2014 Chevrolet Sonic Owners

Chevrolet Sonic Owner Manual (GMNA-Localizing-U.S.
/Canada-6081473) - Black plate (1,1)

2014 - 2nd Edition - 8/19/13
2014 Chevrolet Sonic Owner Manual M
In Brief . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1 Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1 Downloadable Applications . . . 7-45

Instrument Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2 Storage Compartments . . . . . . . . 4-1 Bluetooth Phone/Devices . . . . . 7-50
Initial Drive Information . . . . . . . . 1-4 Luggage/Load Locations . . . . . . . 4-2 Trademarks and License
Vehicle Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-15 Additional Storage Features . . . 4-2 Agreements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-58
Performance and
Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-20 Instruments and Controls . . . . 5-1 Climate Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1
Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2 Climate Control Systems . . . . . . 8-1
Keys, Doors, and Warning Lights, Gauges, and Air Vents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-4
Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1 Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7 Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-4
Keys and Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1 Information Displays . . . . . . . . . . 5-22
Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10 Vehicle Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-24 Driving and Operating . . . . . . . . 9-1
Vehicle Security. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-13 Trip Computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-25 Driving Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2
Exterior Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-15 Vehicle Personalization . . . . . . . 5-27 Starting and Operating . . . . . . . 9-13
Interior Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-17 Engine Exhaust . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-20
Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-17 Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1 Automatic Transmission . . . . . . 9-21
Roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-20 Exterior Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1 Manual Transmission . . . . . . . . . 9-24
Interior Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5 Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-25
Seats and Restraints . . . . . . . . . 3-1 Lighting Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6 Ride Control Systems . . . . . . . . 9-28
Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2 Cruise Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-30
Front Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3 Infotainment System . . . . . . . . . 7-1 Driver Assistance Systems . . . 9-32
Rear Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1 Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-38
Safety Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8 Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-12 Trailer Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-42
Airbag System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-17 Audio Players . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-19 Conversions and Add-Ons . . . 9-42
Child Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-30 Phone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-26
Chevrolet Sonic Owner Manual (GMNA-Localizing-U.S./Canada-6081473) - Black plate (2,1)
2014 - 2nd Edition - 8/19/13
2014 Chevrolet Sonic Owner Manual M
Vehicle Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-1 Technical Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-1

General Information . . . . . . . . . . 10-2 Vehicle Identification . . . . . . . . . 12-1
Vehicle Checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-3 Vehicle Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-2
Headlamp Aiming . . . . . . . . . . . 10-28
Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . 10-28 Customer Information . . . . . . . 13-1
Electrical System . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-32 Customer Information . . . . . . . . 13-1
Wheels and Tires . . . . . . . . . . . 10-40 Reporting Safety Defects . . . . 13-12
Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-75 Vehicle Data Recording and
Towing the Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . 10-77 Privacy. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-13
Appearance Care . . . . . . . . . . . 10-81 OnStar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-1
Service and Maintenance . . . 11-1 OnStar Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-1
General Information . . . . . . . . . . 11-1 OnStar Services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-2
Maintenance Schedule . . . . . . . 11-2 OnStar Additional
Special Application Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-5
Services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-8 Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . i-1
Additional Maintenance
and Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-8
Recommended Fluids . . . . . . . 11-12
Maintenance Records . . . . . . . 11-15
2014 - 2nd Edition - 8/19/13
Introduction iii
specific vehicle to confirm each of Using this Manual

the features found on your vehicle.
For vehicles first sold in Canada, To quickly locate information about
substitute the name “General the vehicle, use the Index in the
Motors of Canada Limited” for back of the manual. It is an
Chevrolet Motor Division wherever it alphabetical list of what is in the
appears in this manual. manual and the page number where
The names, logos, emblems, it can be found.
slogans, vehicle model names, and Keep this manual in the vehicle for
vehicle body designs appearing in quick reference. Danger, Warnings, and
this manual including, but not limited
to, GM, the GM logo, CHEVROLET, Canadian Vehicle Owners Cautions
the CHEVROLET Emblem, and
SONIC are trademarks and/or Propriétaires Canadiens { Danger
service marks of General Motors A French language manual can be
LLC, its subsidiaries, affiliates, obtained from your dealer, at Text marked { Danger provides
or licensors. www.helminc.com, or from: information on risk of fatal injury.
This manual describes features that On peut obtenir un exemplaire de Disregarding this information may
may or may not be on your specific ce guide en français auprès du endanger life.
vehicle either because they are concessionnaire ou à l'adresse
options that you did not purchase or savant:
due to changes subsequent to the
Helm, Incorporated
printing of this owner manual.
Please refer to the purchase Attention: Customer Service
documentation relating to your 47911 Halyard Drive
Plymouth, MI 48170
Litho in U.S.A.
©
Part No. 22867648 B Second Printing 2013 General Motors LLC. All Rights Reserved.
2014 - 2nd Edition - 8/19/13
iv Introduction
A circle with a slash through it is a Vehicle Symbol Chart

{ Warning safety symbol which means “Do Here are some additional symbols
Not,” “Do not do this,” or “Do not let that may be found on the vehicle
Text marked { Warning provides this happen.” and what they mean. For more
information on risk of accident or
information on the symbol, refer to
injury. Disregarding this Symbols the Index.
information may lead to injury.
The vehicle has components and 9 : Airbag Readiness Light
labels that use symbols instead of
text. Symbols are shown along with # : Air Conditioning
{ Caution the text describing the operation or
information relating to a specific
! : Antilock Brake System (ABS)
component, control, message,
% : Audio® Steering Wheel Controls
Text marked { Caution provides or OnStar
information that may indicate a gauge, or indicator.
hazard that could result in injury M: This symbol is shown when
$ : Brake System Warning Light
or death. It could also result in you need to see your owner manual " : Charging System
possible damage to the vehicle. for additional instructions or I : Cruise Control
information.
B : Engine Coolant Temperature
* : This symbol is shown when
you need to see a service manual O : Exterior Lamps
for additional instructions or # : Fog Lamps
information.
. : Fuel Gauge
+ : Fuses
3 : Headlamp High/Low-Beam
Changer
2014 - 2nd Edition - 8/19/13
Introduction v
j : LATCH System Child

Restraints
* : Malfunction Indicator Lamp
: : Oil Pressure
} : Power
/ : Remote Vehicle Start
> : Safety Belt Reminders
7 : Tire Pressure Monitor
d : Traction Control/StabiliTrak®
M : Windshield Washer Fluid
2014 - 2nd Edition - 8/19/13
vi Introduction
2 NOTES
2014 - 2nd Edition - 8/19/13
In Brief 1-1
In Brief Vehicle Features

Radio(s) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-15
Satellite Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-16
Instrument Panel Portable Audio Devices . . . . . . 1-16
Bluetooth® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-16
Instrument Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2
Steering Wheel Controls . . . . . 1-17
Initial Drive Information Cruise Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-17
Initial Drive Information . . . . . . . . 1-4 Driver Information
Starting the Engine . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4 Center (DIC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-18
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) Forward Collision Alert (FCA)
System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4 System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-18
Remote Vehicle Start . . . . . . . . . 1-5 Lane Departure
Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5 Warning (LDW) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-18
Liftgate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6 Rear Vision
Trunk Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6 Camera (RVC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-19
Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-7 Power Outlets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-19
Seat Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-8 Sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-19
Second Row Seats . . . . . . . . . . . 1-9
Head Restraint Adjustment . . . . 1-9
Performance and Maintenance
Traction Control/Electronic
Safety Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-9
Stability Control . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-20
Passenger Sensing System . . . 1-9
Tire Pressure Monitor . . . . . . . . 1-20
Mirror Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-10
Engine Oil Life System . . . . . . 1-20
Steering Wheel
Driving for Better Fuel
Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-10
Economy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-21
Interior Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-11
Roadside Assistance
Exterior Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-11
Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-21
Windshield Wiper/Washer . . . . 1-12
OnStar® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-22
Climate Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-13
Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-13
2014 - 2nd Edition - 8/19/13
1-2 In Brief
Instrument Panel
2014 - 2nd Edition - 8/19/13
In Brief 1-3
1. Air Vents on page 8-4. 11. Hood Release. See Hood on 19. Power Outlets on page 5-6.
2. Exterior Lamp Controls on page 10-4. 20. Trunk Release. See Trunk
page 6-1. 12. Data Link Connector (DLC) (Sedan) on page 2-10.
3. Instrument Panel Illumination (Out of View). See Malfunction 21. Traction Control/Electronic
Control on page 6-5. Indicator Lamp on page 5-12. Stability Control on page 9-28.
4. Turn Signal Lever. See Turn and 13. Cruise Control on page 9-30. 22. Shift Lever. See Automatic
Lane-Change Signals on Forward Collision Alert (FCA) Transmission on page 9-21 (If
page 6-4. System on page 9-32 (If Equipped) or Manual
5. Instrument Cluster on page 5-8. Equipped. Transmission on page 9-24 (If
Lane Departure Warning Equipped).
6. Horn on page 5-3.
(LDW) on page 9-36 (If 23. Hazard Warning Flashers on
7. Windshield Wiper/Washer on Equipped). page 6-3.
page 5-3.
14. Steering Wheel Adjustment on 24. Passenger Sensing System on
8. Display Screen. page 5-2. page 3-24.
9. Infotainment on page 7-1. 15. Steering Wheel Controls on
10. Instrument Panel Storage on page 5-2.
page 4-1. 16. Ignition Switch. See Ignition
USB Port on page 7-21 (Inside Positions on page 9-14.
IP Storage) (If Equipped). 17. Central Locking System on
Auxiliary Devices on page 7-24 page 2-8.
(Inside IP Storage) (If 18. Climate Control Systems on
Equipped). page 8-1.
2014 - 2nd Edition - 8/19/13
1-4 In Brief
Initial Drive cranking can be stopped by turning

the ignition key to ACC/
Information ACCESSORY or LOCK/OFF. See
Starting the Engine on page 9-15.
This section provides a brief
overview about some of the
important features that may or may Remote Keyless Entry
not be on your specific vehicle. (RKE) System
For more detailed information, refer The RKE transmitter may work up to
to each of the features which can be 60 m (195 ft) away from the vehicle.
found later in this owner manual.
The RKE transmitter can have one
of the two symbols for the remote
Starting the Engine trunk release. With Remote Start Shown
The vehicle has a
Computer-Controlled Cranking
System. It assists in starting the
engine and protects components.
If the ignition key is turned to
START and then released when the
engine begins cranking, the engine
will continue cranking for a few
seconds or until the engine starts.
If the engine does not start and the
key is held in START, cranking will
be stopped after 15 seconds to
prevent damage. To prevent gear
damage, cranking is not allowed if
the engine is running. Engine
2014 - 2nd Edition - 8/19/13
In Brief 1-5
Press the key release button to Remote Vehicle Start Canceling a Remote Start
extend the key blade. The key can
If equipped with this feature, the To cancel a remote start, do one of
be used for the ignition and all
engine can be started from outside the following:
locks.
the vehicle. . Aim the RKE transmitter at the
Press K to unlock the driver door or
Starting the Vehicle vehicle and press and hold /
all doors.
until the parking lamps turn off.
1. Aim the RKE transmitter at the
Press Q to lock all doors. vehicle. . Turn on the hazard warning
Lock and unlock feedback can be flashers.
personalized. See Vehicle 2. Press and release Q. . Turn the vehicle on and then off.
Personalization on page 5-27. 3. Immediately after completing
See Remote Vehicle Start on
If equipped, press and hold V or Step 2, press and hold / for at page 2-5.
Y to release the trunk. least four seconds or until the
turn signal lamps flash. Door Locks
Press and release 7 to initiate When the engine starts, the parking
vehicle locator. To lock or unlock the doors from
lamps will turn on and remain on as
outside the vehicle:
Press and hold 7 for at least long as the engine is running. The
doors will be locked and the climate . Use the key in the driver door to
three seconds to sound the panic
control system may come on. lock all doors or unlock the
alarm.
driver door only.
The engine will continue to run for
Press 7 again to cancel the panic 10 minutes. Repeat the steps for a . Press Q or K on the Remote
alarm. 10-minute time extension. Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter.
See Keys on page 2-1 and Remote start can be extended only once. See Remote Keyless Entry
Keyless Entry (RKE) System (RKE) System Operation on
Operation on page 2-3. page 2-3.
2014 - 2nd Edition - 8/19/13
1-6 In Brief
To unlock the doors from inside the

vehicle:
. Press K on the central locking
switch or on the driver door
switch.
. Pull the door handle. Pulling the
door handle again unlatches
the door.
. Lift the lock knob on the driver
door to unlock the driver door.
See Door Locks on page 2-7. See
To lock the doors from inside the Central Locking System on To open the liftgate from the
vehicle: page 2-8. outside, press K twice on the RKE
. Press Q on the central locking transmitter to unlock all doors, then
switch or on the driver door Liftgate use the touch pad.
switch. To lock or unlock the liftgate from See Liftgate (Hatchback) on
page 2-12.
. Press the lock knob on the driver the inside, press Q or K on the
door to lock all doors and, central locking switch or on the
if equipped, the liftgate. driver door switch.
Trunk Release
The vehicle must be in P (Park) for To lock or unlock the trunk from the
automatic transmissions. For inside, press Q or K on the central
manual transmissions the parking locking switch or on the driver door
brake must be engaged. switch.
2014 - 2nd Edition - 8/19/13
In Brief 1-7
To lock the trunk from the outside Power Windows

press Q on the RKE transmitter.
To open the trunk from outside of
the vehicle:
. Press K on the RKE transmitter
to unlock all doors, then use the
touch pad.
. Press Y or V on the RKE
transmitter.
See Trunk (Sedan) on page 2-10
To open the trunk from inside the and Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
vehicle press V. System Operation on page 2-3.
If equipped, press the switch down
Windows to open the window. Pull the front of
the switch up to close it.
Manual Windows The switches work when the vehicle
If equipped, use the window crank is in ON/RUN or ACC/
to open and close each window. ACCESSORY, or when Retained
Accessory Power (RAP) is active.
See Manual Windows on page 2-18.
See Retained Accessory Power
(RAP) on page 9-17.
See Power Windows on page 2-18.
2014 - 2nd Edition - 8/19/13
1-8 In Brief
Seat Adjustment Seat Height Adjuster Reclining Seatbacks

Manual Seats
If available, move the lever up or To recline a manual seatback:

down to manually raise or lower 1. Lift the lever.
To adjust a manual seat: the seat.
1. Pull the handle at the front of If necessary, move the safety
See Seat Adjustment on page 3-3. belt out of the way to access the
the seat.
lever.
2. Slide the seat to the desired
position and release the handle. 2. Move the seatback to the
desired position, and then
3. Try to move the seat back and release the lever to lock the
forth to be sure it is locked in seatback in place.
place.
3. Push and pull on the seatback to
See Seat Adjustment on page 3-3. make sure it is locked in place.
2014 - 2nd Edition - 8/19/13
In Brief 1-9
To return the seatback to the upright while keeping the seat and the head
. Lap-Shoulder Belt on page 3-11.
position: restraint height in the proper . Lower Anchors and Tethers for
1. Lift the lever fully without position. Children (LATCH System) on
applying pressure to the See Head Restraints on page 3-2 page 3-37.
seatback, and the seatback will and Seat Adjustment on page 3-3.
return to the upright position. Passenger Sensing
2. Push and pull on the seatback to Safety Belts System
make sure it is locked.
See Reclining Seatbacks on
page 3-4.
Second Row Seats

The rear seatbacks can be folded
United States
down to increase cargo space.
See Rear Seats on page 3-7.
Head Restraint
Adjustment
Do not drive until the head restraints Refer to the following sections for
for all occupants are installed and important information on how to use Canada
adjusted properly. safety belts properly: The passenger sensing system
To achieve a comfortable seating . Safety Belts on page 3-8. turns off the front outboard
position, change the seatback passenger frontal airbag and knee
. How to Wear Safety Belts
recline angle as little as necessary airbag (if equipped) under certain
Properly on page 3-10.
conditions. No other airbag is
2014 - 2nd Edition - 8/19/13
1-10 In Brief
affected by the passenger sensing Move the control up, down, or side Interior Mirror
system. See Passenger Sensing to side to adjust the mirror.
Hold the inside rearview mirror in
System on page 3-24 for important See Manual Mirrors on page 2-15. the center to move it for a clearer
information.
view behind your vehicle. Adjust the
The passenger airbag status Power Outside Mirrors
mirror to avoid glare from the
indicator will be visible on the headlamps behind you. Push the
instrument panel when the vehicle is tab forward for daytime use and pull
started. See Passenger Airbag it for nighttime use.
Status Indicator on page 5-11.
See Manual Rearview Mirror on
page 2-17.
Mirror Adjustment
Exterior Mirrors Steering Wheel
Manual Outside Mirrors
Adjustment
For vehicles with power outside

mirrors:
1. Select the mirror by moving the
selector switch to L for the driver
side or R for the passenger side.
2. Use the control knob to move
the mirror in the desired
direction.
See Power Mirrors on page 2-15.
2014 - 2nd Edition - 8/19/13
In Brief 1-11
To adjust the steering wheel: The dome lamp controls are in the For more information about interior
1. Pull the lever down. headliner above the rear seats. lighting, see Instrument Panel
9 : Press to turn the lamps off, Illumination Control on page 6-5 or
2. Move the steering wheel up, Courtesy Lamps on page 6-5.
down, forward, and backward. even when a door is open.
3. Pull the lever up to lock the H : When the button is returned to Exterior Lighting
steering wheel in place. the middle position, the lamps turn
on automatically when a door is
Do not adjust the steering wheel opened.
while driving.
R: Press to turn on the dome lamps.
Interior Lighting Reading Lamps
Dome Lamps
The exterior lamp control is on the

instrument panel to the outboard
side of the steering column.
O : Briefly turn to this position to
turn the automatic light control off or
For vehicles with front reading on again.
lamps, they are in the overhead AUTO: Turns the headlamps on
console. automatically at normal brightness,
# or $ : Press to turn each lamp together with the following:
on or off. . Parking Lamps
2014 - 2nd Edition - 8/19/13
1-12 In Brief
. Taillamps
Windshield Wiper/Washer
. License Plate Lamps
. Instrument Panel Lights
. Sidemarker Lamps
; : Turns on the parking lamps
including all lamps except the Hatchback Shown, Sedan Similar
headlamps. INT: Move the lever up to INT for
Sedan
5: Turns the headlamps on intermittent wipes, then turn the x
together with the parking lamps and INT band up for more frequent
instrument panel lights. A warning wipes or down for less frequent
chime sounds if the driver door is wipes.
opened when the ignition switch is
off and the headlamps are on. OFF: Use to turn the wipers off.
# : For vehicles with fog lamps, 8 : For a single wipe, briefly move
Hatchback the wiper lever down. For several
press to turn the lamps on or off.
The windshield wiper/washer lever wipes, hold the wiper lever down.
See:
is on the right side of the steering nL: Pull the windshield wiper
. Exterior Lamp Controls on column. lever toward you to spray windshield
page 6-1 washer fluid and activate the wipers.
Move the lever to one of the
. Daytime Running Lamps (DRL) following positions: See Windshield Wiper/Washer on
on page 6-2 page 5-3. For vehicles with a rear
HI: Use for fast wipes.
. Fog Lamps on page 6-4 window wiper/washer, see Rear
LO: Use for slow wipes. Window Wiper/Washer on page 5-4.
2014 - 2nd Edition - 8/19/13
In Brief 1-13
Climate Controls 6. Rear Window Defogger Transmission

If equipped with these climate 7. Recirculation
Automatic Transmission
control systems, the heating,
cooling, and ventilation can be Manual Mode
controlled for the vehicle. This position allows you to change
gears similar to a manual
transmission. To use this feature:
1. Move the shift lever from
D (Drive) rearward to
M (Manual Mode).
Climate Control System with

Heater Only
1. Temperature Control
Heater and Air Conditioning 2. Fan Control
1. Temperature Control 3. Air Delivery Mode Control

4. Rear Window Defogger
2. Fan Control
3. Air Delivery Mode Control See Climate Control Systems on
page 8-1.
4. Driver and Passenger Heated
Seats (If Equipped)
5. Air Conditioning
2014 - 2nd Edition - 8/19/13
1-14 In Brief
2. Press the + (plus) end of the For the best fuel economy, The manual transmission is
button on the side of the accelerate slowly and shift when the equipped with a reverse lockout
shift lever to upshift, or push light comes on, if weather, road, and ring. To shift into R (Reverse), press
the − (minus) end of the button traffic conditions allow. down the clutch pedal, lift up the
to downshift. It is normal for the light to go on and ring on the shift lever, and shift into
See Manual Mode on page 9-23. off if the accelerator position R (Reverse). Let up on the clutch
changes quickly. Ignore the light pedal slowly while pressing the
Manual Transmission during downshifts. accelerator pedal.
Up-Shift Light See Manual Transmission on
Reverse Lockout page 9-24.
Vehicles equipped with a manual

transmission may have an up-shift
light. This light indicates when to
shift to the next higher gear for
better fuel economy.
2014 - 2nd Edition - 8/19/13
In Brief 1-15
. CD: Selects the previous track Retrieving Stations
Vehicle Features or rewinds within a track.
Press the FAV button to open a
Push/MENU/TUNE: Turn to
Radio(s) navigate the available menus. Turn
favorite page or to switch to another
favorite page. Briefly press one of
Radio Controls without to search for stations. the 1 to 6 buttons to retrieve the
Touchscreen MEDIA: Press to play a CD when station.
O /VOL: Press to turn the system listening to the radio. See “Storing a Favorite Station”
on or off. For more information about these under AM-FM Radio on page 7-12.
Turn to increase or decrease the and other radio features, see
Radio Controls with
volume. Operation on page 7-8.
Touchscreen
When the system is on, press and Storing a Favorite Station Audio Source Menu
release to mute the system. Press Stations from all bands can be
and release again to turn the sound stored in any order in the favorite
z VOL y (Volume): Press to
back on. increase or decrease the volume.
pages.
RADIO/BAND: Press to choose FM, Up to six stations can be stored in
O (Power): Press and hold to turn
AM, or SiriusXM® (if equipped). each favorite page and the number
the system on and off.
SEEK ¨: of available favorite pages can D (Home Page): Press to enter

be set. the Home Page.
. Radio: Seeks the next station.
.
Storing Stations Storing a Favorite Station
CD: Selects the next track or
fast forwards within a track. To store the station to a position in Stations from all bands can be
the list, press the corresponding stored in any order in the favorite
© SEEK: button 1 to 6 until a beep is heard. pages.
. Radio: Seeks the previous Up to five stations can be stored in
station. each of the seven favorites pages.
2014 - 2nd Edition - 8/19/13
1-16 In Brief
Storing Stations Setting the Clock A second AUX input is on the front
To store the station to a position in of the infotainment system,
See Clock on page 5-5.
the list, press the corresponding if equipped. External devices such
button 1−5 until a beep is heard. as iPods®, laptop computers, MP3
Satellite Radio players, CD changers, and USB
1. Select the desired station. SiriusXM® is a satellite radio service storage devices may be connected,
based in the 48 contiguous United depending on the audio system.
2. Press S or T to select the
desired page of saved favorites. States and 10 Canadian provinces. See Auxiliary Devices on page 7-24.
SiriusXM satellite radio has a wide
variety of programming and Bluetooth®
commercial-free music, coast to
coast, and in digital-quality sound. The Bluetooth® system allows users
A fee is required to receive the with a Bluetooth-enabled mobile
SiriusXM service. phone to make and receive
hands-free calls using the vehicle
Refer to:
audio system and controls.
. www.siriusxm.com or call
The Bluetooth-enabled mobile
1-866-635-2349 (U.S.).
phone must be paired with the
3. Hold down any of the preset
. www.xmradio.ca or call in-vehicle Bluetooth system before it
buttons to save the current radio 1-877-209-0079 (Canada) can be used in the vehicle. Not all
station to that button of the See Satellite Radio on page 7-16. phones will support all functions.
selected favorites page. See Bluetooth (Voice Recognition)
To change a preset button, tune to Portable Audio Devices on page 7-37 or Bluetooth
the new desired radio station and (Overview) on page 7-26 or
Some vehicles have a 3.5 mm Bluetooth (Infotainment Controls) on
hold the button. (1/8 in) auxiliary input and a USB page 7-28 and Hands-Free Phone
See “Storing a Favorite Station” port in the storage area to the right on page 7-42.
under AM-FM Radio on page 7-12. of the infotainment system.
2014 - 2nd Edition - 8/19/13
In Brief 1-17
Steering Wheel Controls $ / i : Press to decline an Cruise Control

incoming call, to end speech
recognition, or to end a current call.
Press to silence the vehicle
speakers while using the
infotainment system. Press again to
turn the sound on.
For vehicles with OnStar or
Bluetooth systems, press to reject
an incoming call, or end a
current call.
_ SRC ^ : Press to select an audio
source.
Some audio steering wheel controls Toggle up or down to select the next
could differ depending on the or previous favorite radio station or o : Press to turn the cruise control
vehicle's options. Some audio CD/MP3 track. system on and off.
steering wheel controls can be + x −: Press + or − to increase or RES/+: Move the thumbwheel up
adjusted at the steering wheel. decrease the volume. briefly to make the vehicle resume
b / g : Press to interact with the to a previously set speed or hold
See Steering Wheel Controls on upwards to accelerate. If cruise
available Bluetooth or OnStar page 5-2.
systems. control is already active, use to
increase vehicle speed.
2014 - 2nd Edition - 8/19/13
1-18 In Brief
SET/−: Move the thumbwheel down 2. w x : Turn the band to scroll approximately 60 m (197 ft) and
briefly to set the speed and activate through the menu items. operates at speeds above 40 km/h
cruise control. If cruise control is (25 mph).
already active, use to decrease 3. MENU: Press to display the DIC
menus. This button is also used See Forward Collision Alert (FCA)
speed. System on page 9-32.
to return to or exit the last
n : Press to disengage cruise screen displayed on the DIC.
control without erasing the set
See Driver Information Center (DIC)
Lane Departure
speed from memory.
on page 5-22. Warning (LDW)
See Cruise Control on page 9-30.
If equipped, LDW is intended to help
Forward Collision Alert avoid unintentional lane departures
Driver Information
(FCA) System at speeds of 56 km/h (35 mph) or
Center (DIC) greater. LDW uses a camera sensor
For vehicles with FCA, this system to detect the lane markings. The
The DIC display is in the instrument is intended to help avoid or reduce
cluster. It shows the status of many LDW indicator, @, appears green if
the harm caused by front-end
vehicle systems. The controls for crashes. FCA provides a flashing a lane marking is detected. If the
the DIC are on the turn signal lever. visual alert and beeps when vehicle departs the lane, the
approaching a vehicle directly indicator will change to amber and
ahead too quickly. FCA also flash. In addition, beeps will sound.
provides a visual alert if following See Lane Departure Warning (LDW)
another vehicle much too closely. on page 9-36.
The forward-looking FCA camera
sensor is on the windshield ahead
of the rearview mirror. FCA detects
1. SET/CLR: Press to set or clear vehicles within a distance of
the menu item displayed.
2014 - 2nd Edition - 8/19/13
In Brief 1-19
Rear Vision Sunroof Open/Close: To open the sunroof,

press and hold the rear of the
Camera (RVC) switch. To close the sunroof, press
If equipped, RVC displays a view of and hold the front of the switch.
the area behind the vehicle, on the Vent: Press and hold the front of
center stack display, when the the switch to vent the sunroof.
vehicle is shifted into R (Reverse).
Manually close the sunshade.
See Rear Vision Camera (RVC) on
page 9-34. The sunroof will not operate if the
vehicle has an electrical failure.
Power Outlets See Sunroof on page 2-20.
The accessory power outlets can be
used to plug in electrical equipment,
such as a cell phone or MP3 player.
On vehicles with this feature, the
The vehicle has an accessory sunroof only operates when the
power outlet in front of the ignition is turned to ON/RUN or
cupholders on the center floor Retained Accessory Power (RAP) is
console. active.
See Power Outlets on page 5-6.
2014 - 2nd Edition - 8/19/13
1-20 In Brief
. To turn off both traction control
Performance and and StabiliTrak, press and hold
the tires to the recommended
pressure shown on the Tire and
Maintenance the TCS/StabiliTrak button g Loading Information label. See
until the traction off light i and Vehicle Load Limits on page 9-9.
Traction Control/ the StabiliTrak OFF light g
The warning light will remain on until
the tire pressure is corrected.
Electronic Stability illuminate.
Control The low tire pressure warning light
. Press the TCS/StabiliTrak button may come on in cool weather when
The Traction Control System (TCS) g again to turn on both systems. the vehicle is first started, and then
limits wheel spin. The system is on See Traction Control/Electronic turn off as the vehicle is driven. This
when the vehicle is started. Stability Control on page 9-28. may be an early indicator that the
The StabiliTrak system assists with tire pressures are getting low and
directional control of the vehicle in Tire Pressure Monitor the tires need to be inflated to the
difficult driving conditions. The proper pressure.
This vehicle may have a Tire
system is on when the vehicle is Pressure Monitor System (TPMS). The TPMS does not replace normal
started. monthly tire maintenance. Maintain
. To turn off traction control, press the correct tire pressures.
and release the TCS/StabiliTrak See Tire Pressure Monitor System
button g on the center console. on page 10-49.
The traction off light i
illuminates. Engine Oil Life System
. Press and release the TCS/ The engine oil life system calculates
The low tire pressure warning light engine oil life based on vehicle use
StabiliTrak button g again to alerts to a significant loss in
turn traction control back on. pressure of one of the vehicle's and displays the : % CHANGE
tires. If the warning light comes on,
stop as soon as possible and inflate
2014 - 2nd Edition - 8/19/13
In Brief 1-21
message on the DIC when it is See Engine Oil Life System on

. Keep vehicle tires properly
necessary to change the engine oil page 10-12. inflated.
and filter. . Combine several trips into a
Remember, the oil life display must Driving for Better Fuel single trip.
be reset after each oil change. It will Economy . Replace the vehicle's tires with
not reset itself. the same TPC Spec number
Driving habits can affect fuel
Resetting the Oil Life System mileage. Here are some driving tips molded into the tire's sidewall
to get the best fuel economy near the size.
1. Press the MENU button to show
Remaining Oil Life on the possible. . Follow recommended scheduled
display. This display shows an . Avoid fast starts and accelerate maintenance.
estimate of the oil’s remaining smoothly.
useful life. If 99% is displayed, Roadside Assistance
. Brake gradually and avoid
that means that 99% of the abrupt stops. Program
current oil life remains.
. Avoid idling the engine for long U.S.: 1-800-243-8872
2. To reset the engine oil life periods of time.
system, press the SET/CLR TTY Users (U.S. Only):
button while the oil life display is . When road and weather 1-888-889-2438
active. After a few seconds, conditions are appropriate, use Canada: 1-800-268-6800
there will be a single chime and cruise control.
As the owner of a new Chevrolet,
the oil life will be reset to 100%. . Always follow posted speed you are automatically enrolled in the
Be careful not to reset the oil life limits or drive more slowly when Roadside Assistance program.
display accidentally at any time conditions require.
See Roadside Assistance Program
other than when the oil has just on page 13-5.
been changed. It cannot be reset
accurately until the next oil change.
2014 - 2nd Edition - 8/19/13
1-22 In Brief
OnStar®
If equipped, this vehicle has a
comprehensive, in-vehicle system
that can connect to a live Advisor
for Emergency, Security, Navigation,
Connection, and Diagnostic
Services. See OnStar Overview on
page 14-1.
2014 - 2nd Edition - 8/19/13
Keys, Doors, and Windows 2-1
Keys, Doors, and Exterior Mirrors

Convex Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-15
Keys and Locks
Windows Manual Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Power Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-15
2-15 Keys
Folding Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-16
Keys and Locks Heated Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-16 { Warning
Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1 Blind Spot Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . 2-16
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) Leaving children in a vehicle with
Interior Mirrors a Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2 Manual Rearview Mirror . . . . . . 2-17
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter is dangerous and
System Operation . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3 Windows children or others could be
Remote Vehicle Start . . . . . . . . . 2-5 Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-17 seriously injured or killed. They
Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7 Manual Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-18 could operate the power windows
Central Locking System . . . . . . . 2-8 Power Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-18 or other controls or make the
Door Ajar Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8 Sun Visors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-19 vehicle move. The windows will
Delayed Locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8 function with the RKE transmitter
Automatic Door Locks . . . . . . . . . 2-8 Roof in the vehicle, and children or
Lockout Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9 Sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-20 others could be caught in the path
Safety Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9 of a closing window. Do not leave
Doors children in a vehicle with an RKE
Trunk (Sedan) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10 transmitter.
Liftgate (Hatchback) . . . . . . . . . 2-12
Vehicle Security
Vehicle Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-13
Vehicle Alarm System . . . . . . . 2-13
Immobilizer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-14
Immobilizer Operation . . . . . . . 2-14
2014 - 2nd Edition - 8/19/13
2-2 Keys, Doors, and Windows
Remote Keyless Entry

(RKE) System
See Radio Frequency Statement on
page 13-15.
If there is a decrease in the RKE
operating range:
. Check the distance. The
transmitter may be too far from
the vehicle.
. Check the location. Other
The key that is part of the Remote Press the button on the RKE vehicles or objects may be
Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter can transmitter to extend the key. Press blocking the signal.
be used for the ignition and all the button and the key blade to . Check the transmitter's battery.
locks. retract the key. See “Battery Replacement” later
See your dealer if a new key is in this section.
needed. . If the transmitter is still not
If the vehicle has an ignition, and it working correctly, see your
becomes difficult to turn they key, dealer or a qualified technician
inspect the key blade for debris. for service.
If you are locked out of the vehicle,
see Roadside Assistance Program
on page 13-5.
2014 - 2nd Edition - 8/19/13
Remote Keyless Entry “Unlocked Door Anti Lock Out”

under Vehicle Personalization on
(RKE) System Operation page 5-27. If the passenger door is
The RKE transmitter may work up to open when Q is pressed, all
60 m (195 ft) away from the vehicle. doors lock.
Other conditions can affect the
Pressing Q may also arm the
performance of the transmitter. See
theft-deterrent system. See Vehicle
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
Alarm System on page 2-13.
System on page 2-2.
The RKE transmitter can have one
K (Unlock): Press to unlock the
driver door or all doors. See
of the two symbols for the remote
“Remote Locking, Unlocking,
trunk release. With Remote Start Shown Starting” under Vehicle
The following buttons are on the Personalization on page 5-27. The
transmitter: turn signal indicators flash to
indicate unlocking has occurred. For
Q (Lock): Press to lock all doors. more information see “Remote
The turn signal indicators may flash Unlock Feedback” under Vehicle
and/or the horn may sound to Personalization on page 5-27.
indicate locking. See “Remote
Locking, Unlocking, Starting” under Pressing K may also disarm the
Vehicle Personalization on theft-deterrent system. See Vehicle
page 5-27. Alarm System on page 2-13.
If the driver door is open when Q is V or Y (Remote Trunk
pressed, all doors lock except the Release): If equipped, press and
driver door, if Unlocked Door Anti hold to release the trunk.
Lock Out is enabled through the
vehicle personalization. See
2014 - 2nd Edition - 8/19/13
7 (Vehicle Locator/Panic Programming Transmitters to 3. Insert the new key to be

Alarm): Press and release one the Vehicle programmed and turn it to the
time to initiate vehicle locator. The ON/RUN position within
Only RKE transmitters programmed five seconds.
exterior lamps flash and the horn to this vehicle will work. If a
chirps three times. Press and hold transmitter is lost or stolen, a The security light will turn off
7 for at least three seconds to replacement can be purchased and once the key has been
sound the panic alarm. The horn programmed through your dealer. programmed.
sounds and the turn signals flash for When the replacement transmitter is 4. Repeat Steps 1–3 if additional
30 seconds until 7 is pressed programmed to this vehicle, all keys are to be programmed.
again, or the key is placed in the remaining transmitters must also be
ignition and turned to ON/RUN. reprogrammed. Any lost or stolen If a key is lost or damaged, see your
transmitters will no longer work dealer to have a new key made.
/ (Remote Vehicle Start):
once the new transmitter is Programming without a
If equipped, press and release Q programmed. See your dealer to
and then immediately press and Recognized Transmitter
have new transmitters programmed.
hold / for approximately Program a new key to the vehicle
two seconds or until the turn signal Programming with a Recognized when a recognized key is not
lamps flash to start the engine from Transmitter available. Canadian regulations
outside the vehicle using the RKE To program a new key: require that owners see their
transmitter. See Remote Vehicle dealer.
1. Insert the original, already
Start on page 2-5. If there are no currently recognized
programmed key in the ignition
The buttons on the RKE transmitter and turn to the key to the ON/ keys available, follow this procedure
are disabled when there is a key in RUN position. to program the first key.
the ignition. This procedure will take
2. Turn the key to LOCK/OFF, and
remove the key. approximately 30 minutes to
complete for the first key. The
2014 - 2nd Edition - 8/19/13
vehicle must be off and all of the Battery Replacement Remote Vehicle Start
keys you wish to program must be
The battery is not rechargeable. To If equipped, this feature allows the
with you.
replace the battery: engine to be started from outside
1. Insert the new vehicle key into the vehicle.
the ignition. { Caution / (Remote Vehicle Start): This
2. Turn to ON/RUN. The security button will be on the RKE
light will come on. When replacing the battery, do
transmitter if the vehicle has remote
not touch any of the circuitry on
3. Wait 10 minutes until the start.
the transmitter. Static from your
security light turns off. The climate control system will use
body could damage the
4. Turn the ignition to LOCK/OFF. transmitter. the previous settings during a
remote start. The rear defog may
5. Repeat Steps 2–4 two more come on during remote start based
times. After the third time, turn to 1. Press the button on the on cold ambient conditions. The
ON/RUN; the key is learned and transmitter to extend the key. rear fog indicator light does not
all previously known keys will no come on during remote start.
longer work with the vehicle. 2. Remove the battery cover by
prying with a finger. If the vehicle has heated seats, they
Remaining keys can be learned by may come on during a remote start.
following the procedure in 3. Remove the old battery.
See Heated Front Seats on
“Programming with a Recognized 4. Insert the new battery, positive page 3-6.
Transmitter.” side facing up. Replace with a
CR2032 or equivalent battery. Laws in some local communities
may restrict the use of remote
5. Snap the battery cover back on starters. For example, some laws
to the transmitter. require a person using remote start
to have the vehicle in view. Check
local regulations for any
requirements.
2014 - 2nd Edition - 8/19/13
Other conditions can affect the The engine will continue to run for After this, the vehicle's ignition
performance of the transmitter. See 10 minutes. Repeat the steps for a switch must be turned to ON/RUN
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) 10-minute time extension. Remote and then back to LOCK/OFF using
System on page 2-2. start can be extended only once. the key, before the remote start
Insert the key and turn it to ON/RUN procedure can be used again.
Starting the Vehicle
before driving. Canceling a Remote Start
To start the engine using the remote
start feature: Extending Engine Run Time To cancel a remote start, do one of
1. Aim the RKE transmitter at the For a 10-minute extension, repeat the following:
vehicle. Steps 1–3 while the engine is still . Aim the RKE transmitter at the
running. The remote start can be vehicle and press and hold /
2. Press and release Q. extended once. until the parking lamps turn off.
3. Immediately after completing When the remote start is extended, . Turn on the hazard warning
Step 2, press and hold / for at the second 10 minutes will start flashers.
least four seconds or until the immediately.
turn signal lamps flash. The turn
. Turn the vehicle on and then off.
For example, if the engine has been
signal lamps flashing confirms running for five minutes, and Conditions in Which Remote Start
the request to remote start the 10 minutes are added, the engine Will Not Work
vehicle has been received. will run for a total of 15 minutes. The remote vehicle start feature will
When the engine starts, the parking A maximum of two remote starts, not operate if:
lamps will turn on and remain on as or a single start with an extension,
long as the engine is running. The
. The key is in the ignition.
are allowed between ignition cycles.
doors will be locked and the climate . The hood is not closed.
control system may come on. . The hazard warning flashers
are on.
2014 - 2nd Edition - 8/19/13

. The malfunction indicator lamp To lock or unlock the doors from
is on. Warning (Continued) outside the vehicle:
. The engine coolant temperature doors are not locked. So, all . Use the key in the driver door to
is too high. passengers should wear lock all doors or unlock the
. The oil pressure is low. safety belts properly and the driver door only.
doors should be locked
. Two remote vehicle starts, or a . Press Q or K on the Remote
whenever the vehicle is
single remote start with an Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter.
driven.
extension, have already See Remote Keyless Entry
been used. . Young children who get into (RKE) System Operation on
unlocked vehicles may be page 2-3.
. The vehicle is not in P (Park).
unable to get out. A child can
be overcome by extreme heat
Door Locks and can suffer permanent
injuries or even death from
{ Warning heat stroke. Always lock the
vehicle whenever leaving it.
Unlocked doors can be
dangerous.
. Outsiders can easily enter
through an unlocked door
. Passengers, especially when you slow down or stop
children, can easily open the the vehicle. Locking the doors
doors and fall out of a moving can help prevent this from
vehicle. When a door is happening.
locked, the handle will not
open it. The chance of being
thrown out of the vehicle in a
crash is increased if the
(Continued)
2014 - 2nd Edition - 8/19/13
To lock the doors from inside the The system can be programed. See When Q is pressed on the driver or
vehicle: Vehicle Personalization on passenger door power lock switch
page 5-27. while the door is open, a chime will
. Press Q on the central locking
switch or on the driver door sound three times to indicate that
switch.
Door Ajar Reminder delayed locking is active. The doors
will then lock automatically
. Press the lock knob on the driver five seconds after all doors are
door to lock all doors and, closed.
if equipped, the liftgate.
If a door is reopened before
To unlock the doors from inside the five seconds have elapsed, the five
vehicle: second timer will reset once all the
. Press K on the central locking doors are closed again. Press Q on
If one of the doors, the trunk, or the the door lock switch again, or press
switch or on the driver door liftgate is not closed properly while
switch. the ignition is on, the door ajar light
Q on the RKE transmitter, to
override this feature and lock the
. Pull the door handle. Pulling the on the instrument panel comes on doors immediately.
door handle again unlatches and stays on until the doors are
the door. closed. Delayed locking can be
programmed through the Driver
. Lift the lock knob on the driver Information Center (DIC). See
door to unlock the driver door. Delayed Locking
Vehicle Personalization on
This feature delays the actual page 5-27.
Central Locking System locking of the doors until
five seconds after all doors are Automatic Door Locks
This system allows for the doors closed. Delayed locking can only be
and liftgate/trunk to be locked and turned on when the Unlocked Door The vehicle is programmed so that
unlocked from the RKE transmitter Anti Lockout feature has been when the doors are closed, the
or the central locking switch on the turned off. ignition is on, and the shift lever is
center stack.
2014 - 2nd Edition - 8/19/13
moved out of P (Park) for automatic If Unlocked Door Anti Lockout is Manual Safety Locks
transmissions, or when the vehicle turned on and: the vehicle is off, the
speed is above 13 km/h (8 mph) for driver door is open, and door
manual transmissions, the doors locking is requested using a door
and the trunk/liftgate will lock. lock switch or the RKE transmitter,
To unlock the doors and the trunk/ all the doors will lock and only the
driver door will unlock.
liftgate press K on the center stack
or the driver door switch. The Unlocked Door Anti Lockout
feature can be turned on or off using
If equipped with an automatic the vehicle personalization menus.
transmission the vehicle must be in See Vehicle Personalization on
P (Park). page 5-27.
If equipped with a manual Lockout Protection can be manually
transmission the vehicle must be in overridden with the driver door open
Neutral with the parking brake set. If equipped, the safety lock is
by pressing and holding Q on the
This feature can be programmed. power door lock switch. located on the inside edge of the
See Vehicle Personalization on rear doors. To use the safety lock:
page 5-27. Safety Locks 1. Insert the key into the safety lock
slot and turn it so the slot is in
Lockout Protection The rear door safety locks prevent the horizontal position.
passengers from opening the rear
If the driver side power door lock doors from inside the vehicle. 2. Close the door.
switch is pressed when the driver 3. Do the same for the other
door is open and the key is in the rear door.
ignition, all of the doors will lock and
then the driver door will unlock.
2014 - 2nd Edition - 8/19/13
To open a rear door when the safety Doors

lock is on: Warning (Continued)
1. Unlock the door by lifting the Trunk (Sedan) . Adjust the climate control
rear door lock, using the power system to a setting that
door lock switch, or with the
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) { Warning brings in only outside air and
set the fan speed to the
transmitter. Exhaust gases can enter the highest setting. See “Climate
2. Open the door from the outside. vehicle if it is driven with the Control Systems” in the
liftgate, hatch/trunk open, or with Index.
To cancel the safety lock:
any objects that pass through the . If the vehicle is equipped with
1. Unlock the door and open it from seal between the body and the a power liftgate, disable the
the outside. hatch/trunk or liftgate. Engine power liftgate function.
2. Insert the key into the safety lock exhaust contains carbon For more information about
slot and turn it so the slot is in monoxide (CO) which cannot be carbon monoxide, see Engine
the vertical position. seen or smelled. It can cause Exhaust on page 9-20.
3. Do the same for the other unconsciousness and even death.
rear door. If the vehicle must be driven with To lock or unlock the trunk from the
the liftgate or hatch/trunk open:
inside, press Q or K on the central
. Close all of the windows. locking switch located on the center
. Fully open the air outlets on stack.
or under the instrument
panel.
(Continued)
2014 - 2nd Edition - 8/19/13
Emergency Trunk Release

Handle
{ Caution
Do not use the emergency trunk
release handle as a tie-down or
anchor point when securing items
in the trunk as it could damage
the handle.
To open the trunk from inside of the To open the trunk from outside of
vehicle: the vehicle:
. Press V. . Press K on the RKE transmitter
See Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) to unlock all doors, then use the
System Operation on page 2-3. touch pad.
. Press Y or V on the RKE
transmitter.
There is a glow-in-the-dark
emergency trunk release handle on
the underside of the trunk lid. This
2014 - 2nd Edition - 8/19/13
handle will glow following exposure

to light. Pull the release handle Warning (Continued)
down to open the trunk from the
inside.
. Adjust the climate control
system to a setting that
brings in only outside air and
Liftgate (Hatchback) set the fan speed to the
highest setting. See “Climate
{ Warning Control Systems” in the
Index.
Exhaust gases can enter the
vehicle if it is driven with the
. If the vehicle is equipped with
liftgate, hatch/trunk open, or with a power liftgate, disable the
power liftgate function.
any objects that pass through the To open the liftgate from the
seal between the body and the For more information about outside, press K on the
hatch/trunk or liftgate. Engine carbon monoxide, see Engine RKE transmitter to unlock all doors,
exhaust contains carbon Exhaust on page 9-20. then use the touch pad.
monoxide (CO) which cannot be
seen or smelled. It can cause See Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
To lock or unlock the liftgate from System Operation on page 2-3.
unconsciousness and even death.
the inside, press Q or K on the
When closing the liftgate, close from
If the vehicle must be driven with central locking switch or on the the center to ensure that it fully
the liftgate or hatch/trunk open: driver door. latches.
. Close all of the windows. The vehicle must be in P (Park) for
. Fully open the air outlets on automatic transmissions. For
or under the instrument manual transmissions the parking
panel. brake must be engaged.
(Continued)
2014 - 2nd Edition - 8/19/13
Vehicle Security Fast Flash: Vehicle is unsecured. The vehicle alarm system will not
A door, the hood, or the trunk/ arm if the doors are locked with
This vehicle has theft-deterrent liftgate is open. the key.
features; however, they do not make
Slow Flash: Alarm system is If the driver door is opened without
the vehicle impossible to steal.
armed. first unlocking with the RKE
transmitter, the horn will chirp and
Vehicle Alarm System Arming the AlarmSystem the lights will flash to indicate
This vehicle has an anti-theft alarm 1. Close all doors, the trunk/liftgate, pre-alarm. If the vehicle is not
system. and the hood. started, or the door is not unlocked
2. Lock the vehicle in one of by pressing K on the RKE
two ways: transmitter during the 10–second
pre-alarm, the alarm will be
. Use the RKE transmitter. activated.
. With a door open, press Q If a door, the hood, or the liftgate is
on the interior of the door. opened without first unlocking with
3. After 30 seconds the alarm the RKE transmitter, the turn signals
system will arm, and the will flash and the horn will sound for
indicator light will begin to slowly about 30 seconds. The alarm
flash indicating the alarm system system will then re-arm to monitor
The indicator light on the instrument for the next unauthorized event.
panel near the windshield indicates is operating. Pressing Q on the
the status of the system. RKE transmitter a second time Disarming the System
Off: Vehicle is disarmed. will bypass the 30-second delay To disarm the system, either unlock
and immediately arm the alarm the doors using the RKE transmitter,
On Solid: Vehicle is secured system.
during the delay to arm the system. or start the vehicle with a
recognized transmitter in the
vehicle.
2014 - 2nd Edition - 8/19/13
To avoid setting off the alarm by Immobilizer Operation The security light in the instrument
accident: cluster comes on if there is a
This vehicle has a passive problem with arming or disarming
. Press K on the RKE transmitter. theft-deterrent system. the theft-deterrent system.
. Start the vehicle. The system does not have to be When trying to start the vehicle, the
To avoid setting off the alarm by manually armed or disarmed. security light comes on briefly when
accident: The vehicle is automatically the ignition is turned on.
. Lock the vehicle after all immobilized when the key is If the engine does not start and the
occupants have left the vehicle removed from the ignition. security light stays on, there is a
and all doors are closed. The system is automatically problem with the system. Turn the
disarmed when the vehicle is ignition off and try again.
. Always unlock a door with the
RKE transmitter. started with the correct key. The key If the engine still does not start, and
uses a transponder that matches an the key appears to be undamaged
Unlocking the driver door with the immobilizer control unit in the or the light continues to stay on, try
key will not disarm the system or vehicle and automatically disarms another ignition key. If the engine
turn off the alarm. the system. Only an authorized key does not start with the other key, the
starts the vehicle. The vehicle may vehicle needs service. If the vehicle
How to Detect a Tamper
not start if the key is damaged. does start, the first key may be
Condition
damaged. See your dealer who can
If K is pressed on the transmitter service the theft-deterrent system
and the horn chirps three times, an and have a new key made.
alarm occurred previously while the Do not leave the key or device that
alarm system was armed. disarms or deactivates the
theft-deterrent system in the vehicle.
Immobilizer
page 13-15.
2014 - 2nd Edition - 8/19/13
Exterior Mirrors Manual Mirrors Power Mirrors
Convex Mirrors
{ Warning
A convex mirror can make things,
like other vehicles, look farther
away than they really are. If you
cut too sharply into the right lane,
you could hit a vehicle on the
right. Check the inside mirror or
glance over your shoulder before
changing lanes.
Move the control up, down, or side For vehicles with power outside
to side to adjust the mirror. mirrors:
The passenger side mirror is convex
shaped. A convex mirror's surface is See Folding Mirrors on page 2-16. 1. Select the mirror by moving the
curved so more can be seen from selector switch to L for the driver
the driver seat. side or R for the passenger side.
2. Use the control knob to move
the mirror in the desired
direction.
See Folding Mirrors on page 2-16.
2014 - 2nd Edition - 8/19/13
Folding Mirrors Driving with the Blind Spot 1. When the approaching vehicle is
Mirror a long distance away, the image
Manual Folding Mirrors in the main mirror is small and
The vehicle has manual folding near the inboard edge of the
mirrors. These mirrors can be folded mirror.
inward to prevent damage when 2. As the vehicle gets closer, the
going through an automatic car image in the main mirror gets
wash. To fold, pull the mirror toward larger and moves outboard.
the vehicle. Push the mirror outward
to return it to the original position. 3. As the vehicle enters the blind
zone, the image transitions from
Heated Mirrors the main mirror to the blind spot
mirror.
For vehicles with this feature:
4. When the vehicle is in the blind
1 (Rear Window Defogger): zone, the image only appears in
Press to heat the mirrors. See “Rear the blind spot mirror.
Window and Outside Mirror
Defogger” under Climate Control Using the Outside Mirror with
Systems on page 8-1. the Blind Spot Mirror
1. Set the main mirror so that the
Blind Spot Mirrors side of the vehicle can just be
If equipped, the blind spot mirror is seen and the blind spot mirror
a small convex mirror built into the has an unobstructed view.
upper and outer corner of both
outside mirrors. It can show objects
that may be in the vehicle's
blind zone. Actual Mirror View
2014 - 2nd Edition - 8/19/13
2. When checking for traffic or Interior Mirrors Windows

before changing a lane, look at
the main driver/passenger side
mirror to observe traffic in the Manual Rearview Mirror { Warning
adjacent lane, behind your Hold the inside rearview mirror in
vehicle. Check the blind spot Never leave a child, a helpless
the center to move it for a clearer
mirror for a vehicle in the blind adult, or a pet alone in a vehicle,
view behind your vehicle. Adjust the
zone. Then, glance over your especially with the windows
mirror to avoid glare from the
shoulder to double check before headlamps behind you. Push the closed in warm or hot weather.
moving slowly into the tab forward for daytime use and pull They can be overcome by the
adjacent lane. it for nighttime use. extreme heat and suffer
permanent injuries or even death
Vehicles with OnStar® have three from heat stroke.
control buttons at the bottom of the
mirror. See your dealer for more
information about OnStar and how
to subscribe to it. See OnStar
Overview on page 14-1.
2014 - 2nd Edition - 8/19/13
The vehicle aerodynamics are If equipped, press the switch to

designed to improve fuel economy Warning (Continued) open the window. Pull the front of
performance. This may result in a the switch up to close it.
pulsing sound when either rear windows will function and they
could be seriously injured or killed The switches work when the vehicle
window is down and the front is in ON/RUN or ACC/
windows are up. To reduce the if caught in the path of a closing
window. Do not leave keys in a ACCESSORY, or when Retained
sound, open either a front window Accessory Power (RAP) is active.
or the sunroof, if equipped. vehicle with children.
See Retained Accessory Power
When there are children in the (RAP) on page 9-17.
Manual Windows rear seat use the window lockout
button to prevent unintentional Express Window Operation
If equipped, use the window crank
to open and close each window. operation of the windows. Windows with an express-down or
express-up feature allow the window
The rear windows do not open fully.
to be lowered or raised without
holding the switch. The driver
Power Windows window has express-down and
express-up. Pull a window switch up
{ Warning or push it down all the way, release
it, and the window goes up or down
Leaving children in a vehicle with automatically. Stop the window by
the keys is dangerous for many pushing or pulling the switch in the
reasons. Children or others could same direction a second time or
be badly injured or even killed. briefly operating the switch to the
They could operate the power first detent in either direction.
windows or other controls or even
make the vehicle move. The
(Continued)
2014 - 2nd Edition - 8/19/13
Safety Function 2. Press and hold the power This feature prevents the rear
window switch until the window passenger windows from operating,
If any object is in the path of the
is fully open. except from the driver position.
window when the express-up
feature is active, the window will 3. Pull the power window switch up Press o to disable the rear window
stop and auto-reverse to a preset until the window is fully closed. switches.
position. Weather conditions may 4. Continue holding the switch up
cause the window to auto-reverse. Press o again to return to normal
for approximately two seconds
The window switch may be held up after the window is completely window operation.
to the second position to close the closed.
window. The window will return to Sun Visors
normal operation once the The window is now reprogrammed.
obstruction or condition is removed. To block out glare, swing down the
Window Lockout sun visors. You can also remove
Safety Function Override them from the center mount and
swing them to the side.
If the battery on the vehicle has
been recharged or disconnected, Visor Vanity Mirror
or is not working, the windows will
need to be reprogrammed for the Vanity mirrors are on the back of the
express-up feature to work. Before sun visors. Swing down the sun
reprogramming, replace or recharge visor and open the cover.
the vehicle's battery.
To program the driver window:
1. With the ignition in ACC/
ACCESSORY or ON/RUN,
or when RAP is active, close all
doors.
2014 - 2nd Edition - 8/19/13
Roof Vent: Press and hold the front of

the switch to vent the sunroof.
Sunroof Manually close the sunshade.
The sunroof will not operate if the
vehicle has an electrical failure.
Dirt and debris may collect on the

On vehicles with this feature, the sunroof seal or in the track. This
sunroof only operates when the could cause an issue with sunroof
ignition is turned to ON/RUN or operation or noise. It could also plug
Retained Accessory Power (RAP) is the water drainage system.
active. Periodically open the sunroof and
remove any obstacles or loose
Open/Close: To open the sunroof, debris. Wipe the sunroof seal and
press and hold the rear of the roof sealing area using a clean
switch. To close the sunroof, press cloth, mild soap, and water. Do not
and hold the front of the switch. remove grease from the sunroof.
2014 - 2nd Edition - 8/19/13
Seats and Restraints 3-1
Seats and Safety Belt Extender . . . . . . . . . 3-15 Adding Equipment to the

Safety System Check . . . . . . . . 3-16 Airbag-Equipped Vehicle . . . 3-28
Restraints Safety Belt Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-16 Airbag System Check . . . . . . . . 3-29
Replacing Safety Belt System Replacing Airbag System
Parts after a Crash . . . . . . . . . 3-16 Parts after a Crash . . . . . . . . . 3-29
Head Restraints
Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2 Airbag System Child Restraints
Airbag System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-17 Older Children . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-30
Front Seats Where Are the Airbags? . . . . . 3-19 Infants and Young
Seat Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3 When Should an Airbag Children . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-32
Reclining Seatbacks . . . . . . . . . . 3-4 Inflate? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-21 Child Restraint Systems . . . . . 3-34
Front Seat Armrest . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5 What Makes an Airbag Where to Put the Restraint . . . 3-36
Heated Front Seats . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6 Inflate? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-22 Lower Anchors and Tethers
How Does an Airbag for Children (LATCH
Rear Seats
Restrain? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-22 System) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-37
Rear Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7
What Will You See after an Replacing LATCH System
Safety Belts Airbag Inflates? . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-22 Parts After a Crash . . . . . . . . . 3-43
Safety Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8 Passenger Sensing Securing Child Restraints
How to Wear Safety Belts System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-24 (Rear Seat) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-44
Properly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10 Servicing the Airbag-Equipped Securing Child Restraints
Lap-Shoulder Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-11 Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-28 (Right Front
Safety Belt Use During Passenger Seat) . . . . . . . . . . . 3-46
Pregnancy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-15
2014 - 2nd Edition - 8/19/13
3-2 Seats and Restraints
Head Restraints
{ Warning
With head restraints that are not
installed and adjusted properly,
there is a greater chance that
occupants will suffer a neck/
spinal injury in a crash. Do not
drive until the head restraints for
all occupants are installed and
adjusted properly.
Adjust the head restraint so that the The height of the head restraint can
top of the restraint is at the same be adjusted. Pull the head restraint
Front Seats height as the top of the occupant's up to raise it. Try to move the head
The front seats have adjustable head. This position reduces the restraint to make sure that it is
head restraints in the outboard chances of a neck injury in a crash. locked in place.
seating positions. To lower the head restraint, press
the button, located on the top of the
seatback, and push the head
restraint down. Try to move the
head restraint after the button is
released to make sure that it is
locked in place.
The front seat outboard head
restraints are not designed to be
removed.
2014 - 2nd Edition - 8/19/13
Rear Seats To lower the head restraint, press Front Seats

the button, located on the top of the
The vehicle's rear seats have
seatback, and push the head
adjustable head restraints in the
restraint down. Try to move the Seat Adjustment
outboard seating positions.
head restraint after the button is Manual Seats
released to make sure that it is
locked in place.
Rear outboard head restraints are
{ Warning
not designed to be removed. You can lose control of the
vehicle if you try to adjust a driver
seat while the vehicle is moving.
Adjust the driver seat only when
the vehicle is not moving.
The height of the head restraint can

be adjusted. Pull the head restraint
up to raise it. Try to move the head
restraint to make sure that it is
locked in place.
2014 - 2nd Edition - 8/19/13
To adjust a manual seat: Reclining Seatbacks To recline a manual seatback:

1. Pull the handle at the front of 1. Lift the lever.
the seat. { Warning If necessary, move the safety
2. Slide the seat to the desired belt out of the way to access the
If either seatback is not locked, it
position and release the handle. lever.
could move forward in a sudden
3. Try to move the seat back and stop or crash. That could cause 2. Move the seatback to the
forth to be sure it is locked in injury to the person sitting there. desired position, and then
place. Always push and pull on the release the lever to lock the
seatbacks to be sure they are seatback in place.
Seat Height Adjuster
locked. 3. Push and pull on the seatback to
make sure it is locked in place.
To return the seatback to the upright
position:
1. Lift the lever fully without
applying pressure to the
seatback, and the seatback will
return to the upright position.
2. Push and pull on the seatback to
make sure it is locked.
If available, move the lever up or

down to manually raise or lower
the seat.
2014 - 2nd Edition - 8/19/13
Front Seat Armrest

{ Warning
Sitting in a reclined position when
the vehicle is in motion can be
dangerous. Even when buckled
up, the safety belts cannot do
their job.
The shoulder belt will not be
against your body. Instead, it will
be in front of you. In a crash, you
could go into it, receiving neck or
other injuries. Do not have a seatback reclined if
The lap belt could go up over the vehicle is moving.
your abdomen. The belt forces There is an armrest on the inboard
would be there, not at your pelvic side of the driver seat. To raise or
bones. This could cause serious lower the armrest, push up or pull
internal injuries. down on the armrest.
For proper protection when the
vehicle is in motion, have the
seatback upright. Then sit well
back in the seat and wear the
safety belt properly.
2014 - 2nd Edition - 8/19/13
Heated Front Seats Remote Start Auto Heated

Seats
{ Warning If equipped, when it is cold outside
the heated seats can be turned on
If you cannot feel temperature automatically during a remote
change or pain to the skin, the vehicle start. The heated seats will
seat heater may cause burns. To be canceled when the ignition is
reduce the risk of burns, people turned on. Press the heated seat
with such a condition should use controls to use the heated seats
care when using the seat heater, after the vehicle is started.
especially for long periods of The heated seat indicator lights do
time. Do not place anything on not turn on during a remote start.
the seat that insulates against If equipped, the controls are on the
heat, such as a blanket, cushion, climate control system. To operate, The temperature performance of an
cover, or similar item. This may the engine must be running. unoccupied seat may be reduced.
This is normal.
cause the seat heater to Press M or L to heat the driver or
overheat. An overheated seat passenger seat. The indicator light See Remote Vehicle Start on
heater may cause a burn or may on the control turns on when this page 2-5.
damage the seat. feature is on. Press the control
again to turn this feature off.
The passenger seat may take
longer to heat up.
2014 - 2nd Edition - 8/19/13
Rear Seats To fold the seatback down:
Folding the Seatback

Either side of the seatback can be
folded down for more cargo space.
Fold a seatback only when the
vehicle is not moving.
{ Caution
Folding a rear seat with the safety
belts still fastened may cause
damage to the seat or the safety Sedan Shown, Hatchback Similar
belts. Always unbuckle the safety 2. Reach under the belt and pull
belts and return them to their 1. Make sure the safety belt is in the lever on top of the seatback
normal stowed position before the retainer hook. to unlock the seatback.
folding a rear seat. A tab near the seatback lever
raises when the seatback is
unlocked.
3. Fold the seatback down.
Repeat Steps 1–3 for the other
seatback, if desired.
2014 - 2nd Edition - 8/19/13
Raising the Seatback To raise a seatback: Safety Belts

1. Lift the seatback up and push it
{ Warning rearward to lock it in place.
This section of the manual
describes how to use safety belts
Make sure the safety belt is in
If either seatback is not locked, it properly. It also describes some
the retainer hook and is not
could move forward in a sudden things not to do with safety belts.
twisted or caught in the
stop or crash. That could cause seatback.
injury to the person sitting there.
A tab near the seatback lever
{ Warning
Always push and pull on the
retracts when the seatback is Do not let anyone ride where a
seatbacks to be sure they are locked in place.
locked. safety belt cannot be worn
The center rear safety belt may properly. In a crash, if you or your
lock when you raise the passenger(s) are not wearing
seatback. If this happens, let the safety belts, injuries can be much
{ Warning belt go back all the way and worse than if you are wearing
start again. safety belts. You can be seriously
A safety belt that is improperly injured or killed by hitting things
routed, not properly attached, 2. Push and pull the top of the
seatback to be sure it is locked inside the vehicle harder or by
or twisted will not provide the being ejected from the vehicle. In
into position.
protection needed in a crash. The addition, anyone who is not
person wearing the belt could be 3. Repeat Steps 1 and 2 for the
buckled up can strike other
seriously injured. After raising the other seatback, if necessary.
passengers in the vehicle.
rear seatback, always check to be When the seat is not in use, it
sure that the safety belts are should be kept in the upright, locked It is extremely dangerous to ride
properly routed and attached, and position. in a cargo area, inside or outside
are not twisted. of a vehicle. In a collision,
passengers riding in these areas
(Continued)
2014 - 2nd Edition - 8/19/13
Why Safety Belts Work safety belts. That is why wearing

Warning (Continued) safety belts makes such good
sense.
are more likely to be seriously
injured or killed. Do not allow Questions and Answers About
passengers to ride in any area of Safety Belts
the vehicle that is not equipped Q: Will I be trapped in the vehicle
with seats and safety belts. after a crash if I am wearing a
Always wear a safety belt, and safety belt?
check that all passenger(s) are A: You could be — whether you are
restrained properly too. wearing a safety belt or not.
Your chance of being conscious
This vehicle has indicators as a during and after a crash, so you
reminder to buckle the safety belts. can unbuckle and get out, is
See Safety Belt Reminders on When riding in a vehicle, you travel much greater if you are belted.
page 5-10. as fast as the vehicle does. If the Q: If my vehicle has airbags, why
vehicle stops suddenly, you keep should I have to wear safety
going until something stops you. belts?
It could be the windshield, the
instrument panel, or the safety belts! A: Airbags are supplemental
systems only; so they work with
When you wear a safety belt, you safety belts — not instead of
and the vehicle slow down together. them. Whether or not an airbag
There is more time to stop because is provided, all occupants still
you stop over a longer distance and, have to buckle up to get the
when worn properly, your strongest most protection.
bones take the forces from the
2014 - 2nd Edition - 8/19/13
Also, in nearly all states and in

. Wear the shoulder belt over the
all Canadian provinces, the law shoulder and across the chest.
requires wearing safety belts. These parts of the body are best
able to take belt restraining
How to Wear Safety Belts forces. The shoulder belt locks if
there is a sudden stop or crash.
Properly
This section is only for people of { Warning
adult size.
You can be seriously injured,
There are special things to know
or even killed, by not wearing
about safety belts and children. And
there are different rules for smaller your safety belt properly.
children and infants. If a child will be . Sit up straight and always keep . Never allow the lap or
riding in the vehicle, see Older your feet on the floor in front shoulder belt to become
Children on page 3-30 or Infants of you. loose or twisted.
and Young Children on page 3-32. . Always use the correct buckle . Never wear the shoulder belt
Follow those rules for everyone's for your seating position. under both arms or behind
protection. your back.
. Wear the lap part of the belt low
It is very important for all occupants and snug on the hips, just . Never route the lap or
to buckle up. Statistics show that touching the thighs. In a crash, shoulder belt over an
unbelted people are hurt more often this applies force to the strong armrest.
in crashes than those who are pelvic bones and you would be
wearing safety belts. less likely to slide under the lap
There are important things to know belt. If you slid under it, the belt
about wearing a safety belt properly. would apply force on your
abdomen. This could cause
serious or even fatal injuries.
2014 - 2nd Edition - 8/19/13
Lap-Shoulder Belt The lap-shoulder belt may lock if If the latch plate will not go fully
you pull the belt across you very into the buckle, check if the
All seating positions in the vehicle quickly. If this happens, let the correct buckle is being used.
have a lap-shoulder belt. belt go back slightly to unlock it. Pull up on the latch plate to
The following instructions explain Then pull the belt across you make sure it is secure. If the belt
how to wear a lap-shoulder belt more slowly. is not long enough, see Safety
properly. If the shoulder portion of a Belt Extender on page 3-15.
1. Adjust the seat, if the seat is passenger belt is pulled out all Position the release button on
adjustable, so you can sit up the way, the child restraint the buckle so that the safety belt
straight. To see how, see “Seats” locking feature may be engaged. could be quickly unbuckled if
in the Index. If this happens, let the belt go necessary.
back all the way and start again.
4. If equipped with a shoulder belt
height adjuster, move it to the
height that is right for you. See
“Shoulder Belt Height Adjuster”
in this section for instructions on
use and important safety
information.
2. Pick up the latch plate and pull

the belt across you. Do not let it 3. Push the latch plate into the
get twisted. buckle until it clicks.
2014 - 2nd Edition - 8/19/13
Adjust the height so the shoulder

portion of the belt is on the shoulder
and not falling off of it. The belt
should be close to, but not
contacting, the neck. Improper
shoulder belt height adjustment
could reduce the effectiveness of
the safety belt in a crash. See How
to Wear Safety Belts Properly on
page 3-10.
5. To make the lap part tight, pull To unlatch the belt, push the button
up on the shoulder belt. on the buckle. The belt should
It may be necessary to pull return to its stowed position.
stitching on the safety belt Before a door is closed, be sure the
through the latch plate to fully belt is out of the way. If a door is
tighten the lap belt on smaller slammed against a safety belt,
occupants. damage can occur to both the
safety belt and the vehicle.
Shoulder Belt Height Adjuster
The vehicle has a shoulder belt
To move it down, press the release
height adjuster for the driver and
button and move the height adjuster
right front passenger seating
to the desired position.
positions.
2014 - 2nd Edition - 8/19/13
After the adjuster is set to the replaced. See Replacing Safety Belt To install the adjustable comfort
desired position, try to move it down System Parts after a Crash on guide to the seatback and the
without pressing the release button page 3-16. safety belt:
to make sure it has locked into
position. Rear Safety Belt Comfort
Guides
Safety Belt Pretensioners
Rear safety belt comfort guides may
This vehicle has safety belt provide added safety belt comfort
pretensioners for front outboard for older children who have
occupants. Although the safety belt outgrown booster seats and for
pretensioners cannot be seen, they some adults. When installed on a
are part of the safety belt assembly. shoulder belt, the comfort guide
They can help tighten the safety positions the shoulder belt away
belts during the early stages of a from the neck and head.
moderate to severe frontal, near
Safety belt comfort guides are
frontal, or rear crash if the threshold
available through your dealer.
conditions for pretensioner
1. Locate the anchor loop on the
activation are met. And, if the
rear outboard seatback, near
vehicle has side-impact airbags,
the top.
safety belt pretensioners can help
tighten the safety belts in a side 2. Attach the adjustable comfort
crash or a rollover event. guide to the anchor loop by
threading the hook through
Pretensioners work only once. If the
the loop.
pretensioners activate in a crash,
the pretensioners and probably
other new parts of the vehicle's
safety belt system will need to be
2014 - 2nd Edition - 8/19/13
6. Adjust the guide so the shoulder

portion of the belt is on the
shoulder and not falling off of it.
The belt should be close to, but
not contacting, the neck.
Improper comfort guide
adjustment could reduce the
effectiveness of the safety belt in
a crash.
{ Warning
A safety belt that is not properly
3. Place the guide over the belt, 4. Be sure that the belt is not
worn may not provide the
and insert the two edges of the twisted and it lies flat. The
belt into the slots of the guide. elastic cord must be under the protection needed in a crash. The
belt and the guide on top. person wearing the belt could be
seriously injured. The shoulder
5. The elastic cord on the comfort belt should go over the shoulder
guide is adjustable. You can and across the chest. These parts
make it longer or shorter by of the body are best able to take
squeezing both ends of the
belt restraining forces.
plastic adjuster and pulling on
the elastic cord or the guide.
2014 - 2nd Edition - 8/19/13
Safety Belt Use During The best way to protect the fetus is
to protect the mother. When a safety
Pregnancy belt is worn properly, it is more likely
Safety belts work for everyone, that the fetus will not be hurt in a
including pregnant women. Like all crash. For pregnant women, as for
occupants, they are more likely to anyone, the key to making safety
be seriously injured if they do not belts effective is wearing them
wear safety belts. properly.
Safety Belt Extender

If the vehicle's safety belt will fasten
around you, you should use it.
7. Buckle and position the safety
But if a safety belt is not long
belt as described previously in
enough, your dealer will order you
this section. Make sure that the
an extender. When you go in to
shoulder belt crosses the
order it, take the heaviest coat you
shoulder.
will wear, so the extender will be
To remove and store the comfort long enough for you. To help avoid
guide, squeeze the belt edges personal injury, do not let someone
together so that the safety belt can else use it, and use it only for the
be removed from the guide. seat it is made to fit. The extender
Un-hook the guide from the loop on A pregnant woman should wear a has been designed for adults. Never
the seat. Store the guide in a lap-shoulder belt, and the lap use it for securing child seats. To
convenient place like the glove box portion should be worn as low as wear it, attach it to the regular safety
for the next time it is needed. possible, below the rounding, belt. See the instruction sheet that
throughout the pregnancy. comes with the extender.
2014 - 2nd Edition - 8/19/13
Safety System Check Safety Belt Care Warning (Continued)

Now and then, check that the safety Keep belts clean and dry.
belt reminder light, safety belts, crash. To help make sure the
buckles, latch plates, retractors, and
anchorages are all working properly.
{ Warning safety belt systems are working
properly after a crash, have them
Look for any other loose or Do not bleach or dye safety belts. inspected and any necessary
damaged safety belt system parts It may severely weaken them. In replacements made as soon as
that might keep a safety belt system a crash, they might not be able to possible.
from doing its job. See your dealer provide adequate protection.
to have it repaired. Torn or frayed Clean safety belts only with mild
safety belts may not protect you in a After a minor crash, replacement of
soap and lukewarm water. safety belts may not be necessary.
crash. They can rip apart under
impact forces. If a belt is torn or But the safety belt assemblies that
were used during any crash may
frayed, get a new one right away. Replacing Safety Belt have been stressed or damaged.
Make sure the safety belt reminder System Parts after a See your dealer to have the safety
light is working. See Safety Belt Crash belt assemblies inspected or
Reminders on page 5-10. replaced.
Keep safety belts clean and dry.
See Safety Belt Care on page 3-16.
{ Warning
A crash can damage the safety
belt system in the vehicle.
A damaged safety belt system
may not properly protect the
person using it, resulting in
serious injury or even death in a
(Continued)
2014 - 2nd Edition - 8/19/13
New parts and repairs may be

. A roof-rail airbag for the front
necessary even if the safety belt
Airbag System outboard passenger and the
system was not being used at the The vehicle has the following passenger seated directly
time of the crash. airbags except where noted below: behind the front outboard
passenger.
Have the safety belt pretensioners, . A frontal airbag for the driver.
if equipped, checked if the vehicle The vehicle may have the following
. A frontal airbag for the front airbags on models sold in Canada:
has been in a crash, or if the airbag outboard passenger.
readiness light stays on after you . A knee airbag for the driver.
start the vehicle or while you are . A knee airbag for the driver.
driving. See Airbag Readiness Light
. A knee airbag for the front
. A knee airbag for the front outboard passenger.
on page 5-11. outboard passenger.
. Seat-mounted side impact
. A seat-mounted side impact airbags for the second row
airbag for the driver. outboard passengers.
. A seat-mounted side impact All vehicle airbags have the word
airbag for the front outboard AIRBAG on the trim or on a label
passenger. near the deployment opening.
. Seat-mounted side impact For frontal airbags, the word
airbags for the second row AIRBAG is on the center of the
outboard passengers. steering wheel for the driver and on
. A roof-rail airbag for the driver the instrument panel for the front
and the passenger seated outboard passenger.
directly behind the driver. For knee airbags, the word AIRBAG
is on the lower part of the
instrument panel.
2014 - 2nd Edition - 8/19/13
For seat-mounted side impact

airbags, the word AIRBAG is on the Warning (Continued) Warning (Continued)
side of the seatback closest to
the door. in every crash. In some crashes seriously injured or killed. Do not
safety belts are the only restraint. sit unnecessarily close to any
For roof-rail airbags, the word See When Should an Airbag airbag, as you would be if sitting
AIRBAG is on the ceiling or trim. Inflate? on page 3-21. on the edge of the seat or leaning
Airbags are designed to supplement Wearing your safety belt during a forward. Safety belts help keep
the protection provided by safety crash helps reduce the chance of you in position before and during
belts. Even though today's airbags a crash. Always wear a safety
hitting things inside the vehicle or
are also designed to help reduce belt, even with airbags. The driver
being ejected from it. Airbags are
the risk of injury from the force of an should sit as far back as possible
inflating bag, all airbags must inflate “supplemental restraints” to the
safety belts. Everyone in the while still maintaining control of
very quickly to do their job. the vehicle.
vehicle should wear a safety belt
Here are the most important things properly, whether or not there is Occupants should not lean on or
to know about the airbag system: an airbag for that person. sleep against the door or side
windows in seating positions with
{ Warning seat-mounted side impact airbags
and/or roof-rail airbags.
You can be severely injured or { Warning
killed in a crash if you are not
wearing your safety belt, even Because airbags inflate with great
with airbags. Airbags are force and faster than the blink of
designed to work with safety an eye, anyone who is up
belts, not replace them. Also, against, or very close to any
airbags are not designed to inflate airbag when it inflates can be
(Continued) (Continued)
2014 - 2nd Edition - 8/19/13
Where Are the Airbags?

{ Warning
Children who are up against,
or very close to, any airbag when
it inflates can be seriously injured
or killed. Always secure children
properly in the vehicle. To read
how, see Older Children on
page 3-30 or Infants and Young
Children on page 3-32.
The driver knee airbag, if equipped,

is below the steering column. The
front outboard passenger knee
The driver frontal airbag is in the airbag, if equipped, is below the
center of the steering wheel. glove box.
The front outboard passenger
frontal airbag is in the passenger
There is an airbag readiness light side instrument panel.
on the instrument panel cluster,
which shows the airbag symbol. The
system checks the airbag electrical
system for malfunctions. The light
tells you if there is an electrical
problem. See Airbag Readiness
Light on page 5-11 for more
information.
2014 - 2nd Edition - 8/19/13
Warning (Continued)
or even death. The path of an
inflating airbag must be kept
clear. Do not put anything
between an occupant and an
airbag, and do not attach or put
anything on the steering wheel
hub or on or near any other
airbag covering.
Do not use seat accessories that
Driver Side Shown, Passenger Rear Seat Driver Side Shown, block the inflation path of a
Side Similar Passenger Side Similar seat-mounted side impact airbag.
The seat-mounted side impact If the vehicle has second row Never secure anything to the roof
airbags for the driver and front seat‐mounted side impact airbags, of a vehicle with roof-rail airbags
outboard passenger are in the side they are in the sides of the rear by routing a rope or tie‐down
of the seatbacks closest to the door. seatback closest to the door. through any door or window
The roof-rail airbags for the driver, opening. If you do, the path of an
right front passenger, and second { Warning inflating roof-rail airbag will be
row outboard passengers are in the blocked.
ceiling above the side windows. If something is between an
occupant and an airbag, the
airbag might not inflate properly
or it might force the object into
that person causing severe injury
(Continued)
2014 - 2nd Edition - 8/19/13
When Should an Airbag It depends on what is hit, the Seat-mounted side impact airbags
direction of the impact, and how are designed to inflate in moderate
Inflate? quickly the vehicle slows down. to severe side crashes depending
This vehicle is equipped with Frontal airbags may inflate at on the location of the impact.
airbags. See Airbag System on different crash speeds depending on Seat-mounted side impact airbags
page 3-17. Airbags are designed to whether the vehicle hits an object are not designed to inflate in frontal
inflate if the impact exceeds the straight on or at an angle, and impacts, near frontal impacts,
specific airbag system's deployment whether the object is fixed or rollovers, or rear impacts.
threshold. Deployment thresholds moving, rigid or deformable, narrow A seat-mounted side impact airbag
are used to predict how severe a or wide. is designed to inflate on the side of
crash is likely to be in time for the the vehicle that is struck.
airbags to inflate and help restrain Frontal airbags are not intended to
inflate during vehicle rollovers, rear Roof-rail airbags are designed to
the occupants. The vehicle has inflate in moderate to severe side
electronic sensors that help the impacts, or many side impacts.
crashes depending on the location
airbag system determine the In addition, the vehicle has of the impact. In addition, these
severity of the impact. Deployment advanced technology frontal roof-rail airbags are designed to
thresholds can vary with specific airbags. Advanced technology inflate during a rollover or in a
vehicle design. frontal airbags adjust the restraint severe frontal impact. Roof-rail
Frontal airbags are designed to according to crash severity. airbags are not designed to inflate in
inflate in moderate to severe frontal Knee airbags, if equipped, are rear impacts. Both roof-rail airbags
or near frontal crashes to help designed to inflate in moderate to will inflate when either side of the
reduce the potential for severe severe frontal or near-frontal vehicle is struck, if the sensing
injuries, mainly to the driver's or impacts. Knee airbags are not system predicts that the vehicle is
front outboard passenger's head designed to inflate during vehicle about to roll over on its side, or in a
and chest. rollovers, in rear impacts, or in many severe frontal impact.
Whether the frontal airbags will or side crashes.
should inflate is not based primarily
on how fast the vehicle is traveling.
2014 - 2nd Edition - 8/19/13
In any particular crash, no one can moderate to severe side collisions, What Will You See after
say whether an airbag should have even belted occupants can contact
inflated simply because of the the inside of the vehicle.
an Airbag Inflates?
vehicle damage or the repair costs. Airbags supplement the protection After the frontal airbags and
provided by safety belts by seat-mounted side impact airbags
What Makes an Airbag distributing the force of the impact inflate, they quickly deflate, so
Inflate? more evenly over the quickly that some people may not
occupant's body. even realize an airbag inflated.
In a deployment event, the sensing Roof-rail airbags may still be at least
system sends an electrical signal Rollover capable roof-rail airbags partially inflated for some time after
triggering a release of gas from the are designed to help contain the they inflate. Some components of
inflator. Gas from the inflator fills the head and chest of occupants in the the airbag module may be hot for
airbag causing the bag to break out outboard seating positions in the several minutes. For location of the
of the cover. The inflator, the airbag, first and second rows. The rollover airbags, see Where Are the
and related hardware are all part of capable roof-rail airbags are Airbags? on page 3-19.
the airbag module. designed to help reduce the risk of
full or partial ejection in rollover The parts of the airbag that come
For airbag locations, see Where Are into contact with you may be warm,
events, although no system can
the Airbags? on page 3-19. but not too hot to touch. There may
prevent all such ejections.
be some smoke and dust coming
How Does an Airbag But airbags would not help in many from the vents in the deflated
types of collisions, primarily airbags. Airbag inflation does not
Restrain? because the occupant's motion is prevent the driver from seeing out of
In moderate to severe frontal or not toward those airbags. See When the windshield or being able to steer
near frontal collisions, even belted Should an Airbag Inflate? on the vehicle, nor does it prevent
occupants can contact the steering page 3-21. people from leaving the vehicle.
wheel or the instrument panel. In Airbags should never be regarded
as anything more than a supplement
to safety belts.
2014 - 2nd Edition - 8/19/13
the hazard warning flashers by Additional windshield breakage may

{ Warning using the controls for those also occur from the front outboard
features. passenger airbag.
When an airbag inflates, there
may be dust in the air. This dust
. Airbags are designed to inflate
could cause breathing problems { Warning only once. After an airbag
for people with a history of inflates, you will need some new
A crash severe enough to inflate parts for the airbag system.
asthma or other breathing trouble. the airbags may have also
To avoid this, everyone in the If you do not get them, the
damaged important functions in airbag system will not be there
vehicle should get out as soon as the vehicle, such as the fuel to help protect you in another
it is safe to do so. If you have system, brake and steering crash. A new system will include
breathing problems but cannot systems, etc. Even if the vehicle airbag modules and possibly
get out of the vehicle after an appears to be drivable after a other parts. The service manual
airbag inflates, then get fresh air moderate crash, there may be for the vehicle covers the need
by opening a window or a door. concealed damage that could to replace other parts.
If you experience breathing make it difficult to safely operate .
problems following an airbag The vehicle has a crash sensing
the vehicle. and diagnostic module which
deployment, you should seek
Use caution if you should attempt records information after a
medical attention.
to restart the engine after a crash crash. See Vehicle Data
has occurred. Recording and Privacy on
The vehicle has a feature that may page 13-13 and Event Data
automatically unlock the doors, turn Recorders on page 13-14.
on the interior lamps, turn on the In many crashes severe enough to
inflate the airbag, windshields are
. Let only qualified technicians
hazard warning flashers, and shut work on the airbag systems.
off the fuel system after the airbags broken by vehicle deformation.
Improper service can mean that
inflate. You can lock the doors, turn
off the interior lamps, and turn off
2014 - 2nd Edition - 8/19/13
an airbag system will not work occupant and determine if the front
properly. See your dealer for outboard passenger frontal airbag
service. and knee airbag (if equipped)
should be allowed to inflate or not.
Passenger Sensing According to accident statistics,
System children are safer when properly
Canada secured in a rear seat in the correct
The vehicle has a passenger
The words ON and OFF, or the child restraint for their weight
sensing system for the front
symbol for on and off, will be visible and size.
outboard passenger position. The
passenger airbag status indicator during the system check. check. Whenever possible, children
will light on the instrument panel When the system check is age 12 and under should be
when the vehicle is started. complete, either the word ON or secured in a rear seating position.
OFF, or the symbol for on or off, will Never put a rear-facing child seat in
be visible. See Passenger Airbag
the front. This is because the risk to
Status Indicator on page 5-11.
the rear-facing child is so great,
The passenger sensing system if the airbag inflates.
turns off the front outboard
passenger frontal airbag and knee
airbag (if equipped) under certain
{ Warning
United States
conditions. No other airbag is A child in a rear-facing child
affected by the passenger sensing restraint can be seriously injured
system. or killed if the passenger frontal
The passenger sensing system airbag inflates. This is because
works with sensors that are part of the back of the rear-facing child
the front outboard passenger seat. restraint would be very close to
The sensors are designed to detect (Continued)
the presence of a properly seated
2014 - 2nd Edition - 8/19/13
The passenger sensing system is When the passenger sensing

Warning (Continued) designed to turn off the front system has turned off the front
outboard passenger frontal airbag outboard passenger frontal airbag
the inflating airbag. A child in a and knee airbag (if equipped) if: and knee airbag (if equipped), the
forward-facing child restraint can off indicator will light and stay lit as
. The front outboard passenger
be seriously injured or killed if the a reminder that the airbags are off.
passenger frontal airbag inflates seat is unoccupied.
See Passenger Airbag Status
and the passenger seat is in a . The system determines that an Indicator on page 5-11.
forward position. infant is present in a rear-facing
infant seat. The passenger sensing system is
Even if the passenger sensing designed to turn on the front
system has turned off the front . The system determines that a outboard passenger frontal airbag
outboard passenger airbag(s), no small child is present in a child and knee airbag (if equipped)
system is fail-safe. No one can restraint. anytime the system senses that a
guarantee that an airbag will not . The system determines that a person of adult size is sitting
inflate under some unusual small child is present in a properly in the front outboard
circumstance, even though the booster seat. passenger seat. When the
airbag(s) are off. passenger sensing system has
. A front outboard passenger allowed the airbags to be enabled,
Secure rear-facing child restraints takes his/her weight off of the the on indicator will light and stay lit
in a rear seat, even if the seat for a period of time. as a reminder that the airbags are
airbag(s) are off. If you secure a . The front outboard passenger active.
forward-facing child restraint in seat is occupied by a smaller For some children who have
the front outboard passenger person, such as a child who has outgrown child restraints, and for
seat, always move the seat as far outgrown child restraints. very small adults, the passenger
back as it will go. It is better to sensing system may or may not turn
. There is a critical problem with
secure the child restraint in a off the front outboard passenger
the airbag system or the
rear seat. passenger sensing system. frontal airbag and knee airbag (if
equipped), depending upon the
2014 - 2nd Edition - 8/19/13
person's seating posture and 2. Remove the child restraint from restraint. If this happens, adjust
body build. Everyone in the the vehicle. the head restraint. See Head
vehicle who has outgrown child 3. Remove any additional items Restraints on page 3-2.
restraints should wear a safety belt from the seat such as blankets, 6. Restart the vehicle.
properly — whether or not there is cushions, seat covers, seat
an airbag for that person. If the on indicator is still lit, secure
heaters, or seat massagers. the child in the child restraint in a
{ Warning 4. Reinstall the child restraint
following the directions provided
rear seat position in the vehicle, and
check with your dealer.
If the airbag readiness light ever by the child restraint
manufacturer and refer to If the Off Indicator Is Lit for an
comes on and stays on, it means Adult-Size Occupant
that something may be wrong Securing Child Restraints (Rear
with the airbag system. To help Seat) on page 3-44 or Securing
Child Restraints (Right Front
avoid injury to yourself or others,
Passenger Seat) on page 3-46.
have the vehicle serviced right
away. See Airbag Readiness 5. If, after reinstalling the child
Light on page 5-11 for more restraint and restarting the
information, including important vehicle, the on indicator is still lit,
safety information. turn the vehicle off. Then slightly
recline the vehicle seatback and
adjust the seat cushion,
If the On Indicator Is Lit for a if adjustable, to make sure that
Child Restraint the vehicle seatback is not
If a child restraint has been installed pushing the child restraint into
and the on indicator is lit: the seat cushion. Also make
sure the child restraint is not If a person of adult size is sitting in
1. Turn the vehicle off. trapped under the vehicle head the front outboard passenger seat,
but the off indicator is lit, it could be
2014 - 2nd Edition - 8/19/13
because that person is not sitting A thick layer of additional material,

properly in the seat. Use the { Warning such as a blanket or cushion,
following steps to allow the system or aftermarket equipment such as
to detect that person and enable the If the front outboard passenger seat covers, seat heaters, and seat
front outboard passenger frontal airbag is turned off for an massagers can affect how well the
airbag and knee airbag (if adult-sized occupant, the airbag passenger sensing system
equipped): will not be able to inflate and help operates. We recommend that you
protect that person in a crash, not use seat covers or other
1. Turn the vehicle off. resulting in an increased risk of aftermarket equipment except when
2. Remove any additional material serious injury or even death. An approved by GM for your specific
from the seat, such as blankets, adult-sized occupant should not vehicle. See Adding Equipment to
cushions, seat covers, seat ride in the front outboard the Airbag-Equipped Vehicle on
heaters, or seat massagers. passenger seat, if the passenger page 3-28 for more information
3. Place the seatback in the fully airbag off indicator is lit. about modifications that can affect
upright position. how the system operates.
4. Have the person sit upright in Additional Factors Affecting The on indicator may be lit if an
the seat, centered on the seat System Operation object, such as a briefcase,
cushion, with legs comfortably handbag, grocery bag, laptop,
Safety belts help keep the or other electronic device, is put on
extended.
passenger in position on the seat an unoccupied seat. If this is not
5. Restart the vehicle and have the during vehicle maneuvers and desired, remove the object from
person remain in this position for braking, which helps the passenger the seat.
two to three minutes after the on sensing system maintain the
indicator is lit. passenger airbag status. See
“Safety Belts” and “Child Restraints”
in the Index for additional
information about the importance of
proper restraint use.
2014 - 2nd Edition - 8/19/13
module, steering wheel, instrument

{ Warning { Warning panel, any of the airbag modules,
ceiling or pillar garnish trim, front
Stowing of articles under the For up to 10 seconds after the sensors, side impact sensors,
passenger seat or between the vehicle is turned off and the or airbag wiring.
passenger seat cushion and battery is disconnected, an airbag
seatback may interfere with the can still inflate during improper Your dealer and the service manual
proper operation of the passenger service. You can be injured if you have information about the location
sensing system. are close to an airbag when it of the airbag sensors, sensing and
diagnostic module, and airbag
inflates. Avoid yellow connectors.
wiring.
They are probably part of the
Servicing the airbag system. Be sure to follow In addition, the vehicle has a
Airbag-Equipped Vehicle proper service procedures, and passenger sensing system for the
make sure the person performing front outboard passenger position,
Airbags affect how the vehicle which includes sensors that are part
should be serviced. There are parts work for you is qualified to do so.
of the passenger seat. The
of the airbag system in several passenger sensing system may not
places around the vehicle. Your
dealer and the service manual have
Adding Equipment to the operate properly if the original seat
Airbag-Equipped Vehicle trim is replaced with non-GM
information about servicing the covers, upholstery, or trim; or with
vehicle and the airbag system. To Adding accessories that change the GM covers, upholstery, or trim
purchase a service manual, see vehicle's frame, bumper system, designed for a different vehicle. Any
Service Publications Ordering height, front end, or side sheet object, such as an aftermarket seat
Information on page 13-11. metal may keep the airbag system heater or a comfort-enhancing pad
from working properly. The or device, installed under or on top
operation of the airbag system can of the seat fabric, could also
also be affected by changing any interfere with the operation of the
parts of the front seats, safety belts, passenger sensing system. This
the airbag sensing and diagnostic could either prevent proper
2014 - 2nd Edition - 8/19/13
deployment of the passenger Airbag System Check Replacing Airbag System

airbag(s) or prevent the passenger
sensing system from properly The airbag system does not need Parts after a Crash
turning off the passenger airbag(s). regularly scheduled maintenance or
See Passenger Sensing System on replacement. Make sure the airbag
readiness light is working. See
{ Warning
page 3-24.
Airbag Readiness Light on A crash can damage the airbag
The vehicle has rollover roof-rail page 5-11. systems in the vehicle.
airbags. See Different Size Tires A damaged airbag system may
and Wheels on page 10-56 for
additional important information. { Caution not work properly and may not
protect you and your
If you have to modify your vehicle If an airbag covering is damaged, passenger(s) in a crash, resulting
because you have a disability and opened, or broken, the airbag in serious injury or even death. To
have questions about whether the may not work properly. Do not help make sure the airbag
modifications will affect the vehicle's open or break the airbag systems are working properly
airbag system, or if you have coverings. If there are any after a crash, have them
questions about whether the airbag opened or broken airbag inspected and any necessary
system will be affected if the vehicle coverings, have the airbag replacements made as soon as
is modified for any other reason, call covering and/or airbag module possible.
Customer Assistance. See replaced. For the location of the
Customer Assistance Offices on airbags, see Where Are the
page 13-3. If an airbag inflates, you will need to
Airbags? on page 3-19. See your
replace airbag system parts. See
dealer for service. your dealer for service.
2014 - 2nd Edition - 8/19/13
If the airbag readiness light stays on Child Restraints The manufacturer instructions that
after the vehicle is started or comes come with the booster seat state the
on when you are driving, the airbag weight and height limitations for that
system may not work properly. Have Older Children booster. Use a booster seat with a
the vehicle serviced right away. See lap-shoulder belt until the child
Airbag Readiness Light on passes the fit test below:
page 5-11. . Sit all the way back on the seat.
Do the knees bend at the seat
edge? If yes, continue. If no,
return to the booster seat.
. Buckle the lap-shoulder belt.
Does the shoulder belt rest on
the shoulder? If yes, continue.
If no, try using the rear safety
belt comfort guide. See “Rear
Safety Belt Comfort Guides”
under Lap-Shoulder Belt on
Older children who have outgrown
page 3-11. If the shoulder belt
booster seats should wear the
still does not rest on the
vehicle safety belts.
shoulder, then return to the
booster seat.
. Does the lap belt fit low and
snug on the hips, touching the
thighs? If yes, continue. If no,
2014 - 2nd Edition - 8/19/13

. Can proper safety belt fit be According to accident statistics,
maintained for the length of the children are safer when properly
trip? If yes, continue. If no, restrained in a rear seating position.
In a crash, children who are not
Q: What is the proper way to buckled up can strike other people
wear safety belts? who are buckled up, or can be
A: An older child should wear a thrown out of the vehicle. Older
lap-shoulder belt and get the children need to use safety belts
additional restraint a shoulder properly.
belt can provide. The shoulder
belt should not cross the face or { Warning
neck. The lap belt should fit
snugly below the hips, just Never allow more than one child
touching the top of the thighs. to wear the same safety belt. The { Warning
This applies belt force to the safety belt cannot properly spread Never allow a child to wear the
child's pelvic bones in a crash. the impact forces. In a crash, they safety belt with the shoulder belt
It should never be worn over the can be crushed together and behind their back. A child can be
abdomen, which could cause seriously injured. A safety belt seriously injured by not wearing
severe or even fatal internal must be used by only one person
injuries in a crash. the lap-shoulder belt properly. In a
at a time. crash, the child would not be
Also see “Rear Safety Belt Comfort restrained by the shoulder belt.
Guides” under Lap-Shoulder Belt on The child could move too far
page 3-11. forward increasing the chance of
head and neck injury. The child
might also slide under the lap
(Continued)
2014 - 2nd Edition - 8/19/13
Warning (Continued)
Infants and Young Every time infants and young
children ride in vehicles, they should
Children have the protection provided by
belt. The belt force would then be Everyone in a vehicle needs appropriate child restraints. Neither
applied right on the abdomen. protection! This includes infants and the vehicle's safety belt system nor
That could cause serious or fatal all other children. Neither the its airbag system is designed
injuries. The shoulder belt should distance traveled nor the age and for them.
go over the shoulder and across size of the traveler changes the
the chest. Children who are not restrained
need, for everyone, to use safety properly can strike other people,
restraints. In fact, the law in every or can be thrown out of the vehicle.
state in the United States and in
every Canadian province says
children up to some age must be { Warning
restrained while in a vehicle.
Never hold an infant or a child
while riding in a vehicle. Due to
{ Warning crash forces, an infant or a child
will become so heavy it is not
Children can be seriously injured
possible to hold it during a crash.
or strangled if a shoulder belt is
For example, in a crash at only
wrapped around their neck and
40 km/h (25 mph), a 5.5 kg (12 lb)
the safety belt continues to
infant will suddenly become a
tighten. Never leave children
110 kg (240 lb) force on a person's
unattended in a vehicle and never
arms. An infant should be
allow children to play with the
secured in an appropriate
safety belts.
restraint.
2014 - 2nd Edition - 8/19/13
weight, height, and age but also

Warning (Continued) whether or not the restraint will
be compatible with the motor
seat, always move the front vehicle in which it will be used.
passenger seat as far back as it
will go. For most basic types of child
restraints, there are many
different models available. When
purchasing a child restraint, be
sure it is designed to be used in
a motor vehicle. If it is, the
restraint will have a label saying
that it meets federal motor
vehicle safety standards.
{ Warning The restraint manufacturer
Children who are up against, instructions that come with the
restraint state the weight and
or very close to, any airbag when
height limitations for a particular
it inflates can be seriously injured
child restraint. In addition, there
or killed. Never put a rear-facing are many kinds of restraints
child restraint in the right front available for children with
seat. Secure a rear-facing child Q: What are the different types of
special needs.
restraint in a rear seat. It is also add-on child restraints?
better to secure a forward-facing A: Add-on child restraints, which
child restraint in a rear seat. If you are purchased by the vehicle
must secure a forward-facing owner, are available in four basic
child restraint in the right front types. Selection of a particular
(Continued) restraint should take into
consideration not only the child's
2014 - 2nd Edition - 8/19/13
Child Restraint Systems

{ Warning { Warning
To reduce the risk of neck and A young child's hip bones are still
head injury during a crash, infants so small that the vehicle's regular
need complete support. In a safety belt may not remain low on
crash, if an infant is in a the hip bones, as it should.
rear-facing child restraint, the Instead, it may settle up around
crash forces can be distributed the child's abdomen. In a crash,
across the strongest part of an the belt would apply force on a
infant's body, the back and body area that is unprotected by
shoulders. Infants should always any bony structure. This alone
be secured in rear-facing child could cause serious or fatal
restraints. injuries. To reduce the risk of
serious or fatal injuries during a Rear-Facing Infant Seat
crash, young children should A rear-facing infant seat provides
always be secured in appropriate restraint with the seating surface
child restraints. against the back of the infant.
The harness system holds the infant
in place and, in a crash, acts to
keep the infant positioned in the
restraint.
2014 - 2nd Edition - 8/19/13
Securing an Add-On Child

Restraint in the Vehicle
{ Warning
A child can be seriously injured or
killed in a crash if the child
restraint is not properly secured in
the vehicle. Secure the child
restraint properly in the vehicle
using the vehicle safety belt or
LATCH system, following the
Forward-Facing Child Seat Booster Seats instructions that came with that
A forward-facing child seat provides A booster seat is a child restraint child restraint and the instructions
restraint for the child's body with the designed to improve the fit of the in this manual.
harness. vehicle's safety belt system.
A booster seat can also help a child To help reduce the chance of injury,
to see out the window. the child restraint must be secured
in the vehicle. Child restraint
systems must be secured in vehicle
seats by lap belts or the lap belt
portion of a lap-shoulder belt, or by
the LATCH system. See Lower
Anchors and Tethers for Children
(LATCH System) on page 3-37.
2014 - 2nd Edition - 8/19/13
Children can be endangered in a Administration (NHTSA) website to Whenever possible, children

crash if the child restraint is not locate the nearest child safety seat aged 12 and under should be
properly secured in the vehicle. inspection station. For CPST secured in a rear seating position.
When securing an add-on child availability in Canada, check with Never put a rear-facing child seat in
restraint, refer to the instructions Transport Canada or the Provincial the front. This is because the risk to
that come with the restraint which Ministry of Transportation office. the rear-facing child is so great if the
may be on the restraint itself or in a Securing the Child Within the airbag deploys.
booklet, or both, and to this manual. Child Restraint
The child restraint instructions are
important, so if they are not
{ Warning
available, obtain a replacement { Warning A child in a rear-facing child
copy from the manufacturer. A child can be seriously injured or restraint can be seriously injured
Keep in mind that an unsecured killed in a crash if the child is not or killed if the front passenger
child restraint can move around in a properly secured in the child airbag inflates. This is because
collision or sudden stop and injure restraint. Secure the child the back of the rear-facing child
people in the vehicle. Be sure to properly following the instructions restraint would be very close to
properly secure any child restraint in that came with that child restraint. the inflating airbag. A child in a
the vehicle — even when no child is forward-facing child restraint can
in it. be seriously injured or killed if the
In some areas of the United States Where to Put the front passenger airbag inflates
and Canada, Certified Child Restraint and the passenger seat is in a
Passenger Safety Technicians forward position.
According to accident statistics,
(CPSTs) are available to inspect children and infants are safer when Even if the passenger sensing
and demonstrate how to correctly properly restrained in a child system has turned off the front
use and install child restraints. In restraint system or infant restraint passenger frontal airbag, no
the U.S., refer to the National system secured in a rear seating
Highway Traffic Safety (Continued)
position.
2014 - 2nd Edition - 8/19/13
Warning (Continued)
Child restraints and booster seats Lower Anchors and
vary considerably in size, and some
may fit in certain seating positions
Tethers for Children
system is fail-safe. No one can better than others. Always make (LATCH System)
guarantee that an airbag will not sure the child restraint is properly
deploy under some unusual The LATCH system secures a child
secured. restraint during driving or in a crash.
circumstance, even though it is
turned off. Depending on where you place the LATCH attachments on the child
child restraint and the size of the restraint are used to attach the child
Secure rear-facing child restraints child restraint, you may not be able restraint to the anchors in the
in a rear seat, even if the airbag to access adjacent safety belt vehicle. The LATCH system is
is off. If you secure a assemblies or LATCH anchors for designed to make installation of a
forward-facing child restraint in additional passengers or child child restraint easier.
the front seat, always move the restraints. Adjacent seating In order to use the LATCH system in
front passenger seat as far back positions should not be used if the your vehicle, you need a child
as it will go. It is better to secure child restraint prevents access to or restraint that has LATCH
the child restraint in a rear seat. interferes with the routing of the attachments. LATCH-compatible
safety belt. rear-facing and forward-facing child
See Passenger Sensing System
on page 3-24 for additional Wherever a child restraint is seats can be properly installed
information. installed, be sure to secure the child using either the LATCH anchors or
restraint properly. the vehicle’s safety belts. Do not
use both the safety belts and the
When securing a child restraint in a Keep in mind that an unsecured
LATCH anchorage system to secure
rear seating position, study the child restraint can move around in a
a rear-facing or forward-facing
instructions that came with the child collision or sudden stop and injure
child seat.
restraint to make sure it is people in the vehicle. Be sure to
properly secure any child restraint in Booster seats use the vehicle’s
compatible with this vehicle.
the vehicle — even when no child is safety belts to secure the child in
in it. the booster seat. If the manufacturer
2014 - 2nd Edition - 8/19/13
recommends that the booster seat The following explains how to attach Top Tether Anchor
be secured with the LATCH system, a child restraint with these
this can be done as long as the attachments in the vehicle.
booster seat can be positioned Not all vehicle seating positions or
properly and there is no interference child restraints have lower anchors
with the proper positioning of the and attachments or top tether
lap-shoulder belt on the child. anchors and attachments.
Make sure to follow the instructions
that came with the child restraint, Lower Anchors
and also the instructions in this
manual.
When installing a child restraint with
a top tether, you must also use
either the lower anchors or the
safety belts to properly secure the A top tether (3, 4) anchors the top of
child restraint. A child restraint must the child restraint to the vehicle.
never be installed using only the top A top tether anchor is built into the
tether and anchor. vehicle. The top tether
attachment (2) on the child restraint
The LATCH anchorage system can connects to the top tether anchor in
be used until the combined weight the vehicle in order to reduce the
of the child plus the child restraint is forward movement and rotation of
29.5 kg (65 lbs). Use the safety belt Lower anchors (1) are metal bars the child restraint during driving or in
alone instead of the LATCH built into the vehicle. There are two a crash.
anchorage system once the lower anchors for each LATCH
combined weight is more than seating position that will
29.5 kg (65 lbs). accommodate a child restraint with
lower attachments (2).
2014 - 2nd Edition - 8/19/13
The child restraint may have a Lower Anchor and Top Tether To assist in locating the lower
single tether (3) or a dual tether (4). Anchor Locations anchors, each seating position with
Either will have a single lower anchors has two labels, near
attachment (2) to secure the top the crease between the seatback
tether to the anchor. and the seat cushion.
Some child restraints that have a
top tether are designed for use with
or without the top tether being
attached. Others require the top
tether always to be attached. In
Canada, the law requires that
forward-facing child restraints have
a top tether, and that the tether be To assist in locating the top tether
attached. Be sure to read and follow anchors, the top tether anchor
the instructions for your child symbol is on the cover for sedan
restraint. models or near the anchors on
I (Top Tether Anchor): Seating hatchback models.
positions with top tether anchors.
H (Lower Anchor): Seating
positions with two lower anchors.
2014 - 2nd Edition - 8/19/13
the instructions that come with the

child restraint say that the top tether
must be attached.
According to accident statistics,
children and infants are safer when
properly restrained in a child
restraint system or infant restraint
system secured in a rear seating
position. See Where to Put the
Restraint on page 3-36 for
additional information.
Sedan Hatchback Securing a Child Restraint

Designed for the LATCH
For sedan models, the top tether For hatchback models, the top
System
anchors are under the covers tether anchors are on the back of
behind the rear seat on the filler the rear seatbacks. Remove the
panel. Pull open the cover to access cargo cover before installing the top { Warning
the top tether anchors. Be sure to tether. The cargo cover should
use an anchor on the same side of remain off while the top tether is in If a LATCH-type child restraint is
the vehicle as the seating position use. Be sure to use an anchor on not attached to anchors, the child
where the child restraint will be the same side of the vehicle as the restraint will not be able to protect
placed. seating position where the child the child correctly. In a crash, the
restraint will be placed. child could be seriously injured or
killed. Install a LATCH-type child
Do not secure a child restraint in a
restraint properly using the
position without a top tether anchor
anchors, or use the vehicle safety
if a national or local law requires
that the top tether be attached, or if (Continued)
2014 - 2nd Edition - 8/19/13
Warning (Continued) { Warning Caution (Continued)

belts to secure the restraint, Children can be seriously injured Do not fold the empty rear seat
following the instructions that or strangled if a shoulder belt is with a safety belt buckled. This
came with the child restraint and wrapped around their neck and could damage the safety belt or
the instructions in this manual. the safety belt continues to the seat. Unbuckle and return the
tighten. Buckle any unused safety safety belt to its stowed position,
belts behind the child restraint so before folding the seat.
children cannot reach them. Pull
{ Warning the shoulder belt all the way out If you need to secure more than one
Do not attach more than one child of the retractor to set the lock, child restraint in the rear seat, see
restraint to a single anchor. if the vehicle has one, after the Where to Put the Restraint on
Attaching more than one child child restraint has been installed. page 3-36.
restraint to a single anchor could This system is designed to make
cause the anchor or attachment the installation of child restraints
to come loose or even break
during a crash. A child or others
{ Caution easier. When using lower anchors,
do not use the vehicle's safety belts.
could be injured. To reduce the Do not let the LATCH Instead, use the vehicle's anchors
risk of serious or fatal injuries attachments rub against the and child restraint attachments to
during a crash, attach only one vehicle’s safety belts. This may secure the restraints. Some
child restraint per anchor. damage these parts. If necessary, restraints also use another vehicle
move buckled safety belts to anchor to secure a top tether.
avoid rubbing the LATCH 1. Attach and tighten the lower
attachments. attachments to the lower
(Continued) anchors. If the child restraint
does not have lower
2014 - 2nd Edition - 8/19/13
attachments or the desired 2.2. Open the cover, are using a single tether,
seating position does not have if equipped, to access the route the tether over the
lower anchors, secure the child top tether anchors. seatback.
restraint with the top tether and 2.3. For hatchback models,
the safety belts. Refer to your remove the cargo cover
child restraint manufacturer before installing the top
instructions and the instructions tether. The cargo cover
in this manual. should remain off while the
1.1. Find the lower anchors for top tether is in use.
the desired seating 2.4. Route and tighten the top
position. tether according to your
1.2. Put the child restraint on child restraint instructions
the seat. and the following If the position you are using
1.3. Attach and tighten the lower instructions: does not have a headrest
attachments on the child or head restraint and you
restraint to the lower are using a dual tether,
anchors. route the tether over the
seatback.
2. If the child restraint manufacturer
recommends that the top tether
be attached, attach and tighten
the top tether to the top tether
anchor, if equipped. Refer to the
child restraint instructions and
the following steps: If the position you are using
2.1. Find the top tether anchor. does not have a headrest
or head restraint and you
2014 - 2nd Edition - 8/19/13
Replacing LATCH System

Parts After a Crash
{ Warning
A crash can damage the LATCH
system in the vehicle. A damaged
LATCH system may not properly
If the position you are using If the position you are using secure the child restraint,
has an adjustable headrest has an adjustable headrest resulting in serious injury or even
or head restraint and you or head restraint and you death in a crash. To help make
are using a single tether, are using a dual tether, sure the LATCH system is
raise the headrest or head raise the headrest or head working properly after a crash,
restraint and route the restraint and route the see your dealer to have the
tether under the headrest or tether under the headrest or system inspected and any
head restraint and in head restraint and around necessary replacements made as
between the headrest or the headrest or head soon as possible.
head restraint posts. restraint posts.
3. Before placing a child in the If the vehicle has the LATCH system
child restraint, make sure it is and it was being used during a
securely held in place. To check, crash, new LATCH system parts
grasp the child restraint at the may be needed.
LATCH path and attempt to
move it side to side and back New parts and repairs may be
and forth. There should be no necessary even if the LATCH
more than 2.5 cm (1 in) of system was not being used at the
movement for proper installation. time of the crash.
2014 - 2nd Edition - 8/19/13
Securing Child Restraints In Canada, the law requires that

forward-facing child restraints have
(Rear Seat) a top tether, and that the tether be
When securing a child restraint in a attached.
rear seating position, study the If the child restraint does not have
instructions that came with the child the LATCH system, you will be
restraint to make sure it is using the safety belt to secure the
compatible with this vehicle. child restraint in this position.
If the child restraint has the LATCH Be sure to follow the instructions
system, see Lower Anchors and that came with the child restraint.
Tethers for Children (LATCH Secure the child in the child restraint
System) on page 3-37 for how and when and as the instructions say.
where to install the child restraint If more than one child restraint 3. Push the latch plate into the
using LATCH. If a child restraint is needs to be installed in the rear buckle until it clicks.
secured in the vehicle using a seat, be sure to read Where to Put Position the release button on
safety belt and it uses a top tether, the Restraint on page 3-36. the buckle so that the safety belt
see Lower Anchors and Tethers for
1. Put the child restraint on could be quickly unbuckled if
Children (LATCH System) on
the seat. necessary.
page 3-37 for top tether anchor
locations. 2. Pick up the latch plate, and run
Do not secure a child seat in a the lap and shoulder portions of
position without a top tether anchor the vehicle safety belt through or
if a national or local law requires around the restraint. The child
that the top tether be anchored, or if restraint instructions will show
the instructions that come with the you how.
child restraint say that the top strap
must be anchored.
2014 - 2nd Edition - 8/19/13
6. If the child restraint has a top

tether, follow the child restraint
manufacturer's instructions
regarding the use of the top
tether. See Lower Anchors and
Tethers for Children (LATCH
System) on page 3-37 for more
information.
7. Before placing a child in the
child restraint, make sure it is
securely held in place. To check,
grasp the child restraint at the
4. Pull the shoulder belt all the way 5. To tighten the belt, push down safety belt path and attempt to
out of the retractor to set the on the child restraint, pull the move it side to side and back
lock. When the retractor lock is shoulder portion of the belt to and forth. When the child
set, the belt can be tightened but tighten the lap portion of the belt, restraint is properly installed,
not pulled out of the retractor. and feed the shoulder belt back there should be no more than
into the retractor. When installing 2.5 cm (1 in) of movement.
a forward-facing child restraint, it To remove the child restraint,
may be helpful to use your knee unbuckle the vehicle safety belt and
to push down on the child let it return to the stowed position.
restraint as you tighten the belt. If the top tether is attached to a top
Try to pull the belt out of the tether anchor, disconnect it.
retractor to make sure the
retractor is locked. If the
retractor is not locked, repeat
Steps 4 and 5.
2014 - 2nd Edition - 8/19/13
Securing Child Restraints

(Right Front
{ Warning Warning (Continued)
Passenger Seat) A child in a rear-facing child Secure rear-facing child restraints

restraint can be seriously injured in a rear seat, even if the
This vehicle has airbags. A rear or killed if the passenger frontal airbag(s) are off. If you secure a
seat is a safer place to secure a airbag inflates. This is because forward-facing child restraint in
forward-facing child restraint. See the back of the rear-facing child the front outboard passenger
Where to Put the Restraint on
restraint would be very close to seat, always move the seat as far
page 3-36.
the inflating airbag. A child in a back as it will go. It is better to
In addition, the vehicle has a forward-facing child restraint can secure the child restraint in a
passenger sensing system which is be seriously injured or killed if the rear seat.
designed to turn off the front passenger frontal airbag inflates
outboard passenger frontal airbag and the passenger seat is in a
and knee airbag under certain If the child restraint has the LATCH
forward position. system, see Lower Anchors and
conditions. See Passenger Sensing
System on page 3-24 and Even if the passenger sensing Tethers for Children (LATCH
Passenger Airbag Status Indicator system has turned off the front System) on page 3-37 for how to
on page 5-11 for more information outboard passenger airbag(s), no install your child restraint using
on this, including important safety system is fail-safe. No one can LATCH. If a child restraint is
information. guarantee that an airbag will not secured using a safety belt and it
inflate under some unusual uses a top tether, see Lower
Never put a rear-facing child seat in Anchors and Tethers for Children
the front. This is because the risk to circumstance, even though the
(LATCH System) on page 3-37 for
the rear-facing child is so great, airbag(s) are off.
top tether anchor locations.
if the airbag deploys. (Continued)
Do not secure a child seat in a
position without a top tether anchor
if a national or local law requires
that the top tether be anchored, or if
2014 - 2nd Edition - 8/19/13
the instructions that come with the 3. Pick up the latch plate, and run
child restraint say that the top strap the lap and shoulder portions of
must be anchored. the vehicle's safety belt through
In Canada, the law requires that or around the restraint. The child
forward-facing child restraints have restraint instructions will show
a top tether, and that the tether be you how.
attached.
You will be using the lap-shoulder
belt to secure the child restraint in
this position. Follow the instructions
that came with the child restraint.
1. Move the seat as far back as it 4. Push the latch plate into the
will go before securing the buckle until it clicks.
forward-facing child restraint.
Position the release button on
When the passenger sensing the buckle so that the safety belt
system has turned off the front could be quickly unbuckled if
outboard passenger frontal necessary.
airbag and knee airbag, the off
indicator on the passenger Tilt the latch plate to adjust the
airbag status indicator should belt if needed.
light and stay lit when you start
the vehicle. See Passenger
Airbag Status Indicator on
page 5-11.
2. Put the child restraint on
the seat.
2014 - 2nd Edition - 8/19/13
7. Before placing a child in the

child restraint, make sure it is
securely held in place. To check,
grasp the child restraint at the
safety belt path and attempt to
move it side to side and back
and forth. When the child
restraint is properly installed,
there should be no more than
2.5 cm (1 in) of movement.
If the airbags are off, the off
indicator in the passenger airbag
5. Pull the shoulder belt all the way 6. To tighten the belt, push down status indicator will come on and
out of the retractor to set the on the child restraint, pull the stay on when the vehicle is started.
lock. When the retractor lock is shoulder portion of the belt to If a child restraint has been installed
set, the belt can be tightened but tighten the lap portion of the belt, and the off symbol is not lit, see “If
not pulled out of the retractor. and feed the shoulder belt back the On Indicator Is Lit for a Child
into the retractor. When installing Restraint” under Passenger Sensing
a forward-facing child restraint, it System on page 3-24.
may be helpful to use your knee
to push down on the child To remove the child restraint,
restraint as you tighten the belt. unbuckle the vehicle's safety belt
and let it go back all the way.
Try to pull the belt out of the
retractor to make sure the
retractor is locked. If the
retractor is not locked, repeat
Steps 5 and 6.
2014 - 2nd Edition - 8/19/13
Storage 4-1
Storage Storage If equipped, the storage area has an

auxiliary input jack and USB port
Compartments inside.
Storage Compartments
Storage Compartments . . . . . . . 4-1 { Warning Glove Box
Instrument Panel Storage . . . . . 4-1 Lift up on the glove box lever to
Glove Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1 Do not store heavy or sharp
open it.
objects in storage compartments.
Luggage/Load Locations In a crash, these objects may
Load Compartment cause the cover to open and
(Hatchback) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2 could result in injury.
Additional Storage Features
Cargo Cover (Hatchback) . . . . . 4-2 Instrument Panel Storage
Lift up on the lever to open.

2014 - 2nd Edition - 8/19/13
4-2 Storage
Luggage/Load To install the load compartment Additional Storage

cover:
Locations 1. Align the front sides of the load
Features
compartment cover into the slots
Load Compartment on both sides at the front of the Cargo Cover (Hatchback)
(Hatchback) load compartment.
The load compartment cover can be 2. Lower the load compartment { Warning
used to conceal objects under it or cover onto the lip around the
An unsecured cargo cover could
removed and placed on the bottom load compartment.
strike people in a sudden stop or
of the load compartment to carry
turn, or in a crash. Store the
larger loads.
cargo cover securely or remove it
To remove the load compartment from the vehicle.
cover:
1. Lift up on the load compartment The cargo cover can be used to
cover and pull out. cover items in the rear of the
2. Store the load compartment vehicle.
cover on the bottom of the load To remove the cargo cover:
compartment.
1. Remove both of the cords from
the hooks at the top of the
liftgate.
2. Push up on the underside of the
cargo cover at both pins at the
front sides of the cargo cover.
2014 - 2nd Edition - 8/19/13
Storage 4-3
To install the cargo cover:

1. Align the clips on the underside
of the cargo cover over the pins
on both sides of the cargo area
and push down.
2. Reconnect both of the cords to
the hooks at the top of the
liftgate.
2014 - 2nd Edition - 8/19/13
4-4 Storage
2 NOTES
2014 - 2nd Edition - 8/19/13
Instruments and Controls 5-1
Instruments and Airbag Readiness Light . . . . . . 5-11 Engine Oil Pressure Light . . . . 5-19
Passenger Airbag Status Low Fuel Warning Light . . . . . . 5-20
Controls Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11 Immobilizer Light . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-20
Charging System Light . . . . . . 5-12 Reduced Engine Power
Malfunction Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-20
Controls Indicator Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-12 High-Beam On Light . . . . . . . . . 5-21
Steering Wheel Adjustment . . . 5-2 Service Vehicle Soon Daytime Running Lamps
Steering Wheel Controls . . . . . . 5-2 Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-15 (DRL) Indicator Light . . . . . . . 5-21
Horn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3 Brake System Warning Front Fog Lamp Light . . . . . . . . 5-21
Windshield Wiper/Washer . . . . . 5-3 Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-15 Lamps On Reminder . . . . . . . . . 5-21
Rear Window Wiper/ Antilock Brake System (ABS) Cruise Control Light . . . . . . . . . 5-21
Washer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4 Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-16 Door Ajar Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-22
Compass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4 Up-Shift Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-16
Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5 Power Steering Warning Information Displays
Power Outlets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6 Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-16 Driver Information
Lane Departure Warning Center (DIC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-22
Warning Lights, Gauges, and
(LDW) Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-17 Vehicle Messages
Indicators Forward Collision Alert (FCA)
Warning Lights, Gauges, and Vehicle Messages . . . . . . . . . . . 5-24
Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-17 Engine Oil Messages . . . . . . . . 5-24
Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7 Traction Off Light . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-17
Instrument Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8 Tire Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-24
StabiliTrak® OFF Light . . . . . . . 5-18
Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9 Traction Control System Trip Computer
Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9 (TCS)/StabiliTrak® Light . . . . 5-18 Trip Computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-25
Trip Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9 Engine Coolant Temperature
Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9 Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-18 Vehicle Personalization
Fuel Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9 Tire Pressure Light . . . . . . . . . . 5-19 Vehicle Personalization . . . . . . 5-27
Safety Belt Reminders . . . . . . . 5-10
2014 - 2nd Edition - 8/19/13
5-2 Instruments and Controls
Controls Steering Wheel Controls Bluetooth (Voice Recognition) on

page 7-37 or Bluetooth (Overview)
on page 7-26 or Bluetooth
Steering Wheel (Infotainment Controls) on
Adjustment page 7-28 or OnStar Overview on
page 14-1.
$ / i (Mute/End Call): Press to
reject an incoming call, or end a
current call. Press to silence the
vehicle speakers while using the
infotainment system. Press again to
turn the sound on.
For vehicles with OnStar or
Bluetooth systems, press to reject
Some audio steering wheel controls an incoming call, or end a
could differ depending on the current call.
vehicle's options. Some audio _ SRC ^ (Source): Press to select
controls can be adjusted at the an audio source.
To adjust the steering wheel: steering wheel.
1. Pull the lever down. Use to toggle up or down to select
b / g (Push to Talk): For vehicles the next or previous favorite radio
2. Move the steering wheel up, with Bluetooth or OnStar, press to station or CD/MP3 track.
down, forward, and backward. interact with those systems. See
+ x − (Volume): Press + or − to
3. Pull the lever up to lock the
increase or decrease the volume.
steering wheel in place.
Do not adjust the steering wheel
while driving.
2014 - 2nd Edition - 8/19/13
Horn LO: Use for slow wipes. If the windshield wiper lever is then
moved to OFF before the driver
Press a on the steering wheel pad door is opened or within 10 minutes,
to sound the horn. the wipers will restart and move to
the base of the windshield.
Windshield Wiper/Washer If the ignition is put in OFF while the
wipers are performing wipes due to
Hatchback Shown, Sedan Similar windshield washing, the wipers
continue to run until they reach the
INT: (Intermittent Wipes): Move base of the windshield.
the lever up to INT for intermittent
wipes, then turn the x INT band
n L (Windshield Washer): Pull
the windshield wiper lever toward
up for more frequent wipes or down you to spray windshield washer fluid
Sedan
for less frequent wipes. and activate the wipers. The wipers
OFF: Use to turn the wipers off. will continue until the lever is
released or the maximum wash time
8 (Mist): For a single wipe, briefly
is reached. When the windshield
move the wiper lever down. For
wiper lever is released, additional
several wipes, hold the wiper
wipes may occur depending on how
lever down.
long the windshield washer had
Hatchback Wiper Parking been activated. See Washer Fluid
The windshield wiper/washer lever on page 10-21 for information on
If the ignition is put in OFF while the
is on the right side of the steering filling the windshield washer fluid
wipers are on LO, HI, or INT, they
column. reservoir.
will immediately stop.
Move the lever to one of the
following positions:
HI: Use for fast wipes.
2014 - 2nd Edition - 8/19/13
windshield wiper is performing low

{ Warning or high speed wipes. If the rear
wiper control is off, the shift lever is
In freezing weather, do not use in R (Reverse), and the front
the washer until the windshield is windshield wiper is performing
warmed. Otherwise the washer interval wipes, then the rear wiper
fluid can form ice on the automatically performs interval
windshield, blocking your vision. wipes.
ON: Press the upper portion of the
button for continuous rear window This feature can be changed. See
Clear snow and ice from the wiper wipes. Vehicle Personalization on
blades before using them. If frozen page 5-27.
OFF: The rear wiper turns off when
to the windshield, carefully loosen or
the button is returned to the middle The windshield washer reservoir is
thaw them. Damaged wiper blades position. used for the windshield and the rear
should be replaced. See Wiper
Blade Replacement on page 10-26. INT (Intermittent Rear Wipes): window. Check the fluid level in the
Press the lower portion of the button reservoir if either washer is not
Heavy snow or ice can overload the working. See Washer Fluid on
to set a delay between wipes.
wiper motor. A circuit breaker will page 10-21.
stop the motor until it cools down. m = REAR (Rear Washer): Push
the windshield wiper lever forward Compass
Rear Window Wiper/ to spray washer fluid on the rear
window. The lever returns to its The vehicle may have a compass
Washer starting position when released. display in the Driver Information
If equipped with the rear wiper/ Center (DIC). The compass receives
Reverse Gear Wipes its heading and other information
washer, the controls are on the end
of the windshield wiper lever. If the rear wiper control is off, the from the Global Positioning
rear wiper will automatically operate System (GPS) antenna, StabiliTrak,
continuously when the shift lever is and vehicle speed information.
in R (Reverse), and the front
2014 - 2nd Edition - 8/19/13
Avoid covering the GPS antenna, Radio without Touchscreen To set the month and day format:
located on the roof, for long periods 1. Press CLOCK.
To set the time and date:
of time with objects that may
interfere with the antenna's ability to 1. Press CLOCK. 2. Select Time and Date Settings.
receive a satellite signal. The 2. Select Time and Date Settings. 3. Highlight Set Date Format.
compass system is designed to
operate for a certain number of 3. Select Set Time or Set Date. 4. Press the MENU/TUNE knob to
miles or degrees of turn before select MM/DD/YYYY (month/
4. Turn the MENU/TUNE knob to
needing a signal from the GPS day/year), or DD/MM/YYYY
adjust the highlighted value.
satellites. When the compass (day/month/year), or YYYY/MM/
display shows CAL, drive the 5. Press the MENU/TUNE knob to DD (year/month/day).
vehicle for a short distance in an select the next value.
Radio with Touchscreen
open area where it can receive a 6. To save the time or date and
GPS signal. The compass system return to the Time and Date The infotainment system controls
will automatically determine when are used to access the time and
Settings menu, press the /
the GPS signal is restored and date settings through the menu
BACK button at any time or system. See Operation on page 7-8
provide a heading again. press the MENU/TUNE knob for information about how to use the
after adjusting the minutes menu system.
Clock or year.
The infotainment system controls To set the 12/24 hour format: Setting the 12/24 Hour Format
are used to access the time and
1. Press CLOCK. 1. Press D, and then press
date settings through the menu
system. See Operation on page 7-8 settings.
2. Select Time and Date Settings.
for information about how to use the 2. Press time and date settings.
3. Highlight Set Time Format.
menu system. 3. Select 12/24 HR Format.
4. Press the MENU/TUNE knob to
select the 12 hour or 24 hour 4. Press 4.
display format.
2014 - 2nd Edition - 8/19/13
Setting the Month and Day Automatic Clock Sync

Format { Warning
1. Press D, and then press
1. Press D, and then press settings. Power is always supplied to the
settings. outlets. Do not leave electrical
2. Press time and date settings, equipment plugged in when the
2. Press time and date settings. and then automatic clock sync.
vehicle is not in use because the
3. Press S or T to set the date 3. Select On to display the real vehicle could catch fire and cause
display to DD/MM/YYYY (day/ time or Off to display the time injury or death.
month/year), MM/DD/YYYY set by the user.
(month/day/year), or YYYY/MM/ 4. Press 4.
DD (year/month/day) display
format. { Caution
Power Outlets
4. Press 4. Leaving electrical equipment
The accessory power outlets can be plugged in for an extended period
Setting the Time and Date used to plug in electrical equipment,
of time while the vehicle is off will
such as a cell phone or MP3 player.
drain the battery. Always unplug
1. Press D, and then press The vehicle has an accessory electrical equipment when not in
settings. power outlet in front of the use and do not plug in equipment
2. Press time and date settings, cupholders on the center floor that exceeds the maximum
and then set time and date. console. 20 amp rating.
3. Press y or z to adjust the Remove the cover to access and
value. replace when not in use. Certain accessory power plugs may
not be compatible with the
4. Press 4. accessory power outlet and could
2014 - 2nd Edition - 8/19/13
overload vehicle or adapter fuses. Warning Lights, Gauges can indicate when there
If a problem is experienced, see could be a problem with a vehicle
your dealer. Gauges, and function. Often gauges and warning
lights work together to indicate a
When adding electrical equipment, Indicators problem with the vehicle.
be sure to follow the proper
installation instructions included with Warning lights and gauges can When one of the warning lights
the equipment. See Add-On signal that something is wrong comes on and stays on while
Electrical Equipment on page 9-42. before it becomes serious enough driving, or when one of the gauges
to cause an expensive repair or shows there may be a problem,
replacement. Paying attention to the
{ Caution warning lights and gauges could
check the section that explains what
to do. Follow this manual's advice.
prevent injury. Waiting to do repairs can be costly
Hanging heavy equipment from
the power outlet can cause Warning lights come on when there and even dangerous.
damage not covered by the could be a problem with a vehicle
vehicle warranty. The power function. Some warning lights come
outlets are designed for on briefly when the engine is started
accessory power plugs only, such to indicate they are working.
as cell phone charge cords.
2014 - 2nd Edition - 8/19/13
Instrument Cluster
United States Manual Transmission Shown, Canada Similar

2014 - 2nd Edition - 8/19/13
Speedometer The trip odometer measures the Fuel Gauge

distance the vehicle has been
The speedometer shows the driven since the function was last
vehicle's speed in either kilometers reset.
per hour (km/h) or miles per
hour (mph). Press the reset stem in the lower
right of the tachometer to toggle
Odometer between the odometer and the trip
odometer. To reset the trip odometer
to zero, press and hold the reset
stem while the trip odometer is
being displayed. Be careful not to
reset the engine oil life monitor
accidentally.
Tachometer The fuel gauge indicates about how

The odometer shows how far the
vehicle has been driven, in either The tachometer displays the engine much fuel is left when the ignition is
kilometers or miles. speed in revolutions per turned to ON/RUN.
minute (rpm). When the tank nears empty, the low
Trip Odometer fuel warning light will come on.
There is still a little fuel left, but the
vehicle's fuel tank should be filled
soon. See Low Fuel Warning Light
on page 5-20 for more information.
An arrow on the fuel gauge
indicates on which side of the
vehicle the fuel door is located.
2014 - 2nd Edition - 8/19/13
Here are four things that some

owners ask about. None of these
show a problem with the fuel gauge:
. At the service station, the gas
pump shuts off before the gauge
reads full.
When the vehicle is started, this When the vehicle is started, this
. It takes a little more or less fuel
light flashes and a chime may come light flashes and a chime may come
to fill up than the gauge
on to remind the driver to fasten on to remind passengers to fasten
indicated. For example, the
their safety belt. Then the light stays their safety belt. Then the light stays
gauge may have indicated the
on solid until the belt is buckled. on solid until the belt is buckled.
tank was half full, but it actually
This cycle may continue several This cycle continues several times if
took a little more or less than
times if the driver remains or the passenger remains or becomes
half the tank's capacity to fill
becomes unbuckled while the unbuckled while the vehicle is
the tank.
vehicle is moving. moving.
. The indicator moves a little when
If the driver safety belt is buckled, If the passenger safety belt is
turning a corner or speeding up.
neither the light nor the chime buckled, neither the chime nor the
. The gauge goes back to empty comes on. light comes on.
when the ignition is turned off.
Passenger Safety Belt The front passenger safety belt
Reminder Light warning light and chime may turn on
Safety Belt Reminders if an object is put on the seat such
There is a passenger safety belt as a briefcase, handbag, grocery
Driver Safety Belt Reminder reminder light near the passenger bag, laptop, or other electronic
Light airbag status indicator. See device. To turn off the warning light
There is a driver safety belt Passenger Sensing System on and/or chime, remove the object
reminder light on the instrument page 3-24. from the seat or buckle the
cluster. safety belt.
2014 - 2nd Edition - 8/19/13
Airbag Readiness Light

{ Warning
This light shows if there is an
electrical problem with the airbag If the airbag readiness light stays
system. The system check includes on after the vehicle is started or
the airbag sensor(s), passenger comes on while driving, it means
sensing system, the pretensioners the airbag system might not be
(if equipped), the airbag modules, working properly. The airbags in United States
the wiring, and the crash sensing the vehicle might not inflate in a
and diagnostic module. For more crash, or they could even inflate
information on the airbag system, without a crash. To help avoid
see Airbag System on page 3-17. injury, have the vehicle serviced
right away.
Canada
Passenger Airbag Status
When the vehicle is started, the
Indicator passenger airbag status indicator
The vehicle has a passenger will light ON and OFF, or the symbol
sensing system. See Passenger for on and off, for several seconds
The airbag readiness light comes on
Sensing System on page 3-24 for as a system check. Then, after
for several seconds when the
important safety information. The several seconds, the status
vehicle is started. If the light does
instrument panel has a passenger indicator will light either ON or OFF,
not come on then, have it fixed
airbag status indicator. or the on or off symbol to let you
immediately.
know the status of the front
outboard passenger frontal airbag
and knee airbag (if equipped).
2014 - 2nd Edition - 8/19/13
If the word ON or the on symbol is dealer. Driving while this light is on

lit on the passenger airbag status Warning (Continued) could drain the battery. If a short
indicator, it means that the front distance must be driven with the
outboard passenger frontal airbag avoid injury to yourself or others, light on, turn off all accessories,
and knee airbag (if equipped) are have the vehicle serviced right such as the radio and air
allowed to inflate. away. See Airbag Readiness conditioner, to help reduce the drain
Light on page 5-11 for more on the battery.
If the word OFF or the off symbol is information, including important
lit on the passenger airbag status safety information.
indicator, it means that the Malfunction
passenger sensing system has Indicator Lamp
turned off the front outboard Charging System Light A computer system called OBD II
passenger frontal airbag and knee
(On-Board Diagnostics-Second
airbag (if equipped).
Generation) monitors the operation
If, after several seconds, both status of the vehicle to ensure emissions
indicator lights remain on, or if there are at acceptable levels, helping to
are no lights at all, there may be a maintain a clean environment. The
problem with the lights or the malfunction indicator lamp comes
passenger sensing system. See on when the vehicle is placed in
your dealer for service. This light will come on briefly when ON/RUN, as a check to show it is
the ignition is turned on, and the working. If it does not, have the
{ Warning engine is not running, as a check to vehicle serviced by your dealer. See
Ignition Positions on page 9-14 for
show it is working.
If the airbag readiness light ever more information.
It should go out when the engine is
comes on and stays on, it means
started. If it stays on, or comes on
that something may be wrong while driving, there may be a
with the airbag system. To help problem with the electrical charging
(Continued) system. Have it checked by your
2014 - 2nd Edition - 8/19/13
Caution (Continued) Caution (Continued)

the vehicle fuel economy might to pass a required Emission
not be as good, and the engine Inspection/Maintenance test. See
might not run as smoothly. This Accessories and Modifications on
could lead to costly repairs that page 10-3.
If the malfunction indicator lamp
might not be covered by the
comes on while the engine is
vehicle warranty. This light comes on during a
running, this indicates that the
OBD II system has detected a malfunction in one of two ways:
problem and diagnosis and service Light Flashing: A misfire condition
might be required. { Caution has been detected. A misfire
Malfunctions often are indicated by increases vehicle emissions and
the system before any problem is Modifications made to the engine, could damage the emission control
apparent. Being aware of the light transmission, exhaust, intake, system on the vehicle. Diagnosis
can prevent more serious damage or fuel system of the vehicle or and service might be required.
to the vehicle. This system also the replacement of the original
To prevent more serious damage to
assists the service technician in tires with other than those of the
the vehicle:
correctly diagnosing any same Tire Performance Criteria
. Reduce vehicle speed.
malfunction. (TPC) can affect the vehicle's
emission controls and can cause . Avoid hard accelerations.
{ Caution this light to come on. . Avoid steep uphill grades.
Modifications to these systems
If the vehicle is continually driven could lead to costly repairs not If the light continues to flash, find a
with this light on, the emission covered by the vehicle warranty. safe place to stop and park the
controls might not work as well, This could also result in a failure vehicle. Turn the vehicle off, wait at
least 10 seconds, and restart the
(Continued) (Continued)
engine. If the light is still flashing,
2014 - 2nd Edition - 8/19/13
follow the previous steps and see stalling when the vehicle is emission system test equipment will
your dealer for service as soon as changed into gear, misfiring, likely connect to the vehicle's Data
possible. hesitation on acceleration, Link Connector (DLC).
Light On Steady: An emission or stumbling on acceleration.
control system malfunction has These conditions might go away
been detected on the vehicle. once the engine is warmed up.
Diagnosis and service might be If one or more of these conditions
required. occurs, change the fuel brand used.
The following may correct an It may require at least one full tank
emission control system of the proper fuel to turn the light off.
malfunction: See Recommended Fuel on The DLC is under the instrument
page 9-38. panel to the left of the steering
. Check that the fuel cap is fully wheel. See your dealer if assistance
installed. See Filling the Tank on If none of the above have made the is needed.
page 9-40. The diagnostic light turn off, your dealer can check
system can determine if the fuel the vehicle. The dealer has the The vehicle may not pass
cap has been left off or proper test equipment and inspection if:
improperly installed. A loose or diagnostic tools to fix any . The malfunction indicator lamp is
missing fuel cap allows fuel to mechanical or electrical problems on with the engine running, or if
evaporate into the atmosphere. that might have developed. the light does not come on when
A few driving trips with the cap the ignition is turned to ON/RUN
properly installed should turn the Emissions Inspection and
while the engine is off. See your
light off. Maintenance Programs dealer for assistance in verifying
. Check that good quality fuel is Depending on where you live, your proper operation of the
used. Poor fuel quality causes vehicle may be required to malfunction indicator lamp.
the engine not to run as participate in an emission control . The OBD II (On-Board
efficiently as designed and may system inspection and maintenance Diagnostics) system determines
cause stalling after start-up, program. For the inspection, the that critical emission control
2014 - 2nd Edition - 8/19/13
systems have not been For vehicles with this light, it comes
completely diagnosed. The on if a condition exists that may { Warning
vehicle would be considered not require the vehicle to be taken in for
ready for inspection. This can service. The brake system might not be
happen if the 12-volt battery has working properly if the brake
If the light comes on, take the system warning light is on.
recently been replaced or run vehicle to your dealer for service as
down. The diagnostic system is Driving with the brake system
soon as possible. warning light on can lead to a
designed to evaluate critical
emission control systems during crash. If the light is still on after
normal driving. This can take Brake System Warning the vehicle has been pulled off
several days of routine driving. Light the road and carefully stopped,
If this has been done and the The vehicle brake system consists have the vehicle towed for
vehicle still does not pass the of two hydraulic circuits. If one service.
inspection for lack of OBD II circuit is not working, the remaining
system readiness, your dealer circuit can still work to stop the
can prepare the vehicle for vehicle. For normal braking
inspection. performance, both circuits need to
be working
Service Vehicle Soon
If the warning light comes on, there
Light is a brake problem. Have the brake
system inspected right away. Metric English
This light should come on briefly

when the ignition is turned to ON.
If it does not come on then, have it
fixed so it will be ready to warn if
there is a problem.
2014 - 2nd Edition - 8/19/13
When the ignition is on, the brake This light comes on briefly when the Up-Shift Light
system warning light will also come engine is started.
on when the parking brake is set. If the light stays on, turn the ignition
The light will stay on if the parking to LOCK/OFF or if the light comes
brake does not fully release. If it on, stop as soon as possible and
stays on after the parking brake is turn the ignition off. Then start the
fully released, it means there is a engine again to reset the system.
brake problem. If the light still stays on, or comes
If the light comes on while driving, on again while driving, the vehicle For manual transmission vehicles,
carefully pull off the road and stop. needs service. See your dealer. there is an up-shift light that comes
The pedal may be harder to push or If the regular brake system warning on in the lower DIC area. It shows
may go closer to the floor. It may light is not on, the brakes will still when to shift to the next higher gear
take longer to stop. If the light is still work, but the antilock brakes will not for best fuel economy.
on, have the vehicle towed for work. If the regular brake system
service. See Towing the Vehicle on warning light is also on, the antilock See Manual Transmission on
page 10-77. brakes will not work and there is a page 9-24.
problem with the regular brakes.
Antilock Brake System See Brake System Warning Light on Power Steering Warning
(ABS) Warning Light page 5-15. Light
The ABS warning light will come on
briefly when the ignition is turned to
ON/RUN. This is normal. If the light
does not come on then, have it fixed
so it will be ready to warn if there is
a problem.
2014 - 2nd Edition - 8/19/13
This light comes on briefly when the This light comes on green when the
ignition is turned to ON/RUN as a system is on and ready to operate.
check to show it is working. When the system determines that
If it does not come on have the the vehicle is leaving its lane
vehicle serviced by your dealer. without using the turn signal, this
light will change to amber and flash.
If this light stays on, or comes on
while driving, the system may not be See Lane Departure Warning (LDW) The forward collision alert comes on
working. If this happens, see your on page 9-36. when following a vehicle much too
dealer for service. closely. The light flashes when a
Forward Collision Alert vehicle is being rapidly approached.
Lane Departure Warning (FCA) Warning Light See Forward Collision Alert (FCA)
(LDW) Light These lights are on the center of the System on page 9-32.
instrument panel.
Traction Off Light
This light comes on briefly while

starting the vehicle. If it does not, The vehicle ahead light comes on
have the vehicle serviced by your when a vehicle is detected ahead This light comes on briefly while
dealer. If the system is working and a possible collision can occur. starting the engine. If it does not,
normally, the light then turns off. have the vehicle serviced by your
dealer. If the system is working
normally, the indicator light then
turns off.
2014 - 2nd Edition - 8/19/13
The traction off light comes on when This light comes on when the If the light does not come on, have
the Traction Control System (TCS) StabiliTrak system is turned off. the vehicle serviced by your dealer.
has been turned off by pressing and If StabiliTrak is off, the Traction If the system is working normally,
releasing the TCS/StabiliTrak Control System (TCS) is also off. the indicator light turns off.
button. If the StabiliTrak and TCS are off, If the light is on and not flashing, the
This light and the StabiliTrak OFF the system does not assist in TCS, and potentially the StabiliTrak
light come on when StabiliTrak is controlling the vehicle. Turn on the system have been disabled.
turned off. TCS and the StabiliTrak systems If the indicator/warning light is on
If the TCS is off, wheel spin is not and the warning light turns off. and flashing, the TCS and/or the
limited. Adjust driving accordingly. See Traction Control/Electronic StabiliTrak system is actively
See Traction Control/Electronic Stability Control on page 9-28. working.
Stability Control on page 9-28. See Traction Control/Electronic
Traction Control System Stability Control on page 9-28.
StabiliTrak® OFF Light (TCS)/StabiliTrak® Light
Engine Coolant
Temperature Warning
Light
This light comes on briefly while The StabiliTrak or Traction Control

starting the engine. If it does not, System (TCS) indicator/warning
have the vehicle serviced by your light comes on briefly when the
dealer. engine is started.
This light comes on briefly while
starting the vehicle.
2014 - 2nd Edition - 8/19/13
If it does not, have the vehicle Tire Pressure Light When the Light Flashes First and
serviced by the dealer. If the system Then Is On Steady
is working normally the indicator If the light flashes for about a minute
light goes off. and then stays on, there may be a
problem with the TPMS. If the
{ Caution problem is not corrected, the light
will come on at every ignition cycle.
The engine coolant temperature See Tire Pressure Monitor
warning light indicates that the Operation on page 10-50.
For vehicles with the Tire Pressure
vehicle has overheated. Driving
Monitor System (TPMS), this light
with this light on can damage the comes on briefly when the engine is Engine Oil Pressure Light
engine and it may not be covered started. It provides information
by the vehicle warranty. See
Engine Overheating on
about tire pressures and the TPMS. { Caution
page 10-20. When the Light Is On Steady
Lack of proper engine oil
This indicates that one or more of maintenance can damage the
The engine coolant temperature the tires are significantly engine. Driving with the engine
warning light comes on when the underinflated. oil low can also damage the
engine has overheated. Stop as soon as possible, and engine. The repairs would not be
If this happens, pull over and turn inflate the tires to the pressure value covered by the vehicle warranty.
off the engine as soon as possible. shown on the Tire and Loading Check the oil level as soon as
See Engine Overheating on Information label. See Tire Pressure possible. Add oil if required, but if
page 10-20. on page 10-47. the oil level is within the operating
range and the oil pressure is still
low, have the vehicle serviced.
Always follow the maintenance
schedule for changing engine oil.
2014 - 2nd Edition - 8/19/13
This light comes on for a few vehicle serviced by your dealer.

seconds when the ignition is turned If the system is working normally,
on as a check to indicate it is the indicator light turns off.
working. If it does not come on, If the light stays on and the engine
have it fixed. does not start, there could be a
This light comes on when the problem with the immobilizer
This light should come on briefly as vehicle is low on fuel. system. See Immobilizer Operation
the engine is started. If it does not on page 2-14.
The low fuel warning light comes on
come on, have the vehicle serviced
when there are approximately 6.0 L
by your dealer. Reduced Engine Power
(1.7 gal) of fuel remaining in
If the light comes on and stays on, it the tank. Light
means that oil is not flowing through
To turn the light off, add fuel to the
the engine properly. The vehicle
fuel tank. See Filling the Tank on
could be low on oil and might have
page 9-40.
some other system problem. See
your dealer.
Immobilizer Light
Low Fuel Warning Light
The reduced engine power light
should come on briefly as the
engine is started. If it does not come
on, have the vehicle serviced by
your dealer.
The immobilizer light should come This light, along with the malfunction
on briefly as the engine is started. indicator lamp, displays when a
If it does not come on, have the noticeable reduction in the vehicle's
performance occurs.
2014 - 2nd Edition - 8/19/13
The vehicle can be driven at a Daytime Running Lamps The light goes out when the fog
reduced speed when the reduced lamps are turned off. See Fog
engine power light is on but
(DRL) Indicator Light Lamps on page 6-4 for more
acceleration and speed might be information.
reduced. If this light stays on, see
your dealer as soon as possible for Lamps On Reminder
diagnosis and repair.
High-Beam On Light
This light turns on whenever the
Daytime Running Lamps are in use.
See Daytime Running Lamps (DRL)
on page 6-2. This light comes on when the
exterior lamps are in use. See
Front Fog Lamp Light Exterior Lamp Controls on page 6-1.
This light comes on when the
high-beam headlamps are in use. Cruise Control Light
See Headlamp High/Low-Beam
Changer on page 6-2.
For vehicles with fog lamps, this

light comes on when the fog lamps
are on.
2014 - 2nd Edition - 8/19/13
For vehicles with cruise control, the Information Displays DIC Buttons
cruise control light is white when the
cruise control is on and ready, and
turns green when the cruise control Driver Information
is set and active. Center (DIC)
The light turns off when the cruise The DIC displays information about
control is turned off. See Cruise your vehicle. It also displays
Control on page 9-30. warning messages if a system
problem is detected. See Vehicle 1. SET/CLR: Press to set or clear
Door Ajar Light Messages on page 5-24. All the menu item displayed. This is
messages appear in the DIC display not used to reset the trip
in the instrument cluster. odometer. To reset the trip
odometer, use the reset button
DIC Operation and Displays on the tachometer in the
The DIC has different displays instrument cluster.
which can be accessed by using the 2. w x (Band): Turn the band to
DIC buttons on the turn signal lever
scroll through the menu items.
This light comes on when a door is on the left side of the steering
wheel. The DIC displays trip, fuel, 3. MENU: Press to display the DIC
open or not securely latched. Before
and warning messages if a system menus. This button is also used
driving, check that all doors are
problem is detected. See Trip to return to or exit the last
properly closed.
Computer on page 5-25 and Vehicle screen displayed on the DIC.
Messages on page 5-24.
2014 - 2nd Edition - 8/19/13
DIC Menu Items change the displays on the cluster Remaining Oil Life
and DIC to the type of This menu is not available while the
Press MENU to view the DIC
measurements you select. vehicle is moving. This display
menus. Some items display in the
upper display area, some in the Language shows an estimate of the oil's
lower display area, and others use
This menu is not available while the remaining useful life. If 99 : % is
both the upper and lower display displayed, that means 99% of the
vehicle is moving. Press SET/CLR
areas. Use w x to scroll through while the language display is active current oil life remains.
the menu items. Not all items are and move w x to change the When the remaining oil life is low,
available on every vehicle. The the Code 82 message will appear
language of the displays when
following is a list of all possible on the display. The oil should be
LANG SET is displayed. You will
menu items: changed as soon as possible. See
have to select 1 or 2 for the
. Units language display. 1 is Alphabet and Engine Oil on page 10-9. In addition
2 is Arabic Numeral. Press SET/ to the engine oil life system
. Language
CLR to confirm the setting. monitoring the oil life, additional
. Tire Learn maintenance is recommended in the
Tire Learn Maintenance Schedule. See
. Remaining Oil Life
This menu is not available while the Maintenance Schedule on
Units vehicle is moving. This display page 11-2.
This menu is not available while the allows for matching of the TPMS Remember, the oil life display must
vehicle is moving. Press SET/CLR sensors. See Tire Pressure Monitor be reset after each oil change. It will
while the unit display is active and System on page 10-49 and Tire not reset itself. Also, be careful not
Pressure Monitor Operation on
move w x to change units when to reset the oil life display
page 10-50. accidentally at any time other than
UNIT SET is displayed. Press SET/
CLR to confirm the setting. You will when the oil has just been changed.
have to select 1, 2, or 3 for the unit
display. 1 is Imperial units, 2 is US
units, and 3 is metric units. This will
2014 - 2nd Edition - 8/19/13
It cannot be reset accurately until Vehicle Messages 52: Change Timing Belt
the next oil change. To reset the 77: Service Front Camera System
engine oil life system, press the DIC messages display when the
SET/CLR button while the oil life status of the vehicle has changed 84: Engine Power Is Reduced
display is active. See Engine Oil and action may be needed to 89: Service Vehicle Soon
Life System on page 10-12. correct the condition. Multiple
messages appear one after another.
Engine Oil Messages
Press any of the DIC buttons on the
turn signal lever to acknowledge : % CHANGE
and clear them from the display. This message displays when the
More urgent messages cannot be engine oil needs to be changed.
cleared from the DIC display. All When changing the engine oil, be
messages should be taken sure to reset the Oil Life System.
seriously. Clearing messages will See Engine Oil Life System on
not correct the problem. page 10-12, Engine Oil on
Vehicle messages appear as code page 10-9, and Maintenance
numbers. Schedule on page 11-2.
25: Left Front Turn Signal Failure
Tire Messages
26: Left Rear Turn Signal Failure
27: Right Front Turn Signal Failure LF XX, RF XX, LR XX,
or RR XX
28: Right Rear Turn Signal Failure
A message displays when the tire
49: Lane Departure Warning pressure is low. It shows the
Unavailable location of the low tire and the
approximate pressure of the low tire.
2014 - 2nd Edition - 8/19/13
If a tire pressure message appears, Trip Computer 3. MENU: Press to display the DIC
stop as soon as you can. Inflate the menus. This button is also used
tires by adding air until the tire The trip computer is located in the to return to or exit the last
pressure is equal to the values Driver Information Center (DIC). screen displayed on the DIC.
shown on the Tire and Loading It provides the driver with driving To operate the trip computer, turn
Information label. See Tires on information such as average speed, band on the turn signal lever.
page 10-40, Vehicle Load Limits on fuel range, average fuel economy,
page 9-9, and Tire Pressure on The following is a list of the trip
and a timer.
page 10-47. computer items”
. Average Speed
. Fuel Range
. Average Fuel Economy
. Timer
Some items can be reset by
1. SET/CLR: Press to set or clear pressing the SET/CLR button.
the menu item displayed. This is
not used to reset the trip
odometer. To reset the trip
odometer, use the reset button
on the tachometer in the
instrument cluster.
2. w x (Band): Turn the band to
scroll through the menu items.
2014 - 2nd Edition - 8/19/13
Average Speed Fuel Range Average Fuel Economy
Metric Metric Shown, English Similar Metric

This displays the approximate
distance the vehicle can be driven
without refueling. The fuel range
estimate is based on an average of
the vehicle's fuel economy over
recent driving history and the
amount of fuel remaining in the
fuel tank.
English English
This display shows the average This display shows the approximate
speed. To reset the average speed average liters per 100 kilometers
to zero, press and hold the SET/ (L/100 km) or miles per gallon
CLR button while the average (mpg). This number is calculated
speed is displayed. based on the number of L/100 km
(mpg) recorded since the last time
this menu item was reset. To reset
2014 - 2nd Edition - 8/19/13
the average fuel economy, press Vehicle 2. Turn the MENU/TUNE knob to
and hold the SET/CLR button while highlight Vehicle Settings.
the average fuel economy is Personalization 3. Press MENU/TUNE to select the
displayed. Vehicle Settings menu.
Personalization Menu (Radio
Timer without Touchscreen) The following list of menu items may
Use the audio system controls to be available:
access the personalization menus . Comfort and Convenience
for customizing vehicle features. . Climate and Air Quality
The following are all possible . Language
personalization features. Depending
on the vehicle, some may not be . Lighting
available. . Power Door Locks
CONFIG (Configuration): Press to . Remote Lock, Unlock, Start
This display can be used as a timer. access the Configuration
Settings menu.
. Return to Factory Settings
To start/stop the timer, press SET/
CLR while the timer is displayed. MENU/TUNE: Turn to scroll Comfort and Convenience
The display will show the amount of through the menus. Press to enter Select the Comfort and
time that has passed since the timer the menus and select the menu Convenience menu and the
was last reset, not including time the items. following may display:
ignition is off. The timer will record
up to 99:59 hours, after which the
/ BACK: Press to exit or move . Chime Volume
backward in a menu.
display will return to zero. To reset . Auto Wipe in Reverse Gear
the timer to zero, press and hold Entering the Personalization
SET/CLR. Menus Chime Volume
1. Press CONFIG to access the This allows selection of the chime
Configuration Settings menu. volume level.
2014 - 2nd Edition - 8/19/13
Select Normal or High. Exit Lighting Select On or Off.

Auto Wipe in Reverse Gear Select Off, 30 Seconds, 1 Minute, Delayed Door Lock
or 2 Minutes.
When on and the vehicle on, this When on, this feature will delay the
feature will turn the rear wipers on Power Door Locks locking of the doors until
when the vehicle is placed in five seconds after the last door is
Select Power Door Locks and the
R (Reverse) when the front wipers closed. Three chimes will signal that
following may display:
are on. delayed locking is in use. Pressing
. Auto Door Unlock will override the delayed locking
Select On or Off.
. Unlock Door Anti Lock Out feature and immediately lock all of
Language the doors.
. Delayed Door Lock
Select Language, then select from Select On or Off.
the available language(s). Auto Door Unlock
Remote Lock, Unlock, Start
Exterior Lighting This allows selection of which of the
doors will automatically unlock when Select Remote Lock, Unlock, Start
Select the Lighting menu and the the vehicle is shifted into P (Park) or and the following may display:
following may display: the key is removed. . Remote Unlock Feedback
. Exterior Vehicle Locator Lights Select All Doors, Driver Door, or Off. . Remote Lock Feedback
. Exit Lighting Unlock Door Anti Lock Out . Remote Door Unlock
Exterior Vehicle Locator Lights When on, this feature will keep the Remote Unlock Feedback
This allows selection of whether the driver door from locking when the
door is open. If off is selected, the When on, the exterior lamps will
exterior lamps will turn on when flash when unlocking the vehicle
unlocking the vehicle. Unlock Door Anti Lock Out menu
will be available and the door will with the RKE transmitter.
Select On or Off. lock as programmed through Select On or Off.
this menu.
2014 - 2nd Edition - 8/19/13
Remote Lock Feedback Personalization Menu (Radio The following list of menu items may
This allows selection of what type of with Touchscreen) be available:
feedback is given when locking the Settings can be made with the . Time & Date Settings
vehicle with the RKE transmitter. ignition ON and the vehicle not . Radio Settings
Select Lights and Horn, Lights Only, moving. . Connection Settings
Horn Only, or Off. Use the audio system controls to
access the personalization menus
. Vehicle Settings
Remote Door Unlock
for customizing vehicle features. . Language
This allows selection of which doors
The following are all possible . Text Scroll
will unlock when pressing K on the personalization features. Depending
RKE transmitter. . Touch Beep Sound
on the vehicle, some may not be
Select All Doors or Driver Door available. . Max Startup Volume
Only. When set to Driver Door Only, D (Home): Press to access the . System Version
the driver door will unlock the first Home Page Menu. . DivX® VOD
time K is pressed and all doors will
Q or R : Press to scroll through the Press the menu item to select it.
unlock when K is pressed a second menus or setup items. Each of the menus is detailed in the
time. When set to All Doors, all of
the doors will unlock at the first 4: Press to exit, or return to the following information.
previous screen or menu. Settings menus and functions may
press of K.
To access the menu: vary depending on vehicle option.
Return to Factory Settings
1. Press D. Time & Date Settings
Select Return to Factory Settings to
return all of the vehicle 2. Press Settings. Select to change the settings:
personalization to the default . Set Time Format: Select 12h
settings. or 24h.
Select Yes or No.
2014 - 2nd Edition - 8/19/13
. Set Date Format: Press S or T Select Off, Low, Medium, or High. Connection Settings
to select the date display.
Radio Favorites Select and the following may
. Set Time & Date: Select, then display:
This feature sets the number of
press y or z to adjust the favorite pages displayed. . Bluetooth Settings
value.
Press S or T to select the desired . Change Ringtone
. Automatic Clock Sync: Select to
number. . Ringtone Volume
display the real or user time on
the radio. Select On or Off. Radio Tune Bar Bluetooth Settings
Radio Settings Select to display the radio station Select this feature to:
tune bar.
Select and the following may . Connect, disconnect, or delete a
display: Select On or Off. device
. Auto Volume Radio Text . Change or set a Personal
Identification Number (PIN)
. Radio Favorites Select to display the radio broadcast
. information. . Turn on or off the Bluetooth
Radio Tune Bar
connection
Select On or Off.
. Radio Text . Check the device information
. XM Categories XM Categories
Change Ringtone
. Radio Factory Settings Select to set the selection of XM
categories. Select to set different ringtones.
Auto Volume
Radio Factory Settings Ringtone Volume
This feature adjusts the radio
volume to compensate for road and Select to restore the radio to the Select to set the ringtone volume.
wind noise as the vehicle speeds up factory settings.
Press S or T.
or slows down, so that the volume
level is consistent.
2014 - 2nd Edition - 8/19/13
Vehicle Settings Chime Volume Exit Lighting

Select and the following may Select to set the chime volume Select to set how long the exterior
display: level. lamps stay on when leaving the
Select Normal or High. vehicle and it is dark outside.
. Climate & Air Quality
Select Off, 30 Sec, 60 Sec,
. Comfort & Convenience Auto Wipe in Reverse Gear or 120 Sec.
. Collision/Detection Select to set this feature on or off.
When on, and the front wipers are Vehicle Locator Lights
. Lighting
on, the rear window wiper will turn This allows selection of how long
. Power Door Locks on automatically when the vehicle is the exterior lamps stay on when
. Lock, Unlock Settings shifted into R (Reverse). leaving the vehicle and it is dark
Select On or Off. outside.
. Rear Camera Option
Select On or Off.
. Vehicle Factory Settings Collision/Detection
Select and Park Assist may display.
Power Door Locks
Climate & Air Quality
Select On or Off. Select and the following may
Select and Remote Start Heated display:
Seats may display. Lighting . Auto Door Unlock
Select On or Off. Select and the following may . Unlocked Door Anti Lock Out
Comfort and Convenience display:
. Delayed Door Lock
Select the and the following may
. Exit Lighting
display: Auto Door Unlock
. Vehicle Locator Lights
. Chime Volume Select to set which of the doors will
automatically unlock when the
. Auto Wipe in Reverse Gear vehicle is shifted into P (Park).
Select All Doors, Driver Door, or Off.
2014 - 2nd Edition - 8/19/13
Unlocked Door Anti Lock Out

. Remote Lock Light & Horn second time. When set to All Doors,
Feedback all of the doors will unlock at the first
When on, this feature will keep the
driver door from locking when the
. Remote Door Unlock press of K.
door is open. If Off is selected, the Remote Unlock Light Feedback
Delayed Door Lock menu will be
Rear Camera Option
available and the door will lock as When on, the exterior lamps will Select and the following may
programmed through this menu. flash when unlocking the vehicle display:
with the RKE transmitter.
Select On or Off. . Guidelines
Select Flash Lights or Lights Off.
Delayed Door Lock Guidelines
Remote Lock Light & Horn
When on, this feature will delay the Feedback The RVC system has a guideline
locking of the doors until overlay that can help the driver align
five seconds after the last door is Select to set what type of feedback the vehicle when backing into a
closed. Three chimes will signal that is given when pressing Q on the parking spot. See Rear Vision
delayed locking is in use. Pressing RKE transmitter. Camera (RVC) on page 9-34.
either Q or K on the RKE Select Lights Only, Lights & Horn, Select On or Off.
transmitter twice will override the Horn Only, or Off.
delayed locking feature and Vehicle Factory Settings
immediately lock all of the doors. Remote Door Unlock
Select to return all of the vehicle
Select On or Off. Select to set which doors will unlock personalization to the default
when pressing K on the RKE settings.
Lock, Unlock Settings transmitter. Select Yes or No.
Select and the following may Select All Doors or Driver Door.
display: Language
When set to Driver Door Only, the
. Remote Unlock Light Feedback driver door will unlock the first time Select Language, then select from
K is pressed and all doors will the available language(s).
unlock when the button is pressed a
2014 - 2nd Edition - 8/19/13
Text Scroll DivX VOD

When on, if there is long text Press DivX VOD.
displayed on the audio screen, the . DIVX VIDEO: DivX is a digital
text is scrolled. When off, the text is video format created by DivX,
scrolled once and displayed in LLC, a subsidiary of Rovi
truncated form. Corporation. This is an official
Select On or Off. DivX Certified® device that plays
DivX video. See divx.com for
Touch Beep Volume more information and software
When on, a beep will be heard tools on how to convert files into
when pressing the screen. When DivX videos.
off, the beep is canceled. . DIVX VIDEO-ON DEMAND: This
Select On or Off. DivX Certified device must be
registered in order to play
Max Startup Volume purchased DivX
This allows the startup volume of Video-on-Demand (VOD)
the infotainment system to be set. movies. To obtain a registration
code, locate the DivX VOD
Press S or T to select the desired section in the device setup
volume between 9-21. menu. See vod.divx.com for
more information on how to
System Version complete the registration.
Press to view the version of the
infotainment system.
2014 - 2nd Edition - 8/19/13
2 NOTES
2014 - 2nd Edition - 8/19/13
Lighting 6-1
. Taillamps
Lighting Exterior Lighting . License Plate Lamps
Exterior Lamp Controls . Instrument Panel Lights
Exterior Lighting . Sidemarker Lamps
Exterior Lamp Controls . . . . . . . . 6-1
Headlamp High/Low-Beam ; (Parking Lamps): Turns on the
Changer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2 parking lamps including all lamps
Flash-to-Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2 except the headlamps.
Daytime Running 5 (Headlamps): Turns the
Lamps (DRL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2 headlamps on together with the
Automatic Headlamp parking lamps and instrument panel
System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3
lights. A warning chime sounds if
Hazard Warning Flashers . . . . . 6-3
the driver door is opened when the
Turn and Lane-Change
The exterior lamp control is on the ignition switch is off and the
Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4
instrument panel to the outboard headlamps are on.
Fog Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4
side of the steering column. # (Front Fog Lamps): If equipped
Interior Lighting There are four positions: with fog lamps, press to turn the
Instrument Panel Illumination lamps on or off.
Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5 O (Off): Briefly turn to this position
Courtesy Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5 to turn the automatic light control off If equipped with fog lamps, press to
Dome Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5 or on again. turn the lamps on or off.
Reading Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6 AUTO (Automatic): Turns the See Fog Lamps on page 6-4.
Lighting Features headlamps on automatically at
normal brightness, together with the When the lights are on, ; will be
Battery Load Management . . . . 6-6 lit. See Lamps On Reminder on
following:
Battery Power Protection . . . . . . 6-7 page 5-21.
. Parking Lamps
2014 - 2nd Edition - 8/19/13
6-2 Lighting
Headlamp High/ Flash-to-Pass The DRL system makes the

low-beam headlamps come on at a
Low-Beam Changer To flash the high beams, pull the reduced brightness when the
turn signal lever all the way toward following conditions are met:
you. Then release it.
. The ignition is in the ON/
Daytime Running RUN mode.
Lamps (DRL) . The exterior lamp control is
in AUTO.
DRL can make it easier for others to
see the front of your vehicle during
. The engine is running.
3 (Headlamp High/Low-Beam the day. Fully functional DRL are When the DRL are on, only the
Changer): Push the turn signal required on all vehicles first sold in low-beam headlamps, at a reduced
lever away from you to turn the high Canada. level of brightness, will be on. The
beams on. taillamps, sidemarker, instrument
panel, and other lamps will not
Push the lever again or pull the be on.
lever toward you to return to low
beams. The headlamps automatically
change from DRL to the regular
headlamps depending on the
darkness of the surroundings. The
This indicator light turns on in the other lamps that come on with the
instrument cluster when the DRL headlamps will also come on.
are on.
When it is bright enough outside,
A light sensor on top of the the headlamps go off and the DRL
This indicator light turns on in the instrument panel makes the DRL come on.
instrument cluster when the work, so be sure it is not covered.
high-beam headlamps are on.
2014 - 2nd Edition - 8/19/13
Lighting 6-3
To turn the DRL lamps off or on The vehicle has a light sensor on Hazard Warning Flashers
again, turn the exterior lamp control top of the instrument panel. Make
to O and then release. For vehicles sure it is not covered, or the
first sold in Canada, the DRL lamps headlamps will be on when they are
cannot be turned off. not needed.
The system may also turn on the
Automatic Headlamp headlamps when driving through a
System parking garage or tunnel.
When it is dark enough outside and Lights On with Wipers

the exterior lamp control is in the If the windshield wipers are
automatic position, the headlamps activated in daylight with the engine
come on automatically. See Exterior on, and the exterior lamp control is
Lamp Controls on page 6-1. in AUTO, the headlamps, parking
lamps, and other exterior lamps
come on. The transition time for the | (Hazard Warning Flasher):
lamps coming on varies based on Press and momentarily hold this
wiper speed. When the wipers are button to make the front and rear
not operating, these lamps turn off. turn signal lamps flash on and off.
Move the exterior lamp control to P This warns others that you are
or ; to disable this feature. having trouble. Press and
momentarily hold again to turn the
flashers off.
2014 - 2nd Edition - 8/19/13
6-4 Lighting
Turn and Lane-Change If after signaling a turn or lane Fog Lamps

change the arrow flashes rapidly or
Signals does not come on, a signal bulb
may be burned out. Replace any
burned out bulbs. If a bulb is not
burned out, check the fuse. See
Fuses and Circuit Breakers on
page 10-33 or Bulb Replacement on
page 10-28.
Turn Signal On Chime
If the turn signal is left on for more
For vehicles with front fog lamps,
than 1.2 km (0.75 mi), a chime will
Move the lever all the way up or the button is on the outboard side of
sound at each flash of the turn
down to signal a turn. the instrument panel.
signal. To turn the chime off, move
An arrow on the instrument cluster the turn signal lever to the neutral The ignition must be on to turn on
will flash in the direction of the turn position. the fog lamps.
or lane change. # (Fog Lamps): Press to turn the
Raise or lower the lever until the fog lamps on or off. An indicator
arrow starts to flash to signal a lane light on the instrument cluster
change. Hold it there until the lane comes on when the fog lamps
change is completed. If the lever is are on.
briefly pressed and released, the The fog lamps come on together
turn signal flashes three times. with the parking lamps.
The lever returns to its neutral
position when it is released.
2014 - 2nd Edition - 8/19/13
Lighting 6-5
If the high-beam headlamps are Interior Lighting Courtesy Lamps

turned on, the fog lamps will turn off.
If the high-beam headlamps are The courtesy lamps come on
turned off, the fog lamps will turn Instrument Panel automatically when any door is
back on again. Illumination Control opened and the dome lamp is in the
door position.
Some localities have laws that
require the headlamps to be on Dome Lamps
along with the fog lamps.
This feature controls the brightness

of the instrument panel controls and
infotainment display screen. The
thumbwheel is to the left of the
steering column on the instrument
panel.
D (Instrument Panel The dome lamp controls are in the
Brightness): Move the headliner above the rear seats.
thumbwheel up or down and hold, to 9 (Dome Lamp Override): Press
brighten or dim the instrument panel to turn the lamps off, even when a
controls and infotainment display door is open.
screen.
2014 - 2nd Edition - 8/19/13
6-6 Lighting
H (Door): When the button is Lighting Features (alternator) may not be spinning fast
returned to the middle position, the enough at idle to produce all the
lamps turn on automatically when a power needed for very high
door is opened.
Battery Load electrical loads.
Management
R (On): Press to turn on the dome A high electrical load occurs when
lamps. The vehicle has Electric Power several of the following are on, such
Management (EPM) that estimates as: headlamps, high beams, fog
Reading Lamps the battery's temperature and state lamps, rear window defogger,
of charge. It then adjusts the voltage climate control fan at high speed,
for best performance and extended heated seats, engine cooling fans,
life of the battery. trailer loads, and loads plugged into
accessory power outlets.
When the battery's state of charge
is low, the voltage is raised slightly EPM works to prevent excessive
to quickly bring the charge back up. discharge of the battery. It does this
When the state of charge is high, by balancing the generator's output
the voltage is lowered slightly to and the vehicle's electrical needs.
prevent overcharging. If the vehicle It can increase engine idle speed to
has a voltmeter gauge or a voltage generate more power, whenever
For vehicles with front reading display on the Driver Information needed. It can temporarily reduce
lamps, they are in the overhead Center (DIC), you may see the the power demands of some
console. voltage move up or down. This is accessories.
normal. If there is a problem, an
# or $ (Reading Lamps): Press alert will be displayed.
Normally, these actions occur in
to turn each lamp on or off. steps or levels, without being
The battery can be discharged at noticeable. In rare cases at the
idle if the electrical loads are very highest levels of corrective action,
high. This is true for all vehicles. this action may be noticeable to the
This is because the generator driver.
2014 - 2nd Edition - 8/19/13
Lighting 6-7
Battery Power Protection

The battery saver feature is
designed to protect the vehicle's
battery.
If some interior lamps are left on
and the ignition is turned off, the
battery rundown protection system
automatically turns the lamp off after
some time.
2014 - 2nd Edition - 8/19/13
6-8 Lighting
2 NOTES
2014 - 2nd Edition - 8/19/13
Infotainment System 7-1
Infotainment Phone
Bluetooth (Overview) . . . . . . . . 7-26
Introduction
System Bluetooth (Infotainment
Controls) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-28 Infotainment
Bluetooth (Voice Determine which radio the vehicle
Introduction Recognition) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-37 has and read the following pages to
Infotainment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1 Hands-Free Phone . . . . . . . . . . 7-42 become familiar with its features.
Theft-Deterrent Feature . . . . . . . 7-2 Downloadable Applications
Overview (AM-FM Radio) . . . . .
Overview (Radio with
7-3 Smartphone Link { Warning
(Overview) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-45
CD/USB) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-5 Smartphone Link Taking your eyes off the road for
Overview (Radio with (Pandora) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-47 extended periods could cause a
Touchscreen) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-7 Smartphone Link crash resulting in injury or death
Home Page (Radio with (Stitcher) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-49 to you or others. Do not give
Touchscreen) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-7 extended attention to infotainment
Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-8 Bluetooth Phone/Devices tasks while driving.
Pictures and Movies (Audio
Radio System) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-50
AM-FM Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-12 Pictures and Movies (Picture This system provides access to
Satellite Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-16 System) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-55 many audio and non-audio listings.
Radio Reception . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-17 Pictures and Movies (Movie
Satellite Radio Antenna . . . . . . 7-18 To minimize taking your eyes off the
System) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-56 road while driving, do the following
Multi-Band Antenna . . . . . . . . . . 7-18
while the vehicle is parked:
Trademarks and License
Audio Players . Become familiar with the
CD Player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-19
Agreements
Trademarks and License operation and controls of the
USB Port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-21 audio system.
Auxiliary Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-24 Agreements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-58
Bluetooth Audio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-26
2014 - 2nd Edition - 8/19/13
7-2 Infotainment System

. Set up the tone, speaker
adjustments, and preset radio
Theft-Deterrent Feature
stations. The theft-deterrent feature works by
learning a portion of the Vehicle
See Defensive Driving on page 9-2.
Identification Number (VIN) to the
infotainment system. The
{ Caution infotainment system does not
operate if it is stolen or moved to a
Contact your dealer before adding different vehicle.
any equipment.
Adding audio or communication
equipment could interfere with the
operation of the engine, radio,
or other systems, and could
damage them. Follow federal
rules covering mobile radio and
telephone equipment.
Customer Assistance
Assistance is available to help with
Bluetooth pairing, application
downloading and installation, other
mobile device interface, and
operation support of the
infotainment system. See Customer
Assistance Offices on page 13-3.
2014 - 2nd Edition - 8/19/13
Overview (AM-FM Radio) 1. FAV (Favorites)

. Radio: Opens the
favorites list.
2. O /VOL (Power/Volume)
. Turns the system on or off
and adjusts the volume.
3. Buttons 1−6
. Radio: Saves and selects
favorite stations.
4. SEEK ¨
. Radio: Seeks the next
station.
. CD: Selects the next track
or fast forwards within a
track.
5. © SEEK
. Radio: Seeks the previous
station.
. CD: Selects the previous
track or rewinds within a
track.
2014 - 2nd Edition - 8/19/13
6. Push/MENU/TUNE 12. TONE

. Radio: Manually selects . Opens the Tone menu.
radio stations. 13. INFO (Information)
. CD: Selects tracks. . Radio: Shows available
7. RADIO/BAND information about the
. Changes the band while current station.
listening to the radio. . CD: Shows available
. Selects the radio when information about the
listening to a different audio current track.
source. 14. CONFIG (Configuration)
8. / BACK . Opens the
Configuration menu.
. Menu: Moves one
level back. 15. AUX Port
. Character Input: Deletes
. 3.5 mm (1/8 in)
the last character. connection for external
devices.
9. MEDIA
. Selects external audio
source.
10. CLOCK
. Opens the Clock menu.
11. 5 / > (Phone Mute)
. Mutes the audio system.
2014 - 2nd Edition - 8/19/13
Overview (Radio with CD/USB) 1. O /VOL (Power/Volume)

. Turns the system on or off
and adjusts the volume.
2. Z (Eject)
. Removes a disc from the
CD slot.
3. Buttons 1−6
. Radio: Saves and selects
favorite stations.
4. AUX Port
. 3.5 mm (1/8 in) connection
for external devices.
5. Push/MENU/TUNE
. Radio: Manually selects
radio stations.
. CD: Selects tracks.
6. FAV (Favorites)
. Radio: Opens the
favorites list.
2014 - 2nd Edition - 8/19/13
7. INFO (Information) 12. RADIO/BAND

. Radio: Shows available . Changes the band while
information about the listening to the radio.
current station. . Selects the radio when
. CD: Shows available listening to a different
information about the audio source.
current track. 13. CLOCK
8. CD Slot . Opens the Clock menu.
9. SEEK ¨ 14. TONE
. Radio: Seeks the next . Opens the Tone menu.
station.
15. CONFIG (Configuration)
. CD: Selects the next track
or fast forwards within a
. Opens the
Configuration menu.
track.
10. © SEEK 16. / BACK
. Menu: Moves one
. Radio: Seeks the previous
level back.
station.
. CD: Selects the previous
. Character Input: Deletes
track or rewinds within a the last character.
track. 17. 5 / > (Phone/Mute)
11. MEDIA . Opens the Phone menu.
. Selects the CD player or . Mutes the audio system.
an external audio source.
2014 - 2nd Edition - 8/19/13
Overview (Radio with Touchscreen) Home Page (Radio with

Touchscreen)
Touchscreen Buttons
Touchscreen buttons show on the
screen when available. When a
function is unavailable, the button
may gray out. When a function is
selected, the button may highlight.
Home Page Features
1. z VOLy (Volume) 3. D (Home Page)

. Press to decrease or . Press to go to the Home PressF to go to the Home Page.
increase the volume. Page. See Home Page e audio: Press to select AM, FM,
(Radio with Touchscreen) SiriusXM (if equipped), USB/iPod/
2. O (Power) on page 7-7. Bluetooth Audio, or AUX.
. Press and hold to turn the G picture & movie: Press to view
power on or off. a picture, movie, or auxiliary video.
2014 - 2nd Edition - 8/19/13
7 telephone: Press to activate Operation 5 / > (Phone/Mute): For vehicles

the phone features (if equipped). with OnStar, press and hold 5 / >
See Bluetooth (Voice Recognition) Radio Controls without
to mute the infotainment system.
on page 7-37 or Bluetooth Touchscreen
Press and hold 5 / > again, or turn
(Overview) on page 7-26 or The infotainment system is operated
Bluetooth (Infotainment Controls) on by using the pushbuttons, the O /VOL knob to cancel mute.
page 7-28. multifunction knobs, menus shown For vehicles without OnStar, press
^ smartphone link: Press to listen on the display, and steering wheel 5 / > to mute the infotainment
to Pandora® (if equipped), controls, if equipped. system. Press 5 / > again, or turn
Stitcher™, or available application. the O /VOL knob to cancel mute.
Turning the System On or Off
See Smartphone Link (Overview) on
page 7-45 or Smartphone Link O /VOL (Power/Volume): Press to Menu System
(Pandora) on page 7-47 or turn the system on and off.
Smartphone Link (Stitcher) on Controls
Automatic Switch-Off
page 7-49. The Push/MENU/TUNE knob, Push/
If the infotainment system is on after MENU/TUNE button, and / BACK
8 settings: Press to access the
the ignition is turned off, the system
Personalization menu. See Vehicle button are used to navigate the
will turn off automatically after
Personalization on page 5-27. menu system.
10 minutes.
Push/MENU/TUNE Knob:
Volume Control
Turn to:
O /VOL (Power/Volume): Turn to
adjust the volume.
. Enter the menu system.
. Highlight a menu option.
. Select a value.
2014 - 2nd Edition - 8/19/13
Push/MENU/TUNE Button: 2. Press the Push/MENU/TUNE Entering a Character Sequence

Press to: button to select the highlighted
option.
. Select or activate the highlighted
menu option. Submenus
. Confirm a set value.
. Turn a system setting on or off.
/ BACK: 1. Turn the Push/MENU/TUNE
Press to: knob to highlight the setting.
. Exit a menu. 2. Press the Push/MENU/TUNE
An arrow on the right-hand edge of button to select the character.
. Return from a submenu screen
the menu indicates that it has a
to the previous menu screen.
submenu with other options.
Audio Settings
. Delete the last character in a The audio settings can be set for
sequence. Activating a Setting each radio band and each audio
player source.
Selecting a Menu Option
To quickly reset an audio setting
value to 0:
1. Press the TONE button.
2. Select the audio setting.
1. Turn the Push/MENU/TUNE 3. Press and hold the Push/MENU/
knob to highlight the setting. TUNE button until the value
1. Turn the Push/MENU/TUNE changes to 0.
2. Press the Push/MENU/TUNE
knob to move the
button to activate the setting.
highlighted bar.
2014 - 2nd Edition - 8/19/13
Press the / BACK button to go 3. Turn the Push/MENU/TUNE To configure the number of available
back to the Tone Settings menu. knob to select the value between favorite pages:
-15 and +15. 1. Press the Push/MENU/TUNE
Adjusting the Treble, Midrange,
and Bass Press the / BACK button to go button.
back to the Tone Settings menu. 2. Select Radio Settings.
Adjusting the EQ (Equalizer) 3. Select Radio Favorites.
For vehicles with an equalizer: 4. Select the number of available
1. Press the TONE button. favorite pages.
2. Select EQ. 5. Press the / BACK button to go

back to the System
1. Press the TONE button. 3. Select the setting for Pop, Rock, Configuration menu.
Classical, Talk, or Country.
2. Select Treble, Midrange, Auto Volume
or Bass. Press the / BACK button to go
back to the Tone Settings menu. The auto volume feature
3. Turn the Push/MENU/TUNE automatically adjusts the radio
knob to select the value between System Settings volume to compensate for road and
-12 and +12. wind noise as the vehicle speeds up
Configuring the Number of
Press the / BACK button to go or slows down, so that the volume
Favorite Pages
back to the Tone Settings menu. level is consistent.
The level of volume compensation
Adjusting the Fader and Balance
can be selected, or the auto volume
1. Press the TONE button. feature can be turned off.
2. Select Fader or Balance. 1. Press the Push/MENU/TUNE
button.
2. Select Radio Settings.
2014 - 2nd Edition - 8/19/13
3. Select Auto volume control. > (Mute): Press z VOL y, then Auto Store (AS)
4. Select the setting. press > to mute and unmute the This feature automatically stores the
system. stations with the strongest
5. Press the / BACK button to go reception.
back to the System System Settings
Configuration menu. To store or update the stations,
Auto Volume press and hold the AS screen
Radio Controls with This feature automatically adjusts button.
Touchscreen the radio volume to compensate for To listen to a auto stored station:
The infotainment system is operated road and wind noise.
1. Select AM or FM.
by using the pushbuttons, menus The level of volume compensation
shown on the display, and steering 2. Press the AS screen button.
can be selected, or the feature can
wheel controls. be turned off. 3. Press S or T repeatedly to
Turning the System On or Off 1. Press D. select the desired AS page.
O (Power): Press and hold to turn 2. Select Settings.
4. Press the desired preset station
the radio on and off. screen button.
3. Select Radio Settings.
Automatic Switch-Off If AS is pressed with no stored
If the infotainment system has been
4. Select the setting by pressing S stations, AS will update.
turned on after the ignition is turned or T. Audio Settings
off, the system will turn off
automatically after 10 minutes.
5. Press 4. The audio settings can be set for
each radio band and each audio
Volume Control player source.
z VOL y (Volume): Press to
increase or decrease the volume or
press the volume bar.
2014 - 2nd Edition - 8/19/13
Tone Settings: Press menu, then Radio FAV: Press to open the favorites
tone settings from the AM or list and select the favorites page.
FM menu.
AM-FM Radio 1−6: Press to select preset
. EQ (Equalizer): Press S or T to stations.
select a sound style or turn off Radio Controls without
Touchscreen RDS (Radio Data System)
the sound style. When in tone
settings “Manual” and “Talk” may The buttons used to control the The radio may have RDS. The RDS
be the only settings available radio are: feature is available for use only on
depending on the sound system. FM stations that broadcast RDS
P /VOL: Press to turn the radio on information. This feature only works
. Bass, Mid (Midrange), or Treble: and off. when the information from the radio
Press − or + to change the station is available. In rare cases, a
desired sound style from −12 RADIO/BAND: Press to choose
between AM, FM, and SiriusXM®, radio station could broadcast
to +12. incorrect information that causes the
if equipped.
. Fader or Balance: Adjust the radio features to work improperly.
front/rear or left/right speakers Push/MENU/TUNE Knob: Turn to If this happens, contact the radio
by dragging the dot in the navigate the available menus. Turn station.
vehicle image on the screen. to search for stations.
While the radio is tuned to an
. Reset: Restore the settings back INFO: Press to display additional FM-RDS station, the station name
to default settings. information that may be available for or call letters display.
the current song.
Press OK to exit Tone Settings. Radio Menus
SEEK ¨ : Press to search for the
next station. Radio menus are available for AM
and FM.
© SEEK: Press to search for the
previous station. Turn the Push/MENU/TUNE knob to
open the main radio menu for
that band.
2014 - 2nd Edition - 8/19/13
Selecting a Band 3. Select the station. 2. Select FM category list. A list of

all available programming types
Press the RADIO/BAND button to Station Lists displays.
choose AM, FM, or SiriusXM,
1. Turn the Push/MENU/ 3. Select the programming type.
if equipped. The last station that
TUNE knob. A list of stations that transmit
was playing starts playing again.
2. Select AM or FM Station List. All programming of the selected
Selecting a Station receivable stations in the current type displays.
Seek Tuning reception area are displayed. If a 4. Select the station.
station list has not been created,
If the radio station is not known: an automatic station search The category lists are updated
is done. when the station lists are
Briefly press SEEK ¨ or © SEEK to updated.
automatically search for the next 3. The first station in the list
available station. If a station is not will play. Updating Station and Category
found, the radio switches to a more Lists
Category Lists
sensitive search level. If a station If stations stored in the station list
still is not found, the frequency that Most stations that broadcast an can no longer be received:
was last active begins to play. RDS program type code specify the
type of programming transmitted. 1. Turn the Push/MENU/
If the radio station is known: TUNE knob.
Some stations change the program
Press and hold SEEK ¨ or © SEEK type code depending on the 2. Select Update AM or FM Station
until the station on the display is content. The system stores the RDS List, if the stations stored in the
reached, then release the button. stations sorted by program type in station list are no longer
the FM category list. received. A station search will be
Favorites List
To search for a programming type completed and the first station in
1. Turn the Push/MENU/ determined by station: the updated list will play.
TUNE knob.
1. Turn the Push/MENU/ To cancel the station search, press
2. Select Favorites List. TUNE knob. the Push/MENU/TUNE button.
2014 - 2nd Edition - 8/19/13
Storing a Favorite Station O (Power): Press and hold to turn Selecting an Auxiliary Device
Stations from all bands can be the system on and off.
stored in any order in the favorite D (Home Page): Press to enter
pages. the Home Page.
Up to six stations can be stored in RDS (Radio Data System)
each favorite page and the number
of available favorite pages can The radio may have RDS. The RDS
be set. feature is available for use only on
FM stations that broadcast RDS
Storing Stations information. This feature only works
To store the station to a position in when the information from the radio
station is available. In rare cases, a Connect the auxiliary device to the
the list, press the corresponding AUX input terminal. Play will begin
button 1 to 6 until a beep is heard. radio station could broadcast
incorrect information that causes the when the system has finished
Retrieving Stations radio features to work improperly. reading the information on the
If this happens, contact the radio device.
Press the FAV button to open a
favorite page or to switch to another station. If the storage device is already
favorite page. Briefly press one of While the radio is tuned to an connected, press D, audio, Source
the 1 to 6 buttons to retrieve the FM-RDS station, the station name R, select AUX from the drop
station. or call letters display. down menu.
Radio Controls with Selecting a Band Selecting a Station
Touchscreen
Press D, audio, then Source R to Seek Tuning
Audio Source Menu choose AM, FM, or SiriusXM®, If the radio station is not known:
z VOL y (Volume): Press to if equipped. The last station that
increase or decrease the volume. was playing starts playing again. Press g SEEK l to automatically
search for available radio stations.
2014 - 2nd Edition - 8/19/13
Hold and drag to the left or right of Station List Update Station List
the radio station to automatically
search for available radio stations.
Manual Tuning
Continue pressing q TUNE r to
manually change the radio station.
Favorite List
. From the AM or FM menu, press . From the AM or FM menu, press

AM or FM station list on the update AM or FM station list on
screen. the screen. The broadcasting list
updating will begin.
. Press Q or R to scroll through
the list. Press on the station to
. During the AM or FM
select it. broadcasting list update, press
Cancel to stop the updates.
.
Category List
From the AM or FM menu, press Storing a Favorite Station
. From the FM menu, press FM
favorite list on the screen.
category list on the screen. Stations from all bands can be
. Press Q or R to scroll through stored in any order in the favorite
the list. Press on the station to . Press Q or R to scroll through pages.
select it. the list. Press on the station to
Up to five stations can be stored in
select it.
each of the seven favorites pages.
2014 - 2nd Edition - 8/19/13
Storing Stations Satellite Radio MENU/TUNE: Turn to go to the

To store the station to a position in next XM channel.
the list, press the corresponding
SiriusXM® Satelite Radio
Service Storing an SiriusXM Channel
button 1−5 until a beep is heard.
SiriusXM is a satellite radio service Drivers are encouraged to set up
1. Select the desired station. XM channel favorites while the
based in the 48 contiguous United
2. Press S or T to select the States and 10 Canadian provinces. vehicle is not moving. Tune to
SiriusXM Satellite Radio has a wide favorite stations using the
desired page of saved favorites.
variety of programming and pushbuttons, favorites button, and
commercial-free music, coast to steering wheel controls. See
coast, and in digital-quality sound. Defensive Driving on page 9-2.
A service fee is required to receive A maximum of 36 stations can be
the SiriusXM service. For more programmed as favorites using the
information, contact SiriusXM at six pushbuttons positioned below
www.siriusxm.com or the radio station frequency labels
1-866-635-2349 (U.S.), and and by using the radio favorites
www.xmradio.ca or 1-877-209-0079 page button (FAV button). Press the
(Canada). FAV button to go through up to six
3. Hold down any of the preset pages of favorites, each having six
Finding a Channel favorite stations available per page.
buttons to save the current radio
station to that button of the RADIO/BAND: Press to choose Each page of favorites can contain
selected favorites page. XM. The display will show the any combination of AM, FM, or XM
selection. channels. To store an XM channel
To change a preset button, tune to as a favorite:
the new desired radio station and SEEK ¨ : Press to seek the next
hold the button. XM channel. 1. Tune in the desired channel.
© SEEK: Press to seek the
previous XM channel.
2014 - 2nd Edition - 8/19/13
2. Press and release the FAV programming favorites for the station. If this station was one of the
button to display the page where chosen number of numbered presets, choose another station for
the channel is to be stored. pages. that preset button.
3. Press and hold one of the six SiriusXM Radio Messages RADIO ID: If tuned to channel 0,
numbered pushbuttons until a this message alternates with the
beep sounds. When the UPDATING: The encryption code SiriusXM Radio eight-digit radio ID
pushbutton is pressed and in the receiver is being updated, and label. This label is needed to
released, the channel that was no action is required. This process activate the service.
set will return. should take no longer than
30 seconds. CHECK XM TUNER: If this
4. Repeat Steps 1−3 for each XM message does not clear within a
channel to be stored as a NO SIGNAL: The system is short period of time, the receiver
favorite. functioning correctly, but the vehicle could have a fault. Consult with your
is in a location that is blocking the dealer.
To set up the number of favorites SiriusXM signal. When the vehicle is
pages: moved into an open area, the signal
should return.
Radio Reception
1. Press and hold FAV until the
radio setup menu displays. LOADING: The audio system is Frequency interference and static
can occur during normal radio
2. Select the desired number of acquiring and processing audio and
reception if items such as cell phone
favorites pages by pressing the text data. No action is needed. This
message should disappear shortly. chargers, vehicle convenience
pushbutton located below the accessories, and external electronic
displayed page numbers. OFF AIR: This channel is not devices are plugged into the
3. Press FAV to return to the currently in service. Tune in to accessory power outlet. If there is
original main radio screen another channel. interference or static, unplug the
showing the radio frequency CH UNAVAILABLE: This item from the accessory power
tabs and to begin the process of previously assigned channel is no outlet.
longer assigned. Tune to another
2014 - 2nd Edition - 8/19/13
AM SiriusXM® Satellite Radio Satellite Radio Antenna

The range for most AM stations is Service
The XM Satellite Radio antenna is
greater than for FM, especially at SiriusXM Satellite Radio Service located on the roof of the vehicle.
night. The longer range can cause gives digital radio reception from Keep the antenna clear of
station frequencies to interfere with coast to coast in the 48 contiguous obstructions for clear radio
each other. For better radio United States, and in Canada. Just reception.
reception, most AM radio stations as with FM, tall buildings or hills can
boost the power levels during the If the vehicle has a sunroof, the
interfere with satellite radio signals,
day, and then reduce these levels performance of the XM system (if
causing the sound to fade in and
during the night. Static can also equipped) may be affected if the
out. In addition, traveling or standing
occur when things like storms and sunroof is open.
under heavy foliage, bridges,
power lines interfere with radio garages, or tunnels may cause loss
reception. When this happens, try of the SiriusXM signal for a period Multi-Band Antenna
reducing the treble on the radio. of time. The multi-band antenna is on the
FM Stereo roof of the vehicle. The antenna is
Cellular Phone Usage
used for the AM-FM radio, OnStar,
FM signals only reach about 16 to Cellular phone usage may cause the SiriusXM Satellite Radio Service
65 km (10 to 40 mi). Although the interference with the vehicle's radio. System, and GPS (Global
radio has a built-in electronic circuit This interference may occur when Positioning System), if the vehicle
that automatically works to reduce making or receiving phone calls, has these features. Keep the
interference, some static can occur, charging the phone's battery, antenna clear of obstructions for
especially around tall buildings or or simply having the phone on. This clear reception.
hills, causing the sound to fade in interference causes an increased
and out. If the vehicle has a sunroof, the
level of static while listening to the
performance of the features listed
radio. If static is received while
above may be affected if the
listening to the radio, unplug the
sunroof is open.
cellular phone and turn it off.
2014 - 2nd Edition - 8/19/13
Audio Players mild neutral detergent solution

mixed with water, and clean it. Wipe Caution (Continued)
the disc from the center to the
CD Player outer edge. load one CD at a time, and keep
the CD player and the loading slot
The CD player can play audio CDs Care of the CD Player
and MP3 CDs. free of foreign materials, liquids,
Do not add a label to a disc, as it and debris.
The CD player will not play could get caught in the CD player.
8 cm (3 in) CDs. If a label is needed, label the top of Control Buttons
Care of CDs the recorded disc with a
marking pen. The buttons used to control the CD
Sound quality can be reduced due player are:
to disc quality, recording method, Do not use disc lens cleaners
quality of the music recorded, and because they could contaminate the MEDIA: Press to use the CD
how the disc has been handled. lens of the disc optics and damage player.
Handle discs carefully and store the CD player. SEEK ¨ or © SEEK: Press to
them in their original cases or other select tracks or to fast forward or
protective cases away from direct { Caution rewind within a track.
sunlight and dust. If the bottom
surface of a disc is damaged, the If a label is added to a CD, more INFO: Press to display additional
disc may not play properly or at all. than one CD is inserted into the information about the current track
Do not touch the bottom surface of slot at a time, or an attempt is that may be available.
a disc while handling it; this could made to play scratched or Push/MENU/TUNE: Turn to select
damage the surface. Pick up discs damaged CDs, the CD player tracks. Turn to enter the menu.
by grasping the outer edges or the could be damaged. While using Press to select the menu.
edge of the hole and the outer edge. the CD player, use only CDs in Z (Eject): Press to eject the disc.
If the bottom surface of a disc is good condition without any label,
dirty, take a soft, lint-free cloth, (Continued)
or dampen a clean, soft cloth in a
2014 - 2nd Edition - 8/19/13
Inserting a CD
. Turn the Push/MENU/ Using the CD Menu:
TUNE knob.
With the printed side facing up, 1. Turn the Push/MENU/
insert a disc into the CD slot until it Using the CD Menu: TUNE knob.
is drawn in. 1. Turn the Push/MENU/ 2. Select Playlists/Folders.
TUNE knob.
Removing a CD 3. Select the playlist or folder.
2. Select Tracks List.
Press Z. 4. Select the track.
3. Select the track.
The disc is pushed out of the Searching for MP3 Tracks
CD slot. Playing Tracks in Random Order
The search feature may take some
If the disc is not removed after it is Turn the Push/MENU/TUNE knob time to display the information after
ejected, it is pulled back in after a and set Shuffle Songs to On. reading the disc due to the amount
few seconds. Fast Forward and Rewind of information stored on the disc.
FM automatically plays while the
Playing a CD or MP3 CD Press and hold SEEK ¨ or © SEEK disc is being read.
Press the MEDIA button. If there is to fast forward or rewind within the Tracks can be searched by:
a disc in the player, it begins current track.
playing.
. Playlists
Selecting an MP3 Track
Information about the disc and
. Artists
Using the control buttons:
current track is shown on the . Albums
display depending on the data . Press SEEK ¨ or © SEEK to . Song Titles
stored. select the next or previous track.
. Genres
Selecting a CD Track . Turn the Push/MENU/
TUNE knob. . Folder View
Using the control buttons:
. Press SEEK ¨ or © SEEK to
select the next or previous track.
2014 - 2nd Edition - 8/19/13
To search for tracks: Not all iPods and USB Drives are
1. Turn the Push/MENU/ compatible with the infotainment
TUNE knob. system.
2. Select Search. Connecting and Controlling

an iPod®
3. Select: Playlists, Artists, Albums,
Song Titles, Genres, Not all iPods can be controlled by
or Folder View. the infotainment system.
4. Select the track. Connecting an iPod
Connect the iPod to the USB port.
USB Port
Searching for a Track
The USB Port, if equipped, is in the 1. 3.5 mm (1/8 in) Auxiliary Input
storage area to the right of the Jack. See Auxiliary Devices on Tracks can be searched for by:
infotainment system. See Overview page 7-24. . Playlists
(Radio with Touchscreen) on 2. USB Port.
page 7-7 or Overview (AM-FM
. Artists
Radio) on page 7-3 or Overview Radio without Touchscreen . Albums
(Radio with CD/USB) on page 7-5.
For vehicles with a USB port, the . Song Titles
Portable devices are controlled by following devices may be connected . Podcasts
using the menu system described in and controlled by the infotainment
Operation on page 7-8. system: . Genres
. iPods . Audiobooks
. USB Drives . Composers
2014 - 2nd Edition - 8/19/13
To search for tracks: Off: Playback starts from the Files that do not have any meta
1. Turn the Push/MENU/ beginning of the current track after data stored in the ID3 tag display as
TUNE knob. the last track finishes. Unknown.
2. Select Search. Connecting and Controlling a Tracks can be searched for by:
USB Drive . Playlists*
3. Select: Playlists, Artists, Albums,
Song Titles, Podcasts, Genres, The infotainment system can only . Artists
Audiobooks, or Composers. play back .mp3 and .wma files from . Albums
a USB drive.
4. Select the track. . Song Titles
Only the first 2,500 songs are
Shuffle recognized on the device. . Genres
Turn the Push/MENU/TUNE knob When a device is not supported, the . Folder View
and set Shuffle Songs (Random) to message “No supported data found. *This only displays if a playlist is
On or Off, then press the / BACK You can safely disconnect the found on the device.
button to return to the main screen. device” appears.
To search for tracks:
On: Plays tracks in the current Connecting a USB Drive
folder in random order. 1. Turn the Push/MENU/
Connect the USB drive to the TUNE knob.
Off: Plays tracks in the current USB port.
folder in sequential order. 2. Select Search.
Searching for a Track
Repeat 3. Select: Playlists, Artists, Albums,
It is normal for the search feature to Song Titles, Genres,
Turn the Push/MENU/TUNE knob take some time to display the or Folder View.
and set Repeat to On or Off, then information after reading the device
4. Select the track.
press the / BACK button to return due to the amount of information
to the main screen. stored.
On: Repeats the current track.
2014 - 2nd Edition - 8/19/13
Shuffle Functionality USB Support USB Supported File and Folder

Turn the Push/MENU/TUNE knob Structure
USB Supported Devices
and set Shuffle Songs (Random) to The Infotainment system supports:
On or Off.
. USB Flash Drives
. Up to 2,500 folders.
. Portable USB Hard Drives
On: Plays current tracks in random . Up to 10 folders in depth.
order. . 2G-5G iPod nano®
. Up to 2,500 music files.
Off: Plays current tracks in . 1G-3G iPod touch®
sequential order. . Up to 2,500 photo files.
. 120GB/160GB iPod classic®
. Up to 250 movie files.
Repeat Functionality . 3G/3GS/4/4S iPhone®
Turn the Push/MENU/TUNE knob
. ID3 Tag (versions 1.0/1.1/2.2/
Not all iPods and USB drives are 2.3/2.4).
and set Repeat to On or Off. compatible with the USB port.
Repeat On: Repeats the current
. FAT16.
Make sure the iPod has the latest
track. firmware from Apple® for proper . FAT32.
Repeat Off: Playback starts from operation. iPod firmware can be . exFAT.
the beginning of the current track updated using the latest iTunes®
after the last track finishes. application. See www.apple.com/ Connecting a USB Storage
itunes. Device or iPod/iPhone
For help with identifying your iPod, To connect a USB storage device,
The infotainment system can play go to www.apple.com/support. connect the device to the USB port.
music or movies by connecting an
auxiliary device to the USB port, The USB port can play both lower To connect an iPod/iPhone, connect
if equipped. and upper case .mp3, .wma, .ogg, one end of the device’s cable to the
and .wav files stored on a USB iPod/iPhone and the other end to
storage device. the USB port.
2014 - 2nd Edition - 8/19/13
The iPod/iPhone charges while it is A second AUX input is on the front Radio without Touchscreen
connected to the vehicle if the of the infotainment system,
Connect a 3.5 mm (1/8 in) cable to
vehicle is in the ACC/ACCESSORY if equipped. See Overview (Radio
the auxiliary input jack to use a
or ON/RUN position. When the with Touchscreen) on page 7-7 or
portable audio player.
vehicle is turned off, the iPod/ Overview (AM-FM Radio) on
iPhone automatically powers off and page 7-3 or Overview (Radio with Playback of an audio device that is
will not charge or draw power from CD/USB) on page 7-5. connected to the 3.5 mm (1/8 in)
the vehicle's battery. jack can only be controlled using
Portable devices are controlled by
the controls on the device.
For more information on USB using the menu system described in
usage, see “Audio System” in Operation on page 7-8. Adjusting the Volume
Pictures and Movies (Audio System)
on page 7-50 or Pictures and Turn the O /VOL knob to adjust the
Movies (Picture System) on volume of the infotainment system
page 7-55 or Pictures and Movies after the volume level has been set
(Movie System) on page 7-56. on the portable audio device.
Auxiliary Devices
The infotainment system can play
The optional AUX input allows music or movies connected by the
portable devices to connect to the auxiliary device.
vehicle using the 3.5 mm (1/8 in)
input jack. The AUX input jack, Play will begin when the system has
if equipped, is in the storage area to finished reading the information on
the right of the infotainment system. the device.
1. 3.5 mm (1/8 in) Auxiliary
Input Jack
2. USB Port. See USB Port on
page 7-21.
2014 - 2nd Edition - 8/19/13
Playing Music Playing Movies Using the AUX Movie Menu

Movies are not available while
driving.
If the USB storage device is already
connected:
1. Press D.
2. Press picture and movie.
3. Press Source R.
To play the music from the device, 4. Press USB (Movie). 1. Press MENU from the AUX
if the device is already connected: For iPod/iPhone, connect the iPod/ movie screen. The AUX menu is
iPhone to the AUX input terminal by displayed.
1. Press D.
using the AUX cable for iPod/ 2. Press the desired menu.
2. Press audio. iPhone to play movie files. . tone settings: Adjust the
3. Press Source R. iPhone 5 cell phones have a sound setup. See “Tone
connector which no longer supports Settings” under “Radio
4. Press AUX/USB.
AUX connections to the radio. This Controls with Touchscreen”
To adjust the tone settings, see feature is limited to older versions of in Operation on page 7-8.
“Tone Settings” under “Radio iPhone. .
Controls with Touchscreen” in clock/temp display: To
display the clock and
Operation on page 7-8.
temperature on the full
screen, select On or Off.
. display settings: Adjust the
brightness and contrast of
the screen.
2014 - 2nd Edition - 8/19/13
3. Press 4. When selecting Bluetooth audio, the Phone

radio may not be able to launch the
Bluetooth Audio audio player on the connected
device to start playing. When the Bluetooth (Overview)
Streaming Audio vehicle is not moving, choose the For vehicles equipped with
phone to begin playback. Bluetooth capability, the system can
If equipped, music may be played
All devices launch audio differently. interact with many cell phones,
from a paired Bluetooth. See
When selecting Bluetooth audio as allowing:
Bluetooth (Voice Recognition) on
page 7-37 or Bluetooth (Overview) a source, the radio may show as . Placement and receipt of calls in
on page 7-26 or Bluetooth paused on the screen. Press play a hands-free mode.
(Infotainment Controls) on on the device to begin playback. . Sharing of the cell phone’s
page 7-28 for help pairing a device. Some phones support sending address book or contact list with
The music can be controlled by Bluetooth music information to the vehicle.
controls on the device. display on the radio. When the radio
receives this information, it will To minimize driver distraction,
To play music via Bluetooth: check to see if any album art is before driving, and with the vehicle
available and display it. For more parked:
1. Power on the device, pair, and
connect the device. The device information about your phone and . Become familiar with the
will display “GM Audio Source.” supported Bluetooth features, see features of the cell phone.
www.gm.com/bluetooth. Organize the phone book and
2. Once paired, press MEDIA to
contact lists clearly and delete
select Bluetooth Audio.
duplicate or rarely used entries.
3. Press the play button on the If possible, program speed dial
device to begin playback. or other shortcuts.
. Review the controls and
operation of the infotainment
system.
2014 - 2nd Edition - 8/19/13

. Pair cell phone(s) to the vehicle. make and receive phone calls. The Infotainment System Controls
The system may not work with infotainment system and voice
all cell phones. See “Pairing” in If equipped, the infotainment system
recognition are used to control the allows certain controls to be
this section. system. The system can be used selected on the infotainment display.
. If the cell phone has voice while in ON/RUN or ACC/
dialing capability, learn to use ACCESSORY. The range of the For information about how to
that feature to access the Bluetooth system can be up to 9.1 m navigate the menu system using the
address book or contact list. See (30 ft). Not all phones support all infotainment controls, see Operation
“Voice Pass-Thru” in this functions and not all phones work on page 7-8.
section. with the Bluetooth system. See 5 / > (Phone): Press to enter the
www.gm.com/bluetooth for more Phone main menu.
. See “Storing and Deleting Phone information about compatible
Numbers” in this section. phones. Voice Recognition
The voice recognition system uses
{ Warning Bluetooth Controls
commands to control the system
Use the buttons located on the and dial phone numbers.
When using a cell phone, it can infotainment system and the
be distracting to look too long or steering wheel to operate the Noise: The system may not
too often at the screen of the Bluetooth system. recognize voice commands if there
phone or the infotainment system. is too much background noise. Do
Taking your eyes off the road too Steering Wheel Controls not point the center air vents directly
long or too often could cause a b / g (Push to Talk): Press to upward.
crash resulting in injury or death. answer incoming calls, confirm When to Speak: A tone sounds to
Focus your attention on driving. system information, and start voice indicate that the system is ready for
recognition. a voice command. Wait for the tone
Vehicles with a Bluetooth system $ / i (Mute/End Call): Press to and then speak.
can use a Bluetooth-capable cell end a call, reject a call, or cancel an How to Speak: Speak clearly in a
phone with a Hands-Free Profile to operation. calm and natural voice.
2014 - 2nd Edition - 8/19/13
Audio System Pairing without Touchscreen

. Pairing only needs to be
completed once, unless the
When using the Bluetooth system, A Bluetooth-enabled cell phone pairing information on the cell
sound comes through the vehicle's must be paired to the Bluetooth phone changes or the cell phone
front audio system speakers and system and then connected to the is deleted from the system.
overrides the audio system. Use the vehicle before it can be used. See
O /VOL knob during a call to your cell phone manufacturer's user
. Only one paired cell phone can
change the volume level. The guide for Bluetooth functions before be connected to the Bluetooth
adjusted volume level remains in pairing the cell phone. If a Bluetooth system at a time.
memory for later calls. The system phone is not connected, calls will be . If multiple paired cell phones are
maintains a minimum volume level. made using OnStar Hands-Free within range of the system, the
Calling, if available. See OnStar system connects to the first
Other Information Overview on page 14-1. available paired cell phone in the
The Bluetooth® word mark and order that they were first paired
Pairing Information
logos are owned by the Bluetooth® to the system. To link to a
SIG, Inc. and any use of such marks . A Bluetooth phone with MP3 different paired phone, see
by General Motors is under license. capability can be paired “Linking to a Different Phone”
Other trademarks and trade names separately to the vehicle as a later in this section.
are those of their respective owners. phone and an MP3 player at the
same time. This requires the Pairing a Phone as a Hands-Free
See Radio Frequency Statement on Device
device to be paired two times;
page 13-15.
once as a “hands-free” device 1. Press the CONFIG button.
and once as an MP3 device.
Bluetooth (Infotainment 2. Select Phone Settings or
. Up to five cell phones can be Bluetooth Settings.
Controls) paired to the Bluetooth system.
3. Select Bluetooth.
For information about how to . The pairing process is disabled
navigate the menu system using the when the vehicle is moving.
infotainment controls, see Operation
on page 7-8.
2014 - 2nd Edition - 8/19/13
4. Select Pair Device Listing All Paired and Connected 2. Select Phone Settings or
(Hands-Free). A four-digit Phones Bluetooth Settings.
Personal Identification Number 1. Press the CONFIG button. 3. Select Bluetooth.
(PIN) appears on the display.
The PIN is used is Step 6. 2. Select Phone Settings or 4. Select Device List.
Bluetooth Settings. 5. Select the new phone to link to
5. Start the pairing process on the
cell phone to be paired to the 3. Select Bluetooth. and follow the on-screen
vehicle. See the cell phone 4. Select Device List. prompts.
manufacturer's user guide for If delete is selected, the
information on this process. Deleting a Paired Phone highlighted phone will be
6. Locate the device named “Your 1. Press the CONFIG button. deleted.
Vehicle” in the list on the cell 2. Select Phone Settings or Making a Call Using
phone. Follow the instructions Bluetooth Settings.
on the cell phone to enter the Phone Book
PIN provided in Step 4. After the 3. Select Bluetooth. For cell phones that support the
PIN is successfully entered, the 4. Select Device List. phone book feature, the Bluetooth
system prompts you to provide a system can use the contacts stored
5. Select the phone to delete and
name for the paired cell phone. on your cell phone to make calls.
follow the on-screen prompts.
This name will be used to See your cell phone's owner's guide
indicate which phones are Linking to a Different Phone or contact your wireless provider to
paired and connected to the find out if this feature is supported
To link to a different phone, the new
vehicle. The system responds by your phone.
phone must be in the vehicle and
with “<Phone name> has been
available to be connected to the When a cell phone supports the
successfully paired” after the
Bluetooth system before the phone book feature, the Phone
pairing process is complete.
process is started. Book and Call Lists menus are
7. Repeat Steps 1−6 to pair automatically available.
1. Press the CONFIG button.
additional phones.
2014 - 2nd Edition - 8/19/13
The Phone Book menu allows you To make a call using the Call Accepting or Declining a Call
to access the phone book stored in Lists menu:
When an incoming call is received,
the cell phone to make a call.
1. Press 5 / > once or twice the infotainment system mutes and
The Call Lists menu allows you to (depending on the radio). a ring tone is heard in the vehicle.
access the phone numbers from the
Incoming Calls, Outgoing Calls, and 2. Select Call Lists. Accepting a Call
Missed Calls menus on your cell 3. Select the Incoming Calls, Turn the Push/MENU/TUNE knob to
phone to make a call. Outgoing Calls, or Missed “Answer” and press the Push/
To make a call using the Phone Calls list. MENU/TUNE knob to accept
Book menu: the call.
4. Select the name or number you
want to call. Declining a Call
1. Press 5 / > once or twice
(depending on the radio). Making a Call Turn the Push/MENU/TUNE knob to
“Decline” and press the Push/
2. Select Phone Book. To make a call: MENU/TUNE knob to decline
3. Search through the list by 1. Press 5 / > once or twice the call.
selecting the letter group the (depending on the radio).
phone book entry begins with, Call Waiting
or press the Push/MENU/TUNE 2. Enter the character sequence. Call waiting must be supported on
button to scroll through the See “Entering a Character the Bluetooth phone and enabled by
entire list of names/numbers in Sequence” in Operation on the wireless service carrier to work.
the phone book. page 7-8.
Accepting a Call
4. Select the name or number you 3. Select Call to start dialing the
want to call. number. Turn the Push/MENU/TUNE knob to
“Answer” and press the Push/
MENU/TUNE knob to accept
the call.
2014 - 2nd Edition - 8/19/13
Declining a Call 3. Enter the character sequence Dual Tone Multi-Frequency

Turn the Push/MENU/TUNE knob to then select Call. See “Entering a (DTMF) Tones
“Decline” and press the Push/ Character Sequence” in
Operation on page 7-8. The in-vehicle Bluetooth system can
MENU/TUNE knob to decline send numbers during a call. This is
the call. 4. After the call has been placed, used when calling a menu-driven
turn or press the Push/MENU/ phone system.
Switching Between Calls (Call TUNE knob and choose Merge
Waiting Calls Only) 1. Turn or press the Push/MENU/
Calls.
To switch between calls: TUNE knob and select Enter
5. To add more callers to the Number.
1. Turn or press the Push/MENU/ conference call, repeat Steps 1
TUNE knob. −4. The number of callers that 2. Enter the character sequence.
can be added is limited by your See “Entering a Character
2. Select Switch Call from Sequence” in Operation on
the menu. wireless service carrier.
page 7-8.
Conference Calling Ending a Call
Pairing with Touchscreen
Conference calling and three-way Turn or press the Push/MENU/
TUNE knob and select Hang Up. A Bluetooth-enabled cell phone
calling must be supported on the must be paired to the Bluetooth
Bluetooth phone and enabled by the Muting a Call system and then connected to the
wireless service carrier to work. vehicle before it can be used. See
To Mute a Call your cell phone manufacturer's user
To start a conference while in a
current call: Turn or press the Push/MENU/ guide for Bluetooth functions before
TUNE knob and select Mute Call. pairing the cell phone. If a Bluetooth
1. Turn or press the Push/MENU/ phone is not connected, calls will be
TUNE knob. To Cancel Mute made using OnStar Hands-Free
2. Select Enter Number. Turn or press the Push/MENU/ Calling, if available. See OnStar
TUNE knob and select Mute Call. Overview on page 14-1.
2014 - 2nd Edition - 8/19/13
Pairing Information
. Always accept the Phone book
request on the initial pairing of
. A Bluetooth phone with MP3 the phone.
capability cannot be paired to
the vehicle as a phone and an When the Bluetooth device and
MP3 player at the same time. infotainment system are
successfully paired, the phone book
. Up to five cell phones can be is downloaded automatically.
paired to the Bluetooth system. However, the phone book may not
. The pairing process is disabled be downloaded automatically
when the vehicle is moving. according to the type of the phone. 2. Press telephone, then
In this case, proceed with the press Yes.
. Pairing only needs to be
phonebook download on phone. 3. Press Search Bluetooth Device.
completed once, unless the
pairing information on the cell Pairing a Phone 4. Press the desired device to pair
phone changes or the cell phone on the searched list screen.
When there is no paired device on
is deleted from the system.
the infotainment system and the 5. Press Yes on the pop-up screen
. Only one paired cell phone can Simple Secure Pairing (SSP) is of the Bluetooth device and
be connected to the Bluetooth supported: infotainment system.
system at a time.
.
1. Press D. 6. When the Bluetooth device and
If multiple paired cell phones are infotainment system are
within range of the system, the successfully paired, the
system connects to the first telephone screen is displayed on
available paired cell phone in the the infotainment system.
order that they were first paired
to the system. To link to a
different paired phone, see
“Linking to a Different Phone”
later in this section.
2014 - 2nd Edition - 8/19/13
Pairing a Phone 9. When the Bluetooth device and

When a paired device is on the infotainment system are
infotainment system and the SSP is successfully paired, the 5 7
supported: is displayed on the "pair device"
screen.
1. Press D. . The connected phone is
highlighted by 5.
. The 5 7 indicates the
2. Press telephone, then
hands-free and phone music press Yes.
function are enabled.
3. Press Search Bluetooth Device.
. The 7 indicates only
hands-free function is enabled. 4. Press the desired device to pair
on the searched list screen.
. The 5 indicates only Bluetooth 5. Input the PIN code
2. Press settings. music is enabled. (default: 1234) to the Bluetooth
3. Press connection settings. Pairing a Phone device. When the Bluetooth
device and infotainment system
4. Press bluetooth settings. When there is no paired device on are successfully paired, the
5. Press pair device. the infotainment system and the telephone screen is displayed on
SSP is not supported: the infotainment system.
6. Press Search Bluetooth Device.
1. Press D. When the connection fails, a failure
7. Press the desired device to pair message is displayed on the
on the searched list screen. infotainment system.
8. Press Yes on the pop-up screen
of the Bluetooth device and
infotainment system.
2014 - 2nd Edition - 8/19/13
If a Bluetooth device was previously 5. Press pair device. 2. Select settings.

connected, the infotainment system 6. Press Search Bluetooth Device. 3. Press connection settings.
executes the auto connection.
However, if the Bluetooth setting on 7. Press the desired device to pair 4. Press bluetooth settings.
the Bluetooth device is turned off, a on the searched list screen. 5. Press pair device.
failure message is displayed on the 8. Input the PIN code
infotainment system. 6. Press the device to be paired.
(default: 1234) to the Bluetooth
Pairing a Phone device. When the Bluetooth 7. Press OK.
device and infotainment system Checking the Bluetooth
When a paired device is on the
are successfully paired, 5 7 Connection
infotainment system and the SSP is
not supported: is displayed on the pair device
screen. 1. Press D.
1. Press D. . The connected phone is 2. Select settings.
highlighted by 5. 3. Press connection settings.
. The 5 7 indicates the 4. Press bluetooth settings.
hands-free and phone music 5. Press pair device.
function are enabled.
6. The paired device will show with
. The 7 indicates only 5 when connected.
hands-free function is enabled. Disconnecting the Bluetooth
. The 5 indicates only Bluetooth Device
2. Press settings. music is enabled. 1. Press D.

3. Press connection settings. Connecting a Bluetooth Device 2. Select settings.
4. Press bluetooth settings. 1. Press D. 3. Press connection settings.
2014 - 2nd Edition - 8/19/13
4. Press bluetooth settings.

. From the cell phone or Bluetooth hands-free while playing Phone
device, find the Bluetooth device music, the music is
5. Press pair device. type to set/connect the item as a discontinued. Playing music from
6. Press the name of the device to stereo headset. the car is not possible when
be disconnected. there are no music files stored in
. 5 will appear on the screen if the cell phone.
7. Press OK. the stereo headset is
Deleting a Paired Phone successfully connected. . For Bluetooth music to play, the
music must be played at least
. The sound played by the
1. Press D. Bluetooth device is delivered
once from the music player
mode of the cell phone or
2. Select settings. through the infotainment system.
Bluetooth device after
3. Press connection settings. . Bluetooth music can be played connecting as a stereo headset.
only when a Bluetooth device After being played at least once,
4. Press bluetooth settings.
has been connected. To play the music player will
5. Press pair device. Bluetooth music, connect the automatically play upon entering
6. Press Delete. Bluetooth phone to the play mode, and it will
infotainment system. automatically stop when the
7. Press Yes. . music player mode ends. If the
If the Bluetooth device is
Bluetooth Music disconnected while playing cell phone or Bluetooth device is
phone music, the music is not in the waiting screen mode,
Before playing Bluetooth music, some devices may not
read the follow information. discontinued. The audio
streaming function may not be automatically play in Bluetooth
. A cell phone or Bluetooth device supported in some Bluetooth music play mode.
that supports Advanced Audio phones. Only one function can Playing Bluetooth Music
Distribution Profile (A2DP) be used at a time between the
versions over 1.2 must be Bluetooth hands-free or Phone 1. Press D.
registered and connected to the music function. For example,
product. if you convert to the Bluetooth
2014 - 2nd Edition - 8/19/13
Playing a File Repeatedly Conditions that may occur when

playing Bluetooth music:
Press v during playback. . It takes some time to transmit
. 1: Plays the current file data from the cell phone to the
repeatedly. infotainment system.
. ALL: Plays all files repeatedly. . If the cell phone or Bluetooth
. OFF: Returns to normal device is not in the waiting
playback. screen mode, it may not
2. Press audio. automatically play despite being
This function may not be supported carried out from the Bluetooth
3. Press source R. depending on the cell phone. music play mode.
4. Press Bluetooth, then select the Playing a File Randomly . The infotainment system
connected Bluetooth music Press u during playback. transmits the order to play from
play mode. the cell phone in the Bluetooth
. NO: Plays all files repeatedly. music play mode. If this is done
Pause . in a different mode, then the
OFF: Returns to normal
Press r j to pause. playback. device transmits the order to
stop. Depending on the cell
Press r j again to resume. This function may not be supported phone’s options, this order to
depending on the cell phone. play/stop may take time to
Skipping the Previous or Next File activate.
Do not change the track too quickly
Press g or l to select the when playing Bluetooth music. . If the Bluetooth music playback
previous or next file. is not functioning, then check to
see if the cell phone is in the
Search
waiting screen mode.
Press and hold g or l to fast
forward or rewind.
2014 - 2nd Edition - 8/19/13

. Sounds may be cut off during made using OnStar Hands-Free to the system. To link to a
the Bluetooth music playback. Calling, if available. See OnStar different paired phone, see
. The infotainment system outputs Overview on page 14-1. “Connecting to a Different
the audio from the cell phone or Phone” later in this section.
Pairing Information
Bluetooth device as it is Pairing a Phone
transmitted. . A Bluetooth phone with MP3
capability can be paired to the 1. Press b / g. The system
Bluetooth (Voice vehicle as a phone and an MP3 responds “Ready,” followed by
player at the same time. a tone.
Recognition) . Up to five cell phones can be 2. Say “Bluetooth.” This command
Using Voice Recognition paired to the Bluetooth system. can be skipped.
To use voice recognition, press the . The pairing process is disabled 3. Say “Pair.” The system responds
b / g button located on the steering when the vehicle is moving. with instructions and a four-digit
wheel. Use the commands below for . Pairing only needs to be Personal Identification Number
the various voice features. For completed once, unless the (PIN). The PIN is used in Step 5.
additional information, say "Help" pairing information on the cell
while you are in a voice 4. Start the pairing process on the
phone changes or the cell phone cell phone that you want to pair.
recognition menu. is deleted from the system. For help with this process, see
Pairing . Only one paired cell phone can your cell phone manufacturer's
A Bluetooth-enabled cell phone be connected to the Bluetooth user guide.
must be paired to the Bluetooth system at a time. 5. Locate the device named “Your
system and then connected to the . If multiple paired cell phones are Vehicle” in the list on the cell
vehicle before it can be used. See within range of the system, the phone. Follow the instructions
your cell phone manufacturer's user system connects to the first on the cell phone to enter the
guide for Bluetooth functions before available paired cell phone in the PIN provided in Step 3. After the
pairing the cell phone. If a Bluetooth order that they were first paired PIN is successfully entered, the
phone is not connected, calls will be system prompts you to provide a
2014 - 2nd Edition - 8/19/13
name for the paired cell phone. Deleting a Paired Phone 2. Say “Bluetooth.”
This name will be used to If the phone name you want to 3. Say “Change phone.”
indicate which phones are delete is unknown, see “Listing All
paired and connected to the . If another cell phone is
Paired and Connected Phones.” found, the response will be
vehicle. The system responds
with “<Phone name> has been 1. Press b / g. The system “<Phone name> is now
successfully paired” after the responds “Ready,” followed by connected.”
pairing process is complete. a tone. . If another cell phone is not
6. Repeat Steps 1−5 to pair 2. Say “Bluetooth.” found, the original phone
additional phones. remains connected.
3. Say “Delete.” The system asks
Listing All Paired and Connected for which phone to delete. Storing and Deleting Phone
Phones 4. Say the name of the phone you Numbers
The system can list all cell phones want to delete. The system can store up to
paired to it. If a paired cell phone is 30 phone numbers as name tags in
also connected to the vehicle, the Connecting to a Different Phone
the Hands-Free Directory that is
system responds with “is connected” To connect to a different cell phone, shared between the Bluetooth and
after that phone name. the Bluetooth system looks for the OnStar systems.
next available cell phone in the
1. Press b / g. The system order in which all available cell
The following commands are used
responds “Ready,” followed by to delete and store phone numbers.
phones were paired. Depending on
a tone. which cell phone you want to Store: This command will store a
2. Say “Bluetooth.” connect to, you may have to use phone number, or a group of
this command several times. numbers as a name tag.
3. Say “List.”
1. Press b / g. The system Digit Store: This command allows
responds “Ready,” followed by a phone number to be stored as a
a tone. name tag by entering the digits one
at a time.
2014 - 2nd Edition - 8/19/13
Delete: This command is used to To hear all of the numbers Using the “Delete All Name Tags”
delete individual name tags. recognized by the system, say Command
Delete All Name Tags: This “Verify” at any time. This command deletes all stored
command deletes all stored name 1. Press b / g. The system name tags in the Hands-Free
tags in the Hands-Free Calling responds “Ready,” followed by Calling Directory and the
Directory and the Destinations a tone. Destinations Directory.
Directory. To delete all name tags:
2. Say “Digit Store.”
Using the “Store” Command
3. Say each digit, one at a time, 1. Press b / g. The system
1. Press b / g. The system that you want to store. After responds “Ready,” followed by
responds “Ready,” followed by each digit is entered, the system a tone.
a tone. repeats back the digit it heard 2. Say “Delete all name tags.”
followed by a tone. After the last
2. Say “Store.” digit has been entered, say Listing Stored Numbers
3. Say the phone number or group “Store,” and then follow the
The list command will list all stored
of numbers you want to store all directions given by the system to
numbers and name tags.
at once with no pauses, then save a name tag for this number.
follow the directions given by the Using the “List” Command
system to save a name tag for Using the “Delete” Command
this number. 1. Press b / g. The system
1. Press b / g. The system
responds “Ready,” followed by
Using the “Digit Store” Command responds “Ready,” followed by
a tone.
a tone.
If an unwanted number is 2. Say “Directory.”
recognized by the system, say 2. Say “Delete.”
“Clear” at any time to clear the last 3. Say “Hands-Free Calling.”
3. Say the name tag you want to
number. delete. 4. Say “List.”
2014 - 2nd Edition - 8/19/13
Making a Call Calling 911 Emergency Number 2. Say “Digit Dial.”

Calls can be made using the 1. Press b / g. The system 3. Say each digit, one at a time,
following commands. responds “Ready,” followed by that you want to dial. After each
a tone. digit is entered, the system
Dial or Call: The dial or call
repeats back the digit it heard
command can be used 2. Say “Dial” or “Call.” followed by a tone. After the last
interchangeably to dial a phone
3. Say “911.” digit has been entered,
number or a stored name tag.
say “Dial.”
Digit Dial: This command allows a 4. Say “Dial” or “Call.”
Once connected, the person called
phone number to be dialed by Using the “Digit Dial” Command will be heard through the audio
entering the digits one at a time.
The digit dial command allows a speakers.
Re-dial: This command is used to phone number to be dialed by
dial the last number used on the cell Using the “Re-dial” Command
entering the digits one at a time.
phone. After each digit is entered, the 1. Press b / g. The system
Using the “Dial” or “Call” system repeats back the digit it responds “Ready,” followed by
Command heard followed by a tone. a tone.
If an unwanted number is 2. After the tone, say “Re-dial.” The
1. Press b / g. The system recognized by the system, say system dials the last number
responds “Ready,” followed by “Clear” at any time to clear the last called from the connected cell
a tone. number. phone.
2. Say “Dial” or “Call.” To hear all of the numbers Once connected, the person called
3. Say the entire number without recognized by the system, say will be heard through the audio
pausing or say the name tag. “Verify” at any time. speakers.
Once connected, the person called 1. Press b / g. The system
will be heard through the audio responds “Ready,” followed by
speakers. a tone.
2014 - 2nd Edition - 8/19/13
Receiving a Call Three-Way Calling To cancel mute, press b / g , and

When an incoming call is received, Three-way calling must be then say “Un-mute Call.”
the audio system mutes and a ring supported on the cell phone and Transferring a Call
tone is heard in the vehicle. enabled by the wireless service
carrier. Audio can be transferred between
. Press b / g to answer the call. the Bluetooth system and the cell
1. While on a call, press b / g. phone.
. Press $ / i to ignore a call.
2. Say “Three-way call.” The cell phone must be paired and
Call Waiting 3. Use the dial or call command to connected with the Bluetooth
Call waiting must be supported on dial the number of the third party system before a call can be
the cell phone and enabled by the to be called. transferred. The connection process
wireless service carrier. can take up to two minutes after the
4. Once the call is connected, ignition is turned to ON/RUN.
. Press b / g to answer an press b / g to link all callers
incoming call when another call together. To Transfer Audio from the
is active. The original call is Bluetooth System to a Cell Phone
placed on hold. Ending a Call During a call with the audio in the
Press $ / i to end a call. vehicle:
. Press b / g again to return to
the original call. Muting a Call 1. Press b / g.
. To ignore the incoming call, no During a call, all sounds from inside 2. Say “Transfer Call.”
action is required. the vehicle can be muted so that the To Transfer Audio to the Bluetooth
. Press $ / i to disconnect the person on the other end of the call System from a Cell Phone
current call and switch to the call cannot hear them.
During a call with the audio on the
on hold. To mute a call, press b / g , and cell phone, press b / g. The audio
then say “Mute Call.” transfers to the vehicle. If the audio
2014 - 2nd Edition - 8/19/13
does not transfer to the vehicle, use Dual Tone Multi-Frequency previous sections on deleting a
the audio transfer feature on the cell (DTMF) Tones paired phone and deleting
phone. See the cell phone name tags.
manufacturer's user guide. The Bluetooth system can send
numbers and the numbers stored as
Voice Pass-Thru name tags during a call. You can
Hands-Free Phone
use this feature when calling a General Information with
Voice pass-thru allows access to the
menu-driven phone system. Touchscreen
voice recognition commands on the
Account numbers can also be
cell phone. See the cell phone
stored for use.
manufacturer's user guide to see if
the cell phone supports this feature. Sending a Number or Name Tag
To access contacts stored in the cell During a Call
phone: 1. Press b / g. The system
1. Press b / g. The system responds “Ready,” followed by
responds “Ready,” followed by a tone.
a tone. 2. Say “Dial.”
2. Say “Bluetooth.” This command 3. Say the number or name tag
can be skipped. to send.
3. Say “Voice.” The system Clearing the System
responds “OK, accessing
Unless information is deleted out of Vehicles with a Hands-Free Phone
<phone name>.”
the in-vehicle Bluetooth system, it system can use a Bluetooth-capable
The cell phone's normal prompt will be retained indefinitely. This cell phone with a hands-free profile
messages will go through their cycle includes all saved name tags in the to make and receive phone calls.
according to the phone's operating phone book and phone pairing The infotainment system and voice
instructions. information. For information on how control are used to operate the
to delete this information, see the
2014 - 2nd Edition - 8/19/13
system. Not all phones support all $ / i (Mute/End Call): Press to Switching a Call to the Cell Phone
functions and not all phones work end a call, decline a call, or cancel (Private Mode)
with the Hands-Free Phone system. an operation. To switch the call from the cell
Hands-Free Phone Controls Making a Call by Entering a Phone phone to hands-free:
Use the buttons on the infotainment Number 1. Press 0.
system and the steering wheel to
operate the Hands-Free Phone 2. Press 0 again to switch back to
system. hands-free.
Steering Wheel Controls Turning the Microphone On
and Off
Steering wheel controls can be
used to: Press 3 to turn the microphone on
. Answer incoming calls. or off.
. Confirm system information. Calling by Redial
. End a call. 1. Enter the phone number using To call by using redial:
the keypad on the telephone
. Decline a call. screen. . Press b / g on the steering
. Cancel an operation. wheel controls to display the
2. Press 5 on the screen or b / g redial guidance screen.
. Make outgoing calls using the on the steering wheel controls.
call list. . Press and hold 5 on the
If a wrong number is entered, press telephone screen.
b / g (Push to Talk): Press to } to delete the number one digit at
answer incoming calls and to a time, or press and hold } to Redialing is not possible when there
confirm system information. Press delete all digits of the number. is no call history.
and hold for two to three seconds to
access the call list.
2014 - 2nd Edition - 8/19/13
Taking calls 2. Press 9 on the phone book will display on the phone book
When a phone call comes through screen. screen. As more characters of the
the connected Bluetooth cell phone, name are entered, the list of
3. Use the keypad to input the possible names is shortened.
the playing track will be cut off and name to search. For details,
the phone will ring with the relevant refer to the “Searching for a To search for the name Alex:
information displayed. Name” later in this section. 1. Press (abc) to select the first
Press b / g on the steering wheel 4. Select the phone book entry character.
controls or press Accept on the to call. 2. Press (jkl) to select the second
screen. 5. Press the number to dial. character.
To decline the call, press $ / i on When the Bluetooth device and 3. Press (def) to select the third
the steering wheel controls or press infotainment system are character.
Reject on the screen. successfully paired, the phone book 4. Press (wxy) to select the fourth
Using the Phone Book Menu will download. Some phones may character.
not download automatically. If this
1. Press Phone Book on the happens, connect it again or Making a Call from Call History
telephone screen. proceed with the phone book 1. Press Call History on the
download on the phone. telephone screen.
2. Press Q or R to scroll through
the list. Always accept the Phone book 2. Press one of the following for:
request on the initial pairing of the
3. Select the phone book entry phone.
. 2 Dialed calls.
to call.
4. Press the number to dial. Searching for a Name . 4 Missed calls.
Select characters by using the . 9 Received calls.
Searching for Phone Book Entries keypad on the phone book screen.
1. Press Phone Book on the As characters are selected, the 3. Select the phone book entry
telephone screen. names that include those characters to call.
2014 - 2nd Edition - 8/19/13
Making a Call with Speed Dial Downloadable www.pandora.com. Pandora may

Numbers not be available in Canada or
Press and hold the speed dial
Applications Mexico.
number using the keypad on the Stitcher SmartRadio is an Internet
telephone screen. Smartphone Link radio service that streams news,
Only speed dial numbers already (Overview) sports, and entertainment shows
stored on the cell phone can be through the audio system. Create
Before Using Smartphone Link personalized, on-demand stations or
used for speed dial calls. Up to
two-digit speed dial numbers are If equipped, the vehicle can connect discover new shows through
supported. to Pandora®, Stitcher Stitcher's preset stations. To set up
SmartRadio™, or other available an account, download the
For two-digit speed dial numbers, applications through the application from the Android Market
press and hold the second digit to infotainment system. The or iTunes Store, or go to
make a call to the speed dial applications must be downloaded to www.stitcher.com.
number. the device first, then connect the A phone or tablet with Internet
device to the infotainment system. connection and the application
Pandora is a free Internet radio installed is required. Personal cell
service that streams personalized phone data plans are used. Make
radio stations based on artists, sure the latest version is installed
songs, genres, and comedians. on the device and the volume is
Create stations using the Pandora turned up.
website or smartphone application, Smartphone Supported by
then use - (thumbs up) or , Application
(thumbs down) to personalize To use Applications:
stations. To set up an account,
or for more information, go to . Connect an iPod/iPhone using
the USB port.
2014 - 2nd Edition - 8/19/13

. Connect Andriod™ phones not allow this application to be
. When the application is stopped
through Bluetooth. opened on a USB connection. on the smartphone, it usually
iPod/iPhone Error Messages and Please refer to owner’s manual.” takes time to return to normal
Solution operation. Try to activate the
. Activate the application on your application after 10–20 seconds.
If the system fails to activate the iPhone, then press the desired
application on the iPod/iPhone application menu on the To switch to another application
connected, an error message is infotainment system. while playing an application and
displayed as, “Unable to start connected through the USB port,
Connecting Application Error press the HOME button on the iPod/
application, possible reasons.”
If the infotainment system fails to iPhone, then press the application
. Your iPhone is locked. To activate the application on the icon on the infotainment system.
resolve, unlock the iPhone. smartphone connected through Switching Between a USB
. You have another active Bluetooth wireless technology, the Connected Device and a
application open. To resolve, error message is displayed as, Bluetooth Device
close the other active “Connecting application error.”
application. When the iPhone is connected to
. Reset all settings related to the the infotainment system through the
. You have not installed the phone, then press the desired USB port, and the infotainment
application on your iPhone. To application menu on the system is connected to another
resolve, install the application on infotainment system. phone through Bluetooth wireless
the iPhone. . Reconnect the smartphone and technology, press iPhone or
iOS Version Error infotainment system through bluetooth phone on the smartphone
Bluetooth wireless technology, list menu to switch between the two
If the iOS version of the iPhone is then press the desired applications.
less than 4.0, the error message is application menu on the
displayed as, “Your iPhone does infotainment system.
2014 - 2nd Edition - 8/19/13
Displaying or Hiding Application How to Connect Application Smartphone Link

Icons This section explains a general (Pandora)
To display or hide application icons operation. It may vary depending on
on the smartphone link menu: the phone operation system, Some images and explanations may
versions and/or application versions. vary by phone operating systems,
1. Press D. versions, and/or application (App)
To connect an application: versions.
2. Press smartphone link.
1. Install the application on the Using Pandora
smartphone from Appstore or
Playstore. 1. Install the Pandora application
on the smartphone.
2. Connect the smartphone to the
infotainment system through the 2. Connect the smartphone to the
USB port or Bluetooth. infotainment system through the
USB port or Bluetooth wireless
. iPhone: USB port technology.
. Android phone: Bluetooth . iPhone: USB connection.
3. Activate the application. . Android phone/BlackBerry
3. Press SETTINGS.
4. PressD to play the application phone: Bluetooth wireless
4. Press the desired application technology.
through the Infotainment system.
icon to hide or display it on the
The smartphone link menu is 3. Activate the Pandora application.
smartphone link screen.
displayed.
5. Press OK. 4. Press D.
5. Press the application icon.
If the activated application is on the
6. The application screen is 5. Press ^ smartphone link.
smartphone link menu, the ^ is displayed.
activated in the upper position of the
HOME menu or playing screen.
2014 - 2nd Edition - 8/19/13
Changing Tracks Creating Stations by Searching

by Artist or Track
Press l to change to the next
track. 1. Press MENU. The Pandora
menu is displayed.
Bookmark
2. Press create station.
To bookmark a favorite artist or
track: 3. Press enter artist/track. The
keypad is displayed.
1. Press S on the screen. 4. Enter the artist or track name
6. Press Pandora.
2. Press Artist or Track. using the keypad, then press
If the smartphone is not connected Create.
to the infotainment system or the Pandora Menus
5. Press the desired station. The
application is not installed on the Creating Stations from Currently station is added into the
smartphone, the Pandora menu is Playing Music Pandora menu automatically.
not activated.
1. Press MENU. The Pandora Listening to Stations
Thumbs Up and Thumbs Down menu is displayed.
1. Press MENU. The Pandora
Rate tracks by using - (thumbs up) 2. Press create station. menu is displayed.
or , (thumbs down). 3. Press from currently playing.
2. Press Q or R to scroll through
Pause 4. Press Artist or Track. the list. Select the desired
5. Press the desired station. The station.
. Press j to pause. station is added into the QuickMix
. Press r to resume. Pandora menu automatically.
1. Press MENU. The Pandora
menu is displayed.
2014 - 2nd Edition - 8/19/13
2. Press QuickMix Z to listen to a 2. Connect the smartphone to the If the smartphone is not connected
selection of tracks from your infotainment system through the to the infotainment system or the
stations. USB port or Bluetooth wireless application is not installed on the
technology. smartphone, the Stitcher menu is
Tone Settings not activated.
. iPhone: USB connection.
1. Press MENU. The Pandora Thumbs Up and Thumbs Down
menu is displayed.
. Android phone/BlackBerry
phone: Bluetooth wireless Rate tracks by using - (thumbs up)
2. Press tone settings. The tone technology.
settings menu is displayed. See or , (thumbs down).
“Tone Settings” under “Radio 3. Activate the Stitcher application.
Controls with Touchscreen” in Pause
4. Press D.
Operation on page 7-8. . Press j to pause.
5. Press ^ smartphone link.
Smartphone Link . Press r to resume.
(Stitcher) Changing Stations
Some images and explanations may Press l to change to the next
vary by phone operating systems, station.
versions, and/or application (App)
versions. Saving Favorites
Using Stitcher To save a station as a favorite,
1. Install the Stitcher application on press q on the stitcher screen.
the smartphone. 6. Press Stitcher.
2014 - 2nd Edition - 8/19/13
Stitcher Menus
. ID3 Tag information for MP3
Bluetooth Phone/ files, such as the album name
The Stitcher Station menu displays
available station data from the
Devices and the artist, can be played.
Stitcher server.
. To display album title, track title,
Pictures and Movies and artist information, the file
1. Press MENU. The Stitcher should be compatible with the
Station menu is displayed. (Audio System)
ID3 Tag V1 and V2 formats.
The infotainment system can play
2. Press Q or R to scroll through Using USB Storage Devices and
the music files contained in the USB
the list. Select the desired storage device or iPod/iPhone iPod/iPhone
station. products. . Use a USB or flash memory type
Tone Settings storage device. Do not connect
Audio System Information
1. Press MENU. The Stitcher menu using a USB adaptor.
is displayed. Using MP3/WMA/OGG/WAV Files . Do not connect and reconnect
2. Press tone settings. The tone
. Music files with .mp3, .wma, the USB device repeatedly in a
settings menu is displayed. See .ogg, and .wav file name short time, as this may cause
“Tone Settings” under “Radio extensions can be played. static electricity and problems
Controls with Touchscreen” in . MP3 files that can be played using the device.
Operation on page 7-8. are: Bit rate: 8 kbps to . Use a USB device with a metal
320 kbps - Sampling frequency: connecting terminal.
48 kHz, 44.1 kHz, 32 kHz, . Connection with i-Stick Type
24 kHz, 22.05 kHz, and 16 kHz.
USB storage devices may be
. Files with a bit rate above faulty due to vehicle vibration.
128 kbps will result in higher . Do not to touch the USB
quality sound.
connecting terminal.
2014 - 2nd Edition - 8/19/13

. Only USB storage devices on while the USB device is
. USB storage device capacity
formatted in FAT16/32, exFAT connected, the USB device may limit is 2,500 music files,
file system are recognized. be damaged or may not operate 2,500 photo files, 250 movie
NTFS and other file systems are normally. files, 2,500 folders, and
not recognized. .
10 stages of folder structure.
USB storage devices can only The iPod/iPhone can play all
. The time it takes to process files be connected for playing music/
will depend on the USB storage music files supported, but will
movies, viewing photo files, only display up to 2,500 files on
device type and capacity, and or upgrading.
the type of files stored. the screen in alphabetical order.
. Do not use the USB terminal to . Some iPod/iPhone product
. Some USB storage device files charge USB accessory
may not be compatible. models may not support the
equipment. The heat generated connectivity or functionality of
. Up to two USB devices and one may cause performance issues this product.
iPod can be played through a or damage.
. Only connect the iPod/iPhone
USB hub. All devices may not be . Store files in the top-level drive
supported, depending on the with connection cables
of the USB storage device. supported by iPod/iPhone
performance of the USB hub. When the logical drive is
If there is not enough power products. Other connection
separated from the device, only cables cannot be used.
supply, it may not operate the USB music files from the
normally. top-level logical drive can be
. The iPod/iPhone may be
. Do not disconnect the USB played. Music files stored on damaged if it is connected to the
storage device while it is playing. USB storage devices may not vehicle with the ignition on.
This may cause damage to the play normally if an application is When not in use, disconnect the
product or affect the loaded by partitioning a separate iPod/iPhone.
performance of the USB device. drive.
. Disconnect the USB storage . Music files to which Digital Right
device when the ignition is Management (DRM) is applied
turned off. If the ignition is turned cannot be played.
2014 - 2nd Edition - 8/19/13

. When the iPod/iPhone is . Refer to the table for the If the USB device is already
connected to the USB port by classification items related to the connected:
using the iPod/iPhone cable, the search function provided by the
Bluetooth music is not iPod/iPhone. . Press D.
supported. . Press audio.
USB Player
. Connect the iPod/iPhone to the
USB port by using the iPod/ Playing Music from a USB Device . Press SourceR.
iPhone cable to play the music . Connect the USB device to the . Press USB.
files. When the iPod/iPhone is USB port.
To stop the USB device and select
connected to the AUX input . Play will start automatically after another media source, press
terminal, the music file will the system has finished reading
not play. SourceR, then select the other
the USB device. source.
. The iPod/iPhone playback . If a non-readable USB device is
functions and the information To remove the USB device, select
connected, an error message another function, then remove the
displayed may be different when displays and the system will
played on the infotainment USB device.
switch to the previous audio
system. function. Pause
. Press j to pause.
. Press r to resume.
Changing to Next/Previous Files
. Press l to change to the
next file.
2014 - 2nd Edition - 8/19/13
. Press g within five seconds of

. OFF: Returns to normal
the playback time to play the playback.
previous file. Viewing Information on the
Returning to the Beginning of the Currently Playing File
Current File Press the title during playback to
display information about the current
Press g after five seconds of the
file playing.
playback time.
. The information displayed
Scanning Forward or Backward includes the title, file name, . Press the play mode.
Press and hold g or l during folder name, and artist/album
saved with the song. Tone Settings
playback to rewind or fast forward.
Release the button to resume . Incorrect information cannot be 1. Press R.
playback at normal speed. modified or corrected on the 2. Press tone settings. The Tone
Playing a File Repeatedly infotainment system. Settings menu is displayed. See
. The information for songs “Tone Settings” under “Radio
Press v during playback. expressed in special symbols or Controls with Touchscreen” in
. 1: Plays the current file in unavailable languages may be Operation on page 7-8.
repeatedly. displayed as “u.” iPod/iPhone Player
. ALL: Plays all files repeatedly. Using the USB Music Menu This feature is limited to models
. OFF: Returns to normal . Press MENU during playback. supporting the iPod/iPhone
playback. connection.
Playing a File Randomly Playing Music Files
Press u during playback. . Connect the iPod/iPhone to the
USB port.
. NO: Plays all files randomly.
2014 - 2nd Edition - 8/19/13

. Play will start from the previously Pause Playing a File Repeatedly
played point after the system
has finished reading the USB . Press j to pause. Press v during playback.
device.
Press r to resume. 1: Plays the current file
. .
. If a non-readable USB device is repeatedly.
connected, an error message Changing to Next/Previous Song
. ALL: Plays all files repeatedly.
displays and the system will . Press l to change to the
switch to the previous audio . OFF: Returns to normal
next song. playback.
function.
If the iPod/iPhone is already
. Press g within two seconds of Playing a File Randomly
connected: the playback time to play the
previous file. Press u during playback.
1. Press D. Returning to the Beginning of the . NO: Plays all files randomly.
2. Press e audio. Current File . OFF: Returns to normal
Press g after two seconds of the playback.
3. Press SourceR.
playback time. Viewing Information on the
4. Press iPod. Currently Playing Song
Scanning Forward or Backward
To stop the device and select Press the title during playback to
another media source, press Press and hold g or l during display information about the current
SourceR, then select the other playback to rewind or fast forward. song playing.
source. Release the button to resume
playback at normal speed.
. The information displayed
To remove the device, select includes the title, file name,
another function, then remove the folder name, and artist/album
device. saved with the song.
2014 - 2nd Edition - 8/19/13

. Incorrect information cannot be 2. Press tone settings. The tone
. Some files may not operate due
modified or corrected on the settings menu is displayed. See to a different recording format or
infotainment system. “Tone Settings” under “Radio the condition of the file.
. The information for songs Controls with Touchscreen” in Viewing Pictures
expressed in special symbols or Operation on page 7-8.
in unavailable languages may be 1. Connect the USB device to the
Pictures and Movies USB port.
displayed as “u.”
(Picture System)
The infotainment system can view
picture files stored on a USB device.
Picture System Information
Caution for Using Picture Files
. File size:
‐ JPG: Within 64 to 5,000 pixels
(Width) and 64 to 5,000 pixels 2. Press the screen to open to full
Using the iPod Menu (Height). screen. Press the screen again
. Press MENU during playback. ‐ BMP, PNG, GIF: Within 64 to to return to the previous screen.
. Press the appropriate 1,024 pixels (Width) and 64 to If the USB device is already
play mode. 1,024 pixels (Height). connected:
Tone Settings
. File extensions: .jpg, .bmp, .png, 1. Press D.
.gif. Animated .gif files are not
1. Press R on the iPod menu. supported. 2. Press G picture & movie.
3. Press SourceR.
4. Press USB picture.
2014 - 2nd Edition - 8/19/13
Some features are disabled while 3. Press 4 to exit.

the vehicle is in motion.
Viewing a Slide Show Pictures and Movies
1. From the picture screen, press (Movie System)
z. The slide show will start The infotainment system can play
to play. movie files stored on a USB device.
2. Press the screen to cancel the Movie System Information
slide show during the slide show
playback. 2. Press the appropriate menu: Caution for Using Movie Files
. picture file list: lists all
Viewing a Previous or Next
. Available resolution: Within
Picture picture files. 720 x 576 (W x H) pixels.
. sort by title: shows pictures . Frame rate: Less than 30 fps.
Press t or u from the picture in title order.
screen. . Playable movie file: .avi, .mpg,
. sort by date: shows pictures .mp4, .divx, .xvid, .wmv. The
Rotating a Picture in date order. playable movie file may not be
Press y or w from the picture . slide show time: allows played according to the codec
screen. selection of the slide show format.
interval. . Playable codec format: divx,
Enlarging a Picture xvid, mpeg-1, mpeg-4 (mpg4,
. clock/temp display: allows
Press x from the picture screen. selection of On or Off to mp42, mp43), wmv9 (wmv3).
show the clock and . Playable Audio format: MP3,
Using the USB Picture Menu
temperature on the full AC3, AAC, WMA.
1. Press MENU from the picture screen.
screen.
. Max video bitrate:
. display settings: adjusts for
‐ mpeg-1: 8 Mbps
Brightness and Contrast.
2014 - 2nd Edition - 8/19/13
‐ mpeg-4 (mpg4, mp42, mp43): If the USB device is already Changing to Next/Previous Movie
4 Mbps connected: . Press u to change to the
‐ wmv9: 3 Mbps 1. Press D. next file.
‐ divx 3: 3 Mbps
2. Press G picture & movie. . Press t within five seconds of
‐ divx 4/5/6: 4.8 Mbps the playback time to play the
3. Press SourceR. previous file.
‐ xvid: 4.5 Mbps
4. Press USB movie. Returning to the Beginning of the
. Max audio bitrate:
Movie is not available while driving. Current Movie
‐ mp3: 320 Kbps
‐ wma: 320 Kbps Viewing a Slide Show Press t after five seconds of the
playback time.
‐ ac-3: 640 Kbps From the picture screen, press z.
Scanning Forward or Backward
‐ aac: 449 Kbps . The slide show will start to play.
. Movie files to which Digital Right . Press the screen to cancel the Press and hold t or u during
Management (DRM) is applied slide show during the slide show playback to rewind or fast forward.
may not be played. playback. Release the button to resume
playback at normal speed.
Playing a Movie File
. The last played audio source will
play as background music Viewing Full Screen
1. Connect the USB device to the during the slide show playback.
USB port. Press t from the movie screen.
Pause Press t again to return to the
2. Press the screen to open to full
screen. Press the screen again . Press j to pause. previous screen.
to return to the previous screen.
. Press r to resume. Using the USB Movie Menu
1. Press MENU from the movie
screen.
2014 - 2nd Edition - 8/19/13
Subtitle Language Trademarks and

If the movie file has a subtitle
language, it can be viewed.
License Agreements
FCC Information
. Press q from the movie screen.
. Press S or T on the pop-up page 13-15.
screen.
Bluetooth®
. Press r to close the pop-up
2. Press the appropriate menu: The Bluetooth word mark and logos
screen. are owned by the Bluetooth® SIG,
. movie file list: lists all movie If there is only one subtitle Inc. and any use of such marks by
files. language, it can be set to On/Off. General Motors is under license.
. clock/temp display: allows Other trademarks and trade names
selection of On or Off to Audio Language are those of their respective owners.
show the clock and If the movie file has an audio
temperature on the full language, it can be used.
screen. . Press q from the movie screen.
. display settings: adjusts for
Brightness and Contrast. . Press Z S or T on the pop-up
. tone settings: shows the screen.
sound setup. See “Tone . Press r to close the pop-up DivX Certified® to play DivX® video,
Settings” under “Radio screen. including premium content.
Controls with Touchscreen”
in Operation on page 7-8. An audio language can be set only Covered by one or more of the
when supported by the DivX following U.S. patents: 7,295,673;
3. Press 4 to exit. movie file. 7,460,668; 7,515,710; 7,519,274.
2014 - 2nd Edition - 8/19/13
DivX®, DivX Certified® and Explicit Language Notice: Channels

associated logos are trademarks of with frequent explicit language are
Rovi Corporation or its subsidiaries indicated with an “XL” preceding the
and are used under license. channel name. Channel blocking is
available for SiriusXM Satellite
Radio receivers by notifying
Fees and Taxes: Subscription fee, SiriusXM:
taxes, one time activation fee, and . USA: 866-635-2349 or see
other fees may apply. Subscription www.siriusxm.com.
fee is consumer only. All fees and . Canada: 877-209-0079 or see
programming subject to change.
www.xmradio.ca.
“Made for iPod” and “Made for Subscriptions subject to Customer
iPhone” mean that an electronic Agreement available at It is prohibited to copy, decompile,
accessory has been designed to www.siriusxm.com. SiriusXM® disassemble, reverse engineer,
connect specifically to iPod or service only available in the hack, manipulate, or otherwise
iPhone and has been certified by 48 contiguous United States and make available any technology or
the developer to meet Apple Canada. software incorporated in receivers
performance standards. compatible with the SiriusXM
In Canada: Some deterioration of
Satellite Radio System or that
iPod and iPhone are trademarks of service may occur in extreme
support the SiriusXM website, the
Apple Computer, Inc., registered in northern latitudes. This is beyond
Online Service or any of its content.
the U.S. and other countries. the control of SiriusXM® Satellite
Furthermore, the AMBER voice
Radio.
compression software included in
this product is protected by
intellectual property rights including
patent rights, copyrights, and trade
secrets of Digital Voice
Systems, Inc.
2014 - 2nd Edition - 8/19/13
General Requirements:
1. A License Agreement from
SiriusXM is required for any
product that incorporates
SiriusXM Technology and/or for
use of any of the SiriusXM
marks to be manufactured,
distributed, or marketed in the
SiriusXM Service Area.
2. For products to be distributed,
marketed, and/or sold in
Canada, a separate agreement
is required with Canadian
Satellite Radio Inc. (operating as
XM Canada).
FreeType 2
Portions of this software are
®
copyright 2007-2012 The
FreeType Project
(www.freetype.org). All rights
reserved.
Libjpeg
The navigation software is based in
part on the work of the independent
JPEG Group.
2014 - 2nd Edition - 8/19/13
Climate Controls 8-1
Climate Controls Climate Control 5. Air Conditioning

6. Rear Window Defogger
Systems
7. Recirculation
Climate Control Systems These climate control systems
Climate Control Systems . . . . . . 8-1 control the heating, cooling, and
ventilation for the vehicle.
Air Vents
Air Vents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-4
Maintenance
Air Intake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-4
Passenger Compartment Air
Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-4

Heater Only
Climate Control System with 1. Temperature Control
Heater and Air Conditioning 2. Fan Control
1. Temperature Control 3. Air Delivery Mode Control
2. Fan Control 4. Rear Window Defogger
3. Air Delivery Mode Control Temperature Control: Turn
4. Driver and Passenger Heated clockwise or counterclockwise to
Seats (If Equipped) increase or decrease the
temperature.
2014 - 2nd Edition - 8/19/13
8-2 Climate Controls
A (Fan Control): Turn clockwise 1 (Defrost): This mode clears the For quick cool down on hot days, do
or counterclockwise to increase or windshield of fog or frost more the following:
decrease the fan speed. Turning the quickly. Air is directed to the 1. Open the windows to let hot air
fan control to 0 turns the fan off. The windshield and side window outlets. escape.
fan must be turned on to run the air Do not drive the vehicle until all
conditioning compressor. windows are clear.
2. Press M.
Air Delivery Mode Control: Turn In defrost or defog mode, excessive 3. Press #.
clockwise or counterclockwise to air conditioning use can cause the
change the current airflow mode. 4. Select the coolest temperature.
windows to fog. If this happens,
Select from the following air delivery change the air delivery mode to Y 5. Select the highest A speed.
modes: and reduce the fan speed. Using these settings together for
Y (Vent): Air is directed to the # (Air Conditioning): If equipped long periods of time may cause the
instrument panel outlets. with air conditioning, follow these air inside the vehicle to become too
dry. To prevent this from happening,
\ (Bi-Level): Air is divided steps to use the system. Turn A to after the air in the vehicle has
between the instrument panel and the desired speed. The air cooled, turn the recirculation
floor outlets. conditioning does not operate when mode off.
[ (Floor): Air is directed to the the fan control knob is in the off
floor outlets, with some air directed position. Press # to turn the air M (Recirculation): This mode
recirculates and helps to quickly
to the rear outlets. conditioning on and off. When # is cool the air inside the vehicle. It can
W (Defog): This mode clears the pressed, an indicator light comes on be used to prevent outside air and
windows of fog or moisture. Air is to show that the air conditioning odors from entering the vehicle.
directed to the floor, windshield, and is on.
side window outlets.
2014 - 2nd Edition - 8/19/13
Press the button to turn the M orL (Heated Seats, If

recirculation mode on. An indicator Equipped): Press to heat the driver { Caution
light comes on to show that the or passenger seat. See Heated
recirculation is on. Press the button Using a razor blade or sharp
Front Seats on page 3-6. object on the inside rear window
again to return to outside air mode.
Rear Window and Outside can damage the antenna or
Using the recirculation mode for defogger. Repairs would not be
extended periods may cause the
Mirror Defogger
covered by the vehicle warranty.
windows to fog. If this happens, 1 (Rear Window Defogger): Do not stick anything to the rear
select the defrost mode. Press to turn the rear window and
window.
outside mirror defogger on or off. An
Max # is available when the air indicator light comes on to show
conditioning is selected and the that the feature is on.
temperature is set to the coolest
setting while the outside air The rear window defogger turns off
after about 10 minutes. It can also
temperature is warm. When Max #
is activated, the air inside the be turned off by pressing 1 again
vehicle is automatically recirculated, or by turning the ignition to ACC/
which helps to quickly cool the ACCESSORY or LOCK/OFF.
vehicle. The recirculation indicator If turned on again it runs for about
will not be lit. five minutes before turning off.
To allow outside air to enter in these If equipped with heated outside
conditions, press the recirculation rearview mirrors, they turn on with
button twice. The recirculation the rear window defogger and help
indicator will not be lit. to clear fog or frost from the surface
of the mirror. See Heated Mirrors on
page 2-16.
2014 - 2nd Edition - 8/19/13
Air Vents Maintenance

Use the air vents located in the
center and on the side of the Air Intake
instrument panel to direct the Clear away any ice, snow, or leaves
airflow. Move the slats on the center from the air intake at the base of the
air vents to direct airflow. windshield that can block the flow of
Turn the knobs on the side air vents air into the vehicle.
counterclockwise or clockwise to
open or close off the airflow. Passenger Compartment
Operation Tips Air Filter
. Clear away any ice, snow, The filter removes dust, pollen, and 1. Open the glove box completely
or leaves from the air inlets at other airborne irritants from outside and pull it to remove.
the base of the windshield that air that is pulled into the vehicle.
2. Remove the filter cover by
may block the flow of air into the The filter should be replaced as part unscrewing both sides of the
vehicle. of routine scheduled maintenance. cover.
. Use of non-GM approved hood See Maintenance Schedule on
deflectors may adversely affect page 11-2. To find out what type of
the performance of the system. filter to use, see Maintenance
Replacement Parts on page 11-14.
. Keep the path under the front
seats clear of objects to help
circulate the air inside the
vehicle more effectively.
2014 - 2nd Edition - 8/19/13
3. Install the new air filter.

4. Reinstall the air filter cover and
glove box in reverse order.
See your dealer if additional
assistance is needed.
2014 - 2nd Edition - 8/19/13
2 NOTES
2014 - 2nd Edition - 8/19/13
Driving and Operating 9-1
Driving and Shifting Into Park (Automatic Cruise Control

Transmission) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-18 Cruise Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-30
Operating Shifting out of Park (Automatic
Transmission) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-19 Driver Assistance Systems
Parking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-19 Forward Collision Alert (FCA)
Driving Information Parking over Things System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-32
Distracted Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2 That Burn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-20 Rear Vision
Defensive Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2 Camera (RVC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-34
Drunk Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3 Engine Exhaust Lane Departure
Control of a Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3 Engine Exhaust . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-20 Warning (LDW) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-36
Braking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3 Running the Vehicle While
Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3 Parked . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-21 Fuel
Off-Road Recovery . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-4 Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-38
Loss of Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-4
Automatic Transmission Recommended Fuel . . . . . . . . . 9-38
Driving on Wet Roads . . . . . . . . . 9-5 Automatic Transmission . . . . . 9-21 Gasoline Specifications . . . . . . 9-39
Highway Hypnosis . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-6 Manual Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-23 California Fuel
Hill and Mountain Roads . . . . . . 9-6 Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-39
Manual Transmission Fuels in Foreign Countries . . . 9-39
Winter Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-7 Manual Transmission . . . . . . . . 9-24
If the Vehicle Is Stuck . . . . . . . . . 9-8 Fuel Additives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-40
Vehicle Load Limits . . . . . . . . . . . 9-9 Brakes Filling the Tank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-40
Antilock Brake Filling a Portable Fuel
Starting and Operating System (ABS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-25 Container . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-41
New Vehicle Break-In . . . . . . . . 9-13 Parking Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-26
Ignition Positions . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-14 Trailer Towing
Brake Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-27 General Towing
Starting the Engine . . . . . . . . . . 9-15 Hill Start Assist (HSA) . . . . . . . 9-27
Engine Heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-17 Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-42
Retained Accessory Ride Control Systems Conversions and Add-Ons
Power (RAP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-17 Traction Control/Electronic Add-On Electrical
Stability Control . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-28 Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-42
2014 - 2nd Edition - 8/19/13
9-2 Driving and Operating

. Designate a front seat
Driving Information passenger to handle potential { Warning
distractions.
Distracted Driving . Become familiar with vehicle
Taking your eyes off the road too
long or too often could cause a
Distraction comes in many forms features before driving, such as
and can take your focus from the crash resulting in injury or death.
programming favorite radio
task of driving. Exercise good stations and adjusting climate Focus your attention on driving.
judgment and do not let other control and seat settings.
activities divert your attention away Program all trip information into Refer to the Infotainment section for
from the road. Many local any navigation device prior to more information on using that
governments have enacted laws driving. system, including pairing and using
regarding driver distraction. Become a cell phone.
. Wait until the vehicle is parked
familiar with the local laws in
to retrieve items that have fallen
your area. Defensive Driving
to the floor.
To avoid distracted driving, always Defensive driving means “always
. Stop or park the vehicle to tend
keep your eyes on the road, hands expect the unexpected.” The first
to children.
on the wheel, and mind on the drive. step in driving defensively is to wear
. Keep pets in an appropriate the safety belt. See Safety Belts on
. Do not use a phone in
carrier or restraint. page 3-8.
demanding driving situations.
Use a hands-free method to . Avoid stressful conversations . Assume that other road users
place or receive necessary while driving, whether with a (pedestrians, bicyclists, and
phone calls. passenger or on a cell phone. other drivers) are going to be
. Watch the road. Do not read, careless and make mistakes.
take notes, or look up Anticipate what they might do
information on phones or other and be ready.
electronic devices.
2014 - 2nd Edition - 8/19/13

. Allow enough following distance
between you and the driver in
Control of a Vehicle If the engine ever stops while the
vehicle is being driven, brake
front of you. Braking, steering, and accelerating normally but do not pump the
are important factors in helping to brakes. Doing so could make the
. Focus on the task of driving.
control a vehicle while driving. pedal harder to push down. If the
Drunk Driving engine stops, there will be some
Braking power brake assist but it will be
Death and injury associated with used when the brake is applied.
Braking action involves perception
drinking and driving is a global Once the power assist is used up, it
time and reaction time. Deciding to
tragedy. can take longer to stop and the
push the brake pedal is perception
time. Actually doing it is brake pedal will be harder to push.
{ Warning reaction time.
Steering
Drinking and then driving is very Average driver reaction time is
dangerous. Your reflexes, about three-quarters of a second. In Electric Power Steering
perceptions, attentiveness, and that time, a vehicle moving at
The vehicle has electric power
judgment can be affected by even 100 km/h (60 mph) travels 20 m
steering. It does not have power
a small amount of alcohol. You (66 ft), which could be a lot of
steering fluid. Regular maintenance
can have a serious — or even distance in an emergency.
is not required.
fatal — collision if you drive after Helpful braking tips to keep in mind
If power steering assist is lost due
drinking. include:
to a system malfunction, the vehicle
Do not drink and drive or ride with . Keep enough distance between can be steered, but may require
a driver who has been drinking. you and the vehicle in front increased effort. See your dealer if
Ride home in a cab; or if you are of you. there is a problem.
with a group, designate a driver . Avoid needless heavy braking.
who will not drink. . Keep pace with traffic.
2014 - 2nd Edition - 8/19/13
If the steering wheel is turned until it Steering in Emergencies The vehicle's right wheels can drop
reaches the end of its travel and is off the edge of a road onto the
. There are some situations when
held against that position for an shoulder while driving. Follow
steering around a problem may
extended period of time, power these tips:
be more effective than braking.
steering assist may be reduced. 1. Ease off the accelerator and
. Holding both sides of the
If the steering assist is used for an then, if there is nothing in the
steering wheel allows you to turn
extended period of time, power way, steer the vehicle so that it
180 degrees without removing
assist may be reduced. straddles the edge of the
a hand.
Normal use of the power steering pavement.
. The Antilock Brake System
assist should return when the 2. Turn the steering wheel about
(ABS) allows steering while
system cools down. one-eighth of a turn, until the
braking.
See your dealer if there is a right front tire contacts the
problem. pavement edge.
Off-Road Recovery
3. Turn the steering wheel to go
Curve Tips straight down the roadway.
. Take curves at a reasonable
speed. Loss of Control
. Reduce speed before entering a Skidding
curve.
There are three types of skids that
. Maintain a reasonable steady correspond to the vehicle's three
speed through the curve. control systems:
. Wait until the vehicle is out of . Braking Skid — wheels are not
the curve before accelerating rolling.
gently into the straightaway.
2014 - 2nd Edition - 8/19/13

. Steering or Cornering material on the road. Learn to
Skid — too much speed or recognize warning clues — such { Warning
steering in a curve causes tires as enough water, ice, or packed
to slip and lose cornering force. snow on the road to make a Wet brakes can cause crashes.
mirrored surface — and slow They might not work as well in a
. Acceleration Skid — too much
down when you have any doubt. quick stop and could cause
throttle causes the driving
wheels to spin. pulling to one side. You could
. Try to avoid sudden steering, lose control of the vehicle.
Defensive drivers avoid most skids acceleration, or braking,
by taking reasonable care suited to including reducing vehicle speed After driving through a large
existing conditions, and by not by shifting to a lower gear. Any puddle of water or a car/vehicle
overdriving those conditions. But sudden changes could cause wash, lightly apply the brake
skids are always possible. the tires to slide. pedal until the brakes work
Remember: Antilock brakes help normally.
If the vehicle starts to slide, follow
these suggestions: avoid only the braking skid. Flowing or rushing water creates
strong forces. Driving through
. Ease your foot off the
accelerator pedal and steer the
Driving on Wet Roads flowing water could cause the
way you want the vehicle to go. Rain and wet roads can reduce vehicle to be carried away. If this
The vehicle may straighten out. vehicle traction and affect your happens, you and other vehicle
Be ready for a second skid if it ability to stop and accelerate. occupants could drown. Do not
occurs. Always drive slower in these types ignore police warnings and be
of driving conditions and avoid very cautious about trying to drive
. Slow down and adjust your
driving through large puddles and through flowing water.
driving according to weather
conditions. Stopping distance deep‐standing or flowing water.
can be longer and vehicle
control can be affected when
traction is reduced by water,
snow, ice, gravel, or other
2014 - 2nd Edition - 8/19/13
Hydroplaning
. Turn off cruise control. . Check all fluid levels and brakes,
tires, cooling system, and
Hydroplaning is dangerous. Water Highway Hypnosis transmission.
can build up under the vehicle's
tires so they actually ride on the Always be alert and pay attention to . Shift to a lower gear when going
water. This can happen if the road is your surroundings while driving. down steep or long hills.
wet enough and you are going fast If you become tired or sleepy, find a
enough. When the vehicle is safe place to park the vehicle { Warning
hydroplaning, it has little or no and rest.
contact with the road. Using the brakes to slow the
Other driving tips include:
vehicle on a long downhill slope
There is no hard and fast rule about . Keep the vehicle well ventilated. can cause brake overheating, can
hydroplaning. The best advice is to
. Keep the interior reduce brake performance, and
slow down when the road is wet.
temperature cool. could result in a loss of braking.
Other Rainy Weather Tips Shift the transmission to a lower
. Keep your eyes moving — scan
gear to let the engine assist the
Besides slowing down, other wet the road ahead and to the sides.
weather driving tips include: brakes on a steep downhill slope.
. Check the rearview mirror and
. Allow extra following distance. vehicle instruments often.
. Pass with caution.
Hill and Mountain Roads { Warning
. Keep windshield wiping
equipment in good shape. Driving on steep hills or through Coasting downhill in N (Neutral)
mountains is different than driving or with the ignition off is
. Keep the windshield washer fluid on flat or rolling terrain. Tips for
reservoir filled. dangerous. This can cause
driving in these conditions include: overheating of the brakes and
. Have good tires with proper . Keep the vehicle serviced and in (Continued)
tread depth. See Tires on good shape.
page 10-40.
2014 - 2nd Edition - 8/19/13
Wet ice can occur at about 0°C Allow greater following distance on
Warning (Continued) (32°F) when freezing rain begins to any slippery road and watch for
fall, resulting in even less traction. slippery spots. Icy patches can
loss of steering. Always have the Avoid driving on wet ice or in occur on otherwise clear roads in
engine running and the vehicle freezing rain until roads can be shaded areas. The surface of a
in gear. treated with salt or sand. curve or an overpass can remain icy
Drive with caution, whatever the when the surrounding roads are
. Stay in your own lane. Do not condition. Accelerate gently so clear. Avoid sudden steering
swing wide or cut across the traction is not lost. Accelerating too maneuvers and braking while
center of the road. Drive at quickly causes the wheels to spin on ice.
speeds that let you stay in your and makes the surface under the Turn off cruise control on slippery
own lane. tires slick, so there is even less surfaces.
. Be alert on top of hills; traction.
Blizzard Conditions
something could be in your lane Try not to break the fragile traction.
(stalled car, accident). If you accelerate too fast, the drive Being stuck in snow can be a
. wheels will spin and polish the serious situation. Stay with the
Pay attention to special road
surface under the tires even more. vehicle unless there is help nearby.
signs (falling rocks area, winding
If possible, use Roadside
roads, long grades, passing or Traction Control should be turned Assistance. See Roadside
no-passing zones) and take on. See Traction Control/Electronic Assistance Program on page 13-5.
appropriate action. Stability Control on page 9-28. To get help and keep everyone in
The Antilock Brake System (ABS) the vehicle safe:
Winter Driving improves vehicle stability during . Turn on the hazard warning
Driving on Snow or Ice hard stops on slippery roads, but flashers.
apply the brakes sooner than when
Drive carefully when there is snow on dry pavement. See Antilock
. Tie a red cloth to an outside
or ice between the tires and the Brake System (ABS) on page 9-25. mirror.
road, creating less traction or grip.
2014 - 2nd Edition - 8/19/13
If it takes some time for help to

{ Warning Warning (Continued) arrive, now and then when you run
the engine, push the accelerator
Snow can trap engine exhaust . Fully open the air outlets on pedal slightly so the engine runs
under the vehicle. This may or under the instrument faster than the idle speed. This
cause exhaust gases to get panel. keeps the battery charged to restart
inside. Engine exhaust contains . Adjust the climate control the vehicle and to signal for help
carbon monoxide (CO) which system to a setting that with the headlamps. Do this as little
cannot be seen or smelled. It can circulates the air inside the as possible to save fuel.
cause unconsciousness and even vehicle and set the fan speed
death. to the highest setting. See If the Vehicle Is Stuck
If the vehicle is stuck in the snow: “Climate Control Systems”.
Slowly and cautiously spin the
. Clear away snow from around For more information about wheels to free the vehicle when
the base of your vehicle, carbon monoxide, see Engine stuck in sand, mud, ice, or snow.
especially any that is blocking Exhaust on page 9-20.
If stuck too severely for the traction
the exhaust pipe. system to free the vehicle, turn the
. Check again from time to To save fuel, run the engine for only traction system off and use the
time to be sure snow does short periods as needed to warm rocking method. See Traction
not collect there. the vehicle and then shut the engine Control/Electronic Stability Control
off and close the window most of on page 9-28.
. Open a window about 5 cm the way to save heat. Repeat this
(2 in) on the side of the
vehicle that is away from the
until help arrives but only when you
feel really uncomfortable from the
{ Warning
wind to bring in fresh air. cold. Moving about to keep warm If the vehicle's tires spin at high
(Continued) also helps. speed, they can explode, and you
or others could be injured. The
(Continued)
2014 - 2nd Edition - 8/19/13
the vehicle out after a few tries, it

Warning (Continued) might need to be towed out. If the Warning (Continued)
vehicle does need to be towed out,
vehicle can overheat, causing an see Towing the Vehicle on (GVWR), or either the
engine compartment fire or other page 10-77. maximum front or rear Gross
damage. Spin the wheels as little Axle Weight Rating (GAWR).
as possible and avoid going Vehicle Load Limits This can cause systems to
above 56 km/h (35 mph). break and change the way the
It is very important to know how vehicle handles. This could
much weight the vehicle can cause loss of control and a
Rocking the Vehicle to Get
carry. This weight is called the crash. Overloading can also
it Out
vehicle capacity weight and shorten the life of the vehicle.
Turn the steering wheel left and includes the weight of all
right to clear the area around the occupants, cargo, and all
front wheels. Turn off any traction nonfactory-installed options.
system. Shift back and forth
Two labels on the vehicle show
between R (Reverse) and a low
forward gear, spinning the wheels how much weight it may
as little as possible. To prevent properly carry: the Tire and
transmission wear, wait until the Loading Information label and
wheels stop spinning before shifting the Certification label.
gears. Release the accelerator
pedal while shifting, and press
lightly on the accelerator pedal
{ Warning
when the transmission is in gear. Do not load the vehicle any
Slowly spinning the wheels in the heavier than the Gross
forward and reverse directions Vehicle Weight Rating
causes a rocking motion that could
free the vehicle. If that does not get (Continued)
2014 - 2nd Edition - 8/19/13
Tire and Loading Information The Tire and Loading 2. Determine the combined
Label Information label also shows the weight of the driver and
tire size of the original passengers that will be riding
equipment tires (3) and the in your vehicle.
recommended cold tire inflation 3. Subtract the combined
pressures (4). For more weight of the driver and
information on tires and inflation passengers from XXX kg or
see Tires on page 10-40 and XXX lbs.
Tire Pressure on page 10-47.
4. The resulting figure equals
There is also important loading
the available amount of cargo
information on the Certification
and luggage load capacity.
label. It tells you the Gross
For example, if the "XXX"
Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)
amount equals 1400 lbs. and
Label Example and the Gross Axle Weight
there will be five 150 lb
Rating (GAWR) for the front and
A vehicle-specific Tire and passengers in your vehicle,
rear axle. See “Certification
Loading Information label is the amount of available cargo
Label” later in this section.
attached to the vehicle's center and luggage load capacity is
pillar (B-pillar). The Tire and “Steps for Determining Correct 650 lbs. (1400-750 (5 x 150)
Loading Information label shows Load Limit– = 650 lbs.)
the number of occupant seating 1. Locate the statement "The 5. Determine the combined
positions (1), and the maximum combined weight of weight of luggage and cargo
vehicle capacity weight (2) in occupants and cargo should being loaded on the vehicle.
kilograms and pounds. never exceed XXX kg or That weight may not safely
XXX lbs." on your vehicle’s
placard.
2014 - 2nd Edition - 8/19/13
exceed the available cargo

and luggage load capacity
calculated in Step 4.
6. If your vehicle will be towing
a trailer, load from your trailer
will be transferred to your
vehicle. Consult this manual
to determine how this
reduces the available cargo
and luggage load capacity of
your vehicle.”
Example 1 Example 2
This vehicle is neither designed
nor intended to tow a trailer. 1. Vehicle Capacity Weight for 1. Vehicle Capacity Weight for
Example 1 = 453 kg Example 2 = 453 kg
(1,000 lbs). (1,000 lbs).
2. Subtract Occupant Weight @ 2. Subtract Occupant Weight @
68 kg (150 lbs) × 2 = 136 kg 68 kg (150 lbs) × 5 = 340 kg
(300 lbs). (750 lbs).
3. Available Occupant and 3. Available Cargo Weight =
Cargo Weight = 317 kg 113 kg (250 lbs).
(700 lbs).
2014 - 2nd Edition - 8/19/13
seating positions. The combined fuel, and cargo. Never exceed

weight of the driver, passengers, the GVWR for the vehicle, or the
and cargo should never exceed Gross Axle Weight Rating
the vehicle's capacity weight. (GAWR) for either the front or
rear axle.
Certification Label
And, if there is a heavy load, it
should be spread out. See
“Steps for Determining Correct
Load Limit” earlier in this
section.
Example 3 { Warning
1. Vehicle Capacity Weight for
Example 3 = 453 kg Do not load the vehicle any
(1,000 lbs). heavier than the Gross
Vehicle Weight Rating
2. Subtract Occupant Weight @ (GVWR), or either the
91 kg (200 lbs) × 5 = 453 kg Label Example maximum front or rear Gross
(1,000 lbs). A vehicle-specific Certification Axle Weight Rating (GAWR).
3. Available Cargo Weight = label is attached to the vehicle's This can cause systems to
0 kg (0 lbs). center pillar (B-pillar). The label break and change the way the
tells the gross weight capacity of vehicle handles. This could
Refer to the vehicle's Tire and cause loss of control and a
Loading Information label for the vehicle, called the Gross
Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR). crash. Overloading can also
specific information about the shorten the life of the vehicle.
vehicle's capacity weight and The GVWR includes the weight
of the vehicle, all occupants,
2014 - 2nd Edition - 8/19/13
If you put things inside the Starting and

vehicle — like suitcases, tools, Warning (Continued)
packages, or anything Operating
. Never stack heavier
else — they will go as fast as the things, like suitcases,
vehicle goes. If you have to stop New Vehicle Break-In
inside the vehicle so that
or turn quickly, or if there is a some of them are above
crash, they will keep going. the tops of the seats. { Caution
The vehicle does not need an
{ Warning . Do not leave an
unsecured child restraint elaborate break-in. But it will
Things inside the vehicle can in the vehicle. perform better in the long run if
strike and injure people in a you follow these guidelines:
. Secure loose items in the
sudden stop or turn, or in a . Do not drive at any one
vehicle. constant speed, fast or slow,
crash.
. Do not leave a seat folded for the first 805 km (500 mi).
. Put things in the cargo down unless needed. Do not make full-throttle
area of the vehicle. In the starts. Avoid downshifting to
cargo area, put them as brake or slow the vehicle.
far forward as possible. . Avoid making hard stops for
Try to spread the weight the first 322 km (200 mi) or
evenly. so. During this time the new
(Continued) brake linings are not yet
broken in. Hard stops with
new linings can mean
premature wear and earlier
replacement. Follow this
(Continued)
2014 - 2nd Edition - 8/19/13
To shift out of P (Park), the ignition to N (Neutral), firmly apply the

Caution (Continued) must be in ON/RUN and the regular brakes and steer the vehicle to a
brake pedal applied. safe location.
breaking-in guideline every
time you get new brake 1 (STOPPING THE ENGINE/LOCK/ 3. Come to a complete stop. Shift
linings. OFF): When the vehicle is stopped, to P (Park) with an automatic
turn the ignition switch to LOCK/ transmission, or Neutral with a
Following break-in, engine speed OFF to turn the engine off. manual transmission. Turn the
and load can be gradually ignition to LOCK/OFF.
increased. This position locks the steering
wheel, ignition, and transmission. 4. Set the parking brake. See
Do not turn the engine off when the Parking Brake on page 9-26.
Ignition Positions vehicle is moving. This will cause a
loss of power assist in the brake { Warning
and steering systems and disable
the airbags. Turning off the vehicle while
moving may cause loss of power
If the vehicle must be shut off in an assist in the brake and steering
emergency: systems and disable the airbags.
1. Brake using a firm and steady While driving, only shut the
pressure. Do not pump the vehicle off in an emergency.
brakes repeatedly. This may
deplete power assist, requiring
increased brake pedal force. If the vehicle cannot be pulled over,
and must be shut off while driving,
2. Shift the vehicle to N (Neutral). turn the ignition to ACC/
This can be done while the ACCESSORY.
The ignition switch has four different vehicle is moving. After shifting
positions.
2014 - 2nd Edition - 8/19/13
If you leave the key in the ACC/

{ Caution ACCESSORY or ON/RUN position { Caution
with the engine off, the battery could
Using a tool to force the key to be drained. You may not be able to Do not try to shift to P (Park) if the
turn in the ignition could cause start the vehicle if the battery is vehicle is moving. If you do, you
damage to the switch or break the allowed to drain for an extended could damage the transmission.
key. Use the correct key, make period of time. Shift to P (Park) only when the
sure it is all the way in, and turn it vehicle is stopped.
only with your hand. If the key 4 (START): This is the position that
starts the engine. When the engine
cannot be turned by hand, see
starts, release the key. The ignition
your dealer.
switch returns to ON/RUN for
driving.
{ Caution
2 (ACC/ACCESSORY): This is the A warning tone will sound when the If the steering wheel is turned
position in which things like the driver door is opened, the ignition is until it reaches the end of its
radio and the windshield wipers can in ACC/ACCESSORY or LOCK/ travel, and is held in that position
be operated when the engine is off. OFF, and the key is in the ignition. while starting the vehicle, damage
3 (ON/RUN): This position can be If the ignition becomes difficult to may occur to the hydraulic power
used to operate the electrical turn, see Keys on page 2-1. steering system and there may be
accessories and to display some loss of power steering assist.
instrument cluster warning and Starting the Engine
indicator lights. This position can Manual Transmission
also be used for service and Automatic Transmission
diagnostics, and to verify the proper Move the shift lever to P (Park) or The shift lever should be in Neutral
operation of the malfunction N (Neutral). The engine will not start and the parking brake engaged.
indicator lamp as may be required in any other position. To restart the Hold the clutch pedal to the floor
for emission inspection purposes. engine when the vehicle is already and start the engine. The vehicle
The switch stays in this position moving, use N (Neutral) only. will not start if the clutch pedal is not
when the engine is running. all the way down.
2014 - 2nd Edition - 8/19/13
Starting Procedure 3. If the engine still will not start,

1. With your foot off the accelerator
{ Caution or starts but then stops, it could
be flooded with too much
pedal, turn the ignition to START. Holding the key in START for gasoline. Try pushing the
When the engine cranks, let go longer than 15 seconds at a time accelerator pedal all the way to
of the key. The idle speed will go will cause the battery to be the floor and holding it there as
down as the engine gets warm. drained much sooner. And the you hold the key in START for
The vehicle has a excessive heat can damage the about three seconds. If the
Computer-Controlled Cranking starter motor. Wait about vehicle starts briefly but then
System. It assists in starting the 15 seconds between each try to stops again, do the same thing,
engine and protects help avoid draining the battery or but this time keep the pedal
components. If the ignition key is damaging the starter. down for five or six seconds.
turned to START and then This clears the extra gasoline
released when the engine from the engine.
begins cranking, the engine will 2. If the engine does not start, wait
about 15 seconds and try again.
continue cranking for a
few seconds or until the engine Wait about 15 seconds between { Caution
starts. If the engine does not each try.
If you add electrical parts or
start and the key is held in When the engine has run about accessories, you could change
START, cranking will be stopped 10 seconds to warm up, the the way the engine operates. Any
after 15 seconds to prevent vehicle is ready to be driven. Do resulting damage would not be
damage. To prevent gear not run the engine at high speed covered by the vehicle warranty.
damage, cranking is not allowed when it is cold. See Add-On Electrical Equipment
if the engine is running. Engine If the weather is below freezing on page 9-42.
cranking can be stopped by (0°C or 32°F), let the engine run
turning the ignition key to ACC/ for a few minutes to warm up.
ACCESSORY or LOCK/OFF.
2014 - 2nd Edition - 8/19/13
Engine Heater factory with a tie holding it in The length of time the heater should
place. Use care in removing the remain plugged in depends on
The engine heater can provide tie so that the cord is not several factors. Ask a dealer in the
easier starting and better fuel damaged. area where you will be parking the
economy during engine warm-up in vehicle for the best advice on this.
cold weather conditions at or below 3. Plug it into a normal, grounded
−18°C (0°F). Vehicles with an 110-volt AC outlet.
engine heater should be plugged in
Retained Accessory
at least four hours before starting. { Warning Power (RAP)
1. Turn off the engine. These vehicle accessories may be
Plugging the cord into an used for up to 10 minutes after the
ungrounded outlet could cause an engine is turned off:
electrical shock. Also, the wrong
kind of extension cord could
. Audio System
overheat and cause a fire. You . Power Windows
could be seriously injured. Plug . Sunroof
the cord into a properly grounded
three-prong 110-volt AC outlet. The power windows and sunroof will
If the cord will not reach, use a continue to work for up to
heavy-duty three-prong extension 10 minutes or until any door is
cord rated for at least 15 amps. opened.
The radio will work when the key is
4. Before starting the engine, be in ON/RUN or ACC/ACCESSORY.
sure to unplug and store the Once the key is turned from ON/
2. Open the hood and unwrap the RUN to LOCK/OFF, the radio will
electrical cord. The cord is cord as it was before to keep it
away from moving engine parts. continue to work for 10 minutes after
located in the driver side of the the last input (button press, knob
engine compartment, near the If you do not it could be
damaged. turn) to the radio is detected.
battery. It is shipped from the
2014 - 2nd Edition - 8/19/13
It is possible to turn the radio back Leaving the Vehicle with the If you have to leave the vehicle with
on at any time after it has timed out Engine Running (Automatic the engine running, be sure the
using the Power knob. The radio will Transmission) vehicle is in P (Park) and the
be functional for 10 minutes after the parking brake is firmly set before
last input (button press, knob turn) you leave it. After you have moved
to the radio is detected. { Warning the shift lever into P (Park), hold the
It can be dangerous to leave the brake pedal down. Then see if you
Shifting Into Park vehicle with the engine running. can move the shift lever away from
P (Park) without first pushing the
(Automatic Transmission) It could overheat and catch fire.
button on the shift lever. If you can,
1. Hold the brake pedal down and It is dangerous to get out of the it means that the shift lever was not
set the parking brake. See vehicle if the shift lever is not fully fully locked into P (Park).
Parking Brake on page 9-26. in P (Park) with the parking brake
firmly set. The vehicle can roll.
Torque Lock (Automatic
2. Move the shift lever into P (Park) Transmission)
by pressing the button on the Do not leave the vehicle when the
shift lever and pushing the lever If you are parking on a hill and you
engine is running. If you have left
all the way toward the front of do not shift the transmission into
the engine running, the vehicle
the vehicle. P (Park) properly, the weight of the
can move suddenly. You or others vehicle may put too much force on
3. Turn the ignition key to could be injured. To be sure the the parking pawl in the
LOCK/OFF. vehicle will not move, even when transmission. You may find it difficult
4. Remove the key and take it with you are on fairly level ground, to pull the shift lever out of P (Park).
you. If you can leave the vehicle always set the parking brake and This is called “torque lock.”
with the ignition key in your move the shift lever to P (Park). To prevent torque lock, set the
hand, the vehicle is in P (Park). See Shifting Into Park (Automatic parking brake and then shift into
Transmission) on page 9-18. P (Park) properly before you leave
2014 - 2nd Edition - 8/19/13
the driver seat. To find out how, see The shift lock control is always If you still cannot move the shift
“Shifting Into Park” previously in this functional except in the case of an lever from P (Park), consult your
section. uncharged or low voltage (less than dealer or a professional towing
When you are ready to drive, move 9‐volt) battery. service.
the shift lever out of P (Park) before If the vehicle has an uncharged The doors may lock when shifting
you release the parking brake. battery or a battery with low voltage, from P (Park). See Automatic Door
If torque lock does occur, you may try charging or jump starting the Locks on page 2-8.
need to have another vehicle push battery. See Jump Starting on
yours a little uphill to take some of page 10-75. Parking
the pressure from the parking pawl To shift out of P (Park): If the vehicle has a manual
in the transmission, so you can pull 1. Apply the brake pedal. transmission, before getting out of
the shift lever out of P (Park). the vehicle, move the shift lever into
2. Turn the ignition to ON/RUN. R (Reverse) if parking on a downhill
Shifting out of Park 3. Press the shift lever button. slope. On a level surface or an
(Automatic Transmission) uphill slope, use 1 (First) gear.
4. Move the shift lever to the
Firmly apply the parking brake. Turn
This vehicle is equipped with a shift desired position.
the wheels toward the curb for a
lock control. The shift lock control is If still unable to shift out of P (Park): downhill slope, or away from the
designed to: curb for an uphill slope. Once the
1. Fully release the shift lever
. Prevent ignition key removal button. shift lever has been placed into gear
unless the shift lever is in with the clutch pedal pressed in,
P (Park) with the shift lever 2. Hold the brake pedal down and turn the ignition key to LOCK/OFF,
button fully released. press the shift lever button remove the key, and release the
again. clutch.
. Prevent movement of the shift
lever out of P (Park) unless the 3. Move the shift lever to the
ignition is in ON/RUN and the desired position.
brake pedal is applied.
2014 - 2nd Edition - 8/19/13
Parking over Things Engine Exhaust Warning (Continued)

That Burn
{ Warning . There are holes or openings
{ Warning Engine exhaust contains carbon
in the vehicle body from
damage or aftermarket
Things that can burn could touch monoxide (CO) which cannot be modifications that are not
hot exhaust parts under the seen or smelled. Exposure to CO completely sealed.
vehicle and ignite. Do not park can cause unconsciousness and If unusual fumes are detected or
over papers, leaves, dry grass, even death. if it is suspected that exhaust is
or other things that can burn. Exhaust may enter the vehicle if: coming into the vehicle:
. The vehicle idles in areas . Drive it only with the windows
with poor ventilation (parking completely down.
garages, tunnels, deep snow . Have the vehicle repaired
that may block underbody immediately.
airflow or tail pipes).
Never park the vehicle with the
. The exhaust smells or engine running in an enclosed
sounds strange or different. area such as a garage or a
. The exhaust system leaks building that has no fresh air
due to corrosion or damage. ventilation.
. The vehicle exhaust system
has been modified, damaged,
or improperly repaired.
(Continued)
2014 - 2nd Edition - 8/19/13
Running the Vehicle Automatic

While Parked
{ Warning
Transmission It is dangerous to get out of the
It is better not to park with the
engine running. vehicle if the shift lever is not fully
in P (Park) with the parking brake
If the vehicle is left with the engine firmly set. The vehicle can roll.
running, follow the proper steps to
be sure the vehicle will not move. Do not leave the vehicle when the
See Shifting Into Park (Automatic engine is running. If you have left
Transmission) on page 9-18 and the engine running, the vehicle
Engine Exhaust on page 9-20. If the can move suddenly. You or others
vehicle has a manual transmission, could be injured. To be sure the
see Parking on page 9-19. vehicle will not move, even when
you are on fairly level ground,
always set the parking brake and
move the shift lever to P (Park).
See Shifting Into Park (Automatic
P (Park): This position locks the Transmission) on page 9-18.
front wheels. It is the best position
to use when you start the engine
because the vehicle cannot move Make sure the shift lever is fully in
easily. P (Park) before starting the engine.
The vehicle has a shift lock control.
You must fully apply the brake pedal
then press the shift lever button
before you can shift from P (Park)
while the ignition key is in ON/RUN.
If you cannot shift out of P (Park),
2014 - 2nd Edition - 8/19/13
ease pressure on the shift lever and the vehicle is already moving, use
push the shift lever all the way into N (Neutral) only. Also, use Caution (Continued)
P (Park) as you maintain brake N (Neutral) when the vehicle is
application. Then move the shift being towed. the vehicle warranty. Be sure the
lever into another gear. See Shifting engine is not running at high
speed when shifting the vehicle.
out of Park (Automatic
Transmission) on page 9-19.
{ Warning
R (Reverse): Use this gear to Shifting into a drive gear while the D (Drive): This position is for
back up. engine is running at high speed is normal driving. It provides the best
dangerous. Unless your foot is fuel economy. If you need more
power for passing, and you are:
{ Caution firmly on the brake pedal, the
vehicle could move very rapidly. . Going less than 56 km/h
Shifting to R (Reverse) while the You could lose control and hit (35 mph), push the accelerator
vehicle is moving forward could people or objects. Do not shift pedal about halfway down.
damage the transmission. The into a drive gear while the engine
is running at high speed.
. Going about 56 km/h (35 mph) or
repairs would not be covered by more, push the accelerator all
the vehicle warranty. Shift to the way down.
R (Reverse) only after the vehicle
M (Manual Mode): This position,
is stopped.
{ Caution allows you to change gears similar
to a manual transmission. If the
To rock the vehicle back and forth to Shifting out of P (Park) or vehicle has this feature, see
get out of snow, ice, or sand without N (Neutral) with the engine “Manual Mode” following.
damaging the transmission, see If running at high speed may
the Vehicle Is Stuck on page 9-8. damage the transmission. The
repairs would not be covered by
N (Neutral): In this position, the
engine does not connect with the (Continued)
wheels. To restart the engine when
2014 - 2nd Edition - 8/19/13
Manual Mode 2. Press the + (plus) end of the The transmission will only allow you
button on the side of the shift to shift into gears appropriate for the
To use this feature: lever to upshift, or press vehicle speed and engine
1. Move the shift lever from the − (minus) end of the button revolutions per minute (rpm):
D (Drive) rearward to to downshift. . The transmission will not
M (Manual Mode). The Driver Information Center (DIC) automatically shift to the next
While driving in manual mode, in the instrument cluster will change higher gear if the vehicle speed
the transmission will remain in from the currently displayed or engine rpm is too low.
the driver selected gear. When message to the letter “M,” for . The transmission will not allow
coming to a stop in the manual Manual position, and a number shifting to the next lower gear if
position, the vehicle will indicating the requested gear. the vehicle speed or engine rpm
automatically shift into While using manual mode, the is too high.
1 (First) gear. transmission will have firmer shifting
and sportier performance. You can
use this for sport driving or when
climbing hills to stay in gear longer
or to downshift for more power or
engine braking.
2014 - 2nd Edition - 8/19/13
Manual Transmission Caution (Continued)

3 (Third), 4 (Fourth), 5 (Fifth), and
6 (Sixth): Shift into 3 (Third),
4 (Fourth), 5 (Fifth), and 6 (Sixth) (if
sequence, and time the gear equipped) the same way as for
shifting with the accelerator to 2 (Second). Slowly let up on the
avoid revving the engine and clutch pedal as you press the
damaging the clutch. accelerator pedal.
To stop, let up on the accelerator
1 (First): Press the clutch pedal pedal and press the brake pedal.
and shift into 1 (First). Then, slowly Just before the vehicle stops, press
let up on the clutch pedal as you the clutch pedal and the brake
press the accelerator pedal. pedal, and shift to Neutral.
You can shift into 1 (First) when Neutral: Use this position when
going less than 32 km/h (20 mph). you start or idle the engine.
The vehicle may be equipped with a If you have come to a complete stop
5-speed or 6-speed manual and it is hard to shift into 1 (First),
transmission. put the shift lever in Neutral and let
up on the clutch. Press the clutch
pedal back down. Then shift into
{ Caution 1 (First).
Shifting the vehicle initially into 2 (Second): Press the clutch pedal
any gear other than 1 (First) or as you let up on the accelerator
R (Reverse) can damage the pedal and shift into 2 (Second).
clutch. Shift the manual Then, slowly let up on the clutch
transmission in the proper pedal as you press the accelerator
pedal.
(Continued)
2014 - 2nd Edition - 8/19/13
R (Reverse): To back up, press Up-Shift Light Brakes

down the clutch pedal, lift up the
reverse lockout ring on the shift
lever, and shift into R (Reverse). Let Antilock Brake
up on the clutch pedal slowly while System (ABS)
pressing the accelerator pedal.
This vehicle has ABS, an advanced
electronic braking system that helps
{ Caution prevent a braking skid.
Vehicles equipped with a manual When the vehicle begins to drive
Shifting to R (Reverse) while the transmission may have an up-shift
vehicle is moving forward could away, ABS checks itself.
light. This light indicates when to A momentary motor or clicking noise
damage the transmission. The shift to the next higher gear for
repairs would not be covered by might be heard while this test is
better fuel economy. going on, and it might even be
the vehicle warranty. Shift to
For the best fuel economy, noticed that the brake pedal moves
R (Reverse) only after the vehicle
accelerate slowly and shift when the a little. This is normal.
is stopped.
light comes on, and if the weather,
road, and traffic conditions allow.
Shift Speeds It is normal for the light to go on and
off if the accelerator position
{ Warning changes quickly. Ignore the light
during downshifts.
If you skip a gear when
downshifting, you could lose If there is a problem with ABS, this
control of the vehicle. You could warning light stays on. See Antilock
injure yourself or others. Do not Brake System (ABS) Warning Light
shift down more than one gear at on page 5-16.
a time when downshifting.
2014 - 2nd Edition - 8/19/13
If driving safely on a wet road and it suddenly slows or stops. Always Parking Brake
becomes necessary to slam on the leave enough room up ahead to
brakes and continue braking to stop, even with ABS.
avoid a sudden obstacle, a
computer senses that the wheels Using ABS
are slowing down. If one of the Do not pump the brakes. Just hold
wheels is about to stop rolling, the the brake pedal down firmly and let
computer will separately work the ABS work. You might hear the ABS
brakes at each wheel. pump or motor operating and feel
ABS can change the brake pressure the brake pedal pulsate, but this is
to each wheel, as required, faster normal.
than any driver could. This can help Braking in Emergencies
you steer around the obstacle while
braking hard. ABS allows you to steer and brake
at the same time. In many
As the brakes are applied, the emergencies, steering can help To set the parking brake, hold the
computer keeps receiving updates more than even the very best brake pedal down and pull up on the
on wheel speed and controls braking. parking brake lever. If the ignition is
braking pressure accordingly. on, the brake system warning light
Remember: ABS does not change will come on. See Brake System
the time needed to get a foot up to Warning Light on page 5-15.
the brake pedal or always decrease To release the parking brake, hold
stopping distance. If you get too the brake pedal down. Pull the
close to the vehicle in front of you, parking brake lever up until you can
there will not be enough time to press the release button. Hold the
apply the brakes if that vehicle release button in as you move the
brake lever all the way down.
2014 - 2nd Edition - 8/19/13
each corner of the vehicle until the two seconds to ensure that there is
{ Caution ABS activates. Minor brake pedal no rolling. The brakes will
pulsation or pedal movement during automatically release when the
Driving with the parking brake on this time is normal and the driver accelerator pedal is applied within
can overheat the brake system should continue to apply the brake the two-second window. It will not
and cause premature wear or pedal as the driving situation activate if the vehicle is in a drive
damage to brake system parts. dictates. The brake assist feature gear and facing downhill, or if the
Make sure that the parking brake will automatically disengage when vehicle is facing uphill and in
is fully released and the brake the brake pedal is released or brake R (Reverse).
warning light is off before driving. pedal pressure is quickly
decreased.
Brake Assist Hill Start Assist (HSA)
This vehicle has a brake assist
This vehicle has an HSA feature,
feature designed to assist the driver
which may be useful when the
in stopping or decreasing vehicle
vehicle is stopped on a grade. This
speed in emergency driving
feature is designed to prevent the
conditions. This feature
vehicle from rolling, either forward or
automatically uses the stability
rearward, during vehicle drive off.
system hydraulic brake control
After the driver completely stops
module to supplement the power
and holds the vehicle in a complete
brake system under conditions
standstill on a grade, HSA will be
where the driver has quickly and
automatically activated. During the
forcefully applied the brake pedal in
transition period between when the
an attempt to quickly stop or slow
driver releases the brake pedal and
down the vehicle. The stability
starts to accelerate to drive off on a
system hydraulic brake control
grade, HSA holds the braking
module increases brake pressure at
pressure for a maximum of
2014 - 2nd Edition - 8/19/13
Ride Control Systems vehicle wheel brakes to assist the

driver in keeping the vehicle on the
intended path.
Traction Control/
If cruise control is being used and
Electronic Stability traction control or StabiliTrak begins
Control to limit wheel spin, cruise control will
disengage. Cruise control may be The indicator light for both systems
System Operation turned back on when road is in the instrument cluster. This
The vehicle has a Traction Control conditions allow. light will:
System (TCS) and StabiliTrak®, an Both systems come on . Flash when TCS is limiting
electronic stability control system. automatically when the vehicle is wheel spin.
These systems help limit wheel slip started and begins to move. The
and assist the driver in maintaining
. Flash when StabiliTrak is
systems may be heard or felt while activated.
control, especially on slippery road they are operating or while
conditions. performing diagnostic checks. This
. Turn on and stay on when either
TCS activates if it senses that any is normal and does not mean there system is not working.
of the drive wheels are spinning or is a problem with the vehicle. If either system fails to turn on or to
beginning to lose traction. When this It is recommended to leave both activate, a message displays in the
happens, TCS applies the brakes to systems on for normal driving Driver Information Center (DIC), and
the spinning wheels and reduces conditions, but it may be necessary d comes on and stays on to
engine power to limit wheel spin. to turn TCS off if the vehicle gets indicate that the system is inactive
StabiliTrak activates when the stuck in sand, mud, ice, or snow. and is not assisting the driver in
vehicle senses a difference between See If the Vehicle Is Stuck on maintaining control. The vehicle is
the intended path and the direction page 9-8 and “Turning the Systems safe to drive, but driving should be
the vehicle is actually traveling. Off and On” later in this section. adjusted accordingly.
StabiliTrak selectively applies
braking pressure to any one of the
2014 - 2nd Edition - 8/19/13
If d comes on and stays on: The button for TCS and StabiliTrak StabiliTrak OFF Light g come on
is on the center console. and stay on in the instrument
1. Stop the vehicle.
cluster.
2. Turn the engine off and wait { Caution To turn TCS and StabiliTrak on
15 seconds.
Do not repeatedly brake or again, press and release the g
3. Start the engine.
accelerate heavily when TCS is button. The traction off light i and
Drive the vehicle. If d comes on off. The vehicle driveline could be StabiliTrak OFF Light g in the
and stays on, the vehicle may need damaged. instrument cluster turn off.
more time to diagnose the problem.
If the condition persists, see your Adding accessories can affect the
To turn off only TCS, press and vehicle performance. See
dealer.
release the g button. The traction Accessories and Modifications on
Turning the Systems Off off light i displays in the instrument page 10-3.
and On cluster.
To turn TCS on again, press and
release the g button. The traction
off light i displayed in the
instrument cluster will turn off.
If TCS is limiting wheel spin when
the g button is pressed, the system
will not turn off until the wheels stop
spinning.
To turn off both TCS and StabiliTrak,
press and hold the g button until
the traction off light i and
2014 - 2nd Edition - 8/19/13
Cruise Control using cruise control, the cruise o (On/Off): Press to turn the
control will automatically disengage. cruise control system on and off.
If the vehicle is equipped with cruise See Traction Control/Electronic
control, a speed of about 40 km/h Stability Control on page 9-28. If a RES/+ (Resume/Accelerate):
(25 mph) or more can be maintained collision alert occurs when cruise Move the thumbwheel up briefly to
without keeping your foot on the control is activated, cruise control is make the vehicle resume to a
accelerator. Cruise control does not disengaged. See Forward Collision previously set speed or hold
work at speeds below 40 km/h Alert (FCA) System on page 9-32. upwards to accelerate. If cruise
(25 mph). When road conditions allow you to control is already active, use to
safely use it again, the cruise increase vehicle speed.
{ Warning control can be turned back on. SET/− (Set/Coast): Move the
If the brakes are applied, the cruise thumbwheel down briefly to set the
Cruise control can be dangerous control shuts off. speed and activate cruise control.
where you cannot drive safely at If cruise control is already active,
a steady speed. Do not use the use to decrease speed.
cruise control on winding roads or n (Cancel): Press to disengage
in heavy traffic. cruise control without erasing the
Cruise control can be dangerous set speed from memory.
on slippery roads. On such roads, Setting Cruise Control
fast changes in tire traction can
cause excessive wheel slip, and If o is on when not in use, it could
you could lose control. Do not use get bumped and go into cruise when
cruise control on slippery roads. not desired. Keep o off when
cruise control is not being used.
If the vehicle's Traction Control
System (TCS) or StabiliTrak system
begins to limit wheel spin while
2014 - 2nd Edition - 8/19/13
To set cruise control: Increasing Speed While Using briefly. For each press, the
Cruise Control vehicle goes about 1.6 km/h
1. Press the o button to turn the (1 mph) slower.
cruise system on. If the cruise control system is
already activated: Passing Another Vehicle While
2. Get to the speed desired. Using Cruise Control
. Move the thumbwheel up toward
3. Move the thumbwheel down to RES/+ and hold it until the Use the accelerator pedal to
SET/- and release it. desired speed is reached, then increase the vehicle speed. When
4. Take your foot off the accelerator release it. you take your foot off the pedal, the
pedal. . To increase the vehicle speed in vehicle slows down to the previous
small increments, move the set cruise control speed. While
Resuming a Set Speed pressing the accelerator pedal or
thumbwheel up toward RES/+
If the cruise control is set at a briefly and then release it. For shortly following the release to
desired speed and then the brakes each press, the vehicle goes override cruise control, briefly
or clutch for manual transmissions about 1.6 km/h (1 mph) faster. moving the thumbwheel toward
are applied, the cruise control is SET– will result in cruise control set
disengaged without erasing the set Reducing Speed While Using to the current vehicle speed.
speed from memory. Cruise Control
Using Cruise Control on Hills
Once the vehicle reaches about If the cruise control system is
already activated: How well cruise control works on
40 km/h (25 mph) or more, move the
hills depends on the vehicle speed,
thumbwheel up toward RES/+ . Move the thumbwheel toward load, and the steepness of the hills.
briefly. The vehicle returns to the SET/− and hold until the desired When going up steep hills, you
previous set speed. lower speed is reached, then might have to step on the
release it. accelerator pedal to maintain the
. To decrease the vehicle speed in vehicle speed. When going
smaller increments, move the downhill, you might have to brake or
thumbwheel toward SET/−
2014 - 2nd Edition - 8/19/13
shift to a lower gear to maintain the Driver Assistance

vehicle speed. When the brakes are { Warning
applied, cruise control will turn off. Systems FCA is a warning system and
Ending Cruise Control does not apply the brakes. When
Forward Collision Alert approaching a slower-moving or
There are three ways to end cruise
control:
(FCA) System stopped vehicle ahead too rapidly,
For vehicles with this feature, read or when following a vehicle too
. To disengage cruise control, closely, FCA may not provide a
step lightly on the brake pedal or the following section before using it.
warning with enough time to help
clutch for manual transmission. The Forward Collision Alert (FCA)
avoid a crash. FCA does not warn
system may help to avoid or reduce
. Press n on the steering wheel. the harm caused by front-end of pedestrians, animals, signs,
crashes. FCA provides a flashing guardrails, bridges, construction
. To turn off cruise control, press
barrels, or other objects. Be ready
o on the steering wheel. red visual alert and beeps when
to take action and apply the
approaching a vehicle directly
Erasing Speed Memory ahead too quickly. FCA also brakes. For more information, see
The cruise control set speed is provides a visual alert if following Defensive Driving on page 9-2.
erased from memory if the o button another vehicle much too closely.
is pressed or if the ignition is The FCA display is on top of the Detecting the Vehicle Ahead
turned off. instrument panel to the right of the
steering wheel.
The forward-looking FCA camera
sensor is on the windshield ahead
of the rearview mirror. FCA detects
vehicles within a distance of
approximately 60 m (197 ft) and
operates at speeds above 40 km/h
(25 mph).
2014 - 2nd Edition - 8/19/13
The green vehicle ahead indicator Tailgating Alert

will appear when a vehicle is Warning (Continued)
The red FCA display will stay
detected ahead. Whenever this continuously illuminated when you
indicator does not appear, FCA will proper condition. Keep the
windshield, headlamps, and FCA are following a vehicle ahead much
not respond. The indicator may too closely.
disappear on curves, highway exit sensors clean and in good repair.
ramps, or hills, or due to poor Selecting the Alert Timing
visibility. The FCA system will not Collision Alert
detect another vehicle ahead until it
is completely in the driving lane.
{ Warning
FCA does not provide a warning
to help avoid a crash, unless it
detects a vehicle. FCA may not When your vehicle approaches
detect a vehicle ahead if the FCA another vehicle too rapidly, the red
sensor is blocked by dirt, snow, FCA display will flash and sound
or ice, or if the windshield is several beeps. When this occurs,
damaged. It may also not detect a the brake system prepares for driver
vehicle on winding or hilly roads, braking to occur more rapidly. The Collision Alert control is on the
or in conditions that can limit Continue to apply the brake pedal steering wheel. Press COLLISION
visibility such as fog, rain, as the driving situation dictates. ALERT to set the alert timing to far,
or snow, or if the headlamps or medium, near or off. The first button
windshield are not cleaned or in press shows the current control
(Continued) setting on the DIC. Additional button
presses will change this setting. The
chosen setting will remain until it is
2014 - 2nd Edition - 8/19/13
changed and will affect both the Rear Vision Warning (Continued)
Collision Alert and the Tailgating
Alert features. The timing of both
Camera (RVC)
alerts will vary based on vehicle This vehicle may have the RVC before backing may result in
speed. The faster the vehicle speed, system. Read this entire section injury, death, or vehicle damage.
the further away the alert will occur. before using it. Always check behind and around
Consider traffic and weather the vehicle before backing.
The RVC system can assist the
conditions when selecting the alert
driver when backing up by
timing. The range of selectable alert An image appears on the
displaying a view of the area behind
timing may not be appropriate for all infotainment screen when the
the vehicle.
drivers and driving conditions. vehicle is shifted into R (Reverse).
The infotainment screen goes to the
Unnecessary Alerts { Warning previous screen after approximately
FCA may sometimes set 4 seconds once the vehicle is
The RVC system does not display
unnecessary alerts to turning shifted out of R (Reverse).
children, pedestrians, bicyclists,
vehicles, vehicles in other lanes,
objects that are not vehicles, animals, or any other object To return to the previous screen
or shadows. These alerts are located outside the camera's field sooner, do one of the following:
normal operation and the vehicle of view, below the bumper, . Shift into P (Park).
does not need service. or under the vehicle. Perceived
. Reach a vehicle speed of
distances may be different from
Cleaning the System actual distances. Do not back the 8 km/h (5 mph).
If the FCA system does not seem to vehicle using only the RVC Guidelines
operate properly, clean the outside screen, during longer, higher
The RVC system has a guideline
of the windshield area in front of the speed backing maneuvers, overlay that can help the driver align
camera sensor before considering or where there could be cross the vehicle when backing into a
taking the vehicle in for service. traffic. Failure to use proper care parking spot.
(Continued)
2014 - 2nd Edition - 8/19/13
To turn the guidelines on or off: Rear Vision Camera Location

1. Shift into P (Park).
2. From the home page on the
infotainment system, select
Settings.
3. Select Rear Camera Options.
4. Select Guidelines.
Rear Vision Camera Error
Messages
SERVICE REAR VISION CAMERA
SYSTEM: This message can 1. View displayed by the camera.
display when the system is not
operating properly. The camera is above the license
If any other problem occurs or if a plate.
problem persists, see your dealer. The area displayed by the camera is
limited. It does not display objects
that are close to either corner or
under the bumper and can vary
depending on vehicle orientation or
road conditions. Displayed images
may be closer or farther than they 1. View displayed by the camera.
appear.
2. Corner of the rear bumper.
The following illustrations show the
field of view that the camera
provides.
2014 - 2nd Edition - 8/19/13
When the System Does Not Lane Departure Warning (Continued)

Seem to Work Properly Warning (LDW)
The RVC system may not work For vehicles with this feature, read If LDW only detects lane
properly or display a clear image if: the entire section before using it. markings on one side of the road,
. The RVC is turned off. See it will only warn you when
departing the lane on the side
“Turning the Rear Camera
System On or Off” earlier in this
{ Warning where it has detected a lane
section. The LDW system is an aid to help marker. Even with LDW, always
. the vehicle stay in the driving keep your attention on the road
It is dark.
lane. It does not steer the vehicle. and maintain proper vehicle
. The sun or the beam of The LDW system may not: position within the lane, or vehicle
headlamps are shining directly damage, injury, or death could
into the camera lens. . Provide enough time to avoid occur. Always keep the
.
a crash. windshield clean and do not use
Ice, snow, mud, or anything else
builds up on the camera lens. . Detect lane markings under LDW in bad weather conditions.
Clean the lens, rinse it with bad weather conditions or if
water, and wipe it with a soft the windshield is dirty.
When the vehicle crosses a
cloth. . Detect lane markings and will detected lane marking, the LDW
. The back of the vehicle is in an not detect road edges. indicator will flash and three beeps
accident. The position and . Warn that the vehicle is will sound. LDW will not warn if the
mounting angle of the camera crossing a lane marking if the turn signal is on or if a sharp
can change or the camera can system does not detect the maneuver is made.
be affected. Be sure to have the lane marking.
camera and its position and
mounting angle checked at your (Continued)
dealer.
2014 - 2nd Edition - 8/19/13
How the System Works When the System Does Not

The LDW camera sensor is on the Seem To Work Properly
windshield ahead of the rearview If the LDW symbol does not appear:
mirror. . The lane markings on the road
may not be seen.
When the vehicle is started, the . The camera sensor may be
LDW indicator on top of the blocked by dirt, snow or ice.
instrument panel to the right of the
steering wheel will come on briefly.
. The windshield may be
damaged.
LDW operates at speeds of 56 km
(35 mph) or greater. If LDW is on,
. The weather may be limiting
the LDW indicator will appear green visibility.
if the system detects a left or right This is normal operation; the vehicle
lane marking. This indicator will does not need service. Clean the
change to amber, flash, and three windshield.
beeps will sound if the vehicle
To turn LDW on and off, press the crosses a detected lane marking
without using the turn signal. These
{ Warning
LANE DEPART button on the
steering wheel. The control indicator beeps will be sounded from the left LDW does not provide a warning
will light when LDW is on. or right side, depending on the lane to help avoid a crash, unless it
departure direction. detects the lane markings. LDW
may not detect the lane markings
if the camera sensor is blocked
by dirt, snow, or ice, or if the
windshield is damaged. It may
(Continued)
2014 - 2nd Edition - 8/19/13
Warning (Continued) Fuel Recommended Fuel

Use of the recommended fuel is an Use regular unleaded gasoline with
also not detect a lane on winding important part of the proper a posted octane rating of 87 or
or hilly roads, or in conditions that maintenance of this vehicle. When higher. If the octane rating is less
can limit visibility such as fog, driving in the U.S., to help keep the than 87, an audible knocking noise
rain, or snow, or if the headlamps engine clean and maintain optimum may be heard. If this occurs, use a
or windshield are not cleaned or vehicle performance, we gasoline rated at 87 octane or
in proper condition. Keep the recommend using TOP TIER higher as soon as possible. If heavy
windshield, headlamps, and Detergent Gasolines. See knocking is heard when using
camera sensors clean and in www.toptiergas.com for a list of TOP gasoline with a higher octane rating,
good repair. TIER Detergent Gasolines. the engine needs service.
Use of Seasonal Fuels
LDW warnings may occasionally Use summer and winter fuels in the
occur due to tar marks, shadows, appropriate season. Driving or
cracks in the road, or other road starting could be affected if the
imperfections. This is normal system incorrect fuel is used. Drive the
operation, the vehicle does not need vehicle with the engine running until
service. the fuel is a half tank or less, then
refuel with the current seasonal fuel.
Prohibited Fuels
Gasolines containing oxygenates,
such as ethers and ethanol, as well
as reformulated gasolines are
available in some cities. If these
gasolines comply with the
previously described specification,
2014 - 2nd Edition - 8/19/13
then they are acceptable to use. Gasoline Specifications vehicle may not pass a smog-check
However, E85 and other fuels test. See Malfunction Indicator
containing more than 15% ethanol At a minimum, gasoline should meet Lamp on page 5-12. If this occurs,
must be used only in FlexFuel ASTM specification D 4814. Some return to your authorized dealer for
vehicles. gasolines contain an diagnosis. If it is determined that the
octane-enhancing additive called condition is caused by the type of
methylcyclopentadienyl manganese
{ Caution tricarbonyl (MMT). We recommend
fuel used, repairs may not be
covered by the vehicle warranty.
Do not use fuel containing against the use of gasolines
methanol. It can corrode metal containing MMT. See “Prohibited Fuels in Foreign
Fuels" in Recommended Fuel on
parts in the fuel system and also Countries
page 9-38.
damage plastic and rubber parts.
That damage would not be If planning to drive in countries
covered under the vehicle
California Fuel outside the U.S. or Canada, the
warranty. Requirements proper fuel might be hard to find.
Check regional auto club or fuel
If the vehicle is certified to meet retail brand websites for availability
Some gasolines that are not California Emissions Standards, it is in the country where driving. Never
reformulated for low emissions can designed to operate on fuels that use leaded gasoline, fuel containing
contain an octane-enhancing meet California specifications. See methanol, or any other fuel not
additive called the underhood emission control recommended. Costly repairs
methylcyclopentadienyl manganese label. If this fuel is not available in caused by use of improper fuel
tricarbonyl (MMT). Do not use states adopting California Emissions would not be covered by the vehicle
gasolines with MMT as they can Standards, the vehicle will operate warranty.
reduce spark plug life and affect satisfactorily on fuels meeting
emission control system federal specifications, but emission
performance. The malfunction control system performance might
indicator lamp may turn on. If this be affected. The malfunction
occurs, see your dealer for service. indicator lamp could turn on and the
2014 - 2nd Edition - 8/19/13
Fuel Additives Filling the Tank Warning (Continued)

To keep fuel systems clean, TOP
TIER Detergent Gasoline is { Warning . Fuel can spray out if the fuel
recommended. See Fuel on cap is opened too quickly.
page 9-38. Fuel vapors and fuel fires burn This spray can happen if the
violently and can cause injury or tank is nearly full, and is
If TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline is death. more likely in hot weather.
not available, one bottle of Fuel Open the fuel cap slowly and
System Treatment PLUS, part . To help avoid injuries to you
and others, read and follow wait for any hiss noise to stop
number 88861013, added to the fuel then unscrew the cap all
tank at every engine oil change, can all the instructions on the fuel
pump island. the way
help. Fuel System Treatment PLUS
is the only gasoline additive . Turn off the engine when
recommended by General Motors. refueling. The fuel cap is behind a hinged fuel
It is available at your dealer. door on the passenger side of the
. Keep sparks, flames, and vehicle.
smoking materials away
from fuel. To remove the fuel cap, turn it
slowly counterclockwise. The fuel
. Do not leave the fuel pump cap has a spring in it; if the cap is
unattended. released too soon, it will spring back
. Do not reenter the vehicle to the right.
while pumping fuel. Be careful not to spill fuel. Do not
. Keep children away from the top off or overfill the tank. Wait a
fuel pump and never let few seconds after you have finished
children pump fuel. pumping before removing the
nozzle. Clean fuel from painted
(Continued)
2014 - 2nd Edition - 8/19/13
surfaces as soon as possible. See Filling a Portable Fuel

“Washing the Vehicle” in Exterior { Caution Container
Care on page 10-81.
If a new fuel cap is needed, be
When replacing the fuel cap, turn it
clockwise until it clicks. Make sure
sure to get the right type of cap
from your dealer. The wrong type
{ Warning
the cap is fully installed. The of fuel cap might not fit properly, Filling a portable fuel container
diagnostic system can determine if might cause the malfunction while it is in the vehicle can cause
the fuel cap has been left off or indicator lamp to light, and could fuel vapors that can ignite either
improperly installed. This would
damage the fuel tank and by static electricity or other
allow fuel to evaporate into the
emissions system. See means. You or others could be
atmosphere. See Malfunction
Malfunction Indicator Lamp on badly burned and the vehicle
Indicator Lamp on page 5-12.
page 5-12. could be damaged. Always:
{ Warning . Use approved fuel
containers.
If a fire starts while you are . Remove the container from
refueling, do not remove the the vehicle, trunk, or pickup
nozzle. Shut off the flow of fuel by bed before filling.
shutting off the pump or by
notifying the station attendant.
. Place the container on the
ground.
Leave the area immediately.
. Place the nozzle inside the fill
opening of the container
before dispensing fuel, and
(Continued)
2014 - 2nd Edition - 8/19/13
Warning (Continued) Trailer Towing Conversions and

Add-Ons
keep it in contact with the fill General Towing
opening until filling is Information
complete. Add-On Electrical
. Fill the container no more
The vehicle is neither designed nor Equipment
intended to tow a trailer.
than 95% full to allow for
expansion. { Caution
. Do not smoke, light matches, Some electrical equipment can
or use lighters while damage the vehicle or cause
pumping fuel. components to not work and
. Avoid using cell phones or would not be covered by the
other electronic devices. warranty. Always check with your
dealer before adding electrical
equipment.
Add-on equipment can drain the

vehicle's 12-volt battery, even if the
vehicle is not operating.
The vehicle has an airbag system.
Before attempting to add anything
electrical to the vehicle, see
Servicing the Airbag-Equipped
Vehicle on page 3-28 and Adding
Equipment to the Airbag-Equipped
Vehicle on page 3-28.
2014 - 2nd Edition - 8/19/13
Vehicle Care 10-1
Washer Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-21

Vehicle Care Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-22
Taillamps, Turn Signal,
Stoplamps, and Back-Up
Brake Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-23 Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-30
Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-24 License Plate Lamp . . . . . . . . 10-31
General Information Starter Switch Check . . . . . . . 10-25 Replacement Bulbs . . . . . . . . . 10-32
General Information . . . . . . . . . . 10-2 Automatic Transmission Shift
California Proposition Lock Control Function Electrical System
65 Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-2 Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-25 Electrical System
California Perchlorate Ignition Transmission Lock Overload . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-32
Materials Requirements . . . . 10-3 Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-26 Fuses and Circuit
Accessories and Park Brake and P (Park) Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-33
Modifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-3 Mechanism Check . . . . . . . . 10-26 Engine Compartment Fuse
Wiper Blade Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-33
Vehicle Checks Instrument Panel Fuse
Doing Your Own Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-26
Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-38
Service Work . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-3 Headlamp Aiming
Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-4 Headlamp Aiming . . . . . . . . . . 10-28 Wheels and Tires
Engine Compartment Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-40
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-6 Bulb Replacement All-Season Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-41
Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-9 Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . 10-28 Winter Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-41
Engine Oil Life System . . . . . 10-12 Halogen Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-28 Summer Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-42
Automatic Transmission Headlamps, Front Turn Tire Sidewall Labeling . . . . . . 10-42
Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-13 Signal and Parking Tire Designations . . . . . . . . . . . 10-44
Manual Transmission Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-28 Tire Terminology and
Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-13 Fog Lamps (LS, LT, Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-45
Hydraulic Clutch . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-13 and LTZ) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-30 Tire Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-47
Engine Air Cleaner/Filter . . . . 10-14 Fog Lamps (RS) . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-30 Tire Pressure Monitor
Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-15 System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-49
Engine Coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-16
Engine Overheating . . . . . . . . 10-20
2014 - 2nd Edition - 8/19/13
10-2 Vehicle Care
Tire Pressure Monitor Towing the Vehicle General Information

Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-50 Towing the Vehicle . . . . . . . . . 10-77
Tire Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-53 Recreational Vehicle For service and parts needs, visit
Tire Rotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-53 Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-78 your dealer. You will receive
When It Is Time for New genuine GM parts and GM-trained
Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-54 Appearance Care and supported service people.
Buying New Tires . . . . . . . . . . . 10-55 Exterior Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-81
Interior Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-86 Genuine GM parts have one of
Different Size Tires and these marks:
Wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-56 Floor Mats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-89
Uniform Tire Quality
Grading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-57
Wheel Alignment and Tire
Balance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-58
Wheel Replacement . . . . . . . . 10-59
Tire Chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-60
If a Tire Goes Flat . . . . . . . . . . 10-60
Tire Sealant and
Compressor Kit . . . . . . . . . . . 10-62
Storing the Tire Sealant and
Compressor Kit . . . . . . . . . . . 10-69
Tire Changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-69
Compact Spare Tire . . . . . . . . 10-74
Jump Starting California Proposition
Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-75 65 Warning
Most motor vehicles, including this
one, contain and/or emit chemicals
known to the State of California to
2014 - 2nd Edition - 8/19/13
Vehicle Care 10-3
cause cancer and birth defects or handling, emissions systems, Vehicle Checks
other reproductive harm. Engine aerodynamics, durability, and
exhaust, many parts and systems, electronic systems like antilock
many fluids, and some component brakes, traction control, and stability Doing Your Own
wear by-products contain and/or control. These accessories or Service Work
emit these chemicals. modifications could even cause
California Perchlorate
malfunction or damage not covered
by the vehicle warranty.
{ Warning
Materials Requirements Damage to vehicle components It can be dangerous to work on
resulting from modifications or the your vehicle if you do not have
Certain types of automotive the proper knowledge, service
installation or use of non‐GM
applications, such as airbag manual, tools, or parts. Always
certified parts, including control
initiators, safety belt pretensioners, follow owner manual procedures
module or software modifications, is
and lithium batteries contained in and consult the service manual
not covered under the terms of the
Remote Keyless Entry transmitters,
vehicle warranty and may affect for your vehicle before doing any
may contain perchlorate materials.
remaining warranty coverage for service work.
Special handling may be necessary.
affected parts.
For additional information, see
www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/ GM Accessories are designed to If doing some of your own service
perchlorate. complement and function with other work, use the proper service
systems on the vehicle. See your manual. It tells you much more
Accessories and dealer to accessorize the vehicle about how to service the vehicle
using genuine GM Accessories than this manual can. To order the
Modifications installed by a dealer technician. proper service manual, see Service
Adding non‐dealer accessories or Also, see Adding Equipment to the Publications Ordering Information
making modifications to the vehicle Airbag-Equipped Vehicle on on page 13-11.
can affect vehicle performance and page 3-28.
safety, including such things as
airbags, braking, stability, ride and
2014 - 2nd Edition - 8/19/13
10-4 Vehicle Care
This vehicle has an airbag system. Hood

Before attempting to do your own
service work, see Servicing the To open the hood:
Airbag-Equipped Vehicle on
page 3-28.
Keep a record with all parts receipts
and list the mileage and the date of
any service work performed. See
Maintenance Records on
page 11-15.
{ Caution
2. Go to the front of the vehicle and
Even small amounts of move the secondary hood
contamination can cause damage release lever toward the right
to vehicle systems. Do not allow side of the vehicle.
1. Pull the hood release handle
contaminants to contact the fluids, inside the vehicle. It is located
reservoir caps, or dipsticks. on the lower left side of the
instrument panel.
2014 - 2nd Edition - 8/19/13
Vehicle Care 10-5
To close the hood:

1. Before closing the hood, be sure
all filler caps are on properly.
Then, lift the hood to relieve
pressure on the hood prop.
Remove the hood prop from the
slot in the underside of the hood
and return the prop to its
retainer. The prop rod must click
into place when returning it to
the retainer to prevent hood
damage.
3. Lift the hood and release the 2. Lower the hood 30 cm (12 in)
hood prop from its retainer, above the vehicle and release it
located in front of the engine so it fully latches. Check to
compartment. Securely place the make sure the hood is closed
hood prop into the slot on the and repeat the process if
underside of the hood. necessary.
2014 - 2nd Edition - 8/19/13
10-6 Vehicle Care
Engine Compartment Overview
1.4L L4 Engine
2014 - 2nd Edition - 8/19/13
Vehicle Care 10-7
1. Engine Air Cleaner/Filter on

page 10-14.
2. Engine Oil Dipstick. See Engine
Oil on page 10-9.
3. Engine Cooling Fan (Out of
View). See Cooling System on
page 10-15.
4. Engine Oil Fill Cap. See Engine
Oil on page 10-9.
5. Engine Coolant Surge Tank and
Pressure Cap. See Cooling
System on page 10-15.
6. Brake/Clutch Fluid Reservoir.
See Brakes on page 10-22 and
Hydraulic Clutch on page 10-13.
7. Battery on page 10-24.
8. Windshield Washer Fluid
Reservoir. See Washer Fluid on
page 10-21.
9. Engine Compartment Fuse
Block on page 10-33.
2014 - 2nd Edition - 8/19/13
10-8 Vehicle Care
1.8L L4 Engine
2014 - 2nd Edition - 8/19/13
Vehicle Care 10-9
1. Engine Air Cleaner/Filter on Engine Oil

page 10-14.
To ensure proper engine
2. Engine Oil Dipstick. See Engine performance and long life, careful
Oil on page 10-9. attention must be paid to engine oil.
3. Engine Cooling Fan (Out of Following these simple, but
View). See Cooling System on important steps will help protect
your investment: If the engine oil pressure light
page 10-15.
comes on, check the engine oil level
4. Engine Oil Fill Cap. See Engine . Always use engine oil approved right away. The oil pressure light is
Oil on page 10-9. to the proper specification and of on the instrument cluster. See
the proper viscosity grade. See Engine Oil Pressure Light on
5. Engine Coolant Surge Tank and
“Selecting the Right Engine Oil” page 5-19. Check the engine oil
Pressure Cap. See Cooling
in this section. level regularly; this is an added
System on page 10-15.
. Check the engine oil level reminder.
6. Brake/Clutch Fluid Reservoir.
regularly and maintain the Checking Engine Oil
See Brakes on page 10-22 and proper oil level. See “Checking
Hydraulic Clutch on page 10-13. Engine Oil” and “When to Add It is a good idea to check the engine
7. Battery on page 10-24. Engine Oil” in this section. oil level at each fuel fill. In order to
get an accurate reading, the oil
8. Engine Compartment Fuse . Change the engine oil at the must be warm and the vehicle must
Block on page 10-33. appropriate time. See Engine Oil be on level ground. The engine oil
9. Windshield Washer Fluid Life System on page 10-12. dipstick handle is a loop. See
Reservoir. See Washer Fluid on . Always dispose of engine oil Engine Compartment Overview on
page 10-21. properly. See “What to Do with page 10-6 for the location of the
Used Oil” in this section. engine oil dipstick.
1. If the engine has been running
recently, turn off the engine and
allow several minutes for the oil
2014 - 2nd Edition - 8/19/13
10-10 Vehicle Care
to drain back into the oil pan. When to Add Engine Oil
Checking the oil level too soon Caution (Continued)
after engine shutoff will not
provide an accurate oil level have an oil level above the
reading. operating range, i.e., the engine
has so much oil that the oil level
gets above the upper mark that
{ Warning shows the proper operating
The engine oil dipstick handle 1.8L Shown, 1.4L Similar range, the engine could be
may be hot; it could burn you. If the oil is below the minimum mark damaged. You should drain out
Use a towel or glove to touch the on the dipstick, add 1 L (1 qt) of the the excess oil or limit driving of
dipstick handle. recommended oil and then recheck the vehicle and seek a service
the level. See “Selecting the Right professional to remove the
Engine Oil” in this section for an excess amount of oil.
2. Pull out the dipstick and clean it
explanation of what kind of oil to
with a paper towel or cloth, then
use. For engine oil crankcase See Engine Compartment Overview
push it back in all the way.
capacity, see Capacities and on page 10-6 for the location of the
Remove it again, keeping the tip
Specifications on page 12-2. engine oil fill cap.
down, and check the level.
Add enough oil to put the level
{ Caution somewhere in the proper operating
Do not add too much oil. Oil range. Push the dipstick all the way
levels above or below the back in when through.
acceptable operating range
shown on the dipstick are harmful
to the engine. If you find that you
(Continued)
2014 - 2nd Edition - 8/19/13
Vehicle Care 10-11
Selecting the Right Engine Oil specification. See “Specification”

Selecting the right engine oil
{ Caution earlier in this section for more
information.
depends on both the proper oil Failure to use the recommended
specification and viscosity grade. engine oil can result in engine Engine Oil Additives/Engine
See Recommended Fluids and damage not covered by the Oil Flushes
Lubricants on page 11-12. vehicle warranty. Check with your Do not add anything to the oil. The
Specification dealer or service provider on recommended oils with the dexos
whether the oil is approved to the specification and displaying the
Use and ask for licensed engine oils dexos1 specification.
with the dexos1® approved dexos certification mark are all that
certification mark. Engine oils is needed for good performance and
meeting the requirements for the Viscosity Grade engine protection.
vehicle should have the dexos1 SAE 5W-30 is the best viscosity Engine oil system flushes are not
approved certification mark. This grade for the vehicle. Do not use recommended and could cause
certification mark indicates that the other viscosity grade oils such as engine damage not covered by the
oil has been approved to the dexos1 SAE 10W-30, 10W-40, or 20W-50. vehicle warranty.
specification.
Cold Temperature Operation: In an What to Do with Used Oil
area of extreme cold, where the
Used engine oil contains certain
temperature falls below −29°C
elements that can be unhealthy for
(−20°F), an SAE 0W-30 oil may be
your skin and could even cause
used. An oil of this viscosity grade
cancer. Do not let used oil stay on
will provide easier cold starting for
your skin for very long. Clean your
the engine at extremely low
skin and nails with soap and water,
temperatures. When selecting an oil
or a good hand cleaner. Wash or
of the appropriate viscosity grade,
properly dispose of clothing or rags
always select an oil of the correct
2014 - 2nd Edition - 8/19/13
10-12 Vehicle Care
containing used engine oil. See the When the system has calculated How to Reset the Engine Oil
manufacturer's warnings about the that oil life has been diminished, it Life System
use and disposal of oil products. indicates that an oil change is
Reset the system whenever the
Used oil can be a threat to the necessary. A : % CHANGE engine oil is changed so that the
environment. If you change your message in the DIC comes on. See system can calculate the next
own oil, be sure to drain all the oil Vehicle Messages on page 5-24. engine oil change. To reset the
from the filter before disposal. Never Change the oil as soon as possible system:
dispose of oil by putting it in the within the next 1 000 km (600 mi).
trash or pouring it on the ground, It is possible that, if driving under 1. Press the MENU button to show
into sewers, or into streams or the best conditions, the oil life Remaining Oil Life on the
bodies of water. Recycle it by taking system might indicate that an oil display. This display shows an
it to a place that collects used oil. change is not necessary for up to a estimate of the oil’s remaining
year. The engine oil and filter must useful life. If 99% is displayed,
be changed at least once a year that means that 99% of the
Engine Oil Life System current oil life remains.
and, at this time, the system must
When to Change Engine Oil be reset. Your dealer has trained 2. To reset the engine oil life
This vehicle has a computer system service people who will perform this system, press the SET/CLR
that indicates when to change the work and reset the system. It is also button while the oil life display is
engine oil and filter. This is based important to check the oil regularly active. After a few seconds,
on a combination of factors which over the course of an oil drain there will be a single chime and
include engine revolutions, engine interval and keep it at the proper the oil life will be reset to 100%.
temperature, and miles driven. level.
Based on driving conditions, the If the system is ever reset
mileage at which an oil change is accidentally, the oil must be
indicated can vary considerably. For changed at 5 000 km (3,000 mi)
the oil life system to work properly, since the last oil change.
the system must be reset every time Remember to reset the oil life
the oil is changed. system whenever the oil is changed.
2014 - 2nd Edition - 8/19/13
Vehicle Care 10-13
Automatic Transmission Manual Transmission

Fluid Fluid
How to Check Automatic It is not necessary to check the
Transmission Fluid manual transmission fluid level.
A transmission fluid leak is the only
It is not necessary to check the reason for fluid loss. If a leak
transmission fluid level. occurs, take the vehicle to your
A transmission fluid leak is the only dealer and have it repaired as soon
reason for fluid loss. If a leak as possible. See Recommended
occurs, take the vehicle to your Fluids and Lubricants on page 11-12
dealer and have it repaired as soon for the proper fluid to use.
as possible.
Be careful not to reset the oil life
display accidentally at any time There is a special procedure for Hydraulic Clutch
other than after the oil is changed. checking and changing the
For vehicles with a manual
It cannot be reset accurately. transmission fluid. Because this
transmission, it is not necessary to
procedure is difficult, you should regularly check brake/clutch fluid
If the : % CHANGE message in have this done at your dealer. unless there is a leak suspected.
the DIC comes back on when the Change the fluid and filter at the Adding fluid will not correct a leak.
vehicle is started, the engine oil life intervals listed in Maintenance A fluid loss in this system could
system has not reset. Repeat the Schedule on page 11-2, and be sure indicate a problem. Have the
procedure. to use the fluid listed in system inspected and repaired.
Recommended Fluids and
Lubricants on page 11-12. When to Check and What
to Use
The common hydraulic clutch and
brake master cylinder fluid reservoir
is filled with DOT 3 brake fluid as
2014 - 2nd Edition - 8/19/13
10-14 Vehicle Care
indicated on the reservoir cap. See When to Inspect the Engine Air To inspect or replace the air cleaner/
Engine Compartment Overview on Cleaner/Filter filter:
page 10-6 for reservoir location.
Inspect the air cleaner/filter at the
How to Check and Add Fluid scheduled maintenance intervals.
See Maintenance Schedule on
Visually check the brake/clutch fluid
page 11-2. If you are driving in
reservoir to make sure the fluid level
dusty/dirty conditions, inspect the
is at the MIN (minimum) line on the
filter at each engine oil change.
side of the reservoir. The brake/
hydraulic clutch fluid system should How to Inspect the Engine Air
be closed and sealed. Cleaner/Filter
Do not remove the cap to check the To inspect the engine air cleaner/
fluid level or to top‐off the fluid level. filter, remove the filter from the
Remove the cap only when vehicle and lightly shake the filter to
necessary to add the proper fluid release loose dust and dirt. If the 1.4L L4 Engine
until the level reaches the MIN line. filter remains covered with dirt, a
new filter is required.
Engine Air Cleaner/Filter
The engine air cleaner/filter is
located in the engine compartment
on the passenger side of the
vehicle. See Engine Compartment
Overview on page 10-6 for more
information on location.
2014 - 2nd Edition - 8/19/13
Vehicle Care 10-15
Cooling System
{ Warning
The cooling system allows the
Operating the engine with the air engine to maintain the correct
cleaner/filter off can cause you or working temperature.
others to be burned. The air
cleaner not only cleans the air; it
helps to stop flames if the engine
backfires. Use caution when
working on the engine and do not
drive with the air cleaner/filter off.
1.8L L4 Engine
1. Remove the two screws, tilt the { Caution
cover, and slide it out of the
assembly. If the air cleaner/filter is off, dirt
can easily get into the engine,
2. Inspect or replace the engine air which could damage it. Always 1.4L L4 Engine
cleaner/filter.
have the air cleaner/filter in place 1. Engine Cooling Fan (Out
3. Lower the cover, slide it into the when you are driving. of View)
assembly, then secure with the
two screws. 2. Engine Coolant Surge Tank and
Pressure Cap
See Maintenance Schedule on
page 11-2 for replacement intervals.
2014 - 2nd Edition - 8/19/13
10-16 Vehicle Care
{ Warning Caution (Continued)

Heater and radiator hoses, and vehicle warranty. Always use
other engine parts, can be very DEX-COOL (silicate-free) coolant
hot. Do not touch them. If you do, in the vehicle.
you can be burned.
Do not run the engine if there is a Engine Coolant
leak. If you run the engine, it
could lose all coolant. That could The cooling system in the vehicle is
cause an engine fire, and you filled with DEX-COOL engine
coolant. This coolant is designed to
could be burned. Get any leak
1.8L L4 Engine remain in the vehicle for 5 years or
fixed before you drive the vehicle.
240 000 km (150,000 mi), whichever
1. Engine Cooling Fan (Out occurs first.
of View)
The following explains the cooling
2. Engine Coolant Surge Tank and { Caution system and how to check and add
Pressure Cap coolant when it is low. If there is a
Using coolant other than problem with engine overheating,
{ Warning DEX-COOL® can cause see Engine Overheating on
premature engine, heater core, page 10-20.
An electric engine cooling fan or radiator corrosion. In addition,
under the hood can start up even the engine coolant could require
when the engine is not running changing sooner. Any repairs
and can cause injury. Keep would not be covered by the
hands, clothing, and tools away (Continued)
from any underhood electric fan.
2014 - 2nd Edition - 8/19/13
Vehicle Care 10-17
What to Use
. Gives boiling protection up to Never dispose of engine coolant by
129°C (265°F), engine putting it in the trash, pouring it on
temperature.
{ Warning . Protects against rust and
the ground, or into sewers, streams,
or bodies of water. Have the coolant
Adding only plain water or some corrosion. changed by an authorized service
other liquid to the cooling system center, familiar with legal
. Will not damage aluminum parts. requirements regarding used
can be dangerous. Plain water
and other liquids, can boil before
. Helps keep the proper engine coolant disposal. This will help
the proper coolant mixture will. temperature. protect the environment and your
health.
The coolant warning system is set
for the proper coolant mixture. { Caution Checking Coolant
With plain water or the wrong
If improper coolant mixture, The vehicle must be on a level
mixture, the engine could get too
inhibitors, or additives are used in surface when checking the coolant
hot but you would not get the
the vehicle cooling system, the level.
overheat warning. The engine
engine could overheat and be It is normal to see coolant moving in
could catch fire and you or others
damaged. Too much water in the the upper coolant hose return line
could be burned. Use a 50/
mixture can freeze and crack when the engine is running.
50 mixture of clean, drinkable
engine cooling parts. The repairs
water and DEX-COOL coolant. Check to see if coolant is visible in
would not be covered by the
the coolant surge tank. If the coolant
vehicle warranty. Use only the inside the coolant surge tank is
Use a 50/50 mixture of clean proper mixture of engine coolant
drinkable water and DEX-COOL boiling, do not do anything else until
for the cooling system. See it cools down.
coolant. This mixture: Recommended Fluids and
. Gives freezing protection down Lubricants on page 11-12.
to −37°C (−34°F), outside
temperature.
2014 - 2nd Edition - 8/19/13
10-18 Vehicle Care
If coolant is visible but the coolant water and DEX-COOL coolant at the
level is not at or above the mark coolant surge tank, but be sure the Warning (Continued)
pointed to, add a 50/50 mixture of cooling system, including the
clean drinkable water and coolant surge tank pressure cap, is The coolant warning system is set
DEX-COOL coolant. cool before you do it. for the proper coolant mixture.
Be sure the cooling system is cool With plain water or the wrong
before this is done. { Warning mixture, the engine could get too
hot but you would not get the
If no coolant is visible in the coolant Steam and scalding liquids from a overheat warning. The engine
surge tank, add coolant as follows: hot cooling system can blow out could catch fire and you or
How to Add Coolant to the and burn you badly. Never turn others could be burned. Use a
Coolant Surge Tank the cap when the cooling system, 50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable
including the surge tank pressure water and DEX-COOL coolant.
cap, is hot. Wait for the cooling
{ Caution system and surge tank pressure
cap to cool.
This vehicle has a specific
coolant fill procedure. Failure to
{ Caution
follow this procedure could cause In cold weather, water can freeze
the engine to overheat and be
severely damaged.
{ Warning and crack the engine, radiator,
heater core, and other parts. Use
Adding only plain water or some the recommended coolant and
If no problem is found, check to see other liquid to the cooling system the proper coolant mixture.
if coolant is visible in the coolant can be dangerous. Plain water
surge tank. If coolant is visible but and other liquids, can boil before
the coolant level is not at the the proper coolant mixture will.
indicated level mark, add a (Continued)
50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable
2014 - 2nd Edition - 8/19/13
Vehicle Care 10-19
a hiss, wait for that to stop. This 4. With the coolant surge tank
{ Warning will allow any pressure still left to pressure cap off, start the
be vented out the engine and let it run until you
You can be burned if you spill discharge hose. can feel the upper radiator hose
coolant on hot engine parts. getting hot. Watch out for the
Coolant contains ethylene glycol 2. Keep turning the pressure cap
slowly and remove it. engine cooling fan.
and it will burn if the engine parts
are hot enough. Do not spill By this time, the coolant level
coolant on a hot engine. inside the coolant surge tank
may be lower. If the level is
lower, add more of the proper
DEX-COOL coolant mixture to
the coolant surge tank until the
level reaches the indicated
level mark.
5. Replace the pressure cap tightly.
1.4L Engine Shown, 1.8L Engine Check the level in the coolant surge
Similar tank when the cooling system has
cooled down. If the coolant is not at
1. Remove the coolant surge tank the proper level, repeat Steps 1–
pressure cap when the cooling 3. Fill the coolant surge tank with 3 and reinstall the pressure cap.
system, including the coolant the proper DEX-COOL coolant If the coolant still is not at the proper
surge tank pressure cap and mixture to the indicated level when the system cools down
upper radiator hose, is no level mark. again, see your dealer.
longer hot.
Turn the pressure cap slowly
counterclockwise about
one-quarter of a turn. If you hear
2014 - 2nd Edition - 8/19/13
10-20 Vehicle Care
{ Caution { Caution Warning (Continued)

If the pressure cap is not tightly Running the engine without If you keep driving when the
installed, coolant loss and coolant may cause damage or a engine is overheated, the liquids
possible engine damage may fire. Vehicle damage would not be in it can catch fire. You or others
occur. Be sure the cap is properly covered by the vehicle warranty. could be badly burned. Stop the
and tightly secured. engine if it overheats, and get out
of the vehicle until the engine
If Steam Is Coming from the
is cool.
Engine Overheating Engine Compartment
The vehicle has an indicator to warn
of the engine overheating. { Warning If No Steam Is Coming from
the Engine Compartment
If the decision is made not to lift the Steam from an overheated engine
hood when this warning appears, If an engine overheat warning is
can burn you badly, even if you displayed but no steam can be seen
get service help right away. See just open the hood. Stay away
Roadside Assistance Program on or heard, the problem may not be
from the engine if you see or hear too serious. Sometimes the engine
page 13-5. steam coming from it. Just turn it can get a little too hot when the
If the decision is made to lift the off and get everyone away from vehicle:
hood, make sure the vehicle is the vehicle until it cools down.
parked on a level surface. Wait until there is no sign of
. Climbs a long hill on a hot day.
Then check to see if the engine steam or coolant before you open . Stops after high-speed driving.
cooling fan is running. If the engine the hood. . Idles for long periods in traffic.
is overheating, the fan should be (Continued) If the overheat warning is displayed
running. If it is not, do not continue with no sign of steam:
to run the engine. Have the vehicle
serviced. 1. Turn the air conditioning off.
2014 - 2nd Edition - 8/19/13
Vehicle Care 10-21
2. Turn the heater on to the highest Washer Fluid

temperature and to the highest { Caution
fan speed. Open the windows as What to Use
necessary.
. Do not use engine coolant
When the vehicle needs windshield (antifreeze) in the windshield
3. When it is safe to do so, pull off washer fluid, be sure to read the washer. It can damage the
the road, shift to P (Park) or manufacturer's instructions before windshield washer system
N (Neutral) for an automatic use. If operating the vehicle in an and paint.
transmission or Neutral for a area where the temperature may fall
manual transmission, and let the below freezing, use a fluid that has
. Do not mix water with
engine idle. sufficient protection against ready-to-use washer fluid.
freezing. Water can cause the solution
If the overheat warning no longer to freeze and damage the
displays, the vehicle can be driven. Adding Washer Fluid washer fluid tank and other
Continue to drive the vehicle slowly parts of the washer system.
for about 10 minutes. Keep a safe
vehicle distance from the vehicle in
. When using concentrated
front. If the warning does not come washer fluid, follow the
back on, continue to drive normally manufacturer instructions for
and have the cooling system adding water.
checked for proper fill and function. . Fill the washer fluid tank only
If the warning continues, pull over, three-quarters full when it is
Open the cap with the washer very cold. This allows for fluid
stop, and park the vehicle symbol on it. Add washer fluid until
right away. expansion if freezing occurs,
the tank is full. See Engine which could damage the tank
If there is no sign of steam, idle the Compartment Overview on if it is completely full.
engine for three minutes while page 10-6 for reservoir location.
parked. If the warning is still
displayed, turn off the engine until it
cools down.
2014 - 2nd Edition - 8/19/13
10-22 Vehicle Care
Brakes Drum brakes have an inspection

{ Caution hole to inspect lining wear during
This vehicle has front disc brakes scheduled maintenance. When the
and could have rear drum brakes or Continuing to drive with worn-out front brake pads are replaced, have
rear disc brakes. brake pads could result in costly the rear brakes inspected, too.
brake repair.
Disc brake pads have built-in wear Brake linings should always be
indicators that make a high-pitched replaced as complete axle sets.
warning sound when the brake pads Some driving conditions or climates
are worn and new pads are needed. can cause a brake squeal when the Brake Pedal Travel
The sound can come and go or be brakes are first applied or lightly See your dealer if the brake pedal
heard all the time the vehicle is applied. This does not mean does not return to normal height,
moving, except when applying the something is wrong with the brakes. or if there is a rapid increase in
brake pedal firmly. pedal travel. This could be a sign
Properly torqued wheel nuts are
necessary to help prevent brake that brake service might be
{ Warning pulsation. When tires are rotated, required.
inspect brake pads for wear and
The brake wear warning sound evenly tighten wheel nuts in the
Brake Adjustment
means that soon the brakes will proper sequence to torque Every moderate brake stop, the disc
not work well. That could lead to specifications in Capacities and brakes adjust for wear. If rarely
a crash. When the brake wear Specifications on page 12-2. making moderate or heavier brake
warning sound is heard, have the stops, the brakes might not adjust
vehicle serviced. If the vehicle has rear drum brakes,
they do not have wear indicators, correctly. Very carefully making a
but if a rear brake rubbing noise is few moderate brake stops about
heard, have the rear brake linings every 1 600 km (1,000 miles) will
inspected immediately. Rear brake adjust the brakes properly.
drums should be removed and If the vehicle has rear drum brakes
inspected each time the tires are and the brake pedal goes down
removed for rotation or changing. farther than normal, the rear drum
2014 - 2nd Edition - 8/19/13
Vehicle Care 10-23
brakes might need adjustment. Brake Fluid since a leak means that sooner
Adjust them by backing up and or later the brakes and/or clutch
firmly applying the brakes a few will not work well.
times. Do not top off the brake/clutch fluid.
Replacing Brake System Parts Adding fluid does not correct a leak.
If fluid is added when the linings are
The braking system on a vehicle is worn, there will be too much fluid
complex. Its many parts have to be when new brake linings are
of top quality and work well together installed. Add or remove brake fluid,
if the vehicle is to have really good The brake/clutch master cylinder
reservoir is filled with DOT 3 brake as necessary, only when work is
braking. The vehicle was designed done on the brake/clutch hydraulic
and tested with top-quality brake fluid as indicated on the reservoir
cap. See Engine Compartment system.
parts. When parts of the braking
system are replaced, be sure to get Overview on page 10-6 for the
new, approved replacement parts. location of the reservoir. { Warning
If this is not done, the brakes might There are only two reasons why the If too much brake fluid is added, it
not work properly. For example, fluid level in the reservoir might
can spill on the engine and burn,
installing disc brake pads that are go down:
if the engine is hot enough. You
wrong for the vehicle, can change . The fluid level goes down
the balance between the front and or others could be burned, and
because of normal brake lining the vehicle could be damaged.
rear brakes — for the worse. The wear. When new linings are
braking performance expected can Add brake fluid only when work is
installed, the fluid level goes done on the brake/clutch
change in many other ways if the back up.
wrong replacement brake parts are hydraulic system.
installed. . A fluid leak in the brake/clutch
hydraulic system can also cause
a low fluid level. Have the brake/
clutch hydraulic system fixed,
2014 - 2nd Edition - 8/19/13
10-24 Vehicle Care
When the brake/clutch fluid falls to a Battery

low level, the brake warning light { Caution
comes on. See Brake System Refer to the replacement number
Warning Light on page 5-15.
. Using the wrong fluid can shown on the original battery label
badly damage brake/clutch when a new battery is needed. See
What to Add hydraulic system parts. For Engine Compartment Overview on
Use only new DOT 3 brake fluid example, just a few drops of page 10-6 for battery location.
from a sealed container. See mineral-based oil, such as
Recommended Fluids and engine oil, in the brake
hydraulic system can damage
{ Warning
Lubricants on page 11-12.
brake hydraulic system parts Battery posts, terminals, and
Always clean the brake/clutch fluid so badly that they will have to related accessories contain lead
reservoir cap and the area around be replaced. Do not let and lead compounds, chemicals
the cap before removing it. This someone put in the wrong
helps keep dirt from entering the known to the State of California to
kind of fluid.
reservoir. cause cancer and reproductive
. If brake fluid is spilled on the harm. Wash hands after handling.
vehicle's painted surfaces,
{ Warning the paint finish can be
damaged. Be careful not to Vehicle Storage
With the wrong kind of fluid in the
spill brake fluid on the
brake/clutch hydraulic system, the
brakes might not work well. This
vehicle. If you do, wash it off { Warning
immediately.
could cause a crash. Always use Batteries have acid that can burn
the proper brake/clutch fluid. you and gas that can explode.
You can be badly hurt if you are
not careful. See Jump Starting on
(Continued)
2014 - 2nd Edition - 8/19/13
Vehicle Care 10-25
Warning (Continued)
1. Before starting this check, be Automatic Transmission
sure there is enough room
around the vehicle.
Shift Lock Control
page 10-75 for tips on working Function Check
around a battery without 2. Apply both the parking brake
getting hurt. and the regular brake.
Do not use the accelerator
{ Warning
Infrequent Usage: Remove the pedal, and be ready to turn off When you are doing this
black, negative (−) cable from the the engine immediately if it inspection, the vehicle could
battery to keep the battery from starts. move suddenly. If the vehicle
running down. 3. For automatic transmission moves, you or others could be
Extended Storage: Remove the vehicles, try to start the engine injured.
black, negative (−) cable from the in each gear. The vehicle should
battery or use a battery trickle start only in P (Park) or
1. Before starting this check, be
charger. N (Neutral). If the vehicle starts
sure there is enough room
in any other position, contact
around the vehicle. It should be
your dealer for service.
Starter Switch Check parked on a level surface.
For manual transmission
2. Apply the parking brake. Be
{ Warning vehicles, put the shift lever in
Neutral, push the clutch pedal
ready to apply the regular brake
immediately if the vehicle begins
When you are doing this down halfway, and try to start
to move.
inspection, the vehicle could the engine. The vehicle should
move suddenly. If the vehicle start only when the clutch pedal 3. With the engine off, turn the
is pushed down all the way to ignition on, but do not start the
moves, you or others could be
the floor. If the vehicle starts engine. Without applying the
injured. regular brake, try to move the
when the clutch pedal is not
pushed all the way down, shift lever out of P (Park) with
contact your dealer for service.
2014 - 2nd Edition - 8/19/13
10-26 Vehicle Care

. To check the P (Park)
normal effort. If the shift lever Park Brake and P (Park) mechanism's holding ability:
moves out of P (Park), contact
your dealer for service.
Mechanism Check With the engine running, shift to
P (Park). Then release the
Ignition Transmission { Warning parking brake followed by the
regular brake.
Lock Check When you are doing this check,
Contact your dealer if service is
While parked, and with the parking the vehicle could begin to move. required.
brake set, try to turn the ignition to You or others could be injured
LOCK/OFF in each shift lever and property could be damaged.
Make sure there is room in front
Wiper Blade Replacement
position.
. For automatic transmission of the vehicle in case it begins to Front Wiper Blade
vehicles, the ignition should turn roll. Be ready to apply the regular Replacement
to LOCK/OFF only when the brake at once should the vehicle
Windshield wiper blades should be
shift lever is in P (Park). begin to move.
inspected for wear or cracking. See
. For manual transmission the Maintenance Schedule on
vehicles, the ignition should turn Park on a fairly steep hill, with the page 11-2 for more information.
to LOCK/OFF only when the vehicle facing downhill. Keeping Replacement blades come in
shift lever is in neutral. your foot on the regular brake, set different types and are removed in
the parking brake. different ways. For proper
On all vehicles, the ignition key
should come out only in LOCK/OFF. . To check the parking brake's windshield wiper blade length and
holding ability: With the engine type, see Maintenance
Contact your dealer if service is running and the transmission in Replacement Parts on page 11-14.
required. N (Neutral), slowly remove foot
pressure from the regular brake
pedal. Do this until the vehicle is
held by the parking brake only.
2014 - 2nd Edition - 8/19/13
Vehicle Care 10-27
1. Pull the wiper arm a short

{ Caution distance away from the
glass (1).
Allowing the wiper arm to touch
the windshield when no wiper 2. Pull the blade out from
blade is installed could damage the arm (2).
the windshield. Any damage that It may require extra effort to
occurs would not be covered by 3. Install the new blade onto the remove the old blade.
your warranty. Do not allow the arm and make sure the tabs are
wiper arm to touch the windshield. fully set in the locked position.
4. Repeat the steps for the other
To replace the windshield wiper wiper.
blade: Rear Wiper Blade Replacement
1. Pull the windshield wiper
assembly away from the
windshield.
3. Once the blade pin disengages

from the wiper arm, remove the
wiper blade by sliding the pin out
2. Squeeze the tabs on each side of the guide hole.
of the wiper blade assembly and
slide the assembly off the end of 4. Reverse the steps to install the
the wiper arm. new blade.
2014 - 2nd Edition - 8/19/13
10-28 Vehicle Care
Headlamp Aiming Bulb Replacement Headlamps, Front Turn

Headlamp aim has been preset and For the proper type of replacement Signal and Parking
should need no further adjustment. bulbs, see Replacement Bulbs on Lamps
If the vehicle is damaged in a crash, page 10-32.
the headlamp aim may be affected. For any bulb‐changing procedure
If adjustment to the headlamps is not listed in this section, contact
necessary, see your dealer. your dealer.
Halogen Bulbs
{ Warning
Halogen bulbs have pressurized
gas inside and can burst if you
drop or scratch the bulb. You or
others could be injured. Be sure
Passenger Side Shown, Driver
to read and follow the instructions
Side Similar
on the bulb package.
1. High-Beam Headlamp
2. Low-Beam Headlamp
3. Parking/Turn Signal Lamps
High-Beam Headlamp/
Low-Beam Headlamp
1. Open the hood. See Hood on
page 10-4.
2014 - 2nd Edition - 8/19/13
Vehicle Care 10-29
2. For the driver side bulb, remove 6. Install the new bulb in the
the windshield washer bottle headlamp assembly by turning
filler neck by turning it clockwise.
one-quarter turn 7. Reconnect the wiring harness
counterclockwise and pulling it connector.
straight up and out of the bottle.
8. Install the headlamp bulb access
cover.
9. For the driver side bulb, replace
the windshield washer bottle
filler neck by turning it
one-quarter turn clockwise into
the bottle. 2. Remove the parking/turn signal
Parking/Turn Signal Lamp lamp bulb socket from the
headlamp assembly by turning
1. Open the hood. See Hood on counterclockwise.
page 10-4.
3. Remove the bulb from the bulb
socket by pulling it straight out.
3. Remove the headlamp bulb 4. Install the new bulb in the bulb
access cover. socket.
4. Turn the bulb counterclockwise 5. Install the bulb socket into the
and pull straight back. headlamp assembly by turning
clockwise.
5. Disconnect the wiring harness
connector from the bulb.
2014 - 2nd Edition - 8/19/13
10-30 Vehicle Care
Fog Lamps (LS, LT, Fog Lamps (RS) 5. Install the new bulb by turning it
clockwise into the assembly.
and LTZ)
6. Reconnect the electrical
To replace the front fog lamp bulb: connector.
1. Locate the fog lamp located 7. Replace the cap on the back of
under the front fascia. the fog lamp assembly.
2. Disconnect the electrical
connector from the fog lamp bulb Taillamps, Turn Signal,
assembly. Stoplamps, and Back-Up
3. Remove the bulb by turning it Lamps
counterclockwise and pulling it
straight out of the assembly.
4. Install the new bulb by turning it
clockwise into the assembly. To replace the front fog lamp bulb:
5. Reconnect the electrical 1. Locate the fog lamp located
connector. under the front fascia.
2. Remove the cap from the back
of the fog lamp assembly.
3. Disconnect the electrical
connector from the fog lamp bulb
assembly.
4. Remove the bulb by turning it
Sedan Taillamp Shown, Hatchback
counterclockwise and pulling it
Taillamp Similar
straight out of the assembly.
1. Back-up Lamp
2014 - 2nd Edition - 8/19/13
Vehicle Care 10-31
2. Turn Signal Lamp 4. Remove the bulb socket from License Plate Lamp
3. Stop Lamp/Taillamp the taillamp assembly by turning
it counterclockwise.
4. Sidemarker Lamp
5. Remove the bulb by pulling it
To replace one of these bulbs: straight out.
1. Open the trunk. 6. Install a new bulb into the bulb
socket.
7. Install the bulb socket into the
taillamp assembly by turning it
clockwise.
8. Install the taillamp assembly and
tighten the two screws.
Lamp Assembly
2. Remove the two screws, which

secure the taillamp assembly.
3. Remove the taillamp assembly
by pulling it straight back until
the two posts disengage from
the grommets.
Bulb Assembly
2014 - 2nd Edition - 8/19/13
10-32 Vehicle Care
1. Bulb Socket Replacement Bulbs Electrical System

2. Bulb Bulb
Exterior Lamp
3. Lamp Assembly Number Electrical System
To replace one of these bulbs: Back-Up Lamp 921 Overload
1. Push the left end of the lamp Front Fog Lamp H8 The vehicle has fuses and circuit
assembly toward the right. breakers to protect against an
Front Parking/Turn 7444NA electrical system overload.
2. Turn the lamp assembly down to Signal Lamp
remove it. When the current electrical load is
High-Beam 9005LL too heavy, the circuit breaker opens
3. Turn the bulb socket (1) Headlamp and closes, protecting the circuit
counterclockwise to remove it until the current load returns to
License Plate Lamp W5W LL
from the lamp assembly (3). normal or the problem is fixed. This
4. Pull the bulb (2) straight out of Low-Beam H11 greatly reduces the chance of circuit
the bulb socket (1). Headlamp overload and fire caused by
Rear 194LL electrical problems.
5. Push the replacement bulb
straight into the bulb socket and Sidemarker Lamp Fuses and circuit breakers protect
turn the bulb socket clockwise to Rear Turn 4157NAK power devices in the vehicle.
install it into the lamp assembly. Signal Lamp Replace a bad fuse with a new one
6. Turn the lamp assembly into the Stop Lamp/Taillamp 7444LL of the identical size and rating.
lamp assembly opening If there is a problem on the road and
engaging the clip side first. For replacement bulbs not listed a fuse needs to be replaced, the
7. Push on the lamp side opposite here, contact your dealer. same amperage fuse can be
the clip until the lamp assembly borrowed. Choose some feature of
snaps into place. the vehicle that is not needed to use
and replace it as soon as possible.
2014 - 2nd Edition - 8/19/13
Vehicle Care 10-33
Headlamp Wiring Fuses and Circuit Engine Compartment

An electrical overload may cause Breakers Fuse Block
the lamps to go on and off, or in
The wiring circuits in the vehicle are LUV and LUW Engines
some cases to remain off. Have the
protected from short circuits by a
headlamp wiring checked right away
combination of fuses, circuit
if the lamps go on and off or
breakers, and fusible thermal links.
remain off.
This greatly reduces the chance of
Windshield Wipers fires caused by electrical problems.
If the wiper motor overheats due to Look at the silver-colored band
heavy snow or ice, the windshield inside the fuse. If the band is broken
wipers will stop until the motor cools or melted, replace the fuse. Be sure
and will then restart. you replace a bad fuse with a new
one of the identical size and rating.
Although the circuit is protected
from electrical overload, overload Fuses of the same amperage can
due to heavy snow or ice may be temporarily borrowed from
cause wiper linkage damage. another fuse location, if a fuse goes
Always clear ice and heavy snow out. Replace the fuse as soon as The engine compartment fuse block
from the windshield before using the you can. is on the driver side of the vehicle,
windshield wipers. near the battery.
If the overload is caused by an
electrical problem and not snow or
ice, be sure to get it fixed.
2014 - 2nd Edition - 8/19/13
10-34 Vehicle Care
{ Caution Mini Fuses Usage

1 Antilock Brake
Spilling liquid on any electrical System Valve
component on the vehicle may
damage it. Always keep the 2 Sunroof
covers on any electrical 4 Rear Wiper
component.
5 Regulated Voltage
Control
To access the fuses, press the clips
6 Antilock Brake
together, and lift the cover. To
System Fluid
reinstall the cover, push the cover
until it is secure. 7 Automatic
Occupant
Sensing/ROS
8 Outside Rearview
Mirror
10 Rear Window
Defogger
12 Heated Outside
Rearview Mirror
13 Heated Front Seat
The vehicle may not be equipped 14 Fuel System

with all of the fuses, relays, and Control Module 1
features shown. 15 Flex Fuel
2014 - 2nd Edition - 8/19/13
Vehicle Care 10-35
Mini Fuses Usage Mini Fuses Usage J-Case Usage

Fuses
16 Washer 27 Engine Control
Module 7 Cooling Fan K4
17 Fuel Pump (1.8L)
28 Air Conditioning 8 EVP
18 Engine Control
Compressor Clutch
Module 5 9 Start
29 Transmission
19 Fuel System
Control Module Relays Usage
Control Module 2/
Leveling 30 Horn RLY 1 Front Wiper
20 Transmission 31 Front Fog Lamps Control Relay
Control Module 1 RLY 2 Front Wiper Speed
32 Left High Beam
21 Engine Control Relay
33 Right High Beam
Module 1 RLY 3 Rear Window
SPARE Spare Defogger Relay
22 Coil
23 Engine Control RLY 4 Run/Crank Relay
J-Case Usage
Module 4 Fuses RLY 6 Fuel Pump
24 Engine Control Relay (1.8L)
1 Antilock Brake
Module 3 System Pump RLY 7 Cooling Fan K2
25 Engine Control Relay (1.4L)
2 Front Wiper
Module 2 RLY 8 Cooling Fan K3
3 Blower
26 Injector/ Relay (1.8L),
Ignition Coil 4 Run/Crank IEC Cooling Fan K3
High Current
6 Cooling Fan K5
Relay (1.4L)
2014 - 2nd Edition - 8/19/13
10-36 Vehicle Care
Relays Usage LWE Engine The vehicle may not be equipped

with all of the fuses, relays, and
RLY 9 Powertrain Relay features shown.
RLY 10 Start High Current Mini Fuses Usage
Relay 1 Antilock Brake
RLY 11 Air Conditioning System Valve
Compressor Clutch 2 Sunroof
Relay
5 Outside Rearview
RLY 12 High-Beam Relay Mirror
RLY 13 Cooling Fan K1 6 AOS/ROS
Relay
7 ABS Oil
8 Regulated Voltage
Control
9 Rear Wiper
10 Not Used/IBS*
11 Rear Window
Defogger
13 Not Used/SAI
Valve*
14 Heated Outside
Rearview Mirror
15 Heated Seat Front
2014 - 2nd Edition - 8/19/13
Vehicle Care 10-37
Mini Fuses Usage Mini Fuses Usage J-Case Usage

Fuses
16 Fuel System 27 Engine Control
Control Module 1 Module 3 2 Antilock Brake
System Pump
17 Canister Vent 28 Engine Control
Module 2 3 Blower
18 Washer
29 Injector/ 4 Run/Crank IEC
19 Fuel Pump*
Ignition Coil
6 Cooling Fan K4
20 Engine Control
30 Engine Control
Module 5 7 Cooling Fan K5
Module
21 Fuel System 8 SAI Pump*
31 Air Conditioning
Control Module 2/
Compressor Clutch 9 EVP
Leveling
32 Transmission 10 Start
22 Transmission
Control Module
Control Module 1/
DC-DC Converter 33 Horn Micro Usage
Relays
23 Auxiliary Water 34 Front Fog Lamps
Pump Power RLY 1 Front Wiper
35 Left High Beam Control
24 Engine Control
36 Right High Beam RLY 3 Front Wiper Speed
Module 1
25 Coil J-Case Usage HC-Micro Usage
26 Engine Control Fuses Relays
Module 4 1 Front Wiper RLY 7 Auxiliary Water
Pump Power*
2014 - 2nd Edition - 8/19/13
10-38 Vehicle Care
HC-Micro Usage * = If equipped

Relays
Instrument Panel Fuse
RLY 12 Start
Block
U-Micro Usage
Relays
RLY 6 Not Used/SAI
Valve*
RLY 8 Fuel Pump*
RLY 13 Air Conditioning
Compressor Clutch
RLY 14 High-Beam
Headlamps
Mini Relays Usage

The instrument panel fuse block is
RLY 4 Rear Defogger on the underside of the driver side
RLY 5 Run/Crank instrument panel.
RLY 9 SAI Pump*

RLY 10 Cooling Fan K3
RLY 11 P/T The vehicle may not be equipped
RLY 15 Cooling Fan K1 with all of the fuses, relays, and
features shown.
2014 - 2nd Edition - 8/19/13
Vehicle Care 10-39
Number Usage Number Usage Number Usage

1 DLIS 13 Body Control 26 Airbag Run/Crank
Module 1
2 Data Link 27 Run Relay
Connector 14 Instrument Cluster
28 Liftgate Release
3 Airbag 15 OnStar
29 Trailer Run/Crank
4 Liftgate 16 Ultrasonic Rear
30 Clock Spring
Park Assist
5 Spare
31 Heating,
17 Driver Information
6 Body Control Ventilation, and Air
Center
Module 8 Conditioning
18 Audio
7 Body Control 32 Spare
Module 7 19 Trailer
33 Sunroof
8 Body Control 20 VLBS
34 Cigarette Lighter
Module 6
21 CHEVYSTAR
35 Spare
9 Body Control
22 Heating,
Module 5 36 Rear Power
Ventilation, Air
Windows
10 Body Control Conditioning
Module 4 37 Front Power
23 HDLP ALC
Windows
11 Body Control
24 Clutch
Module 3 38 RAP/ACCY
25 Instrument Cluster/
12 Body Control 39 DC/DC Converter
Automatic
Module 2
Occupant Sensing
2014 - 2nd Edition - 8/19/13
10-40 Vehicle Care
Number Usage Wheels and Tires Warning (Continued)

40 Driver Power
Window Express Tires and a serious crash. See
Up/Down Every new GM vehicle has Vehicle Load Limits on
high-quality tires made by a page 9-9.
41 PTC2
42 PTC1 leading tire manufacturer. See . Underinflated tires pose
the warranty manual for the same danger as
43 Battery Connector information regarding the tire overloaded tires. The
warranty and where to get resulting crash could
service. For additional cause serious injury.
information refer to the tire Check all tires frequently
manufacturer. to maintain the
recommended pressure.
{ Warning Tire pressure should be
checked when the tires
. Poorly maintained and are cold.
improperly used tires are
dangerous.
. Overinflated tires are more
likely to be cut, punctured,
. Overloading the tires can or broken by a sudden
cause overheating as a impact — such as when
result of too much flexing. hitting a pothole. Keep
There could be a blowout tires at the recommended
(Continued) pressure.
(Continued)
2014 - 2nd Edition - 8/19/13
Vehicle Care 10-41
Warning (Continued)
All-Season Tires Winter Tires
This vehicle may come with This vehicle was not originally
. Worn or old tires can all-season tires. These tires are equipped with winter tires. Winter
cause a crash. If the tread designed to provide good overall tires are designed for increased
is badly worn, performance on most road surfaces traction on snow and ice-covered
replace them. and weather conditions. Original roads. Consider installing winter
equipment tires designed to GM's tires on the vehicle if frequent
. Replace any tires that specific tire performance criteria driving on ice or snow covered
have been damaged by have a TPC specification code roads is expected. See your dealer
impacts with potholes, molded onto the sidewall. Original for details regarding winter tire
curbs, etc. equipment all-season tires can be availability and proper tire selection.
identified by the last two characters Also, see Buying New Tires on
. Improperly repaired tires of this TPC code, which will page 10-55.
can cause a crash. Only be “MS.”
the dealer or an With winter tires, there may be
Consider installing winter tires on decreased dry road traction,
authorized tire service the vehicle if frequent driving on increased road noise, and shorter
center should repair, snow or ice-covered roads is tread life. After changing to winter
replace, dismount, and expected. All-season tires provide tires, be alert for changes in vehicle
mount the tires. adequate performance for most handling and braking.
. Do not spin the tires in winter driving conditions, but they If using winter tires:
may not offer the same level of
excess of 56 km/h . Use tires of the same brand and
traction or performance as winter
(35 mph) on slippery tires on snow or ice-covered roads. tread type on all four wheel
surfaces such as snow, See Winter Tires on page 10-41. positions.
mud, ice, etc. Excessive
spinning may cause the
tires to explode.
2014 - 2nd Edition - 8/19/13
10-42 Vehicle Care

. Use only radial ply tires of the
same size, load range, and
Tire Sidewall Labeling and service description. See the
“Tire Size” illustration later in this
speed rating as the original Useful information about a tire is section.
equipment tires. molded into its sidewall. The
Winter tires with the same speed examples show a typical (2) TPC Spec (Tire
rating as the original equipment tires passenger vehicle tire and a Performance Criteria
may not be available for H, V, W, Y, compact spare tire sidewall. Specification): Original
and ZR speed rated tires. If winter equipment tires designed to
tires with a lower speed rating are GM's specific tire performance
chosen, never exceed the tire's criteria have a TPC specification
maximum speed capability. code molded onto the sidewall.
GM's TPC specifications meet or
Summer Tires exceed all federal safety
This vehicle may come with high guidelines.
performance summer tires. These (3) DOT (Department of
tires have a special tread and
Transportation): The
compound that are optimized for
maximum dry and wet road Department of Transportation
performance. This special tread and (DOT) code indicates that the
compound will decrease Passenger (P-Metric) Tire Example tire is in compliance with the
performance in cold climates, and U.S. Department of
on ice and snow. We recommend (1) Tire Size: The tire size is a Transportation Motor Vehicle
installing winter tires on the vehicle combination of letters and Safety Standards.
if frequent driving in cold numbers used to define a
temperatures or on snow or ice particular tire's width, height, DOT Tire Date of
covered roads is expected. See aspect ratio, construction type, Manufacture: The last four
Winter Tires on page 10-41. digits of the TIN indicate the tire
manufactured date. The first two
2014 - 2nd Edition - 8/19/13
Vehicle Care 10-43
digits represent the week performance factors: treadwear, (2) Temporary Use Only: The
(01–52) and the last two digits, traction, and temperature compact spare tire or temporary
the year. For example, the third resistance. For more information use tire should not be driven at
week of the year 2010 would see Uniform Tire Quality speeds over 80 km/h (50 mph).
have a four-digit DOT date Grading on page 10-57. The compact spare tire is for
of 0310. (7) Maximum Cold Inflation emergency use when a regular
(4) Tire Identification Number Load Limit: Maximum load that road tire has lost air and gone
(TIN): The letters and numbers can be carried and the flat. If the vehicle has a compact
following the DOT (Department maximum pressure needed to spare tire, see Compact Spare
of Transportation) code are the support that load. Tire on page 10-74 and If a Tire
Tire Identification Number (TIN). Goes Flat on page 10-60.
The TIN shows the (3) Tire Identification Number
manufacturer and plant code, (TIN): The letters and numbers
tire size, and date the tire was following the DOT (Department
manufactured. The TIN is of Transportation) code are the
molded onto both sides of the Tire Identification Number (TIN).
tire, although only one side may The TIN shows the
have the date of manufacture. manufacturer and plant code,
(5) Tire Ply Material : The type tire size, and date the tire was
of cord and number of plies in manufactured. The TIN is
the sidewall and under the tread. molded onto both sides of the
tire, although only one side may
(6) Uniform Tire Quality Compact Spare Tire Example
have the date of manufacture.
Grading (UTQG): Tire (1) Tire Ply Material : The type
manufacturers are required to of cord and number of plies in
grade tires based on three the sidewall and under the tread.
2014 - 2nd Edition - 8/19/13
10-44 Vehicle Care
(4) Maximum Cold Inflation criteria have a TPC specification vehicle tire engineered to
Load Limit: Maximum load that code molded onto the sidewall. standards set by the U.S. Tire
can be carried and the GM's TPC specifications meet or and Rim Association.
maximum pressure needed to exceed all federal safety (2) Tire Width: The three-digit
support that load. guidelines. number indicates the tire section
(5) Tire Inflation: The width in millimeters from
temporary use tire or compact Tire Designations sidewall to sidewall.
spare tire should be inflated to Tire Size (3) Aspect Ratio: A two-digit
420 kPa (60 psi). For more number that indicates the tire
The following is an example of a
information on tire pressure and height-to-width measurements.
typical passenger vehicle
inflation see Tire Pressure on For example, if the tire size
tire size.
page 10-47. aspect ratio is 60, as shown in
(6) Tire Size: A combination of item 3 of the illustration, it would
letters and numbers define a mean that the tire's sidewall is
tire's width, height, aspect ratio, 60 percent as high as it is wide.
construction type, and service (4) Construction Code: A letter
description. The letter T as the code is used to indicate the type
first character in the tire size of ply construction in the tire.
means the tire is for temporary (1) Passenger (P-Metric) Tire:
The United States version of a The letter R means radial ply
use only. construction; the letter D means
metric tire sizing system. The
(7) TPC Spec (Tire letter P as the first character in diagonal or bias ply
Performance Criteria the tire size means a passenger construction; and the letter B
Specification): Original means belted-bias ply
equipment tires designed to construction.
GM's specific tire performance
2014 - 2nd Edition - 8/19/13
Vehicle Care 10-45
(5) Rim Diameter : Diameter of automatic transmission, power before a tire has built up heat
the wheel in inches. windows, power seats, and air from driving. See Tire Pressure
(6) Service Description: These conditioning. on page 10-47.
characters represent the load Aspect Ratio: The relationship Curb Weight: The weight of a
index and speed rating of the of a tire's height to its width. motor vehicle with standard and
tire. The load index represents Belt: A rubber coated layer of optional equipment including the
the load carrying capacity a tire cords between the plies and the maximum capacity of fuel, oil,
is certified to carry. The speed tread. Cords may be made from and coolant, but without
rating is the maximum speed a steel or other reinforcing passengers and cargo.
tire is certified to carry a load. materials. DOT Markings: A code molded
Bead: The tire bead contains into the sidewall of a tire
Tire Terminology and signifying that the tire is in
Definitions steel wires wrapped by steel
cords that hold the tire onto compliance with the U.S.
Air Pressure: The amount of the rim. Department of Transportation
air inside the tire pressing (DOT) Motor Vehicle Safety
outward on each square inch of Bias Ply Tire: A pneumatic tire Standards. The DOT code
the tire. Air pressure is in which the plies are laid at includes the Tire Identification
expressed in kPa (kilopascal) alternate angles less than Number (TIN), an alphanumeric
or psi (pounds per square inch). 90 degrees to the centerline of designator which can also
the tread. identify the tire manufacturer,
Accessory Weight: The production plant, brand, and
combined weight of optional Cold Tire Pressure: The
amount of air pressure in a tire, date of production.
accessories. Some examples of
optional accessories are measured in kPa (kilopascal) GVWR: Gross Vehicle Weight
or psi (pounds per square inch) Rating. See Vehicle Load Limits
on page 9-9.
2014 - 2nd Edition - 8/19/13
10-46 Vehicle Care
GAWR FRT: Gross Axle Weight Maximum Inflation Pressure: outward when mounted on a
Rating for the front axle. See The maximum air pressure to vehicle. The side of the tire that
Vehicle Load Limits on which a cold tire can be inflated. contains a whitewall, bears
page 9-9. The maximum air pressure is white lettering, or bears
GAWR RR: Gross Axle Weight molded onto the sidewall. manufacturer, brand, and/or
Rating for the rear axle. See Maximum Load Rating: The model name molding that is
Vehicle Load Limits on load rating for a tire at the higher or deeper than the same
page 9-9. maximum permissible inflation moldings on the other sidewall
pressure for that tire. of the tire.
Intended Outboard Sidewall :
The side of an asymmetrical tire Maximum Loaded Vehicle Passenger (P-Metric) Tire: A
that must always face outward Weight: The sum of curb tire used on passenger cars and
when mounted on a vehicle. weight, accessory weight, some light duty trucks and
vehicle capacity weight, and multipurpose vehicles.
Kilopascal (kPa): The metric
unit for air pressure. production options weight. Recommended Inflation
Normal Occupant Weight: The Pressure: Vehicle
Light Truck (LT-Metric) Tire: A manufacturer's recommended
tire used on light duty trucks and number of occupants a vehicle
is designed to seat multiplied by tire inflation pressure as shown
some multipurpose passenger on the tire placard. See Tire
vehicles. 68 kg (150 lb). See Vehicle Load
Limits on page 9-9. Pressure on page 10-47 and
Load Index: An assigned Vehicle Load Limits on
number ranging from 1 to 279 Occupant Distribution : page 9-9.
that corresponds to the load Designated seating positions.
carrying capacity of a tire. Outward Facing Sidewall: The
side of an asymmetrical tire that
has a particular side that faces
2014 - 2nd Edition - 8/19/13
Vehicle Care 10-47
Radial Ply Tire: A pneumatic of a tire when only 1.6 mm Vehicle Maximum Load on the
tire in which the ply cords that (1/16 in) of tread remains. See Tire: Load on an individual tire
extend to the beads are laid at When It Is Time for New Tires due to curb weight, accessory
90 degrees to the centerline of on page 10-54. weight, occupant weight, and
the tread. UTQGS (Uniform Tire Quality cargo weight.
Rim: A metal support for a tire Grading Standards): A tire Vehicle Placard: A label
and upon which the tire beads information system that provides permanently attached to a
are seated. consumers with ratings for a vehicle showing the vehicle
Sidewall: The portion of a tire tire's traction, temperature, and capacity weight and the original
between the tread and the bead. treadwear. Ratings are equipment tire size and
determined by tire recommended inflation pressure.
Speed Rating: An manufacturers using See “Tire and Loading
alphanumeric code assigned to government testing procedures. Information Label” under Vehicle
a tire indicating the maximum The ratings are molded into the Load Limits on page 9-9.
speed at which a tire can sidewall of the tire. See Uniform
operate. Tire Quality Grading on Tire Pressure
Traction: The friction between page 10-57. Tires need the correct amount of
the tire and the road surface. Vehicle Capacity Weight: The air pressure to operate
The amount of grip provided. number of designated seating effectively.
Tread: The portion of a tire that positions multiplied by 68 kg
comes into contact with (150 lb) plus the rated cargo
the road. load. See Vehicle Load Limits
on page 9-9.
Treadwear Indicators: Narrow
bands, sometimes called wear
bars, that show across the tread
2014 - 2nd Edition - 8/19/13
10-48 Vehicle Care
The Tire and Loading How to Check

{ Caution Information label on the vehicle Use a good quality pocket-type
Neither tire underinflation nor indicates the original equipment gauge to check tire pressure.
overinflation is good. tires and the correct cold tire Proper tire inflation cannot be
Underinflated tires, or tires inflation pressures. The determined by looking at the tire.
that do not have enough air, recommended pressure is the Check the tire inflation pressure
can result in: minimum air pressure needed to when the tires are cold, meaning
support the vehicle's maximum the vehicle has not been driven
. Tire overloading and load carrying capacity. See
overheating which could for at least three hours or no
Vehicle Load Limits on more than 1.6 km (1 mi).
lead to a blowout. page 9-9.
. Premature or Remove the valve cap from the
How the vehicle is loaded tire valve stem. Press the tire
irregular wear. affects vehicle handling and ride gauge firmly onto the valve to
. Poor handling. comfort. Never load the vehicle get a pressure measurement.
with more weight than it was If the cold tire inflation pressure
. Reduced fuel economy. designed to carry. matches the recommended
Overinflated tires, or tires that
When to Check pressure on the Tire and
have too much air, can Loading Information label, no
result in: Check the tires once a month or
further adjustment is necessary.
Unusual wear. more. Do not forget the compact
.
If the inflation pressure is low,
spare, if the vehicle has one.
. Poor handling. add air until the recommended
The cold compact spare tire
pressure is reached. If the
. Rough ride. pressure should be at 420 kPa
inflation pressure is high, press
(60 psi). See Compact Spare
. Needless damage from on the metal stem in the center
Tire on page 10-74.
road hazards. of the tire valve to release air.
2014 - 2nd Edition - 8/19/13
Vehicle Care 10-49
Recheck the tire pressure with tire inflation pressure label, you not reached the level to trigger
the tire gauge. should determine the proper tire illumination of the TPMS low tire
inflation pressure for those tires.) pressure telltale.
Return the valve caps on the
valve stems to prevent leaks As an added safety feature, your Your vehicle has also been
vehicle has been equipped with a equipped with a TPMS malfunction
and keep out dirt and moisture.
tire pressure monitoring system indicator to indicate when the
(TPMS) that illuminates a low tire system is not operating properly.
Tire Pressure Monitor pressure telltale when one or more The TPMS malfunction indicator is
System of your tires is significantly combined with the low tire pressure
under-inflated. telltale. When the system detects a
The Tire Pressure Monitor System
Accordingly, when the low tire malfunction, the telltale will flash for
(TPMS) uses radio and sensor
pressure telltale illuminates, you approximately one minute and then
technology to check tire pressure
should stop and check your tires as remain continuously illuminated.
levels. The TPMS sensors monitor
soon as possible, and inflate them This sequence will continue upon
the air pressure in your tires and
to the proper pressure. Driving on a subsequent vehicle start-ups as
transmit tire pressure readings to a
significantly under-inflated tire long as the malfunction exists.
receiver located in the vehicle.
causes the tire to overheat and can When the malfunction indicator is
Each tire, including the spare (if
lead to tire failure. Under-inflation illuminated, the system may not be
provided), should be checked
also reduces fuel efficiency and tire able to detect or signal low tire
monthly when cold and inflated to
tread life, and may affect the pressure as intended. TPMS
the inflation pressure recommended
vehicle's handling and stopping malfunctions may occur for a variety
by the vehicle manufacturer on the
ability. of reasons, including the installation
vehicle placard or tire inflation
Please note that the TPMS is not a of replacement or alternate tires or
pressure label. (If your vehicle has
substitute for proper tire wheels on the vehicle that prevent
tires of a different size than the size
maintenance, and it is the driver's the TPMS from functioning properly.
indicated on the vehicle placard or
responsibility to maintain correct tire Always check the TPMS malfunction
pressure, even if under-inflation has telltale after replacing one or more
tires or wheels on your vehicle to
2014 - 2nd Edition - 8/19/13
10-50 Vehicle Care
ensure that the replacement or A Tire and Loading Information label

alternate tires and wheels allow the shows the size of the original
TPMS to continue to function equipment tires and the correct
properly. inflation pressure for the tires when
See Tire Pressure Monitor they are cold. See Vehicle Load
Operation on page 10-50. Limits on page 9-9, for an example
When a low tire pressure condition of the Tire and Loading Information
See Radio Frequency Statement on label and its location. Also see Tire
is detected, the TPMS illuminates
page 13-15. Pressure on page 10-47.
the low tire pressure warning light
located on the instrument cluster. The TPMS can warn about a low
Tire Pressure Monitor If the warning light comes on, stop tire pressure condition but it does
Operation as soon as possible and inflate the not replace normal tire
tires to the recommended pressure maintenance. See Tire Inspection
This vehicle may have a Tire
shown on the Tire and Loading on page 10-53, Tire Rotation on
Pressure Monitor System (TPMS).
Information label. See Vehicle Load page 10-53 and Tires on
The TPMS is designed to warn the
Limits on page 9-9. page 10-40.
driver when a low tire pressure
condition exists. TPMS sensors are The low tire pressure warning light
mounted onto each tire and wheel comes on at each ignition cycle until { Caution
assembly, excluding the spare tire the tires are inflated to the correct
and wheel assembly. The TPMS inflation pressure. Tire sealant materials are not all
sensors monitor the air pressure in the same. A non-approved tire
The low tire pressure warning light sealant could damage the TPMS
the tires and transmit the tire may come on in cool weather when
pressure readings to a receiver sensors. TPMS sensor damage
the vehicle is first started, and then
located in the vehicle. caused by using an incorrect tire
turn off as the vehicle is driven. This
could be an early indicator that the sealant is not covered by the
air pressure is getting low and must vehicle warranty. Always use only
be inflated to the proper pressure. (Continued)
2014 - 2nd Edition - 8/19/13
Vehicle Care 10-51
TPMS Malfunction Light malfunction light should go off

Caution (Continued) after successfully completing the
The TPMS will not function properly
sensor matching process. See
the GM approved tire sealant if one or more of the TPMS sensors
"TPMS Sensor Matching
available through your dealer or are missing or inoperable. When the
Process" later in this section.
included in the vehicle. system detects a malfunction, the
low tire warning light flashes for . One or more TPMS sensors are
about one minute and then stays on missing or damaged. The
Factory-installed Tire Inflator Kits for the remainder of the ignition malfunction light should go off
use a GM-approved liquid tire cycle. The malfunction light comes when the TPMS sensors are
sealant. Using non-approved tire on at each ignition cycle until the installed and the sensor
sealants could damage the TPMS problem is corrected. Some of the matching process is performed
sensors. See Tire Sealant and conditions that can cause this to successfully. See your dealer for
Compressor Kit on page 10-62 for come on are: service.
information regarding the inflator kit
materials and instructions.
. One of the road tires has been . Replacement tires or wheels do
replaced with the spare tire. The not match the original equipment
spare tire does not have a tires or wheels. Tires and wheels
TPMS sensor. The malfunction other than those recommended
light should go off after the road could prevent the TPMS from
tire is replaced and the sensor functioning properly. See Buying
matching process is performed New Tires on page 10-55.
successfully. See "TPMS Sensor . Operating electronic devices or
Matching Process" later in this being near facilities using radio
section. wave frequencies similar to the
. The TPMS sensor matching TPMS could cause the TPMS
process was not done or not sensors to malfunction.
completed successfully after
rotating the tires. The
2014 - 2nd Edition - 8/19/13
10-52 Vehicle Care
If the TPMS is not functioning There are two minutes to match the 7. Start with the driver side
properly, it cannot detect or signal a first tire/wheel position, and front tire.
low tire condition. See your dealer five minutes overall to match all four 8. Place the relearn tool against
for service if the TPMS malfunction tire/wheel positions. If it takes the tire sidewall, near the valve
light comes on and stays on. longer, the matching process stops stem. Then press the button to
and must be restarted. activate the TPMS sensor.
TPMS Sensor Matching
Process The TPMS sensor matching A horn chirp confirms that the
process is: sensor identification code has
Each TPMS sensor has a unique been matched to this tire and
identification code. The identification 1. Set the parking brake.
wheel position.
code needs to be matched to a new 2. Turn the ignition to ON/RUN with
tire/wheel position after rotating the the engine off. 9. Proceed to the passenger side
tires or replacing one or more of the front tire, and repeat the
3. Press the MENU button to procedure in Step 8.
TPMS sensors. The TPMS sensor
display the menu items in the
matching process should also be 10. Proceed to the passenger side
Driver Information Center (DIC).
performed after replacing a spare rear tire, and repeat the
tire with a road tire containing the 4. Use the thumbwheel to scroll to procedure in Step 8.
TPMS sensor. The malfunction light the Tire Learn menu item
screen. 11. Proceed to the driver side rear
should go off at the next ignition
tire, and repeat the procedure
cycle. The sensors are matched to 5. Press and hold the SET/CLR in Step 8. The horn sounds two
the tire/wheel positions, using a button to begin the sensor times to indicate the sensor
TPMS relearn tool, in the following matching process. identification code has been
order: driver side front tire,
6. The horn sounds twice to signal matched to the driver side rear
passenger side front tire, passenger
the receiver is in relearn mode tire, and the TPMS sensor
side rear tire, and driver side rear.
and the TIRE LEARN message matching process is no longer
See your dealer for service or to
displays on the DIC screen. active. The TIRE LEARN
purchase a relearn tool.
message on the DIC display
screen goes off.
2014 - 2nd Edition - 8/19/13
Vehicle Care 10-53
12. Turn the ignition to LOCK/OFF. . The tire has a bump, bulge, See When It Is Time for New
13. Set all four tires to the
or split. Tires on page 10-54 and Wheel
recommended air pressure . The tire has a puncture, cut, Replacement on page 10-59.
level as indicated on the Tire or other damage that cannot
and Loading Information label. be repaired well because of
the size or location of the
Tire Inspection damage.
We recommend that the tires,
including the spare tire, if the Tire Rotation
vehicle has one, be inspected Tires should be rotated every
for signs of wear or damage at 12 000 km (7,500 mi). See
least once a month. Maintenance Schedule on
Replace the tire if: page 11-2.
. The indicators at three or Tires are rotated to achieve a
more places around the tire uniform wear for all tires. The Use this rotation pattern when
can be seen. first rotation is the most rotating the tires.
important.
. There is cord or fabric Do not include the compact
showing through the tire's Anytime unusual wear is spare tire in the tire rotation.
rubber. noticed, rotate the tires as soon
as possible, check for proper tire Adjust the front and rear tires to
. The tread or sidewall is the recommended inflation
inflation pressure, and check for
cracked, cut, or snagged damaged tires or wheels. If the pressure on the Tire and
deep enough to show cord or unusual wear continues after the Loading Information label after
fabric. rotation, check the wheel the tires have been rotated.
alignment.
2014 - 2nd Edition - 8/19/13
10-54 Vehicle Care
See Tire Pressure on

page 10-47 and Vehicle Load Warning (Continued)
Limits on page 9-9. towel can be used; however, use
Reset the Tire Pressure Monitor a scraper or wire brush later to
System. See Tire Pressure remove all rust or dirt.
Monitor Operation on
page 10-50. Lightly coat the center of the
Check that all wheel nuts are wheel hub with wheel bearing
properly tightened. See “Wheel grease after a wheel change or
Nut Torque” under Capacities tire rotation to prevent corrosion
and Specifications on or rust build-up. Do not get
page 12-2. grease on the flat wheel Treadwear indicators are one way to
mounting surface or on the tell when it is time for new tires.
Treadwear indicators appear when
{ Warning wheel nuts or bolts.
the tires have only 1.6 mm (1/16 in)
or less of tread remaining. See Tire
Rust or dirt on a wheel, or on the When It Is Time for New Inspection on page 10-53 and Tire
parts to which it is fastened, can Tires Rotation on page 10-53.
make wheel nuts become loose
after time. The wheel could come Factors such as maintenance, The rubber in tires ages over time.
off and cause an accident. When temperatures, driving speeds, This also applies to the spare tire,
changing a wheel, remove any vehicle loading, and road conditions if the vehicle has one, even if it is
affect the wear rate of the tires. never used. Multiple factors
rust or dirt from places where the
including temperatures, loading
wheel attaches to the vehicle. In
conditions, and inflation pressure
an emergency, a cloth or a paper
maintenance affect how fast aging
(Continued) takes place. GM recommends that
tires, including the spare if
2014 - 2nd Edition - 8/19/13
Vehicle Care 10-55
equipped, be replaced after six at least a month, remove the tires or number is molded onto the tire's
years, regardless of tread wear. The raise the vehicle to reduce the sidewall near the tire size. If the
tire manufacturer date is the last weight from the tires. tires have an all-season tread
four digits of the DOT Tire design, the TPC Spec number
Identification Number (TIN) which is Buying New Tires will be followed by MS for mud
molded into one side of the tire
sidewall. The first two digits GM has developed and matched and snow. See Tire Sidewall
represent the week (01–52) and the specific tires for the vehicle. The Labeling on page 10-42.
last two digits, the year. For original equipment tires installed GM recommends replacing worn
example, the third week of the year were designed to meet General tires in complete sets of four.
2010 would have a four-digit DOT Motors Tire Performance Criteria Uniform tread depth on all tires
date of 0310. Specification (TPC Spec) will help to maintain the
Vehicle Storage system rating. When performance of the vehicle.
replacement tires are needed, Braking and handling
Tires age when stored normally GM strongly recommends
mounted on a parked vehicle. Park performance may be adversely
a vehicle that will be stored for at
buying tires with the same TPC affected if all the tires are not
least a month in a cool, dry, clean Spec rating. replaced at the same time.
area away from direct sunlight to GM's exclusive TPC Spec If proper rotation and
slow aging. This area should be free system considers over a dozen maintenance have been done,
of grease, gasoline, or other critical specifications that impact all four tires should wear out at
substances that can deteriorate the overall performance of the about the same time. See Tire
rubber. Rotation on page 10-53.
vehicle, including brake system
Parking for an extended period can performance, ride and handling, However, if it is necessary to
cause flat spots on the tires that traction control, and tire replace only one axle set of
may result in vibrations while pressure monitoring worn tires, place the new tires
driving. When storing a vehicle for on the rear axle.
performance. GM's TPC Spec
2014 - 2nd Edition - 8/19/13
10-56 Vehicle Care
Winter tires with the same speed sure they are the same size,
rating as the original equipment { Warning load range, speed rating, and
tires may not be available for H, Mixing tires of different sizes, construction (radial) as the
V, W, Y and ZR speed rated brands, or types may cause original tires.
tires. Never exceed the winter loss of control of the vehicle, Vehicles that have a tire
tires’ maximum speed capability resulting in a crash or other pressure monitoring system
when using winter tires with a vehicle damage. Use the could give an inaccurate
lower speed rating. correct size, brand, and type low-pressure warning if non-TPC
of tires on all wheels. Spec rated tires are installed.
{ Warning See Tire Pressure Monitor
Tires could explode during System on page 10-49.
improper service. Attempting { Warning The Tire and Loading
to mount or dismount a tire Information label indicates the
could cause injury or death. Using bias-ply tires on the original equipment tires on the
Only your dealer or authorized vehicle may cause the wheel vehicle. See Vehicle Load Limits
tire service center should rim flanges to develop cracks on page 9-9.
mount or dismount the tires. after many miles of driving.
A tire and/or wheel could fail Different Size Tires and
suddenly and cause a crash.
Use only radial-ply tires with
Wheels
the wheels on the vehicle. If wheels or tires are installed that
are a different size than the original
equipment wheels and tires, vehicle
If the vehicle tires must be performance, including its braking,
replaced with a tire that does not ride and handling characteristics,
have a TPC Spec number, make stability, and resistance to rollover
2014 - 2nd Edition - 8/19/13
Vehicle Care 10-57
may be affected. If the vehicle has Uniform Tire Quality nominal rim diameters of
electronic systems such as antilock 10 to 12 inches (25 to 30 cm),
brakes, rollover airbags, traction
Grading
or to some limited-production
control, electronic stability control, Quality grades can be found tires.
or All-Wheel Drive, the performance where applicable on the tire
of these systems can also be sidewall between tread shoulder While the tires available on
affected. and maximum section width. For General Motors passenger cars
example: and light trucks may vary with
{ Warning respect to these grades, they
Treadwear 200 Traction AA must also conform to federal
If different sized wheels are used, Temperature A safety requirements and
there may not be an acceptable additional General Motors Tire
level of performance and safety if The following information relates
to the system developed by the Performance Criteria (TPC)
tires not recommended for those standards.
wheels are selected. This United States National Highway
increases the chance of a crash Traffic Safety Administration All Passenger Car Tires Must
and serious injury. Only use GM (NHTSA), which grades tires by Conform to Federal Safety
specific wheel and tire systems treadwear, traction, and Requirements In Addition To
developed for the vehicle, and temperature performance. This These Grades.
have them properly installed by a applies only to vehicles sold in
GM certified technician. the United States. The grades Treadwear
are molded on the sidewalls of The treadwear grade is a
See Buying New Tires on most passenger car tires. The comparative rating based on the
page 10-55 and Accessories and Uniform Tire Quality Grading wear rate of the tire when tested
Modifications on page 10-3. (UTQG) system does not apply under controlled conditions on a
to deep tread, winter tires, specified government test
compact spare tires, tires with course. For example, a tire
2014 - 2nd Edition - 8/19/13
10-58 Vehicle Care
graded 150 would wear one and straight-ahead braking traction performance on the laboratory
one-half (1½) times as well on tests, and does not include test wheel than the minimum
the government course as a tire acceleration, cornering, required by law. Warning: The
graded 100. The relative hydroplaning, or peak traction temperature grade for this tire is
performance of tires depends characteristics. established for a tire that is
upon the actual conditions of properly inflated and not
Temperature
their use, however, and may overloaded. Excessive speed,
depart significantly from the The temperature grades are A underinflation, or excessive
norm due to variations in driving (the highest), B, and C, loading, either separately or in
habits, service practices and representing the tire's resistance combination, can cause heat
differences in road to the generation of heat and its buildup and possible tire failure.
characteristics and climate. ability to dissipate heat when
tested under controlled Wheel Alignment and Tire
Traction conditions on a specified indoor Balance
The traction grades, from laboratory test wheel. Sustained
highest to lowest, are AA, A, B, high temperature can cause the The tires and wheels were aligned
and balanced at the factory to
and C. Those grades represent material of the tire to degenerate
provide the longest tire life and best
the tire's ability to stop on wet and reduce tire life, and overall performance. Adjustments to
pavement as measured under excessive temperature can lead wheel alignment and tire balancing
controlled conditions on to sudden tire failure. The grade are not necessary on a regular
specified government test C corresponds to a level of basis. Consider an alignment check
surfaces of asphalt and performance which all if there is unusual tire wear or the
concrete. A tire marked C may passenger car tires must meet vehicle is significantly pulling to one
have poor traction performance. under the Federal Motor Safety side or the other. Some slight pull to
Warning: The traction grade Standard No. 109. Grades B and the left or right, depending on the
assigned to this tire is based on A represent higher levels of crown of the road and/or other road
2014 - 2nd Edition - 8/19/13
Vehicle Care 10-59
surface variations such as troughs Replace wheels, wheel bolts, wheel

or ruts, is normal. If the vehicle is nuts, or Tire Pressure Monitor Caution (Continued)
vibrating when driving on a smooth System (TPMS) sensors with new
road, the tires and wheels may need GM original equipment parts. ground clearance, and tire or tire
to be rebalanced. See your dealer chain clearance to the body and
chassis.
for proper diagnosis. { Warning
Wheel Replacement Using the wrong replacement Used Replacement Wheels
wheels, wheel bolts, or wheel
Replace any wheel that is bent,
cracked, or badly rusted or nuts can be dangerous. It could
affect the braking and handling of
{ Warning
corroded. If wheel nuts keep coming
loose, the wheel, wheel bolts, and the vehicle. Tires can lose air, Replacing a wheel with a used
wheel nuts should be replaced. and cause loss of control, causing one is dangerous. How it has
If the wheel leaks air, replace it. a crash. Always use the correct been used or how far it has been
Some aluminum wheels can be wheel, wheel bolts, and wheel driven may be unknown. It could
repaired. See your dealer if any of nuts for replacement. fail suddenly and cause a crash.
these conditions exist. When replacing wheels, use a
Your dealer will know the kind of new GM original equipment
wheel.
wheel that is needed. { Caution
Each new wheel should have the
same load-carrying capacity, The wrong wheel can also cause
diameter, width, offset, and be problems with bearing life, brake
mounted the same way as the one it cooling, speedometer or
replaces. odometer calibration, headlamp
aim, bumper height, vehicle
(Continued)
2014 - 2nd Edition - 8/19/13
10-60 Vehicle Care
Tire Chains If a Tire Goes Flat

{ Warning
It is unusual for a tire to blow out
{ Warning while driving, especially if the tires Driving on a flat tire will cause
are maintained properly. See Tires permanent damage to the tire.
Do not use tire chains. There is on page 10-40. If air goes out of a Re-inflating a tire after it has been
not enough clearance. Tire chains tire, it is much more likely to leak driven on while severely
used on a vehicle without the out slowly. But if there is ever a underinflated or flat may cause a
proper amount of clearance can blowout, here are a few tips about blowout and a serious crash.
cause damage to the brakes, what to expect and what to do: Never attempt to re-inflate a tire
suspension, or other vehicle that has been driven on while
If a front tire fails, the flat tire
parts. The area damaged by the severely underinflated or flat.
creates a drag that pulls the vehicle
tire chains could cause loss of toward that side. Take your foot off Have your dealer or an authorized
control and a crash. the accelerator pedal and grip the tire service center repair or
Use another type of traction steering wheel firmly. Steer to replace the flat tire as soon as
device only if its manufacturer maintain lane position, and then possible.
recommends it for the vehicle's gently brake to a stop, well off the
tire size combination and road road, if possible.
conditions. Follow that
manufacturer's instructions. To
A rear blowout, particularly on a
curve, acts much like a skid and
{ Warning
avoid vehicle damage, drive slow may require the same correction as Lifting a vehicle and getting under
and readjust or remove the used in a skid. Stop pressing the it to do maintenance or repairs is
traction device if it contacts the accelerator pedal and steer to dangerous without the
vehicle. Do not spin the wheels. straighten the vehicle. It may be appropriate safety equipment and
If traction devices are used, install very bumpy and noisy. Gently brake training. If a jack is provided with
them on the front tires. to a stop, well off the road,
the vehicle, it is designed only for
if possible.
(Continued)
2014 - 2nd Edition - 8/19/13
Vehicle Care 10-61
Then see Tire Changing on

Warning (Continued) Warning (Continued) page 10-69. To use the tire sealant
and compressor kit, see Tire
changing a flat tire. If it is used for level place to change the tire. To Sealant and Compressor Kit on
anything else, you or others could help prevent the vehicle from page 10-62.
be badly injured or killed if the moving:
vehicle slips off the jack. If a jack When the vehicle has a flat tire (2),
is provided with the vehicle, only 1. Set the parking brake firmly. use the following example as a
use it for changing a flat tire. guide to assist you in the placement
2. Put an automatic
of wheel blocks (1).
transmission in P (Park) or a
manual transmission in
If a tire goes flat, avoid further tire
1 (First) or R (Reverse).
and wheel damage by driving slowly
to a level place, well off the road, 3. Turn off the engine and do
if possible. Turn on the hazard not restart while the vehicle
warning flashers. See Hazard is raised.
Warning Flashers on page 6-3. 4. Do not allow passengers to
remain in the vehicle.
{ Warning 5. Place wheel blocks on both
Changing a tire can be sides of the tire at the 1. Wheel Block
dangerous. The vehicle can slip opposite corner of the tire
being changed. 2. Flat Tire
off the jack and roll over or fall
causing injury or death. Find a The following information explains
This vehicle may come with a jack how to repair or change a tire.
(Continued)
and spare tire or a tire sealant and
compressor kit. To use the jacking
equipment to change a spare tire
safely, follow the instructions below.
2014 - 2nd Edition - 8/19/13
10-62 Vehicle Care
Tire Sealant and Warning (Continued)

equipment, and on some vehicles
there may not be a place to store
Compressor Kit a tire.
and compressor kit instructions
The tire sealant and compressor
{ Warning and inflate the tire to its
recommended pressure. Do not can be used to temporarily seal
Idling a vehicle in an enclosed exceed the recommended punctures up to 6 mm (0.25 in) in
area with poor ventilation is pressure. the tread area of the tire. It can also
dangerous. Engine exhaust may be used to inflate an
underinflated tire.
enter the vehicle. Engine exhaust
contains carbon monoxide (CO) If the tire has been separated from
which cannot be seen or smelled. { Warning the wheel, has damaged sidewalls,
It can cause unconsciousness or has a large puncture, the tire is
Storing the tire sealant and too severely damaged for the tire
and even death. Never run the compressor kit or other
engine in an enclosed area that sealant and compressor kit to be
equipment in the passenger effective. See Roadside Assistance
has no fresh air ventilation. For compartment of the vehicle could
more information, see Engine Program on page 13-5.
cause injury. In a sudden stop or
Exhaust on page 9-20. collision, loose equipment could Read and follow all of the tire
strike someone. Store the tire sealant and compressor kit
instructions.
sealant and compressor kit in its
{ Warning original location.
Overinflating a tire could cause If this vehicle has a tire sealant and
the tire to rupture and you or compressor kit, there may not be a
others could be injured. Be sure spare tire or tire changing
to read and follow the tire sealant
(Continued)
2014 - 2nd Edition - 8/19/13
Vehicle Care 10-63
The kit includes: There is only enough sealant to seal

one tire. After usage, the tire sealant
canister must be replaced.
Using the Tire Sealant and
Compressor Kit to Temporarily
Seal and Inflate a
Punctured Tire
When using the tire sealant and
compressor kit during cold
temperatures, warm the kit in a
heated environment for five minutes.
9. Power Plug This will help to inflate the tire
faster.
1. Sealant Canister Inlet Valve 10. Air Only Hose
If a tire goes flat, avoid further tire
2. Sealant/Air Hose Tire Sealant and wheel damage by driving slowly
3. Base of Sealant Canister Read and follow the safe handling to a level place. Turn on the hazard
instructions on the label adhered to warning flashers. See Hazard
4. Tire Sealant Canister Warning Flashers on page 6-3.
the tire sealant canister (4).
5. On/Off Button See If a Tire Goes Flat on
Check the tire sealant expiration
6. Slot on Top of Compressor date on the tire sealant canister. page 10-60 for other important
The tire sealant canister (4) should safety warnings.
7. Pressure Deflation Button
be replaced before its expiration
8. Pressure Gauge date. Replacement tire sealant
canisters are available at your local
dealer.
2014 - 2nd Edition - 8/19/13
10-64 Vehicle Care
Do not remove any objects that 4. Attach the air only hose (10) to
have penetrated the tire. the sealant canister inlet
1. Remove the tire sealant valve (1) by turning it clockwise
canister (4) and compressor until tight.
from its storage location. See
Storing the Tire Sealant and
Compressor Kit on page 10-69.
2. Remove the air only hose (10)
and the power plug (9) from the
bottom of the compressor.
3. Place the compressor on the
ground near the flat tire. 7. Attach the sealant/air hose (2) to
the tire valve stem by turning it
clockwise until tight.
8. Plug the power plug (9) into the
accessory power outlet in the
5. Slide the base of the tire sealant vehicle. Unplug all items from
canister (3) into the slot on the other accessory power outlets.
top of the compressor (6) to hold See Power Outlets on page 5-6.
it upright.
If the vehicle has an accessory
Make sure the tire valve stem is power outlet, do not use the
positioned close to the ground cigarette lighter.
so the hose will reach it.
If the vehicle only has a cigarette
6. Remove the valve stem cap from lighter, use the cigarette lighter.
the flat tire by turning it
counterclockwise.
2014 - 2nd Edition - 8/19/13
Vehicle Care 10-65
Do not pinch the power plug on the Tire and Loading 12. Press the on/off button (5) to
cord in the door or window. Information label. See Tire turn the tire sealant and
9. Start the vehicle. The vehicle Pressure on page 10-47. compressor kit off.
must be running while using the The pressure gauge (8) may The tire is not sealed and will
air compressor. read higher than the actual tire continue to leak air until the
10. Press the on/off button (5) to pressure while the compressor vehicle is driven and the
turn the tire sealant and is on. Turn the compressor off sealant is distributed in the tire.
compressor kit on. to get an accurate pressure Therefore, Steps 13–21 must
reading. The compressor may be done immediately after
The compressor will inject be turned on/off until the Step 12.
sealant and air into the tire. correct pressure is reached. Be careful while handling the
The pressure gauge (8) will tire sealant and compressor kit
initially show a high pressure { Caution as it could be warm after
while the compressor pushes usage.
the sealant into the tire. Once If the recommended pressure
the sealant is completely cannot be reached after 13. Unplug the power plug (9) from
dispersed into the tire, the approximately 25 minutes, the the accessory power outlet in
pressure will quickly drop and vehicle should not be driven the vehicle.
start to rise again as the tire farther. The tire is too severely 14. Turn the sealant/air hose (2)
inflates with air only. damaged and the tire sealant and counterclockwise to remove it
11. Inflate the tire to the compressor kit cannot inflate the from the tire valve stem.
recommended inflation tire. Remove the power plug from 15. Replace the tire valve
pressure using the pressure the accessory power outlet and stem cap.
gauge (8). The recommended unscrew the inflating hose from
16. Remove the tire sealant
inflation pressure can be found the tire valve. See Roadside
canister (4) from the slot on top
Assistance Program on
of the compressor (6).
page 13-5.
2014 - 2nd Edition - 8/19/13
10-66 Vehicle Care
17. Turn the air only hose (10) 21. Return the equipment to its 24. Wipe off any sealant from the
counterclockwise to remove it original storage location in the wheel, tire, or vehicle.
from the tire sealant canister vehicle. 25. Dispose of the used tire
inlet valve (1). 22. Immediately drive the vehicle sealant canister (4) at a local
18. Turn the sealant/air hose (2) 8 km (5 mi) to distribute the dealer or in accordance with
clockwise onto the sealant sealant in the tire. local state codes and practices.
canister inlet valve (1) to 23. Stop at a safe location and 26. Replace it with a new canister
prevent sealant leakage. check the tire pressure. Refer available from your dealer.
19. Return the air only hose (10) to Steps 1–10 under “Using the 27. After temporarily sealing a tire
and power plug (9) back to Tire Sealant and Compressor using the tire sealant and
their original storage location. Kit without Sealant to Inflate a compressor kit, take the
Tire (Not Punctured).” vehicle to an authorized dealer
If the tire pressure has fallen within 161 km (100 mi) of
more than 68 kPa (10 psi) driving to have the tire repaired
below the recommended or replaced.
inflation pressure, stop driving
the vehicle. The tire is too
severely damaged and the tire
20. If the flat tire was able to inflate sealant cannot seal the tire.
to the recommended inflation See Roadside Assistance
pressure, remove the Program on page 13-5.
maximum speed label from the
If the tire pressure has not
sealant canister and place it in
dropped more than 68 kPa
a highly visible location.
(10 psi) from the recommended
Do not exceed the speed on inflation pressure, inflate the
this label until the damaged tire tire to the recommended
is repaired or replaced. inflation pressure.
2014 - 2nd Edition - 8/19/13
Vehicle Care 10-67
Using the Tire Sealant and 8. Pressure Gauge 1. Remove the compressor from its
Compressor Kit without storage location. See Storing the
Sealant to Inflate a Tire (Not Tire Sealant and Compressor Kit
Punctured) on page 10-69.
The kit includes: 2. Remove the air only hose (10)

and the power plug (9) from the
bottom of the compressor.
3. Place the compressor on the
ground near the flat tire.
Make sure the tire valve stem is
positioned close to the ground
so the hose will reach it.
4. Remove the valve stem cap from
9. Power Plug the flat tire by turning it
10. Air Only Hose counterclockwise.
If a tire goes flat, avoid further tire 5. Attach the air only hose (10) to
and wheel damage by driving slowly the tire valve stem by turning it
1. Sealant Canister Inlet Valve to a level place. Turn on the hazard clockwise until tight.
2. Sealant/Air Hose warning flashers. See Hazard
Warning Flashers on page 6-3.
3. Base of Sealant Canister
See If a Tire Goes Flat on
4. Tire Sealant Canister
page 10-60 for other important
5. On/Off Button safety warnings.
6. Slot on Top of Compressor
7. Pressure Deflation Button
2014 - 2nd Edition - 8/19/13
10-68 Vehicle Care
6. Plug the power plug (9) into the Tire and Loading Information 10. Press the on/off button (5) to
accessory power outlet in the label. See Tire Pressure on turn the tire sealant and
vehicle. Unplug all items from page 10-47. compressor kit off.
other accessory power outlets. The pressure gauge (8) may Be careful while handling the
See Power Outlets on page 5-6. read higher than the actual tire compressor as it could be
If the vehicle has an accessory pressure while the compressor is warm after usage.
power outlet, do not use the on. Turn the compressor off to 11. Unplug the power plug (9) from
cigarette lighter. get an accurate pressure the accessory power outlet in
If the vehicle only has a cigarette reading. The compressor may the vehicle.
lighter, use the cigarette lighter. be turned on/off until the correct
pressure is reached. 12. Turn the air only hose (10)
Do not pinch the power plug counterclockwise to remove it
cord in the door or window.
{ Caution from the tire valve stem.
7. Start the vehicle. The vehicle 13. Replace the tire valve
must be running while using the If the recommended pressure stem cap.
air compressor. cannot be reached after
14. Return the air only hose (10)
approximately 25 minutes, the
8. Press the on/off button (5) to and power plug (9) back to
vehicle should not be driven
turn the tire sealant and their original storage location.
compressor kit on. farther. The tire is too severely
damaged and the tire sealant and 15. Return the equipment to its
The compressor will inflate the compressor kit cannot inflate the original storage location in the
tire with air only. tire. Remove the power plug from vehicle.
9. Inflate the tire to the the accessory power outlet and The tire sealant and compressor kit
recommended inflation pressure unscrew the inflating hose from has accessory adapters located in a
using the pressure gauge (8). the tire valve. See Roadside compartment on the bottom of its
The recommended inflation Assistance Program on housing that can be used to inflate
pressure can be found on the page 13-5. air mattresses, balls, etc.
2014 - 2nd Edition - 8/19/13
Vehicle Care 10-69
Storing the Tire Sealant 2. Return the sealant canister and 2. Jack
the compressor to their original
and Compressor Kit storage location.
3. Wheel Wrench
The tire sealant and compressor kit 4. Strap
is located in the rear storage area. Tire Changing To access the spare tire and tools:
1. Lift the trim cover. Removing the Spare Tire and 1. Open the trunk or liftgate. See
Tools Trunk (Sedan) on page 2-10 or
Liftgate (Hatchback) on
The compact spare tire and tools page 2-12.
are located in the storage
compartment in the rear of the 2. Lift the trim cover.
vehicle. The jack and tools are
stored below the spare tire.
2. Remove the tire sealant

canister (1) and the
compressor (2).
To store the tire sealant canister and
compressor: 3. Turn the retainer
1. Attach the sealant/air hose to counterclockwise and remove it
the sealant canister inlet valve. 1. Extension from the compact spare.
2014 - 2nd Edition - 8/19/13
10-70 Vehicle Care
4. Remove the compact spare tire. 2. Remove the wheel cover, if the
See Compact Spare Tire on vehicle has one, to reach the
page 10-74 for more information. wheel bolts.
5. Remove the jack and tools from
their container and place them
near the tire being changed.
Removing the Flat Tire and
Installing the Spare Tire
1. Do a safety check before
proceeding. See If a Tire Goes
Flat on page 10-60.
4. Place the jack at the position
marked with a half circle.
3. Turn the wheel nuts

counterclockwise to loosen
them. Do not remove them yet.
2014 - 2nd Edition - 8/19/13
Vehicle Care 10-71
5. Insert the jack handle into the

jack and the wheel wrench onto Warning (Continued) Warning (Continued)
the end of the jack handle.
avoid personal injury and vehicle off and cause an accident. When
6. Turn the wheel wrench damage, be sure to fit the jack lift changing a wheel, remove any
clockwise until the lift head is head into the proper location rust or dirt from places where the
firmly contacting the proper before raising the vehicle. wheel attaches to the vehicle. In
lifting point nearest the flat tire. an emergency, a cloth or a paper
towel can be used; however, use
{ Warning 7. Turn the wheel wrench
clockwise to raise the vehicle. a scraper or wire brush later to
Raise the vehicle far enough off remove all rust or dirt.
Getting under a vehicle when it is
lifted on a jack is dangerous. the ground so there is enough
If the vehicle slips off the jack, room for the compact spare tire
you could be badly injured or to fit underneath the wheel well.
killed. Never get under a vehicle 8. Turn the wheel nuts
when it is supported only by counterclockwise to
a jack. remove them.
9. Remove the flat tire.
{ Warning { Warning
Raising the vehicle with the jack Rust or dirt on a wheel, or on the
improperly positioned can parts to which it is fastened, can
damage the vehicle and even make wheel nuts become loose
make the vehicle fall. To help after time. The wheel could come 10. Remove any rust or dirt from
(Continued) (Continued) the wheel bolts, mounting
surfaces, and spare wheel.
2014 - 2nd Edition - 8/19/13
10-72 Vehicle Care
11. Place the compact spare tire

on the wheel-mounting surface. Warning (Continued)
be tightened with a torque wrench
{ Warning to the proper torque specification
Never use oil or grease on bolts after replacing. Follow the torque
or nuts because the nuts might specification supplied by the
come loose. The vehicle's wheel aftermarket manufacturer when
could fall off, causing a crash. using accessory locking wheel
nuts. See Capacities and
Specifications on page 12-2 for
12. Reinstall the wheel nuts. original equipment wheel nut
Tighten each nut by hand until torque specifications.
the wheel is held against 14. Tighten the wheel nuts firmly in
the hub. a crisscross sequence, as
shown.
13. Lower the vehicle by turning
the wheel wrench { Caution
counterclockwise. Lower the
Improperly tightened wheel nuts
{ Caution
jack completely.
can lead to brake pulsation and Wheel covers will not fit on the
rotor damage. To avoid expensive vehicle's compact spare. If you try
{ Warning brake repairs, evenly tighten the to put a wheel cover on the
Wheel nuts that are improperly or wheel nuts in the proper compact spare, the cover or the
incorrectly tightened can cause sequence and to the proper spare could be damaged.
the wheels to become loose or torque specification. See
come off. The wheel nuts should Capacities and Specifications for
the wheel nut torque specification.
(Continued)
2014 - 2nd Edition - 8/19/13
Vehicle Care 10-73
Storing a Flat or Spare Tire

and Tools
{ Warning
Storing a jack, a tire, or other
equipment in the passenger
compartment of the vehicle could
cause injury. In a sudden stop or
Hatchback
collision, loose equipment could
strike someone. Store all these in 5. Route the strap through the
the proper place. wheel, as shown.
4. Attach one end of the strap to a 6. Attach the other end of the strap
cargo tie-down in the rear of the to the other cargo tie-down in
Storing the Flat Tire and Tools
vehicle. the rear of the vehicle.
1. Return the jack and tools to their
original storage location. 7. Tighten the strap.
2. Replace the trim cover. Storing the Compact Spare Tire
and Tools
3. Place the flat tire, lying flat, in
the rear storage compartment. Reverse the instructions for
removing the spare tire and tools to
If the vehicle is a sedan the flat store the compact spare tire.
tire should be against the back
of the rear seats. The compact spare tire is for
Sedan temporary use only. Replace the
If the vehicle is a hatchback the compact spare tire with a full-size
flat tire should be against the tire as soon as you can. See
back of the trunk. Compact Spare Tire on page 10-74.
2014 - 2nd Edition - 8/19/13
10-74 Vehicle Care
Compact Spare Tire (50 mph). To conserve the tread of Do not mix the compact spare tire or
the spare tire, have the standard tire wheel with other wheels or tires.
repaired or replaced as soon as They will not fit. Keep the spare tire
{ Warning convenient and return the spare tire and its wheel together.
Driving with more than one to the storage area.
compact spare tire at a time could When using a compact spare tire, { Caution
result in loss of braking and the ABS and Traction Control
systems may engage until the spare Tire chains will not fit the compact
handling. This could lead to a
crash and you or others could be tire is recognized by the vehicle, spare. Using them can damage
especially on slippery roads. Adjust the vehicle and the chains. Do not
injured. Use only one compact
spare tire at a time. driving to reduce possible use tire chains on the compact
wheel slip. spare.
If this vehicle has a compact spare

tire, it was fully inflated when new; { Caution
however, it can lose air over time. When the compact spare is
Check the inflation pressure installed, do not take the vehicle
regularly. It should be 420 kPa through an automatic car wash
(60 psi).
with guide rails. The compact
Stop as soon as possible and check spare can get caught on the rails
that the spare tire is correctly which can damage the tire, wheel,
inflated after being installed on the and other parts of the vehicle.
vehicle. The compact spare tire is
designed for temporary use only.
The vehicle will perform differently Do not use the compact spare on
with the spare tire installed and it is other vehicles.
recommended that the vehicle
speed be limited to 80 km/h
2014 - 2nd Edition - 8/19/13
Vehicle Care 10-75
Jump Starting { Caution

3. Good Battery Negative Post
4. Good Battery Positive Post
For more information about the
vehicle battery, see Battery on Ignoring these steps could result The jump start negative post and
page 10-24. in costly damage to the vehicle positive post are on the discharged
that would not be covered by the battery on the driver side of the
If the battery has run down, try to vehicle warranty. Trying to start vehicle.
use another vehicle and some the vehicle by pushing or pulling it
jumper cables to start your vehicle. The jump start positive post and
will not work, and it could damage negative post are on the battery of
Be sure to use the following steps to
the vehicle. the vehicle providing the jump start.
do it safely.
The positive jump start connection
{ Warning for the discharged battery is under a
trim cover. Open the cover to
Batteries can hurt you. They can expose the terminal.
be dangerous because:
1. Check the other vehicle. It must
. They contain acid that can have a 12-volt battery with a
burn you. negative ground system.
. They contain gas that can
explode or ignite. { Caution
. They contain enough If the other vehicle does not have
electricity to burn you.
a 12-volt system with a negative
If you do not follow these steps ground, both vehicles can be
exactly, some or all of these 1. Discharged Battery Positive Post damaged. Only use a vehicle that
things can hurt you. 2. Discharged Battery has a 12-volt system with a
Negative Post negative ground for jump starting.
2014 - 2nd Edition - 8/19/13
10-76 Vehicle Care
2. Position the two vehicles so that 4. Turn the ignition to LOCK/OFF.

they are not touching. Turn off all lights and Warning (Continued)
3. Set the parking brake firmly and accessories in both vehicles,
except the hazard warning Be sure the battery has enough
put the shift lever in P (Park) water. You do not need to add
with an automatic transmission, flashers if needed.
water to the battery installed in
or Neutral with a manual your new vehicle. But if a battery
transmission. See Shifting Into { Warning has filler caps, be sure the right
Park (Automatic Transmission) amount of fluid is there. If it is low,
on page 9-18 with an automatic An electric fan can start up even
when the engine is not running add water to take care of that
transmission, or Parking on
and can injure you. Keep hands, first. If you do not, explosive gas
page 9-19 with a manual
transmission. clothing and tools away from any could be present.
underhood electric fan. Battery fluid contains acid that
{ Caution can burn you. Do not get it on
you. If you accidentally get it in
If any accessories are left on or
plugged in during the jump { Warning your eyes or on your skin, flush
the place with water and get
starting procedure, they could be Using a match near a battery can medical help immediately.
damaged. The repairs would not cause battery gas to explode.
be covered by the vehicle People have been hurt doing this,
warranty. Whenever possible, turn
off or unplug all accessories on
and some have been blinded.
Use a flashlight if you need more
{ Warning
either vehicle when jump starting. light. Fans or other moving engine
(Continued) parts can injure you badly. Keep
your hands away from moving
parts once the engine is running.
2014 - 2nd Edition - 8/19/13
Vehicle Care 10-77
5. Connect one end of the red Towing the Vehicle

positive (+) cable to the { Caution
positive (+) terminal on the
discharged battery. If the jumper cables are { Caution
connected or removed in the
6. Connect the other end of the red wrong order, electrical shorting Incorrectly towing a disabled
positive (+) cable to the may occur and damage the vehicle may cause damage. The
positive (+) terminal of the good vehicle. The repairs would not be damage would not be covered by
battery. covered by the vehicle warranty. the vehicle warranty. Do not lash
7. Connect one end of the black Always connect and remove the or hook to the chassis
negative (–) cable to the jumper cables in the correct order, components — including the front
negative (–) terminal of the good making sure that the cables do and rear subframes, suspension
battery. not touch each other or other control arms, and links — during
8. Connect the other end of the metal. towing and recovery of a disabled
black negative (–) cable to the vehicle, or when securing the
negative (–) post for the vehicle. Use the proper nylon
Jumper Cable Removal
discharged battery. strap harnesses around the tires
Reverse the sequence exactly when to secure the vehicle.
9. Start the engine in the vehicle removing the jumper cables.
with the good battery and run
the engine at idle speed for at Have the vehicle towed on a flatbed
least four minutes. car carrier. A wheel lift tow truck
10. Try to start the vehicle that had could damage the vehicle.
the dead battery. If it will not Consult your dealer or a
start after a few tries, it professional towing service if the
probably needs service. disabled vehicle must be towed.
2014 - 2nd Edition - 8/19/13
10-78 Vehicle Care
To tow the vehicle behind another Here are some important things to Dinghy Towing RS Model with
vehicle for recreational purposes, consider before recreational vehicle Automatic Transmission
such as behind a motor home, see towing:
“Recreational Vehicle Towing” . What is the towing capacity of
following. the towing vehicle? Be sure to
read the tow vehicle
Recreational Vehicle manufacturer's
Towing recommendations.
Recreational vehicle towing means . What is the distance that will be
towing the vehicle behind another traveled? Some vehicles have
vehicle, such as a motor home. The restrictions on how far and how
two most common types of long they can tow.
recreational vehicle towing are . Is the proper towing equipment
known as dinghy towing and dolly going to be used? See your
towing. Dinghy towing is towing the dealer or trailering professional
vehicle with all four wheels on the
ground. Dolly towing is towing the
for additional advice and { Caution
equipment recommendations.
vehicle with two wheels on the If the vehicle is towed with all four
ground and two wheels up on a
. Is the vehicle ready to be
towed? Just as preparing the wheels on the ground, the
device known as a dolly. drivetrain components could be
vehicle for a long trip, make sure
the vehicle is prepared to be damaged. The repairs would not
towed. be covered by the vehicle
warranty. Do not tow the vehicle
with all four wheels on the
ground.
2014 - 2nd Edition - 8/19/13
Vehicle Care 10-79
The vehicle was not designed to be 4. To prevent the battery from

towed with all four wheels on the draining while the vehicle is
ground. If the vehicle must be being towed, remove the
towed, a dolly should be used. See following fuse from the
“Dolly Towing” that follows for more instrument panel fuse
information. block: (DLIS). See Instrument
Panel Fuse Block on page 10-38
Dinghy Towing All except RS for more information.
Model with Automatic
Transmission 5. Turn the ignition to ACC/
ACCESSORY.
When dinghy towing a vehicle with
an automatic transmission, the 6. Shift the automatic transmission
vehicle should be run at the to N (Neutral) or a manual
To dinghy tow the vehicle from the transmission to Neutral.
beginning of each day and at each front with all four wheels on the
RV fuel stop for about five minutes. ground: 7. Release the parking brake.
This will ensure proper lubrication of Remember to reinstall the DLIS fuse
transmission components. 1. Position the vehicle to tow and
then secure it to the towing once the destination has been
vehicle. reached.
2. Shift the automatic transmission
to P (Park) or a manual { Caution
transmission into 1 (First) gear If 105 km/h (65 mph) is exceeded
and turn the ignition to while towing the vehicle, it could
LOCK/OFF.
be damaged. Never exceed
3. Set the parking brake. 105 km/h (65 mph) while towing
the vehicle.
2014 - 2nd Edition - 8/19/13
10-80 Vehicle Care
Dolly Towing from the Front 4. Set the parking brake and
remove the key.
5. Clamp the steering wheel in a
straight-ahead position with a
clamping device designed for
towing.
6. Secure the vehicle to the dolly.
7. Release the parking brake.
Dolly Towing from the Rear
{ Caution
Towing the vehicle from the rear The vehicle can be towed from the
could damage it. Also, repairs front using a dolly. To tow the
would not be covered by the vehicle using a dolly, follow these
vehicle warranty. Never have the steps:
vehicle towed from the rear. 1. Attach the dolly to the tow
vehicle following the dolly
manufacturer's instructions.
2. Drive the front wheels onto the
dolly.
3. Put an automatic transmission in
P (Park) or a manual
transmission into 1 (First) gear.
2014 - 2nd Edition - 8/19/13
Vehicle Care 10-81
{ Caution Appearance Care Caution (Continued)

Towing the vehicle from the rear Exterior Care products can be obtained from
could damage it. Also, repairs your dealer. Follow all
would not be covered by the Locks manufacturer directions regarding
vehicle warranty. Never have the Locks are lubricated at the factory. correct product usage, necessary
vehicle towed from the rear. Use a de-icing agent only when safety precautions, and
absolutely necessary, and have the appropriate disposal of any
locks greased after using. See vehicle care product.
Lubricants on page 11-12.
Washing the Vehicle { Caution
To preserve the vehicle's finish,
wash it often and out of direct Avoid using high-pressure
sunlight. washes closer than 30 cm (12 in)
to the surface of the vehicle. Use
of power washers exceeding
{ Caution 8,274 kPa (1,200 psi) can result
Do not use petroleum-based, in damage or removal of paint
acidic, or abrasive cleaning and decals.
agents as they can damage the
vehicle's paint, metal, or plastic The e symbol is on any
parts. If damage occurs, it would underhood compartment electrical
not be covered by the vehicle center that should not be power
warranty. Approved cleaning
(Continued)
2014 - 2nd Edition - 8/19/13
10-82 Vehicle Care
washed. This could cause damage calcium chloride and other salts, ice
that would not be covered by the melting agents, road oil and tar, tree Caution (Continued)
vehicle warranty. sap, bird droppings, chemicals from
industrial chimneys, etc., can may damage it. Use only
If using an automatic car wash, non-abrasive waxes and polishes
follow the car wash instructions. The damage the vehicle's finish if they
remain on painted surfaces. Wash that are made for a basecoat/
windshield wiper and rear window clearcoat paint finish on the
wiper, if equipped, must be off. the vehicle as soon as possible.
If necessary, use non-abrasive vehicle.
Remove any accessories that may
be damaged or interfere with the car cleaners that are marked safe for
wash equipment. painted surfaces to remove foreign To keep the paint finish looking new,
matter. keep the vehicle garaged or
Rinse the vehicle well, before covered whenever possible.
washing and after, to remove all Occasional hand waxing or mild
cleaning agents completely. If they polishing should be done to remove Protecting Exterior Bright Metal
are allowed to dry on the surface, residue from the paint finish. See Moldings
they could stain. your dealer for approved cleaning
products.
Dry the finish with a soft, clean
Do not apply waxes or polishes to
{ Caution
chamois or an all-cotton towel to
avoid surface scratches and water uncoated plastic, vinyl, rubber, Failure to clean and protect the
spotting. decals, simulated wood, or flat paint bright metal moldings can result
as damage can occur. in a hazy white finish or pitting.
Finish Care This damage would not be
Application of aftermarket clearcoat { Caution covered by the vehicle warranty.
sealant/wax materials is not
recommended. If painted surfaces Machine compounding or
are damaged, see your dealer to aggressive polishing on a
have the damage assessed and basecoat/clearcoat paint finish
repaired. Foreign materials such as (Continued)
2014 - 2nd Edition - 8/19/13
Vehicle Care 10-83
The bright metal moldings on the Cleaning Exterior Lamps/

. Solvents, alcohols, fuels,
vehicle are aluminum. To prevent Lenses, Emblems, Decals and or other harsh cleaners.
damage always follow these Stripes . Ice scrapers or other hard items.
cleaning instructions:
Use only lukewarm or cold water, a . Aftermarket appearance caps or
. Be sure the molding is cool to soft cloth, and a car washing soap covers while the lamps are
the touch before applying any to clean exterior lamps, lenses and illuminated, due to excessive
cleaning solution. emblems. Follow instructions under heat generated.
. Use a cleaning solution "Washing the Vehicle" previously in
approved for aluminum. Some this section. { Caution
cleaners are highly acidic or Lamp covers are made of plastic,
contain alkaline substances and and some have a UV protective Failure to clean lamps properly
can damage the moldings. coating. can cause damage to the lamp
cover that would not be covered
. Always dilute a concentrated Use only lukewarm water, a soft
cleaner according to the by the vehicle warranty.
cloth, and mild car washing soap to
manufacturer’s instructions. clean exterior lamps and lenses. Do
. Do not use chrome cleaners. not clean or wipe them while they
. Do not use cleaners that are not
are dry. { Caution
intended for automotive use. Do not use any of the following on
Using wax on low gloss black
lamp covers:
. Use a nonabrasive wax on the finish stripes can increase the
vehicle after washing to protect . Abrasive or caustic agents. gloss level and create a
and extend the molding finish. . Washer fluids and other cleaning non-uniform finish. Clean low
agents in higher concentrations gloss stripes with soap and
than suggested by the water only.
manufacturer.
2014 - 2nd Edition - 8/19/13
10-84 Vehicle Care
Air Intakes squeak. Lubricate weatherstrips at Wheels and Trim — Aluminum

least once a year. Hot, dry climates or Chrome
Clear debris from the air intakes,
may require more frequent
between the hood and windshield Use a soft, clean cloth with mild
application. Black marks from
when washing the vehicle. soap and water to clean the wheels.
rubber material on painted surfaces
can be removed by rubbing with a After rinsing thoroughly with clean
Windshield and Wiper Blades water, dry with a soft, clean towel.
clean cloth. See Recommended
Clean the outside of the windshield Fluids and Lubricants on A wax may then be applied.
with glass cleaner. page 11-12.
Clean rubber blades using a lint-free
Tires
{ Caution
cloth or paper towel soaked with
windshield washer fluid or a mild Use a stiff brush with tire cleaner to Chrome wheels and other chrome
detergent. Wash the windshield clean the tires. trim may be damaged if the
thoroughly when cleaning the vehicle is not washed after driving
on roads that have been sprayed
blades. Bugs, road grime, sap, and
a buildup of vehicle wash/wax
{ Caution with magnesium, calcium,
treatments may cause wiper Using petroleum-based tire or sodium chloride. These
streaking. dressing products on the vehicle chlorides are used on roads for
Replace the wiper blades if they are may damage the paint finish and/ conditions such as ice and dust.
worn or damaged. Damage can be or tires. When applying a tire Always wash the chrome with
caused by extreme dusty dressing, always wipe off any soap and water after exposure.
conditions, sand, salt, heat, sun, overspray from all painted
snow, and ice. surfaces on the vehicle.
Weatherstrips
Apply Dielectric silicone grease on
weatherstrips to make them last
longer, seal better, and not stick or
2014 - 2nd Edition - 8/19/13
Vehicle Care 10-85
check constant velocity joints, material to parts repaired or

{ Caution rubber boots, and axle seals for replaced to restore corrosion
leaks. protection.
To avoid surface damage, do not
use strong soaps, chemicals, Body Component Lubrication Original manufacturer replacement
abrasive polishes, cleaners, parts will provide the corrosion
Lubricate all key lock cylinders, protection while maintaining the
brushes, or cleaners that contain hood hinges, liftgate hinges, and the
acid on aluminum or vehicle warranty.
fuel door hinge unless the
chrome-plated wheels. Use only components are plastic. Applying Finish Damage
approved cleaners. Also, never silicone grease on weatherstrips
drive a vehicle with aluminum or Quickly repair minor chips and
with a clean cloth will make them scratches with touch-up materials
chrome-plated wheels through an last longer, seal better, and not stick available from your dealer to avoid
automatic car wash that uses or squeak. corrosion. Larger areas of finish
silicone carbide tire cleaning damage can be corrected in your
brushes. Damage could occur Underbody Maintenance
dealer's body and paint shop.
and the repairs would not be At least twice a year, Spring and
covered by the vehicle warranty. Fall, use plain water to flush dirt and Chemical Paint Spotting
debris from the vehicle's underbody. Airborne pollutants can fall upon
Your dealer or an underbody car and attack painted vehicle surfaces
Steering, Suspension, and washing system can do this. If not
Chassis Components causing blotchy, ring-shaped
removed, rust and corrosion can discolorations, and small, irregular
Visually inspect steering, develop. dark spots etched into the paint
suspension, and chassis surface. See “Finish Care”
Sheet Metal Damage
components for damaged, loose or previously in this section.
missing parts or signs of wear at If the vehicle is damaged and
least once a year. Inspect the power requires sheet metal repair or
steering for proper hook-up, binding, replacement, make sure the body
leaks, cracks, chafing, etc. Visually repair shop applies anti-corrosion
2014 - 2nd Edition - 8/19/13
10-86 Vehicle Care
Interior Care remain on the surface being 3.8 L (1 gal) of water.

cleaned for extended periods A concentrated soap solution will
To prevent dirt particle abrasions, of time. leave a residue that creates
regularly clean the vehicle's interior. streaks and attracts dirt. Do not
Immediately remove any soils. Note Cleaners may contain solvents that
can become concentrated in the use solutions that contain strong
that newspapers or dark garments or caustic soap.
that can transfer color to home interior. Before using cleaners, read
furnishings can also permanently and adhere to all safety instructions . Do not heavily saturate the
transfer color to the vehicle's on the label. While cleaning the upholstery when cleaning.
interior. interior, maintain adequate . Do not use solvents or cleaners
ventilation by opening the doors and containing solvents.
Use a soft bristle brush to remove windows.
dust from knobs and crevices on the Interior Glass
instrument cluster. Using a mild To prevent damage, do not clean
soap solution, immediately remove the interior using the following To clean, use a terry cloth fabric
hand lotions, sunscreen, and insect cleaners or techniques: dampened with water. Wipe droplets
repellent from all interior surfaces or . Never use a razor or any other left behind with a clean dry cloth.
permanent damage may result. sharp object to remove a soil Commercial glass cleaners may be
from any interior surface. used, if necessary, after cleaning
Your dealer may have products for the interior glass with plain water.
cleaning the interior. Use cleaners . Never use a brush with stiff
specifically designed for the bristles.
surfaces being cleaned to prevent { Caution
. Never rub any surface
permanent damage. Apply all
aggressively or with excessive To prevent scratching, never use
cleaners directly to the cleaning
pressure. abrasive cleaners on automotive
cloth. Do not spray cleaners directly
on any switches or controls. . Do not use laundry detergents or glass. Abrasive cleaners or
Cleaners should be removed dishwashing soaps with aggressive cleaning may damage
quickly. Never allow cleaners to degreasers. For liquid cleaners, the rear window defogger.
use approximately 20 drops per
2014 - 2nd Edition - 8/19/13
Vehicle Care 10-87
Cleaning the windshield with water Fabric/Carpet/Suede 3. Start on the outside edge of the
during the first three to six months soil and gently rub toward the
Start by vacuuming the surface
of ownership will reduce tendency center. Fold the cleaning cloth to
using a soft brush attachment. If a
to fog. a clean area frequently to
rotating brush attachment is being
prevent forcing the soil in to the
Speaker Covers used during vacuuming, only use it
fabric.
on the floor carpet. Before cleaning,
Vacuum around a speaker cover gently remove as much of the soil 4. Continue gently rubbing the
gently, so that the speaker will not as possible using one of the soiled area until there is no
be damaged. Clean spots with just following techniques: longer any color transfer from
water and mild soap. the soil to the cleaning cloth.
. Gently blot liquids with a paper
Coated Moldings towel. Continue blotting until no 5. If the soil is not completely
Coated moldings should be cleaned. more soil can be removed. removed, use a mild soap
solution followed only by plain
. When lightly soiled, wipe with a
. For solid soils, remove as much
water.
sponge or soft lint-free cloth as possible prior to vacuuming.
dampened with water. If the soil is not completely
To clean:
removed, it may be necessary to
. When heavily soiled, use warm 1. Saturate a clean lint-free use a commercial upholstery
soapy water. colorfast cloth with water. cleaner or spot lifter. Test a small
Microfiber cloth is recommended hidden area for colorfastness before
to prevent lint transfer to the using a commercial upholstery
fabric or carpet. cleaner or spot lifter. If ring
2. Remove excess moisture by formation occurs, clean the entire
gently wringing until water does fabric or carpet.
not drip from the cleaning cloth. Following the cleaning process, a
paper towel can be used to blot
excess moisture.
2014 - 2nd Edition - 8/19/13
10-88 Vehicle Care
Cleaning High Gloss Surfaces Instrument Panel, Leather,

and Vehicle Information and Vinyl, Other Plastic Surfaces, Caution (Continued)
Radio Displays Low Gloss Paint Surfaces and these solvents can permanently
For vehicles with high gloss Natural Open Pore Wood change the appearance and feel
surfaces or vehicle displays, use a Surfaces of leather or soft trim and are not
microfiber cloth to wipe surfaces. Use a soft microfiber cloth recommended.
Before wiping the surface with the dampened with water to remove
microfiber cloth, use a soft bristle dust and loose dirt. For a more Do not use cleaners that increase
brush to remove dirt that could thorough cleaning, use a soft gloss, especially on the instrument
scratch the surface. Then use the microfiber cloth dampened with a panel. Reflected glare can decrease
microfiber cloth by gently rubbing to mild soap solution. visibility through the windshield
clean. Never use window cleaners
under certain conditions.
or solvents. Periodically hand wash
the microfiber cloth separately,
{ Caution
using mild soap. Do not use bleach Soaking or saturating leather, { Caution
or fabric softener. Rinse thoroughly especially perforated leather, as
and air dry before next use. Use of air fresheners may cause
well as other interior surfaces, permanent damage to plastics
may cause permanent damage. and painted surfaces. If an air
{ Caution Wipe excess moisture from these freshener comes in contact with
surfaces after cleaning and allow any plastic or painted surface in
Do not attach a device with a
them to dry naturally. Never use the vehicle, blot immediately and
suction cup to the display. This
heat, steam, spot lifters, or spot clean with a soft cloth dampened
may cause damage and would
removers. Do not use cleaners with a mild soap solution.
not be covered by the warranty.
that contain silicone or wax-based Damage caused by air fresheners
products. Cleaners containing would not be covered by the
(Continued) vehicle warranty.
2014 - 2nd Edition - 8/19/13
Vehicle Care 10-89

. Use the floor mat with the
Cargo Cover and Floor Mats correct side up. Do not turn
Convenience Net
it over.
Wash with warm water and mild { Warning . Do not place anything on top of
detergent. Do not use chlorine
bleach. Rinse with cold water, and If a floor mat is the wrong size or the driver side floor mat.
then dry completely. is not properly installed, it can . Use only a single floor mat on
interfere with the pedals. the driver side.
Care of Safety Belts Interference with the pedals can . Do not place one floor mat on
Keep belts clean and dry. cause unintended acceleration top of another.
and/or increased stopping
{ Warning distance which can cause a crash
and injury. Make sure the floor
Removing and Replacing the
Floor Mats
Do not bleach or dye safety belts. mat does not interfere with the Pull up on the rear of the floor mat
It may severely weaken them. In pedals. to unlock each retainer and remove.
a crash, they might not be able to
provide adequate protection. Use the following guidelines for
Clean safety belts only with mild proper floor mat usage:
soap and lukewarm water.
. The original equipment floor
mats were designed for your
vehicle. If the floor mats need
replacing, it is recommended
that GM certified floor mats be
purchased. Non-GM floor mats
may not fit properly and may
interfere with the pedals. Always
check that the floor mats do not
interfere with the pedals.
2014 - 2nd Edition - 8/19/13
10-90 Vehicle Care
Reinstall by lining up the floor mat

retainer openings over the carpet
retainers and snap into position.
Make sure the floor mat is properly
secured in place.
Verify the floor mat does not
interfere with the pedals.
2014 - 2nd Edition - 8/19/13
Service and Maintenance 11-1
Service and General Information technicians, the dealer is the place

for routine maintenance such as oil
Maintenance Your vehicle is an important
investment. This section describes
changes and tire rotations and
additional maintenance items like
the required maintenance for the tires, brakes, batteries, and wiper
General Information vehicle. Follow this schedule to help blades.
General Information . . . . . . . . . . 11-1 protect against major repair
Maintenance Schedule
expenses resulting from neglect or
inadequate maintenance. It may
{ Caution
Maintenance Schedule . . . . . . . 11-2 also help to maintain the value of Damage caused by improper
the vehicle if it is sold. It is the maintenance can lead to costly
Special Application Services responsibility of the owner to have
Special Application repairs and may not be covered
all required maintenance performed. by the vehicle warranty.
Services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-8
Your dealer has trained technicians Maintenance intervals, checks,
Additional Maintenance who can perform required inspections, recommended fluids,
and Care maintenance using genuine and lubricants are important to
Additional Maintenance replacement parts. They have keep the vehicle in good working
and Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-8 up-to-date tools and equipment for condition.
fast and accurate diagnostics. Many
Recommended Fluids dealers have extended evening and
Recommended Fluids and Saturday hours, courtesy The Tire Rotation and Required
Lubricants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-12 transportation, and online Services are the responsibility of the
Maintenance Replacement scheduling to assist with service vehicle owner. It is recommended to
Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-14 needs. have your dealer perform these
services every 12 000 km/7,500 mi.
Maintenance Records Your dealer recognizes the Proper vehicle maintenance helps to
Maintenance Records . . . . . . 11-15 importance of providing keep the vehicle in good working
competitively priced maintenance condition, improves fuel economy,
and repair services. With trained and reduces vehicle emissions.
2014 - 2nd Edition - 8/19/13
11-2 Service and Maintenance
Because of the way people use

. Frequently towing a trailer.
vehicles, maintenance needs vary.
Maintenance
. Used for high speed or
There may need to be more competitive driving. Schedule
frequent checks and services. The
Additional Required Services -
. Used for taxi, police, or delivery Owner Checks and Services
Normal are for vehicles that: service.
At Each Fuel Stop
. Carry passengers and cargo Refer to the information in the
Maintenance Schedule Additional
. Check the engine oil level. See
within recommended limits on Engine Oil on page 10-9.
the Tire and Loading Information Required Services - Severe chart.
label. See Vehicle Load Limits Once a Month
on page 9-9. { Warning . Check the tire inflation
. Are driven on reasonable road Performing maintenance work can pressures. See Tire Pressure on
surfaces within legal driving page 10-47.
be dangerous and can cause
limits. serious injury. Perform . Inspect the tires for wear. See
. Use the recommended fuel. See maintenance work only if the Tire Inspection on page 10-53.
Recommended Fuel on required information, proper tools, . Check the windshield washer
page 9-38. and equipment are available. fluid level. See Washer Fluid on
Refer to the information in the If they are not, see your dealer to page 10-21.
Maintenance Schedule Additional have a trained technician do the
work. See Doing Your Own Engine Oil Change
Required Services - Normal chart.
Service Work on page 10-3. When a : % CHANGE message
The Additional Required Services -
Severe are for vehicles that are: displays in the DIC, have the engine
oil and filter changed within the next
. Mainly driven in heavy city traffic 1 000 km/600 mi. If driven under the
in hot weather. best conditions, the engine oil life
. Mainly driven in hilly or system might not indicate the need
mountainous terrain. for vehicle service for more than a
2014 - 2nd Edition - 8/19/13
year. The engine oil and filter must

. Check windshield washer fluid . Check restraint system
be changed at least once a year level. See Washer Fluid on components. See Safety System
and the oil life system must be page 10-21. Check on page 3-16.
reset. Your trained dealer technician . Visually inspect windshield wiper . Visually inspect fuel system for
can perform this work. If the engine blades for wear, cracking, damage or leaks.
oil life system is reset accidentally, or contamination. See Exterior
service the vehicle within 5 000 km/
. Visually inspect exhaust system
Care on page 10-81. Replace and nearby heat shields for
3,000 mi since the last service. worn or damaged wiper blades.
Reset the oil life system when the loose or damaged parts.
See Wiper Blade Replacement
oil is changed. See Engine Oil Life on page 10-26. . Lubricate body components. See
System on page 10-12. Exterior Care on page 10-81.
. Check tire inflation pressures.
Tire Rotation and Required See Tire Pressure on . Check starter switch. See Starter
Services Every 12 000 km/ page 10-47. Switch Check on page 10-25.
7,500 mi . Inspect tire wear. See Tire . Check automatic transmission
Rotate the tires, if recommended for Inspection on page 10-53. shift lock control function. See
the vehicle, and perform the Automatic Transmission Shift
. Visually check for fluid leaks. Lock Control Function Check on
following services. See Tire
Rotation on page 10-53.
. Inspect engine air cleaner filter. page 10-25.
See Engine Air Cleaner/Filter on . Check ignition transmission lock.
. Check engine oil level and oil page 10-14.
life percentage. If needed, See Ignition Transmission Lock
change engine oil and filter, and
. Inspect brake system. Check on page 10-26.
reset oil life system. See Engine . Visually inspect steering, . Check parking brake and
Oil on page 10-9 and Engine Oil suspension, and chassis automatic transmission park
Life System on page 10-12. components for damaged, loose, mechanism. See Park Brake and
. Check engine coolant level. See or missing parts or signs of P (Park) Mechanism Check on
Engine Coolant on page 10-16. wear. See Exterior Care on page 10-26.
page 10-81.
2014 - 2nd Edition - 8/19/13

. Check accelerator pedal for
damage, high effort, or binding.
Replace if needed.
. Visually inspect gas strut for
signs of wear, cracks, or other
damage. Check the hold open
ability of the strut. See your
dealer if service is required.
. Check tire sealant expiration
date, if equipped. See Tire
Sealant and Compressor Kit on
page 10-62.
. Inspect sunroof track and seal,
if equipped. See Sunroof on
page 2-20.
2014 - 2nd Edition - 8/19/13
1 2 0 0 0 k m/7 ,5 0 0 mi
2 4 0 0 0 k m/1 5 ,0 0 0 mi
3 6 0 0 0 k m/2 2 ,5 0 0 mi
4 8 0 0 0 k m/3 0 ,0 0 0 mi
6 0 0 0 0 k m/3 7 ,5 0 0 mi
7 2 0 0 0 k m/4 5 ,0 0 0 mi
8 4 0 0 0 k m/5 2 ,5 0 0 mi
9 6 0 0 0 k m/6 0 ,0 0 0 mi
1 0 8 0 0 0 k m/6 7 ,5 0 0 mi
1 2 0 0 0 0 k m/7 5 ,0 0 0 mi
1 3 2 0 0 0 k m/8 2 ,5 0 0 mi
1 4 4 0 0 0 k m/9 0 ,0 0 0 mi
1 5 6 0 0 0 k m/9 7 ,5 0 0 mi
1 6 8 0 0 0 k m/1 0 5 ,0 0 0 mi
1 8 0 0 0 0 k m/11 2 ,5 0 0 mi
1 9 2 0 0 0 k m/1 2 0 ,0 0 0 mi
2 0 4 0 0 0 k m/1 2 7 ,5 0 0 mi
2 1 6 0 0 0 k m/1 3 5 ,0 0 0 mi
2 2 8 0 0 0 k m/1 4 2 ,5 0 0 mi
2 4 0 0 0 0 k m/1 5 0 ,0 0 0 mi
Additional Required
Services - Normal
Rotate tires and perform Required Services.
Check engine oil level and oil life percentage. @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @
Change engine oil and filter, if needed.
Replace passenger compartment air filter. (1) @ @ @ @ @ @
Inspect evaporative control system. (2) @ @ @
Replace engine air cleaner filter. (3) @ @ @
Except 1.4L Engine: Replace spark plugs. Inspect
spark plug wires.
@
1.4L Engine Only: Replace spark plugs. Inspect
spark plug wires.
@ @
Change automatic transmission fluid. Change
filter if serviceable.
@
Drain and fill engine cooling system. (4) @
Visually inspect accessory drive belts. (5) @
1.8L Engine Only: Replace timing belt, idler
pulley, and timing belt tensioner. (6)
@
Replace brake/clutch fluid. (6) @
2014 - 2nd Edition - 8/19/13
Footnotes — Maintenance
Schedule Additional Required
Services - Normal
(1) Or every two years, whichever
comes first. More frequent
replacement may be needed if the
vehicle is driven in areas with heavy
traffic, areas with poor air quality,
or areas with high dust levels.
Replacement may also be needed if
there is a reduction in air flow,
excessive window fogging, or odors.
(2) Check all fuel and vapor lines
and hoses for proper hook-up,
routing, and condition.
(3) Or every four years, whichever
comes first.
(4) Or every five years, whichever
comes first. See Cooling System on
page 10-15.
(5) Or every 10 years, whichever
comes first. Inspect for fraying,
excessive cracking, or damage;
replace, if needed.
comes first.
2014 - 2nd Edition - 8/19/13
1 2 0 0 0 k m/7 ,5 0 0 mi
2 4 0 0 0 k m/1 5 ,0 0 0 mi
3 6 0 0 0 k m/2 2 ,5 0 0 mi
4 8 0 0 0 k m/3 0 ,0 0 0 mi
6 0 0 0 0 k m/3 7 ,5 0 0 mi
7 2 0 0 0 k m/4 5 ,0 0 0 mi
8 4 0 0 0 k m/5 2 ,5 0 0 mi
9 6 0 0 0 k m/6 0 ,0 0 0 mi
1 0 8 0 0 0 k m/6 7 ,5 0 0 mi
1 2 0 0 0 0 k m/7 5 ,0 0 0 mi
1 3 2 0 0 0 k m/8 2 ,5 0 0 mi
1 4 4 0 0 0 k m/9 0 ,0 0 0 mi
1 5 6 0 0 0 k m/9 7 ,5 0 0 mi
1 6 8 0 0 0 k m/1 0 5 ,0 0 0 mi
1 8 0 0 0 0 k m/11 2 ,5 0 0 mi
1 9 2 0 0 0 k m/1 2 0 ,0 0 0 mi
2 0 4 0 0 0 k m/1 2 7 ,5 0 0 mi
2 1 6 0 0 0 k m/1 3 5 ,0 0 0 mi
2 2 8 0 0 0 k m/1 4 2 ,5 0 0 mi
2 4 0 0 0 0 k m/1 5 0 ,0 0 0 mi
Additional Required
Services - Severe
Rotate tires and perform Required Services.
Check engine oil level and oil life percentage. @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @ @
Change engine oil and filter, if needed.
Replace passenger compartment air filter. (1) @ @ @ @ @ @
Inspect evaporative control system. (2) @ @ @
Replace engine air cleaner filter. (3) @ @ @
Change automatic transmission fluid. Change
filter if serviceable.
@ @ @
Change manual transmission fluid. @ @ @
Except 1.4L Engine: Replace spark plugs. Inspect
spark plug wires.
@
1.4L Engine Only: Replace spark plugs. Inspect
spark plug wires.
@ @
Drain and fill engine cooling system. (4) @
Visually inspect accessory drive belts. (5) @
1.8L Engine Only: Replace timing belt, idler
pulley, and timing belt tensioner. (6)
@
Replace brake/clutch fluid. (6) @
2014 - 2nd Edition - 8/19/13
Footnotes — Maintenance Special Application Additional

Schedule Additional Required
Services - Severe Services Maintenance and Care
(1) Or every two years, whichever . Severe Commercial Use Your vehicle is an important
comes first. More frequent Vehicles Only: Lubricate chassis investment and caring for it properly
replacement may be needed if the components every 5 000 km/ may help to avoid future costly
vehicle is driven in areas with heavy 3,000 mi. repairs. To maintain vehicle
traffic, areas with poor air quality, . performance, additional
Have underbody flushing service
or areas with high dust levels. maintenance services may be
performed. See "Underbody
Replacement may also be needed if required.
Maintenance" in Exterior Care
there is a reduction in air flow,
on page 10-81. It is recommended that your dealer
excessive window fogging, or odors.
perform these services — their
(2) Check all fuel and vapor lines trained dealer technicians know
and hoses for proper hook-up, your vehicle best. Your dealer can
routing, and condition. also perform a thorough
(3) Or every four years, whichever assessment with a multi-point
comes first. inspection to recommend when your
vehicle may need attention.
(4) Or every five years, whichever
comes first. See Cooling System on The following list is intended to
page 10-15. explain the services and conditions
to look for that may indicate
(5) Or every 10 years, whichever services are required.
comes first. Inspect for fraying,
excessive cracking, or damage;
replace, if needed.
comes first.
2014 - 2nd Edition - 8/19/13
Battery Brakes Hoses

The battery supplies power to start Brakes stop the vehicle and are Hoses transport fluids and should
the engine and operate any crucial to safe driving. be regularly inspected to ensure
additional electrical accessories. . Signs of brake wear may include that there are no cracks or leaks.
. To avoid break-down or failure to chirping, grinding, or squealing With a multi-point inspection, your
start the vehicle, maintain a noises, or difficulty stopping. dealer can inspect the hoses and
battery with full cranking power. advise if replacement is needed.
. Trained dealer technicians have
. Trained dealer technicians have access to tools and equipment Lamps
the diagnostic equipment to test to inspect the brakes and Properly working headlamps,
the battery and ensure that the recommend quality parts taillamps, and brake lamps are
connections and cables are engineered for the vehicle. important to see and be seen on
corrosion-free. the road.
Fluids
Belts Proper fluid levels and approved
. Signs that the headlamps need
. Belts may need replacing if they fluids protect the vehicle’s systems attention include dimming, failure
squeak or show signs of and components. See to light, cracking, or damage.
cracking or splitting. Recommended Fluids and The brake lamps need to be
Lubricants on page 11-12 for GM checked periodically to ensure
. Trained dealer technicians have that they light when braking.
access to tools and equipment approved fluids.
. With a multi-point inspection,
to inspect the belts and . Engine oil and windshield
recommend adjustment or washer fluid levels should be your dealer can check the lamps
replacement when necessary. checked at every fuel fill. and note any concerns.
. A message may indicate when . Instrument cluster lights may
scheduled maintenance on the come on to indicate that fluids
timing belt and other may be low and need to be
components is required. filled.
2014 - 2nd Edition - 8/19/13
Shocks and Struts rubber; cracks or cuts in the Wheel Alignment

Shocks and struts help aid in control tread or sidewall; or a bulge or Wheel alignment is critical for
for a smoother ride. split in the tire. ensuring that the tires deliver
. Signs of wear may include
. Trained dealer technicians can optimal wear and performance.
steering wheel vibration, bounce/ inspect and recommend the right . Signs that the alignment may
sway while braking, longer tires. Your dealer can also need to be adjusted include
stopping distance, or uneven provide tire/wheel balancing pulling, improper vehicle
tire wear. services to ensure smooth handling, or unusual tire wear.
vehicle operation at all speeds.
. As part of the multi-point Your dealer sells and services . Your dealer has the required
inspection, trained dealer name brand tires. equipment to ensure proper
technicians can visually inspect wheel alignment.
the shocks and struts for signs Vehicle Care
of leaking, blown seals, Windshield
To help keep the vehicle looking like
or damage, and can advise new, vehicle care products are For safety, appearance, and the
when service is needed. available from your dealer. For best viewing, keep the windshield
information on how to clean and clean and clear.
Tires
protect the vehicle’s interior and . Signs of damage include
Tires need to be properly inflated, exterior, see Interior Care on scratches, cracks, and chips.
rotated, and balanced. Maintaining page 10-86 and Exterior Care on
the tires can save money and fuel, page 10-81.
. Trained dealer technicians can
and can reduce the risk of tire inspect the windshield and
failure. recommend proper replacement
if needed.
. Signs that the tires need to be
replaced include three or more
visible treadwear indicators; cord
or fabric showing through the
2014 - 2nd Edition - 8/19/13
Wiper Blades
Wiper blades need to be cleaned
and kept in good condition to
provide a clear view.
. Signs of wear include streaking,
skipping across the windshield,
and worn or split rubber.
. Trained dealer technicians can
check the wiper blades and
replace them when needed.
2014 - 2nd Edition - 8/19/13
Recommended Fluids
Recommended Fluids and Lubricants
Fluids and lubricants identified below by name, part number, or specification can be obtained from your dealer.
Usage Fluid/Lubricant
Engine Oil Use only engine oil licensed to the dexos1 specification of the proper SAE
viscosity grade. ACDelco dexos1 Synthetic Blend is recommended. See
Engine Oil on page 10-9.
Engine Coolant 50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable water and use only DEX-COOL Coolant.
See Engine Coolant on page 10-16.
Hydraulic Brake/Clutch System DOT 3 Hydraulic Brake Fluid (GM Part No. 19299818, in
Canada 19299819).
Windshield Washer Automotive windshield washer fluid that meets regional freeze protection
requirements.
Automatic Transmission DEXRON®-VI Automatic Transmission Fluid.
Manual Transmission Manual Transmission Fluid (GM Part No. 19259104, in Canada 19259105).
Key Lock Cylinders Multi-Purpose Lubricant, Superlube (GM Part No. 12346241, in
Canada 10953474).
Manual Transmission Shift Linkage Chassis Lubricant (GM Part No. 12377985, in Canada 88901242) or
lubricant meeting requirements of NLGI #2, Category LB or GC-LB.
2014 - 2nd Edition - 8/19/13
Usage Fluid/Lubricant
Chassis Lubrication Chassis Lubricant (GM Part No. 12377985, in Canada 88901242) or
lubricant meeting requirements of NLGI #2, Category LB or GC-LB.
Hood Latch Assembly, Secondary Lubriplate Lubricant Aerosol (GM Part No. 89021668, in Canada 89021674)
Latch, Pivots, Spring Anchor, and or lubricant meeting requirements of NLGI #2, Category LB or GC-LB.
Release Pawl
Hood and Door Hinges Multi-Purpose Lubricant, Superlube (GM Part No. 12346241, in
Canada 10953474).
Weatherstrip Conditioning Weatherstrip Lubricant (GM Part No. 3634770, in Canada 10953518) or
Dielectric Silicone Grease (GM Part No. 12345579, in Canada 10953481).
2014 - 2nd Edition - 8/19/13
Maintenance Replacement Parts

Replacement parts identified below by name, part number, or specification can be obtained from your dealer.
Maintenance Replacement Parts
Part GM Part Number ACDelco Part Number
Engine Air Cleaner/Filter 96950990 —
Engine Oil Filter 93185674 PF2257G
Passenger Compartment Air Filter 13271190 CF181
Spark Plugs 55585534 41–122
Wiper Blades
Driver Side – 65.0 cm (25.6 in) 95228809 —
Passenger Side – 38.0 cm (15.0 in) 95228810 —
Rear – 26.5 cm (10.4 in) 95016791 —
2014 - 2nd Edition - 8/19/13
Maintenance Records
After the scheduled services are performed, record the date, odometer reading, who performed the service, and the
type of services performed in the boxes provided. Retain all maintenance receipts.
Odometer
Date Serviced By Services Performed
Reading
2014 - 2nd Edition - 8/19/13
Odometer
Reading
2014 - 2nd Edition - 8/19/13
Odometer
Reading
2014 - 2nd Edition - 8/19/13
Odometer
Reading
2014 - 2nd Edition - 8/19/13
Technical Data 12-1
Technical Data Vehicle Identification Engine Identification

The eighth character in the VIN is
Vehicle Identification the engine code. This code
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) identifies the vehicle's engine,
Vehicle Identification specifications, and replacement
Number (VIN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-1 parts. See “Engine Specifications”
Service Parts Identification under Capacities and Specifications
Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-1 on page 12-2 for the vehicle's
engine code.
Vehicle Data
Capacities and
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-2
Service Parts
Engine Drive Belt Routing . . . 12-3 Identification Label
This label, in the spare tire well in
the trunk, has the following
information:
. Vehicle Identification
Number (VIN).
This legal identifier is in the front
. Model designation.
corner of the instrument panel, on . Paint information.
the left side of the vehicle. It can be
seen through the windshield from
. Production options and special
outside. The VIN also appears on equipment.
the Vehicle Certification and Service Do not remove this label from the
Parts labels and certificates of title vehicle.
and registration.
2014 - 2nd Edition - 8/19/13
12-2 Technical Data
Vehicle Data
Capacities and Specifications
The following approximate capacities are given in metric and English conversions. See Recommended Fluids and
Lubricants on page 11-12 for more information.
Capacities
Application
Metric English
Air Conditioning Refrigerant For the air conditioning system refrigerant type and
charge amount, see the refrigerant label under the
hood. See your dealer for more information.
Cooling System
1.4L L4 6.5 L 6.9 qt
1.8L L4 6.0 L 6.3 qt
Engine Oil with Filter
1.4L L4 4.0 L 4.2 qt
1.8L L4 4.5 L 4.8 qt
Fuel Tank 46.0 L 12.2 gal
Wheel Nut Torque 140 Y 100 lb ft
All capacities are approximate. When adding, be sure to fill to the approximate level, as recommended in this
manual. Recheck fluid level after filling.
2014 - 2nd Edition - 8/19/13
Technical Data 12-3
Engine Specifications
Engine VIN Code Transmission Spark Plug Gap
1.4L L4 LUV B Automatic and Manual 0.60–0.70 mm
(0.024–0.028 in)
1.8L L4 LUW H Automatic and Manual 0.60–0.70 mm
(0.024–0.028 in)
1.8L L4 LWE G Automatic and Manual 0.60–0.70 mm
(0.024–0.028 in)
Engine Drive Belt Routing
1.8L L4 Engine (with Air 1.8L L4 Engine (without Air

Conditioning) Conditioning)
1.4L L4 Engine
2014 - 2nd Edition - 8/19/13
12-4 Technical Data
2 NOTES
2014 - 2nd Edition - 8/19/13
Customer Information 13-1
Customer Reporting Safety Defects

Reporting Safety Defects to
Customer Information
Information the United States
Government . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-12 Customer Satisfaction
Reporting Safety Defects to Procedure
Customer Information the Canadian Your satisfaction and goodwill are
Customer Satisfaction Government . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-13 important to your dealer and to
Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-1 Reporting Safety Defects to Chevrolet. Normally, any concerns
Customer Assistance General Motors . . . . . . . . . . . 13-13
with the sales transaction or the
Offices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-3 Vehicle Data Recording and operation of the vehicle will be
Customer Assistance for Text resolved by your dealer's sales or
Telephone (TTY) Users . . . . . 13-4
Privacy
Vehicle Data Recording and service departments. Sometimes,
Online Owner Center . . . . . . . . 13-4 however, despite the best intentions
GM Mobility Reimbursement Privacy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-13
Event Data Recorders . . . . . . 13-14 of all concerned, misunderstandings
Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-5 can occur. If your concern has not
Roadside Assistance OnStar® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-14
Radio Frequency been resolved to your satisfaction,
Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-5 the following steps should be taken:
Scheduling Service Identification (RFID) . . . . . . . 13-15
Appointments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-7 Radio Frequency STEP ONE: Discuss your concern
Courtesy Transportation Statement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-15 with a member of dealership
Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-7 management. Normally, concerns
Collision Damage Repair . . . . 13-9 can be quickly resolved at that level.
Service Publications If the matter has already been
Ordering Information . . . . . . 13-11 reviewed with the sales, service,
or parts manager, contact the owner
of your dealership or the general
manager.
2014 - 2nd Edition - 8/19/13
13-2 Customer Information
STEP TWO: If after contacting a When contacting Chevrolet, 40 days. If you do not agree with the
member of dealership management, remember that your concern will decision given in your case, you
it appears your concern cannot be likely be resolved at a dealer's may reject it and proceed with any
resolved by your dealership without facility. That is why we suggest other venue for relief available
further help, in the U.S., call the following Step One first. to you.
Chevrolet Customer Assistance STEP THREE — U.S. Owners: You may contact the BBB Auto Line
Center at 1-800–222–1020. In Both General Motors and your Program using the toll-free
Canada, call General Motors of dealer are committed to making telephone number or write them at
Canada Customer Care Centre at sure you are completely satisfied the following address:
1-800-263-3777 (English), with the new vehicle. However,
or 1-800-263-7854 (French). BBB Auto Line Program
if you continue to remain unsatisfied Council of Better Business
We encourage you to call the after following the procedure Bureaus, Inc.
toll-free number in order to give your outlined in Steps One and Two, you 4200 Wilson Boulevard
inquiry prompt attention. Have the can file with the Better Business Suite 800
following information available to Bureau (BBB) Auto Line® Program Arlington, VA 22203-1838
give the Customer Assistance to enforce your rights.
representative: Telephone: 1-800-955-5100
The BBB Auto Line Program is an www.dr.bbb.org/goauto
. Vehicle Identification out-of-court program administered
Number (VIN). This is available by the Council of Better Business This program is available in all
from the vehicle registration or Bureaus to settle automotive 50 states and the District of
title, or the plate at the top left of disputes regarding vehicle repairs or Columbia. Eligibility is limited by
the instrument panel and visible the interpretation of the New Vehicle vehicle age, mileage, and other
through the windshield. Limited Warranty. Although you may factors. General Motors reserves
be required to resort to this informal the right to change eligibility
. Dealership name and location. limitations and/or discontinue its
dispute resolution program prior to
. Vehicle delivery date and filing a court action, use of the participation in this program.
present mileage. program is free of charge and your
case will generally be heard within
2014 - 2nd Edition - 8/19/13
STEP THREE — Canadian For further information concerning Customer Assistance

Owners: In the event that you do eligibility in the Canadian Motor
not feel your concerns have been Vehicle Arbitration Plan (CAMVAP),
Offices
addressed after following the call toll-free 1-800-207-0685, or call Chevrolet encourages customers to
procedure outlined in Steps One the General Motors Customer Care call the toll-free number for
and Two, General Motors of Canada Centre, 1-800-263-3777 (English), assistance. However, if a customer
Limited wants you to be aware of its 1-800-263-7854 (French), wishes to write or e-mail Chevrolet,
participation in a no-charge or write to: the letter should be addressed to:
Mediation/Arbitration Program. The Mediation/Arbitration Program
General Motors of Canada Limited United States and Puerto Rico
c/o Customer Care Centre
has committed to binding arbitration General Motors of Canada Limited Chevrolet Motor Division
of owner disputes involving Mail Code: CA1-163-005 Chevrolet Customer Assistance
factory-related vehicle service 1908 Colonel Sam Drive Center
claims. The program provides for Oshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7 P.O. Box 33170
the review of the facts involved by Detroit, MI 48232-5170
an impartial third party arbiter, and The inquiry should be accompanied www.Chevrolet.com
may include an informal hearing by the Vehicle Identification
before the arbiter. The program is Number (VIN). 1-800-222-1020
designed so that the entire dispute 1-800-833-2438 (For Text
settlement process, from the time Telephone Devices (TTYs))
you file your complaint to the final Roadside Assistance:
decision, should be completed in 1-800-243-8872
about 70 days. We believe our From U.S. Virgin Islands:
impartial program offers advantages 1-800-496-9994
over courts in most jurisdictions
because it is informal, quick, and
free of charge.
2014 - 2nd Edition - 8/19/13
Canada Assistance Center. Any TTY user in I (Service History): View

the U.S. can communicate with printable dealer-recorded service
General Motors of Canada Limited
Chevrolet by dialing: records and self-recorded service
Customer Care Centre, Mail
1-800-833-2438. TTY users in records.
Code: CA1-163-005
Canada can dial 1-800-263-3830.
1908 Colonel Sam Drive D (Preferred Dealer
Oshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7 Information): Select a preferred
www.gm.ca Online Owner Center dealer and view dealer location,
1-800-263-3777 (English) Online Owner Experience maps, phone numbers, and hours.
1-800-263-7854 (French) (U.S.) my.chevrolet.com J (Warranty Tracking
1-800-263-3830 (For Text Information): Track the vehicle’s
The Chevrolet online owner
Telephone devices (TTYs)) warranty information.
experience is a one-stop resource
Roadside Assistance:
1-800-268-6800
that allows interaction with J (Recall Information): View
Chevrolet and keeps important active recalls or search by Vehicle
Overseas vehicle-specific information in one Identification Number (VIN). See
place. Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
Please contact the local General
on page 12-1.
Motors Business Unit. Membership Benefits
E (Vehicle Information): H (Other Account Information):
Customer Assistance for View GM Card, SiriusXM Satellite
Download owner manuals and view
radio, and OnStar account
Text Telephone (TTY) vehicle-specific how-to videos.
information.
Users G (Maintenance Information): F (Live Chat Support): Chat live
View maintenance schedules,
To assist customers who are deaf, with online help representatives.
required alerts, OnStar onboard
hard of hearing, or speech-impaired Visit my.chevrolet.com to register
vehicle diagnostic information, and
and who use Text Telephones
schedule service appointments. your vehicle.
(TTYs), Chevrolet has TTY
equipment available at its Customer
2014 - 2nd Edition - 8/19/13
Chevrolet Owner Centre GM Mobility General Motors of Canada also has

(Canada) chevroletowner.ca a Mobility Program. Visit www.gm.ca
Reimbursement Program or call 1-800-GM-DRIVE (463-7483)
Take a trip to the Chevrolet Owner for details. TTY users call
Centre: 1-800-263-3830.
. Chat live with online help
representatives. Roadside Assistance
. Use the Vehicle Tools section. Program
. Access third party enthusiast For U.S.-purchased vehicles, call
sites and social media networks. This program is available to 1-800-243-8872; (Text Telephone
. Locate owner resources such as qualified applicants for cost (TTY): 1-888-889-2438).
lease-end, financing, and reimbursement of eligible For Canadian-purchased vehicles,
warranty information. aftermarket adaptive equipment call 1-800-268-6800.
. required for the vehicle, such as
Retrieve your favorite articles, Service is available 24 hours a day,
hand controls or a wheelchair/
quizzes, tips, and multimedia 365 days a year.
scooter lift for the vehicle.
galleries organized into the
Features and Auto Care For more information on the limited Calling for Assistance
Sections. offer, visit www.gmmobility.com or When calling Roadside Assistance,
call the GM Mobility Assistance have the following information
. Download the owner manual for
Center at 1-800-323-9935. Text ready:
your vehicle, quickly and easily.
Telephone (TTY) users, call
. Find the 1-800-833-9935.
. Your name, home address, and
Chevrolet-recommended home telephone number.
maintenance services for your . Telephone number of your
vehicle. location.
. Location of the vehicle.
2014 - 2nd Edition - 8/19/13

. Model, year, color, and license claims are made too often, or the must be in good condition and
plate number of the vehicle. same type of claim is made many properly inflated. It is the owner's
. Odometer reading, Vehicle times. responsibility for the repair or
Identification Number (VIN), and replacement of the tire if it is not
Services Provided covered by the warranty.
delivery date of the vehicle.
. Emergency Fuel Delivery: . Battery Jump Start: Service to
. Description of the problem.
Delivery of enough fuel for the jump start a dead battery.
Coverage vehicle to get to the nearest
service station. Services Not Included in
Services are provided up to 5 years/
. Lock-Out Service: Service to Roadside Assistance
160 000 km (100,000 mi), whichever
comes first. unlock the vehicle if you are . Impound towing caused by
locked out. A remote unlock may violation of any laws.
In the U.S., anyone driving the be available if you have OnStar.
vehicle is covered. In Canada, a . Legal fines.
For security reasons, the driver
person driving the vehicle without must present identification . Mounting, dismounting,
permission from the owner is not before this service is given. or changing of snow tires,
covered. chains, or other traction devices.
. Emergency Tow from a Public
Roadside Assistance is not a part of Road or Highway: Tow to the . Towing or services for vehicles
the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. nearest Chevrolet dealer for driven on a non-public road or
Chevrolet and General Motors of warranty service, or if the vehicle highway.
Canada Limited reserve the right to was in a crash and cannot be
make any changes or discontinue driven. Assistance is also given Services Specific to
the Roadside Assistance program at when the vehicle is stuck in the Canadian-Purchased Vehicles
any time without notification. sand, mud, or snow. . Fuel Delivery: Reimbursement
Chevrolet and General Motors of . Flat Tire Change: Service to is approximately $5 Canadian.
Canada Limited reserve the right to change a flat tire with the spare Diesel fuel delivery may be
limit services or payment to an tire. The spare tire, if equipped,
owner or driver if they decide the
2014 - 2nd Edition - 8/19/13
restricted. Propane and other to Roadside Assistance. If your dealer requests you to bring
fuels are not provided through Mechanical failures may be the vehicle for service, you are
this service. covered, however any cost for urged to do so as early in the work
. Lock-Out Service: Vehicle parts and labor for repairs not day as possible to allow for
registration is required. covered by the warranty are the same-day repair.
owner responsibility.
. Trip Interruption Benefits and Courtesy Transportation
Assistance: Must be over Scheduling Service
250 kilometers from where your Program
trip was started to qualify. Appointments To enhance your ownership
General Motors of Canada When the vehicle requires warranty experience, we and our participating
Limited requires service, contact your dealer and dealers are proud to offer Courtesy
pre-authorization, original request an appointment. By Transportation, a customer support
detailed receipts, and a copy of scheduling a service appointment program for vehicles with the
the repair orders. Once and advising the service consultant Bumper-to-Bumper (Base Warranty
authorization has been received, of your transportation needs, your Coverage period in Canada),
the Roadside Assistance advisor dealer can help minimize your extended powertrain, and/or
will help to make arrangements inconvenience. hybrid-specific warranties in both
and explain how to receive the U.S. and Canada.
If the vehicle cannot be scheduled
payment.
into the service department Several Courtesy Transportation
. Alternative Service: If immediately, keep driving it until it options are available to assist in
assistance cannot be provided can be scheduled for service, reducing inconvenience when
right away, the Roadside unless, of course, the problem is warranty repairs are required.
Assistance advisor may give safety related. If it is, please call Courtesy Transportation is not a
permission to get local your dealership, let them know this, part of the New Vehicle Limited
emergency road service. You will and ask for instructions. Warranty. A separate booklet
receive payment, up to $100,
entitled “Limited Warranty and
after sending the original receipt
Owner Assistance Information”
2014 - 2nd Edition - 8/19/13
furnished with each new vehicle Public Transportation or Fuel Rental reimbursement will be limited
provides detailed warranty coverage Reimbursement and must be supported by original
information. If the vehicle requires overnight receipts. This requires that you sign
warranty repairs, and public and complete a rental agreement
Transportation Options and meet state/provincial, local, and
transportation is used instead of
Warranty service can generally be your dealer's shuttle service, the rental vehicle provider requirements.
completed while you wait. However, expense must be supported by Requirements vary and may include
if you are unable to wait, GM helps original receipts and can only be up minimum age requirements,
to minimize inconvenience by to the maximum amount allowed by insurance coverage, credit card, etc.
providing several transportation GM for shuttle service. In addition, You are responsible for fuel usage
options. Depending on the for U.S. customers, should you charges and may also be
circumstances, your dealer can offer arrange transportation through a responsible for taxes, levies, usage
one of the following: friend or relative, limited fees, excessive mileage, or rental
reimbursement for reasonable fuel usage beyond the completion of the
Shuttle Service repair.
expenses may be available. Claim
Shuttle service is the preferred amounts should reflect actual costs It may not be possible to provide a
means of offering Courtesy and be supported by original like vehicle as a courtesy rental.
Transportation. Dealers may provide receipts. See your dealer for
shuttle service to get you to your information regarding the allowance Additional Program
destination with minimal interruption amounts for reimbursement of fuel Information
of your daily schedule. This includes or other transportation costs. All program options, such as shuttle
one-way or round-trip shuttle service
Courtesy Rental Vehicle service, may not be available at
within reasonable time and distance
every dealer. Please contact your
parameters of your dealer's area. Your dealer may arrange to provide dealer for specific information about
you with a courtesy rental vehicle or availability. All Courtesy
reimburse you for a rental vehicle Transportation arrangements will be
that you obtain if the vehicle is kept administered by appropriate dealer
for an overnight warranty repair. personnel.
2014 - 2nd Edition - 8/19/13
General Motors reserves the right to ensure that the vehicle's designed corrosion problems, and may not
unilaterally modify, change, appearance, durability, and safety perform properly in subsequent
or discontinue Courtesy are preserved. The use of Genuine collisions. Aftermarket parts are not
Transportation at any time and to GM parts can help maintain the GM covered by the GM New Vehicle
resolve all questions of claim New Vehicle Limited Warranty. Limited Warranty, and any vehicle
eligibility pursuant to the terms and Recycled original equipment parts failure related to such parts is not
conditions described herein at its may also be used for repair. These covered by that warranty.
sole discretion. parts are typically removed from Repair Facility
vehicles that were total losses in
Collision Damage Repair prior crashes. In most cases, the GM also recommends that you
parts being recycled are from choose a collision repair facility that
If the vehicle is involved in a meets your needs before you ever
collision and it is damaged, have the undamaged sections of the vehicle.
A recycled original equipment GM need collision repairs. Your dealer
damage repaired by a qualified
part may be an acceptable choice to may have a collision repair center
technician using the proper
maintain the vehicle's originally with GM-trained technicians and
equipment and quality replacement state‐of‐the‐art equipment, or be
parts. Poorly performed collision designed appearance and safety
performance; however, the history of able to recommend a collision repair
repairs diminish the vehicle resale
these parts is not known. Such parts center that has GM-trained
value, and safety performance can
are not covered by the GM New technicians and comparable
be compromised in subsequent equipment.
collisions. Vehicle Limited Warranty, and any
related failures are not covered by Insuring the Vehicle
Collision Parts that warranty.
Protect your investment in the GM
Genuine GM Collision parts are new Aftermarket collision parts are also vehicle with comprehensive and
parts made with the same materials available. These are made by collision insurance coverage. There
and construction methods as the companies other than GM and may are significant differences in the
parts with which the vehicle was not have been tested for the vehicle. quality of coverage afforded by
originally built. Genuine GM As a result, these parts may fit various insurance policy terms.
Collision parts are the best choice to poorly, exhibit premature durability/
2014 - 2nd Edition - 8/19/13
Many insurance policies provide If a Crash Occurs

. Vehicle Identification
reduced protection to the GM Number (VIN).
If there has been an injury, call
vehicle by limiting compensation for . Insurance company and policy
emergency services for help. Do not
damage repairs by using number.
leave the scene of a crash until all
aftermarket collision parts. Some
matters have been taken care of. . General description of the
insurance companies will not
Move the vehicle only if its position damage to the other vehicle.
specify aftermarket collision parts.
puts you in danger, or you are
When purchasing insurance, we Choose a reputable repair facility
instructed to move it by a police
recommend that you ensure that the that uses quality replacement parts.
officer.
vehicle will be repaired with GM See “Collision Parts” earlier in this
original equipment collision parts. Give only the necessary information section.
If such insurance coverage is not to police and other parties involved
If the airbag has inflated, see What
available from your current in the crash.
Will You See after an Airbag
insurance carrier, consider switching For emergency towing see Inflates? on page 3-22.
to another insurance carrier. Roadside Assistance Program on
If the vehicle is leased, the leasing page 13-5. Managing the Vehicle Damage
company may require you to have Repair Process
Gather the following information:
insurance that ensures repairs with In the event that the vehicle requires
Genuine GM Original Equipment . Driver name, address, and damage repairs, GM recommends
Manufacturer (OEM) parts or telephone number. that you take an active role in its
Genuine Manufacturer replacement . Driver license number. repair. If you have a pre-determined
parts. Read the lease carefully, as repair facility of choice, take the
you may be charged at the end of
. Owner name, address, and
telephone number. vehicle there, or have it towed there.
the lease for poor quality repairs. Specify to the facility that any
. Vehicle license plate number. required replacement collision parts
. Vehicle make, model, and be original equipment parts, either
model year. new Genuine GM parts or recycled
2014 - 2nd Edition - 8/19/13
original GM parts. Remember, Service Publications In-Portfolio: Includes a Portfolio,

recycled parts will not be covered by Owner Manual, and Warranty
the GM vehicle warranty.
Ordering Information Manual.
Insurance pays the bill for the repair, Service Manuals RETAIL SELL PRICE:
but you must live with the repair. Service Manuals have the diagnosis $35.00 (U.S.) plus handling and
Depending on your policy limits, and repair information on the shipping fees.
your insurance company may engines, transmission, axle, Without Portfolio: Owner
initially value the repair using suspension, brakes, electrical, Manual only.
aftermarket parts. Discuss this with steering, body, etc.
the repair professional, and insist on RETAIL SELL PRICE:
Genuine GM parts. Remember, Service Bulletins $25.00 (U.S.) plus handling and
if the vehicle is leased, you may be shipping fees.
Service Bulletins give additional
obligated to have the vehicle technical service information
repaired with Genuine GM parts,
Current and Past Models
needed to knowledgeably service
even if your insurance coverage General Motors cars and trucks. Technical Service Bulletins and
does not pay the full cost. Each bulletin contains instructions Manuals are available for current
to assist in the diagnosis and and past model GM vehicles.
If another party's insurance
company is paying for the repairs, service of the vehicle. ORDER TOLL FREE:
you are not obligated to accept a 1-800-551-4123 Monday – Friday
repair valuation based on that Owner Information 8:00 AM – 6:00 PM Eastern Time
insurance company's collision policy Owner publications are written For Credit Card Orders Only
repair limits, as you have no specifically for owners and intended (VISA-MasterCard-Discover), see
contractual limits with that company. to provide basic operational Helm, Inc. at: www.helminc.com.
In such cases, you can have control information about the vehicle. The
of the repair and parts choices as Owner Manual includes the
long as the cost stays within Maintenance Schedule for all
reasonable limits. models.
2014 - 2nd Edition - 8/19/13
Or write to: Reporting Safety To contact NHTSA, you may call

Helm, Incorporated the Vehicle Safety Hotline
Attention: Customer Service
Defects toll-free at 1-888-327-4236
47911 Halyard Drive (TTY: 1-800-424-9153); go to
Plymouth, MI 48170 Reporting Safety Defects http://www.safercar.gov; or
Prices are subject to change without to the United States write to:
notice and without incurring Government Administrator, NHTSA
obligation. Allow ample time for 1200 New Jersey Avenue, S.E.
delivery. If you believe that your vehicle
has a defect which could cause Washington, D.C. 20590
All listed prices are quoted in U.S. a crash or could cause injury or You can also obtain other
funds. Make checks payable in U.S. death, you should immediately
funds.
information about motor
inform the National Highway vehicle safety from
Traffic Safety Administration http://www.safercar.gov.
(NHTSA) in addition to notifying
General Motors.
If NHTSA receives similar
complaints, it may open an
investigation, and if it finds that
a safety defect exists in a group
of vehicles, it may order a recall
and remedy campaign.
However, NHTSA cannot
become involved in individual
problems between you, your
dealer, or General Motors.
2014 - 2nd Edition - 8/19/13
Reporting Safety Defects Reporting Safety Defects Vehicle Data

to the Canadian to General Motors Recording and
Government In addition to notifying NHTSA (or Privacy
If you live in Canada, and you Transport Canada) in a situation like
believe that the vehicle has a safety this, notify General Motors. The vehicle has a number of
defect, notify Transport Canada computers that record information
Call 1-800-222-1020, or write:
immediately, and notify General about the vehicle’s performance and
Chevrolet Motor Division how it is driven. For example, the
Motors of Canada Limited. Call
Chevrolet Customer Assistance vehicle uses computer modules to
Transport Canada at
Center monitor and control engine and
1-800-333-0510 or write to:
P.O. Box 33170 transmission performance, to
Transport Canada Detroit, MI 48232-5170 monitor the conditions for airbag
Road Safety Branch deployment and deploy them in a
In Canada, call 1-800-263-3777
80 rue Noel crash, and, if equipped, to provide
(English) or 1-800-263-7854
Gatineau, QC J8Z 0A1 antilock braking to help the driver
(French), or write:
control the vehicle. These modules
General Motors of Canada Limited may store data to help the dealer
Customer Care Centre, Mail Code: technician service the vehicle.
CA1-163-005 Some modules may also store data
1908 Colonel Sam Drive about how the vehicle is operated,
Oshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7 such as rate of fuel consumption or
average speed. These modules may
retain personal preferences, such as
radio presets, seat positions, and
temperature settings.
2014 - 2nd Edition - 8/19/13
Event Data Recorders These data can help provide a if the vehicle is leased, with the
better understanding of the consent of the lessee; in response
This vehicle is equipped with an circumstances in which crashes and to an official request by police or
event data recorder (EDR). The injuries occur. NOTE: EDR data are similar government office; as part of
main purpose of an EDR is to recorded by your vehicle only if a GM's defense of litigation through
record, in certain crash or near non-trivial crash situation occurs; no the discovery process; or, as
crash-like situations, such as an air data are recorded by the EDR under required by law. Data that GM
bag deployment or hitting a road normal driving conditions and no collects or receives may also be
obstacle, data that will assist in personal data (e.g., name, gender, used for GM research needs or may
understanding how a vehicle’s age, and crash location) are be made available to others for
systems performed. The EDR is recorded. However, other parties, research purposes, where a need is
designed to record data related to such as law enforcement, could shown and the data is not tied to a
vehicle dynamics and safety combine the EDR data with the type specific vehicle or vehicle owner.
systems for a short period of time, of personally identifying data
typically 30 seconds or less. The
EDR in this vehicle is designed to
routinely acquired during a crash OnStar®
investigation.
record such data as: If the vehicle is equipped with
To read data recorded by an EDR, OnStar® and has an active
. How various systems in your special equipment is required, and subscription, additional data may be
vehicle were operating; access to the vehicle or the EDR is collected through the OnStar
. Whether or not the driver and needed. In addition to the vehicle system. This includes information
passenger safety belts were manufacturer, other parties, such as about the vehicle’s operation;
buckled/fastened; law enforcement, that have the collisions involving the vehicle; the
.
special equipment, can read the use of the vehicle and its features;
How far (if at all) the driver was information if they have access to
depressing the accelerator and/ and, in certain situations, the
the vehicle or the EDR. location and approximate GPS
or brake pedal; and,
GM will not access this data or speed of the vehicle. Refer to the
. How fast the vehicle was share it with others except: with the
traveling. consent of the vehicle owner or,
2014 - 2nd Edition - 8/19/13
OnStar Terms and Conditions and Radio Frequency

Privacy Statement on the OnStar
website.
Statement
This vehicle has systems that
Radio Frequency operate on a radio frequency that
Identification (RFID) comply with Part 15 of the Federal
Communications Commission (FCC)
RFID technology is used in some rules and with Industry Canada
vehicles for functions such as tire Standards RSS‐GEN/210/220/310.
pressure monitoring and ignition
Operation is subject to the following
system security, as well as in
two conditions:
connection with conveniences such
as Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) 1. The device may not cause
transmitters for remote door locking/ harmful interference.
unlocking and starting, and 2. The device must accept any
in-vehicle transmitters for garage interference received, including
door openers. RFID technology in interference that may cause
GM vehicles does not use or record undesired operation of the
personal information or link with any device.
other GM system containing
personal information. Changes or modifications to any of
these systems by other than an
authorized service facility could void
authorization to use this equipment.
2014 - 2nd Edition - 8/19/13
2 NOTES
2014 - 2nd Edition - 8/19/13
OnStar 14-1
OnStar OnStar Overview Press = to:

. Make a call, end a call,
or answer an incoming call.
OnStar Overview .
OnStar Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-1 Give OnStar Hands-Free Calling
voice commands.
OnStar Services . Give OnStar Turn-by-Turn
Emergency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-2 Navigation voice commands.
Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-2 Requires the available Directions
Navigation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-2 If equipped, this vehicle has a and Connections service plan.
Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-3 comprehensive, in-vehicle system
Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-5 that can connect to a live Advisor Press Q to connect to a live
for Emergency, Security, Navigation, Advisor to:
OnStar Additional Information Connection, and Diagnostic
OnStar Additional Services.
. Verify account information or
Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-5 update contact information.
The OnStar system status light is .
next to the OnStar buttons. If the Get driving directions. Requires
status light is: the available Directions and
Connections service plan.
. Solid Green: System is ready. . Receive On-Demand
. Flashing Green: On a call. Diagnostics for a check of the
. Red: Indicates a problem. vehicle’s key operating systems.
. Receive Roadside Assistance.
Press Q or call 1-888-4-ONSTAR
(1-888-466-7827) to speak to an
Advisor.
2014 - 2nd Edition - 8/19/13
14-2 OnStar
Press the OnStar Emergency button OnStar Services Navigation

> to get a priority connection to an
Emergency Advisor available OnStar navigation requires the
24/7 to: Emergency Directions and Connections
With Automatic Crash Response, service plan.
. Get help for an emergency.
the built-in system can automatically Press Q to receive directions or
. Be a Good Samaritan or connect to help in most crashes,
respond to an AMBER Alert. have them sent to the vehicle
even if help cannot be requested. navigation screen, if equipped.
. Get assistance in severe Destinations can also be forwarded
Press > to connect to an
weather or other crisis and to the vehicle from MapQuest.com.
evacuation routes. Emergency Advisor. GPS
technology is used to identify the The OnStar mapping database is
vehicle location and can provide continuously updated. For coverage
critical information to emergency maps, see www.onstar.com (U.S.)
personnel. The Advisor is also or www.onstar.ca (Canada).
trained to offer critical assistance in Turn-by-Turn Navigation
emergency situations.
1. Press Q to connect to a live
Security Advisor.
OnStar provides services like Stolen 2. Request directions.
Vehicle Assistance, Remote Ignition 3. Directions are downloaded to the
Block, and Roadside Assistance, vehicle.
if equipped. OnStar can unlock the
vehicle doors remotely, if equipped 4. Follow the voice-guided
with automatic door locks, and can commands.
help police locate the vehicle if it is
stolen.
2014 - 2nd Edition - 8/19/13
OnStar 14-3
Using Voice Commands 2. Say “Repeat.” System responds After the call ends, press the “Go”
During a Planned Route with the last direction given, then button on the navigation screen to
responds with “OnStar ready,” begin driving directions.
Cancel Route then a tone. If directions are downloaded to the
1. Press =. System responds: Get My Destination navigation system, the route can
“OnStar ready,” then a tone. Say only be canceled through the
“Cancel route.” System 1. Press =. System responds: navigation system.
responds: “Do you want to “OnStar ready,” then a tone.
Destinations can also be
cancel directions?” 2. Say “Get my destination.” downloaded on the go. For
2. Say “Yes.” System responds: System responds with the information about eNav, Destination
“OK, request completed, thank address and the distance to the Download, and coverage maps see
you, goodbye.” destination, then responds with www.onstar.com (U.S.) or
“OnStar ready,” then a tone. www.onstar.ca (Canada).
Route Preview
Other Navigation Services
1. Press =. System responds: Available from OnStar Connections
“OnStar ready,” then a tone. OnStar Hands-Free Calling allows
OnStar eNav: Allows subscribers
2. Say “Route preview.” System to send destinations from calls to be made and received from
responds with the next three MapQuest.com to their Turn-by-Turn the vehicle. The vehicle can also be
maneuvers. Navigation or screen-based controlled through the OnStar
navigation system. When ready, the RemoteLink® mobile app. For
Repeat coverage maps, see
directions will be downloaded to the
1. Press =. System responds: vehicle. www.onstar.com (U.S.) or
“OnStar ready,” then a tone. www.onstar.ca (Canada).
Destination Download: Press Q,
then request the Advisor to
download directions to the
navigation system in the vehicle.
2014 - 2nd Edition - 8/19/13
14-4 OnStar
OnStar Mobile App Calling 911 Emergency Store a Name Tag for Speed
Download the OnStar RemoteLink Dialing
1. Press =. System responds:
mobile app to select Apple®, “OnStar ready,” followed by 1. Press =. System responds:
Android™, and BlackBerry® devices a tone. “OnStar ready.”
to check vehicle fuel level, oil life,
or tire pressure; to start the vehicle 2. Say “Call.” System responds: 2. Say “Store.” System responds:
(if equipped) or unlock it; or to “Please say the name or number “Please say the number you
connect to an OnStar Advisor. For to call.” would like to store.”
OnStar RemoteLink information and 3. Say “911” without pausing. 3. Say the entire number without
compatibility, see www.onstar.com System responds: “911.” pausing. System responds:
(U.S.) or www.onstar.ca (Canada). “Please say the name tag.”
4. Say “Call.” System responds:
Hands-Free Calling “OK, dialing 911.” 4. Pick a name tag. System
responds: “About to store <name
1. Press =. System responds: Retrieve My Number tag>. Does that sound OK?”
“OnStar ready.”
1. Press =. System responds: 5. Say “Yes” or say “No” to try
2. Say “Call.” System responds: “OnStar ready.” again. System responds: “OK,
“Please say the name or number storing <name tag>.”
to call.” 2. Say “My number.” System
responds: “Your OnStar Place a Call Using a Stored
3. Say the entire number without Hands-Free Calling number is,”
pausing, including a “1” and the Number
then says the number.
area code. System responds: 1. Press =. System responds:
“OK calling.” End a Call
“OnStar ready.”
Press =. System responds: “Call 2. Say “Call <name tag>.” System
ended.” responds: “OK, calling
<name tag>.”
2014 - 2nd Edition - 8/19/13
OnStar 14-5
Verify Minutes and Expiration OnStar Additional How OnStar Service Works
Press = and say “Minutes” then Information Automatic Crash Response,
“Verify” to check how many minutes Emergency Services, Crisis Assist,
remain and their expiration date. Transferring Service Stolen Vehicle Assistance, Vehicle
Diagnostics, Remote Door Unlock,
Press Q to request account transfer Roadside Assistance, Turn-by-Turn
Diagnostics eligibility information. The Advisor Navigation, and Hands-Free Calling
OnStar Vehicle Diagnostics will can assist in canceling or removing are available on most vehicles. Not
perform a vehicle check every account information. If OnStar all OnStar services are available
month. It will check the engine, receives information that vehicle everywhere or on all vehicles. For
transmission, antilock brakes, and ownership has changed, OnStar more information, a full description
major vehicle systems. It also may send a voice message to the of OnStar services, system
checks the tire pressures, if the vehicle, requesting updated account limitations, and OnStar terms and
vehicle is equipped with the Tire information. conditions:
Pressure Monitoring System. If an
Reactivation for Subsequent . Call 888-4-ONSTAR
On-Demand Diagnostics check is
Owners (888-466-7827).
needed between e-mails, press Q,
. See www.onstar.com (U.S.).
and an Advisor can run a check. Press Q and follow the prompts to
. See www.onstar.ca (Canada).
speak to an Advisor as soon as
possible after acquiring the vehicle. . Call TTY 1-877-248-2080.
The Advisor will update vehicle
records and will explain the OnStar . Press Q to speak with an
service offers and options available. Advisor.
OnStar services require a vehicle
electrical system, wireless service,
and GPS satellite technologies to be
available and operating for features
2014 - 2nd Edition - 8/19/13
14-6 OnStar
to function properly. These systems vehicle, damage to the vehicle in a system can provide in-vehicle
may not operate if the battery is crash, or wireless phone network access to all of the OnStar services,
discharged or disconnected. congestion or jamming. except Virtual Advisor and OnStar
OnStar service cannot work unless See Radio Frequency Statement on Turn-by-Turn Navigation.
your vehicle is in a place where page 13-15. OnStar.com (U.S.) or OnStar.ca
OnStar has an agreement with a (Canada)
wireless service provider for service Services for People with
in that area, and the wireless Disabilities The website provides access to
service provider has coverage, Advisors provide services to help account information, allows
network capacity, reception, and subscribers with physical disabilities management of the OnStar
technology compatible with OnStar and medical conditions. subscription, and viewing of videos
service. Service involving location of each service. Get subscription
information about the vehicle cannot Press Q for help with: plan pricing and sign up for OnStar
work unless GPS signals are .
Vehicle Diagnostics. Click on the
Locating a gas station with an “My Account” tab on the home
available, unobstructed, and attendant to pump gas.
compatible with the OnStar page. The website navigation and
hardware. OnStar service may not
. Finding a hotel, restaurant, etc., services provided may vary by
work if the OnStar equipment is not that meets accessibility needs. country.
properly installed or it has not been . Providing directions to the OnStar Personal Identification
properly maintained. If equipment or closest hospital or pharmacy in
software is added, connected,
Number (PIN)
urgent situations.
or modified, OnStar service may not A PIN is needed to access some of
work. Other problems beyond the TTY Users the OnStar services, like Remote
control of OnStar may prevent OnStar has the ability to Door Unlock and Stolen Vehicle
service such as hills, tall buildings, communicate to the deaf, Assistance. You will be prompted to
tunnels, weather, electrical system hard-of-hearing, or speech-impaired change the PIN the first time when
design and architecture of the customers while in the vehicle. The speaking with an Advisor. To
available dealer-installed TTY
2014 - 2nd Edition - 8/19/13
OnStar 14-7
change the OnStar PIN, call OnStar Roadside Assistance and a route or may ask for a call back
and provide the Advisor with the locksmith to help gain access to the after the vehicle is driven into an
current number. vehicle. open area.
Warranty Global Positioning Cellular and GPS Antennas
OnStar equipment may be System (GPS) Avoid placing items over or near the
warranted as part of the New . Obstruction of the GPS can antenna to prevent blocking cellular
Vehicle Limited Warranty. The occur in a large city with tall and GPS signal reception. Cellular
manufacturer of the vehicle buildings; in parking garages; reception is required for OnStar to
furnishes detailed warranty around airports; in tunnels, send remote signals to the vehicle.
information. underpasses, or parking
garages; or in an area with very
Unable to Connect to OnStar
Languages dense trees. If GPS signals are Message
The vehicle can be programmed to not available, the OnStar system If there is limited cellular coverage
respond in multiple languages. should still operate to call or the cellular network has reached
Press Q and ask an Advisor. OnStar. However, OnStar could maximum capacity, this message
Advisors are available in English, have difficulty identifying the may come on. Press Q to try the
Spanish and French. Available exact location. call again or try again after driving a
languages may vary by country. . In emergency situations, OnStar few miles into another cellular area.
can use the last stored GPS
Potential Issues location to send to emergency Vehicle and Power Issues
OnStar cannot perform Remote responders. OnStar services require a vehicle
Door Unlock or Stolen Vehicle electrical system, wireless service,
. A temporary loss of GPS can
Assistance after the vehicle has and GPS satellite technologies to be
cause loss of the ability to send
been off continuously for five days. available and operating for features
a Turn-by-Turn Navigation route.
After five days, OnStar can contact to function properly. These systems
The Advisor may give a verbal
may not operate if the battery is
discharged or disconnected.
2014 - 2nd Edition - 8/19/13
14-8 OnStar
Add-on Electrical Equipment OnStar - libcurl and unzip FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE
acknowledgments AND NONINFRINGEMENT OF
The OnStar system is integrated
THIRD PARTY RIGHTS. IN NO
into the electrical architecture of the Certain OnStar components include EVENT SHALL THE AUTHORS OR
vehicle. Do not add any electrical libcurl and unzip software. Below COPYRIGHT HOLDERS BE
equipment. See Add-On Electrical are the notices and licenses LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM,
Equipment on page 9-42. Added associated with this software: DAMAGES OR OTHER LIABILITY,
electrical equipment may interfere
libcurl: WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF
with the operation of the OnStar
CONTRACT, TORT OR
system and cause it to not operate. COPYRIGHT AND PERMISSION OTHERWISE, ARISING FROM,
NOTICE OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION
Privacy
Copyright (c) 1996 - 2010, Daniel WITH THE SOFTWARE OR THE
The complete OnStar Privacy Stenberg, <daniel@haxx.se>. USE OR OTHER DEALINGS IN
Statement may be found at THE SOFTWARE.
www.onstar.com (U.S.), All rights reserved.
or www.onstar.ca (Canada). Except as contained in this notice,
Permission to use, copy, modify,
Privacy-sensitive users of wireless the name of a copyright holder shall
and distribute this software for any
communications are cautioned that not be used in advertising or
purpose with or without fee is
the privacy of any information sent otherwise to promote the sale, use
hereby granted, provided that the
via wireless cellular communications or other dealings in this Software
above copyright notice and this
cannot be assured. Third parties without prior written authorization of
permission notice appear in all
may unlawfully intercept or access the copyright holder.
copies.
transmissions and private unzip:
communications without consent. THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED
“AS IS,” WITHOUT WARRANTY OF This is version 2005-Feb-10 of the
ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR Info-ZIP copyright and license. The
IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT definitive version of this document
LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES
OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS
2014 - 2nd Edition - 8/19/13
OnStar 14-9
should be available at ftp:// Info-ZIP or its contributors be held permitted without inclusion of
ftp.info-zip.org/pub/infozip/ liable for any direct, indirect, this license, as long as the
license.html indefinitely. incidental, special or consequential normal SFX banner has not
Copyright (c) 1990-2005 Info-ZIP. All damages arising out of the use of or been removed from the binary or
rights reserved. inability to use this software. disabled.
For the purposes of this copyright Permission is granted to anyone to 3. Altered versions–including, but
and license, “Info-ZIP” is defined as use this software for any purpose, not limited to, ports to new
the following set of individuals: including commercial applications, operating systems, existing ports
and to alter it and redistribute it with new graphical interfaces,
Mark Adler, John Bush, Karl Davis, freely, subject to the following and dynamic, shared, or static
Harald Denker, Jean-Michel Dubois, restrictions: library versions–must be plainly
Jean-loup Gailly, Hunter Goatley, marked as such and must not be
Ed Gordon, Ian Gorman, Chris 1. Redistributions of source code
must retain the above copyright misrepresented as being the
Herborth, Dirk Haase, Greg Hartwig, original source. Such altered
Robert Heath, Jonathan Hudson, notice, definition, disclaimer, and
this list of conditions. versions also must not be
Paul Kienitz, David Kirschbaum, misrepresented as being
Johnny Lee, Onno van der Linden, 2. Redistributions in binary form Info-ZIP releases–including, but
Igor Mandrichenko, Steve P. Miller, (compiled executables) must not limited to, labeling of the
Sergio Monesi, Keith Owens, reproduce the above copyright altered versions with the names
George Petrov, Greg Roelofs, Kai notice, definition, disclaimer, and “Info-ZIP” (or any variation
Uwe Rommel, Steve Salisbury, this list of conditions in thereof, including, but not limited
Dave Smith, Steven M. Schweda, documentation and/or other to, different capitalizations),
Christian Spieler, Cosmin Truta, materials provided with the “Pocket UnZip,” “WiZ” or
Antoine Verheijen, Paul von Behren, distribution. The sole exception “MacZip” without the explicit
Rich Wales, Mike White to this condition is redistribution permission of Info-ZIP. Such
This software is provided “as is,” of a standard UnZipSFX binary altered versions are further
without warranty of any kind, (including SFXWiz) as part of a prohibited from
express or implied. In no event shall self-extracting archive; that is misrepresentative use of the
2014 - 2nd Edition - 8/19/13
14-10 OnStar
Zip-Bugs or Info-ZIP e-mail

addresses or of the
Info-ZIP URL(s).
4. Info-ZIP retains the right to use
the names “Info-ZIP,” “Zip,”
“UnZip,” “UnZipSFX,” “WiZ,”
“Pocket UnZip,” “Pocket Zip,”
and “MacZip” for its own source
and binary releases.
2014 - 2nd Edition - 8/19/13
INDEX i-1
A Airbags Audio Players . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-19

Adding Equipment to the CD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-19
Accessories and
Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-28 Audio System
Modifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-3
Passenger Status Indicator . . . 5-11 Radio Reception . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-17
Accessory Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-17
Readiness Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11 Theft-Deterrent Feature . . . . . . . . 7-2
Add-On Electrical
Servicing Airbag-Equipped Automatic
Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-42
Vehicles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-28 Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8
Additional Information
System Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-17 Headlamp System . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3
OnStar® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14-5
Alarm Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-21
Air Cleaner/Filter, Engine . . . . . 10-14
Vehicle Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-13 Transmission Fluid . . . . . . . . . 10-13
Air Filter, Passenger
AM-FM Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-12 Automatic Transmission
Compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-4
Antenna Manual Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-23
Air Intake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-4
Multi-band . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-18 Shift Lock Control
Air Vents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-4
Satellite Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-18 Function Check . . . . . . . . . . . 10-25
Airbag System
Antilock Brake Auxiliary
Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-29
System (ABS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-25 Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-24
How Does an Airbag
Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-16
Restrain? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-22
Passenger Sensing
Appearance Care B
Exterior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-81 Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-24
System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-24
Interior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-86 Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-75
What Makes an Airbag
Armrest Load Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6
Inflate? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-22
Front Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5 Power Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7
What Will You See after an
Assistance Program, Blade Replacement, Wiper . . . 10-26
Airbag Inflates? . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-22
Roadside . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-5 Blind Spot Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-16
When Should an Airbag
Audio Bluetooth
Inflate? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-21
Bluetooth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-26 Overview . . . . . . . . . 7-26, 7-28, 7-37
Where Are the Airbags? . . . . . .3-19
2014 - 2nd Edition - 8/19/13
i-2 INDEX
Bluetooth Audio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-26 C Check

Brake Engine Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-12
Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4
System Warning Light . . . . . . . .5-15 Ignition
California
Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-22 Transmission Lock . . . . . . . . 10-26
Fuel Requirements . . . . . . . . . . .9-39
Antilock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-25 Child Restraints
Perchlorate Materials
Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-27 Infants and Young
Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-3
Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-23 Children . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-32
Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-2
Parking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-26 Lower Anchors and
Camera
Braking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3 Tethers for Children . . . . . . . . .3-37
Rear Vision (RVC) . . . . . . . . . . . .9-34
Break-In, New Vehicle . . . . . . . . . 9-13 Older Children . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-30
Canadian Vehicle Owners . . . . . . . . iii
Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-32 Securing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-44, 3-46
Capacities and
Fog Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4, 10-30 Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-34
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-2
Halogen Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-28 Circuit Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-33
Carbon Monoxide
Headlamp Aiming . . . . . . . . . . . 10-28 Cleaning
Engine Exhaust . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-20
Headlamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-28 Exterior Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-81
Liftgate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-12
Headlamps, Front Turn Interior Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-86
Trunk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-10
Signal, and Parking Climate Control Systems . . . . . . . 8-1
Winter Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-7
Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-28 Air Conditioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1
Cargo
License Plate Lamps . . . . . . . 10-31 Heating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1
Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2
Taillamps, Turn Signal, Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5
Cautions, Danger, and
Stoplamps, and Cluster, Instrument . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8
Warnings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iii
Back-up Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . 10-30 Clutch, Hydraulic . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-13
CD Player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-19
Buying New Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-55 Collision Damage Repair . . . . . . 13-9
Central Locking System . . . . . . . . 2-8
Compact Spare Tire . . . . . . . . . . 10-74
Chains, Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-60
Compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2
Charging System Light . . . . . . . . 5-12
Load . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2
2014 - 2nd Edition - 8/19/13
INDEX i-3
Compartments Customer Assistance . . . . . . . . . . 13-4 Door

Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1 Offices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13-3 Ajar Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-22
Compass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4 Text Telephone (TTY) Ajar Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8
Compressor Kit, Tire Users . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13-4 Central Locking System . . . . . . . 2-8
Sealant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-62 Customer Information Delayed Locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8
Computer, Trip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-25 Service Publications Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7
Connections Ordering Information . . . . . . .13-11 Drive Belt Routing, Engine . . . . . 12-3
OnStar® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14-3 Customer Satisfaction Driver Information
Control Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-1 Center (DIC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-22
Traction and Electronic Driving
Stability . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-28 D Defensive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2
Control of a Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3 Damage Repair, Collision . . . . . . 13-9 Drunk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3
Convex Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-15 Danger, Warnings, and For Better Fuel Economy . . . . .1-21
Coolant Cautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iii Highway Hypnosis . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-6
Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-16 Data Recorders, Event . . . . . . . 13-14 Hill and Mountain Roads . . . . . . . 9-6
Engine Temperature Daytime Running If the Vehicle is Stuck . . . . . . . . . . 9-8
Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-18 Lamps (DRL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2 Loss of Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-4
Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-15 Indicator Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-21 Off-Road Recovery . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-4
Courtesy Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5 Defensive Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2 Vehicle Load Limits . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-9
Courtesy Transportation Delayed Locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8 Wet Roads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5
Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-7 Devices Winter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-7
Cover Auxiliary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-24
Cargo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2 Diagnostics
Cruise Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-30 OnStar® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14-5
Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-21 Distracted Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2
Dome Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5
2014 - 2nd Edition - 8/19/13
i-4 INDEX
E Engine (cont'd) Forward Collision Alert

Oil Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-24 (FCA) System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-32
Electrical Equipment,
Overheating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-20 Forward Collision Alert
Add-On . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-42
Pressure Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-19 (FCA) Warning Light . . . . . . . . . 5-17
Electrical System
Reduced Power Light . . . . . . . . .5-20 Front Fog Lamp
Engine Compartment
Running While Parked . . . . . . . .9-21 Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-21
Fuse Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-33
Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4, 9-15 Front Seat Armrest . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5
Fuses and Circuit
Event Data Recorders . . . . . . . . 13-14 Front Seats
Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-33
Extender, Safety Belt . . . . . . . . . . 3-15 Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3
Instrument Panel Fuse
Exterior Lamp Controls . . . . . . . . . 6-1 Heated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6
Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-38
Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-38
Overload . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-32
Emergency F Additives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-40
Economy Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-21
OnStar® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14-2 Filter,
Engine Air Cleaner . . . . . . . . . 10-14 Filling a Portable Fuel
Engine
Flash-to-Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2 Container . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-41
Air Cleaner/Filter . . . . . . . . . . . 10-14
Flashers, Hazard Warning . . . . . . 6-3 Filling the Tank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-40
Check and Service Engine
Flat Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-60 Foreign Countries . . . . . . . . . . . .9-39
Soon Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-12
Changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-69 Gasoline Specifications . . . . . . .9-39
Compartment Overview . . . . . . .10-6
Floor Mats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-89 Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9
Coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-16
Fluid Low Fuel Warning Light . . . . . . .5-20
Coolant Temperature
Automatic Transmission . . . . 10-13 Recommended . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-38
Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-18
Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-23 Requirements, California . . . . .9-39
Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-15
Drive Belt Routing . . . . . . . . . . . .12-3 Washer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-21
Exhaust . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-20 Fog Lamps
Heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-17 Bulb Replacement . . . . . . 6-4, 10-30
Oil Life System . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-12 Folding Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-16
2014 - 2nd Edition - 8/19/13
INDEX i-5
Fuses H Home Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-7

Engine Compartment Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-4
Halogen Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-28
Fuse Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-33 Horn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3
Hands-Free Phone . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-42
Fuses and Circuit How to Wear Safety Belts
Hazard Warning Flashers . . . . . . . 6-3
Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-33 Properly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10
Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2
Instrument Panel Fuse Hydraulic Clutch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-13
Headlamps
Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-38
Aiming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-28
Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3 I
G Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . 10-28 Ignition Positions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-14
Gasoline Daytime Running Ignition Transmission Lock
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-39 Lamps (DRL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2 Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-26
Gauges Daytime Running Lamps Immobilizer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-14
Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9 (DRL) Indicator Light . . . . . . . .5-21 Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-20
Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9 Flash-to-Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2 Infants and Young Children,
Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9 High-Beam On Light . . . . . . . . . .5-21 Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-32
Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9 High/Low Beam Changer . . . . . . 6-2 Infotainment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1
Trip Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9 Lamps On Reminder . . . . . . . . .5-21 Instrument Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8
Warning Lights and Heated Front Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6 Instrument Panel
Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7 Heated Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-16 Storage Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1
General Information Heater Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iii
Service and Maintenance . . . . . 11-1 Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-17
Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-42 Heating and Air Conditioning . . . 8-1
Vehicle Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-2 High-Beam On Light . . . . . . . . . . . 5-21
Glove Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1 Highway Hypnosis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-6
GM Mobility Reimbursement Hill and Mountain Roads . . . . . . . . 9-6
Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-5 Hill Start Assist (HSA) . . . . . . . . . 9-27
2014 - 2nd Edition - 8/19/13
i-6 INDEX
J Lamps (cont'd) Lights (cont'd)

Malfunction Indicator . . . . . . . . .5-12 Door Ajar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-22
Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-75
On Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-21 Engine Coolant
Reading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6 Temperature Warning . . . . . . .5-18
K Lane Departure Engine Oil Pressure . . . . . . . . . .5-19
Keyless Entry Warning (LDW) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-36 Flash-to-Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2
Remote (RKE) System . . . . . . . . 2-3 Lane Departure Warning Front Fog Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-21
Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1 Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-17 High-Beam On . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-21
Lap-Shoulder Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-11 High/Low Beam Changer . . . . . . 6-2
L LATCH System Immobilizer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-20
Labeling, Tire Sidewall . . . . . . . . 10-42 Replacing Parts after a Lane Departure Warning . . . . . .5-17
Lamps Crash . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-43 Low Fuel Warning . . . . . . . . . . . .5-20
Courtesy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5 LATCH, Lower Anchors and Reduced Engine Power . . . . . .5-20
Daytime Running (DRL) . . . . . . . 6-2 Tethers for Children . . . . . . . . . . 3-37 Safety Belt Reminders . . . . . . . .5-10
Dome . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5 Liftgate Service Vehicle Soon . . . . . . . . .5-15
Exterior Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1 Carbon Monoxide . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-12 StabiliTrak® OFF . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-18
Headlamps, Front Turn Lighting Tire Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-19
Signal, and Parking Illumination Control . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5 Traction Control System
Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-28 Lights (TCS)/StabiliTrak® . . . . . . . . . .5-18
License Plate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-31 Airbag Readiness . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11 Traction Off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-17
Antilock Brake System Up-Shift . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-16
(ABS) Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-16 Warning, Power Steering . . . . .5-16
Brake System Warning . . . . . . .5-15 Link
Charging System . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-12 Smartphone . . . . . . 7-45, 7-47, 7-49
Cruise Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-21 Load Compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2
Daytime Running
Lamps (DRL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-21
2014 - 2nd Edition - 8/19/13
INDEX i-7
Locks Messages O
Automatic Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8 Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-24
Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9
Central Locking System . . . . . . . 2-8 Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-24
Trip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9
Delayed Locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8 Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-24
Off-Road
Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7 Mirrors
Recovery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-4
Lockout Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9 Blind Spot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-16
Oil
Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9 Convex . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-15
Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-9
Loss of Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-4 Folding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-16
Engine Oil Life System . . . . . 10-12
Low Fuel Warning Light . . . . . . . . 5-20 Heated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-16
Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-24
Lower Anchors and Tethers Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-15
Pressure Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-19
for Children (LATCH Manual Rearview . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-17
Older Children, Restraints . . . . . 3-30
System) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-37 Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-15
Online Owner Center . . . . . . . . . . 13-4
Monitor System, Tire
OnStar®
M Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-49
System, In Brief . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-22
Movies . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-50, 7-55, 7-56
Maintenance OnStar® Additional
Records . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-15 Multi-band Antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-18
Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-5
Maintenance Schedule OnStar® Connections . . . . . . . . . . 14-3
Recommended Fluids N OnStar® Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . 14-5
and Lubricants . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-12 Navigation OnStar® Emergency . . . . . . . . . . . 14-2
Malfunction Indicator Lamp . . . . 5-12 OnStar® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14-2 OnStar® Navigation . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-2
Manual Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-15 New Vehicle Break-In . . . . . . . . . . 9-13 OnStar® Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-1
Manual Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-23 OnStar® Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-2
Manual Transmission . . . . . . . . . . 9-24 Operation, Infotainment
Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-13 System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-8
Manual Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-18 Ordering
Service Publications . . . . . . . . .13-11
2014 - 2nd Edition - 8/19/13
i-8 INDEX
Outlets Phone R
Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6 Bluetooth . . . . . . . . . 7-26, 7-28, 7-37
Radio Frequency
Overheating, Engine . . . . . . . . . . 10-20 Hands-Free . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-42
Identification (RFID) . . . . . . . . 13-15
Overview, Pictures and
Statement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-15
Infotainment Movies . . . . . . . . . . . 7-50, 7-55, 7-56
Radios
System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3, 7-5, 7-7 Port
AM-FM Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-12
USB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-21
Reception . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-17
P Power
Satellite . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-16
Park Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-15
Reading Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6
Shifting Into . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-18 Outlets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6
Rear Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7
Shifting Out of . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-19 Protection, Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7
Rear Vision Camera (RVC) . . . . 9-34
Parking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-19 Reduced Engine Light . . . . . . . .5-20
Rear Window Washer/Wiper . . . . 5-4
Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-26 Retained Accessory (RAP) . . .9-17
Rearview Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-17
Brake and P (Park) Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-18
Reclining Seatbacks . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4
Mechanism Check . . . . . . . . 10-26 Power Steering Warning
Recommended
Over Things That Burn . . . . . . .9-20 Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-16
Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-38
Passenger Airbag Status Pregnancy, Using Safety
Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11 Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-15
Lubricants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-12
Passenger Compartment Air Privacy
Records
Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-4 Radio Frequency
Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-15
Passenger Sensing System . . . 3-24 Identification (RFID) . . . . . . . 13-15
Recreational Vehicle
Perchlorate Materials Program
Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-78
Requirements, California . . . . . 10-3 Courtesy Transportation . . . . . .13-7
Reduced Engine Power
Personalization Proposition 65 Warning,
Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-20
Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-27 California . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-2
Reimbursement Program,
GM Mobility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-5
2014 - 2nd Edition - 8/19/13
INDEX i-9
Remote Keyless Entry Rotation, Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-53 Seats

(RKE) System . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2, 2-3 Routing, Engine Drive Belt . . . . . 12-3 Adjustment, Front . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3
Remote Vehicle Start . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5 Running the Vehicle While Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2
Replacement Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . 10-32 Parked . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-21 Heated Front . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6
Replacement Parts Rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7
Airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-29 S Reclining Seatbacks . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4
Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-14 Safety Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8 Securing Child
Replacing Airbag System . . . . . . 3-29 Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-16 Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-44, 3-46
Replacing LATCH System Extender . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-15 Security
Parts after a Crash . . . . . . . . . . . 3-43 How to Wear Safety Belts OnStar® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14-2
Replacing Safety Belt Properly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-10 Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-13
System Parts after a Crash . . . 3-16 Lap-Shoulder Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-11 Vehicle Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-13
Reporting Safety Defects Reminders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-10 Service
Canadian Government . . . . . . 13-13 Replacing after a Crash . . . . . .3-16 Accessories and
General Motors . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-13 Use During Pregnancy . . . . . . . .3-15 Modifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-3
U.S. Government . . . . . . . . . . . 13-12 Safety Defects Reporting Doing Your Own Work . . . . . . . .10-3
Restraints Canadian Government . . . . . . 13-13 Engine Soon Light . . . . . . . . . . . .5-12
Where to Put . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-36 General Motors . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-13 Maintenance Records . . . . . . .11-15
Retained Accessory U.S. Government . . . . . . . . . . . 13-12 Maintenance, General
Power (RAP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-17 Safety Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9 Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-1
Roads Safety System Check . . . . . . . . . . 3-16 Parts Identification Label . . . . .12-1
Driving, Wet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5 Satellite Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-16 Publications Ordering
Roadside Assistance Scheduling Appointments . . . . . . 13-7 Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13-11
Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-5 Sealant Kit, Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-62 Scheduling Appointments . . . . .13-7
Roof Vehicle Soon Light . . . . . . . . . . . .5-15
Sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-20 Servicing the Airbag . . . . . . . . . . . 3-28
2014 - 2nd Edition - 8/19/13
i-10 INDEX
Shift Lock Control Function Steering (cont'd) T

Check, Automatic Power, Warning Lights . . . . . . . .5-16
Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9
Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-25 Wheel Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2
Taillamps
Shifting Wheel Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2
Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . 10-30
Into Park . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-18 Stoplamps and Back-up Lamps
Text Telephone (TTY) Users . . . 13-4
Out of Park . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-19 Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . 10-30
Theft-Deterrent Systems . . . . . . . 2-14
Signals, Turn and Storage
Immobilizer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-14
Lane-Change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4 Load Compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2
Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5
Smartphone Storage Areas
Tires
Link . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-45, 7-47, 7-49 Cargo Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2
Buying New Tires . . . . . . . . . . . 10-55
Spare Tire Glove Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1
Chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-60
Compact . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-74 Instrument Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1
Changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-69
Specifications and Storage Compartments . . . . . . . . . 4-1
Compact Spare . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-74
Capacities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-2 Storing the Tire Sealant
Designations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-44
Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9 and Compressor Kit . . . . . . . . . 10-69
Different Size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-56
StabiliTrak Stuck Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-8
If a Tire Goes Flat . . . . . . . . . . 10-60
OFF Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-18 Sun Visors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-19
Inflation Monitor System . . . . 10-50
Start Assist, Hills . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-27 Sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-20
Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-53
Start Vehicle, Remote . . . . . . . . . . 2-5 Symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iv
Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-24
Starter Switch Check . . . . . . . . . 10-25 System
Pressure Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-19
Starting the Engine . . . . . . . 1-4, 9-15 Forward Collision
Pressure Monitor System . . . 10-49
Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3 Alert (FCA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-32
Rotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-53
Infotainment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1
Sealant and
Compressor Kit . . . . . . . . . . . 10-62
Sealant and Compressor
Kit, Storing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-69
2014 - 2nd Edition - 8/19/13
INDEX i-11
Tires (cont'd) Transportation Program, Vehicle (cont'd)

Sidewall Labeling . . . . . . . . . . . 10-42 Courtesy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-7 Personalization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-27
Terminology and Trip Computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-25 Remote Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5
Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-45 Trip Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9 Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-13
Uniform Tire Quality Trunk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10 Service Soon Light . . . . . . . . . . .5-15
Grading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-57 Turn and Lane-Change Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-77
Wheel Alignment and Tire Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4 Vehicle Care
Balance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-58 Turn Signal Storing the Tire Sealant
Wheel Replacement . . . . . . . . 10-59 Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . 10-30 and Compressor Kit . . . . . . . 10-69
When It Is Time for New Tire Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-47
Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-54 U Ventilation, Air . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-4
Winter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-41 Uniform Tire Quality Visors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-19
Towing Grading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-57
General Information . . . . . . . . . .9-42 Up-Shift Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-16 W
Recreational Vehicle . . . . . . . . 10-78 USB Port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-21 Warning
Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-77 Using This Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iii Brake System Light . . . . . . . . . . .5-15
Traction Lane Departure (LDW) . . . . . . .9-36
Control System (TCS)/
StabiliTrak® Light . . . . . . . . . . . .5-18 V Warning Light
Vehicle Forward Collision
Off Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-17 Alert (FCA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-17
Traction Control/Electronic Alarm System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-13
Canadian Owners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .iii Warning Lights, Gauges, and
Stability Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-28 Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7
Transmission Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3
Identification Warnings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iii
Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-21 Cautions and Danger . . . . . . . . . . . .iii
Fluid, Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-13 Number (VIN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12-1
Load Limits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-9 Hazard Flashers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3
Fluid, Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-13 Washer Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-21
Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-24
2014 - 2nd Edition - 8/19/13
i-12 INDEX
Wheels
Alignment and Tire
Balance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-58
Different Size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-56
Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-59
When It Is Time for New
Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-54
Where to Put the Restraint . . . . 3-36
Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-17
Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-18
Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-18
Windshield
Wiper/Washer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3
Winter
Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-7
Winter Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-41
Wiper Blade Replacement . . . . 10-26
Wipers
Rear Washer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4

2014 Chevrolet Sonic Owners

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

2014 Chevrolet Sonic Owners

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Chevrolet Sonic Owner Manual (GMNA-Localizing-U.S.

/Canada-6081473) - Black plate (1,1)

2014 Chevrolet Sonic Owner Manual M

In Brief . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1 Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1 Downloadable Applications . . . 7-45

2014 Chevrolet Sonic Owner Manual M

Vehicle Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-1 Technical Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-1

specific vehicle to confirm each of Using this Manual

A circle with a slash through it is a Vehicle Symbol Chart

j : LATCH System Child

In Brief Vehicle Features

Initial Drive cranking can be stopped by turning

To unlock the doors from inside the

To lock the trunk from the outside Power Windows

Seat Adjustment Seat Height Adjuster Reclining Seatbacks

If available, move the lever up or To recline a manual seatback:

Second Row Seats

For vehicles with power outside

The exterior lamp control is on the

Climate Controls 6. Rear Window Defogger Transmission

Climate Control System with

1. Temperature Control 3. Air Delivery Mode Control

Vehicles equipped with a manual

SEEK ¨: of available favorite pages can D (Home Page): Press to enter

Steering Wheel Controls $ / i : Press to decline an Cruise Control

Rear Vision Sunroof Open/Close: To open the sunroof,

message on the DIC when it is See Engine Oil Life System on

Keys, Doors, and Windows 2-1

Keys, Doors, and Exterior Mirrors

2-2 Keys, Doors, and Windows

Remote Keyless Entry

Keys, Doors, and Windows 2-3

Remote Keyless Entry “Unlocked Door Anti Lock Out”

2-4 Keys, Doors, and Windows

7 (Vehicle Locator/Panic Programming Transmitters to 3. Insert the new key to be

Keys, Doors, and Windows 2-5

2-6 Keys, Doors, and Windows

Keys, Doors, and Windows 2-7

2-8 Keys, Doors, and Windows

Keys, Doors, and Windows 2-9

2-10 Keys, Doors, and Windows

To open a rear door when the safety Doors

Keys, Doors, and Windows 2-11

Emergency Trunk Release

2-12 Keys, Doors, and Windows

handle will glow following exposure

Keys, Doors, and Windows 2-13

2-14 Keys, Doors, and Windows

Keys, Doors, and Windows 2-15

Exterior Mirrors Manual Mirrors Power Mirrors

2-16 Keys, Doors, and Windows

Keys, Doors, and Windows 2-17

2. When checking for traffic or Interior Mirrors Windows

2-18 Keys, Doors, and Windows

The vehicle aerodynamics are If equipped, press the switch to

Keys, Doors, and Windows 2-19

2-20 Keys, Doors, and Windows

Roof Vent: Press and hold the front of

Dirt and debris may collect on the

Seats and Restraints 3-1

Seats and Safety Belt Extender . . . . . . . . . 3-15 Adding Equipment to the

3-2 Seats and Restraints

Seats and Restraints 3-3

Rear Seats To lower the head restraint, press Front Seats